diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-8.txt | 7615 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-8.zip | bin | 126435 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h.zip | bin | 962365 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/51798-h.htm | 10619 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 23608 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/cover_epub.jpg | bin | 177030 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/frontis.png | bin | 132417 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/page10f.png | bin | 164018 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/page162f.png | bin | 163817 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/page98f.png | bin | 167026 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/51798-h/images/whorl.png | bin | 585 -> 0 bytes |
14 files changed, 17 insertions, 18234 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0299c88 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #51798 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/51798) diff --git a/old/51798-8.txt b/old/51798-8.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c85238a..0000000 --- a/old/51798-8.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7615 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of When Santiago Fell, by -Captain Ralph Bonehill and Edward Stratemeyer - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - - -Title: When Santiago Fell - or The War Adventures of Two Chums - -Author: Captain Ralph Bonehill - Edward Stratemeyer - -Release Date: April 19, 2016 [EBook #51798] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHEN SANTIAGO FELL *** - - - - -Produced by David Edwards, Tom Cosmas and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - - - -Transcriber Note - -Text emphasis denoted as _Italic_. - - - - -[Illustration: "A RUSH WAS MADE AND THE OX CART CAME TO A SUDDEN -HALT."] - - - - - WHEN SANTIAGO FELL - - OR - - _THE WAR ADVENTURES OF - TWO CHUMS_ - - BY - - CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL - - AUTHOR OF "A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY," "OFF FOR HAWAII," - "GUN AND SLED," "LEO, THE CIRCUS BOY," - "RIVAL BICYCLISTS," ETC. - - [Illustration] - - CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY - NEW YORK, N. Y. - - -BY THE SAME AUTHOR - - - WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS; - Or, A Young Scout among the Indians. - - BOYS OF THE FORT; - Or, A Young Captain's Pluck. - - THE YOUNG BANDMASTER; - Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield. - - WHEN SANTIAGO FELL; - Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums. - - A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY; - Or, Afloat in the Philippines. - - OFF FOR HAWAII; - Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano. - - _12mo, finely illustrated and bound in cloth. - Price, per volume, 60 cents._ - - -NEW YORK - -CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY 1905 - - -Copyright, 1899, by - -THE MERSHON COMPANY - - - - -PREFACE. - - -"When Santiago Fell," while a complete story in itself, forms the first -volume of a line to be issued under the general title of the "Flag of -Freedom Series" for boys. - -My object in writing this story was to present to American lads a -true picture of life in the Cuba of to-day, and to show what a fierce -struggle was waged by the Cubans against the iron-handed mastery of -Spain previous to the time that our own glorious United States stepped -in and gave to Cuba the precious boon of liberty. The time covered is -the last year of the Cuban-Spanish War and our own campaign leading up -to the fall of Santiago. - -It may be possible that some readers may think the adventures of the -two chums over-drawn, but this is hardly a fact. The past few years -have been exceedingly bitter ones to all living upon Cuban soil, and -neither life nor property has been safe. Even people who were peaceably -inclined were drawn into the struggle against their will, and the -innocent, in many cases, suffered with the guilty. - -This war, so barbarously carried on, has now come to an end; and, -under the guiding hand of Uncle Sam, let us trust that Cuba and her -people will speedily take their rightful place among the small but -well-beloved nations of the world--or, if not this, that she may join -the ever-increasing sisterhood of our own States. - -Once more thanking my numerous young friends for their kind reception -of my previous works, I place this volume in their hands, trusting that -from it they may derive much pleasure and profit. - - Captain Ralph Bonehill. - - _January 1, 1899._ - - - - -CONTENTS. - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. Off for the Interior 1 - - II. The Escape from the Gunboat 8 - - III. In the Wilds of the Island 15 - - IV. In a Novel Prison 22 - - V. Lost among the Hills 30 - - VI. From One Difficulty to Another 37 - - VII. Fooling the Spanish Guerrillas 45 - - VIII. Andres 52 - - IX. Across the Canefields 59 - - X. A Council of the Enemy 66 - - XI. A Wild Ride on Horseback 74 - - XII. A Daring Leap 81 - - XIII. Friends in Need 87 - - XIV. General Calixto Garcia 95 - - XV. A Prisoner of War 102 - - XVI. A Rescue under Difficulties 108 - - XVII. A Treacherous Stream to Cross 116 - - XVIII. Alone 123 - - XIX. The Cave in the Mountain 130 - - XX. Señor Guerez 137 - - XXI. The Attack on the Old Convent 145 - - XXII. The Routing of the Enemy 154 - - XXIII. On the Trail of My Father 161 - - XXIV. In the Belt of the Firebrands 168 - - XXV. Escaping the Flames 176 - - XXVI. A Disheartening Discovery 184 - - XXVII. Gilbert Burnham 191 - - XXVIII. A Battle on Land and Water 198 - - XXIX. Looking for my Cuban Chum 205 - - XXX. Once More among the Hills 212 - - XXXI. The Battle at the Railroad Embankment 220 - - XXXII. A Leap in the Dark 229 - - XXXIII. Captain Guerez Makes a Discovery 238 - - XXXIV. The Dogs of Cuban Warfare 244 - - XXXV. The Last of the Bloodhounds 252 - - XXXVI. Cast into a Santiago Dungeon 261 - - XXXVII. The Fall of the Spanish Stronghold 271 - - - - -WHEN SANTIAGO FELL. - - - - -CHAPTER I. - -OFF FOR THE INTERIOR. - - -"We cannot allow you to leave this city." - -It was a Spanish military officer of high rank who spoke, and he -addressed Alano Guerez and myself. I did not understand his words, but -my companion did, and he quickly translated them for my benefit. - -"Then what are we to do, Alano?" I questioned. "We have no place to -stop at in Santiago, and our money is running low." - -Alano's brow contracted into a perplexing frown. He spoke to the -officer, and received a few curt words in reply. Then the Spaniard -turned to others standing near, and we felt that we were dismissed. A -guard conducted us to the door, and saluted us; and we walked away from -the headquarters. - -The reason for it all was this: Less than a month before we had left -the Broxville Military Academy in upper New York State to join Alano's -parents and my father in Cuba. Alano's father was a Cuban, and owned a -large sugar plantation some distance to the eastward of Guantanamo Bay. -He was wealthy, and had sent Alano to America to be educated, as many -rich Cubans do. As my father and Señor Guerez were well acquainted and -had strong business connections, it was but natural that Alano should -be placed at the boarding school which I attended, and that we should -become firm friends. For a long time we played together, ate together, -studied together, and slept together, until at last as chums we became -almost inseparable. - -Some months back, and while the great struggle for liberty was going -on between the Cubans and their rulers in Spain, certain business -difficulties had taken my father to Cuba. During his stop in the island -he made his home for the greater part with Señor Guerez, and while -there was unfortunate enough during a trip on horseback to fall and -break his leg. - -This accident placed him on his back longer than was first expected, -for the break was a bad one. In the meantime the war went on, and the -territory for many miles around Santiago de Cuba was in a state of wild -excitement. - -Not knowing exactly what was going on, Alano wrote to his parents -begging that he be allowed to come to them, and in the same mail I -sent a communication to my father, asking if I could not accompany -my Cuban chum. To our delight the answer came that if we wished we -might come without delay. At the time this word was sent neither Señor -Guerez nor my father had any idea that the war would assume such vast -proportions around Santiago, involving the loss of many lives and the -destruction of millions of dollars of property. - -Alano and I were not long in making our preparations. We left -Broxville two days after permission was received, took the cars to the -metropolis, and engaged immediate passage upon the _Esmeralda_ for -Santiago de Cuba. - -We had heard of the war a hundred times on the way, but even on -entering the harbor of the city we had no thought of difficulty in -connection with our journey on rail and horseback outside of the city. -We therefore suffered a rude awakening when the custom-house officials, -assisted by the Spanish military officers, made us stand up in a long -row with other passengers, while we were thoroughly searched from head -to foot. Each of us had provided himself with a pistol; and these, -along with the cartridges, were taken from us. Our baggage, also, -was examined in detail, and everything in the way of a weapon was -confiscated. - -"War means something, evidently," was the remark I made, but how much -it meant I did not learn until later. Our names were taken down, and -we were told to remain in the city over night and report at certain -headquarters in the morning. We were closely questioned as to where -we had come from; and when I injudiciously mentioned the Broxville -Military Academy, our questioner, a swarthy Spanish lieutenant, glared -ominously at us. - -"I'm afraid you put your foot into it when you said that," was Alano's -comment at the hotel that evening, when we were discussing our strange -situation. "They are on the watch for people who want to join the -insurgents." - -"Perhaps your father has become a rebel," I ventured. - -"It is not unlikely. He has spoken to me of Cuban independence many -times." - -As might be expected, we passed an almost sleepless night, so anxious -were we to learn what action the Spanish authorities would take in our -case. When the decision came, as noted at the opening of this story, I -was almost dumb-founded. - -"We're in a pickle, Alano," I said, as we walked slowly down the -street, lined upon either side with quaint shops and houses. "We can't -stay here without money, and we can't get out." - -"We must get out!" he exclaimed in a low tone, so as not to be -overheard. "Do you suppose I am going to remain here, when my father -and mother are in the heart of the war district, and, perhaps, in great -danger?" - -"I am with you!" I cried. "For my father is there too. But how can we -manage it? I heard at the hotel last night that every road leading out -of the city is well guarded." - -"We'll find a way," he rejoined confidently. "But we'll have to leave -the bulk of our baggage behind. The most we can carry will be a small -valise each. And we must try to get hold of some kind of weapons, too." - -We returned to our hotel, and during the day Alano struck up an -acquaintanceship with a Cuban-American who knew his father well. Alano, -finding he could trust the gentleman, took him into his confidence, -and, as a result, we obtained not only a good pistol each,--weapons we -immediately secreted in our clothing,--but also received full details -of how to leave Santiago de Cuba by crossing the bay in a rowboat and -taking to the woods and mountains beyond. - -"It will be rough traveling," said the gentlemen who gave us the -directions, "but you'll find your lives much safer than if you tried -one of the regular roads--that is, of course, after you have passed -the forts and the gunboats lying in the harbor." - -Both Alano and I were much taken with this plan, and it was arranged we -should leave the city on the first dark night. Two days later it began -to rain just at sunset, and we felt our time had come. A small rowboat -had already been procured and was secreted under an old warehouse. At -ten o'clock it was still raining and the sky was as black as ink, and -we set out,--I at the oars, and Alano in the bow,--keeping the sharpest -of lookouts. - -We had agreed that not a word should be spoken unless it was necessary, -and we moved on in silence. I had spent many hours on the lake facing -Broxville Academy, and these now stood me in good stead. Dropping my -oars without a sound, I pulled a long, steady stroke in the direction I -had previously studied out. - -We were about halfway across the bay when suddenly Alano turned to me. -"Back!" he whispered, and I reversed my stroke as quickly as possible. - -"There is a gunboat or something ahead," he went on. "Steer to the -left. See the lights?" - -I looked, and through the mists made out several signals dimly. I -brought the boat around, and we went on our way, only to bring up, a -few seconds later, against a huge iron chain, attached to one of the -war vessels' anchors, for the vessel had dragged a bit on the tide. - -The shock threw Alano off his feet, and he tumbled against me, sending -us both sprawling. I lost hold of one of the oars, and at the same -moment an alarm rang out--a sound which filled us both with fear. - - - - -CHAPTER II. - -THE ESCAPE FROM THE GUNBOAT. - - -"We are lost!" cried Alano, as he sought to pick himself up. "Oh, Mark, -what shall we do?" - -"The oar--where is that oar?" I returned, throwing him from me and -trying to pierce the darkness. - -"I don't know. I---- Oh!" - -Alano let out the exclamation as a broad sheet of light swept across -the rain and the waters beneath us--light coming from a search-lantern -in the turret of the gunboat. Fortunately the rays were not lowered -sufficiently to reach us, yet the light was strong enough to enable me -to see the missing oar, which floated but a few feet away. I caught it -with the end of the other oar, and then began pulling at the top of my -speed. - -But all of this took time, and now the alarm on board of the war vessel -had reached its height. A shot rang out, a bell tolled, and several -officers came rushing to the anchor chains. They began shouting in -Spanish, so volubly I could not understand a word; and now was no time -to question Alano, who was doing his best to get out a second pair of -oars which we had, fortunately, placed on board at the last moment. He -had often rowed with me on the lake at Broxville; and in a few seconds -he had caught the stroke, and away we went at a spinning speed. - -"They are going to fire on us!" he panted, as the shouting behind -increased. "Shall we give up?" - -"Not on my account." - -"Nor on mine. If we give up, they'll put us in prison, sure. Pull on!" - -And pull we did, until, in spite of the cold rain, each of us was -dripping with perspiration and ready to drop with exhaustion. - -Boom! a cannon shot rang out, and involuntarily both of us ducked our -heads. But the shot flew wide of its mark--so wide, in fact, that we -knew not where it went. - -"They'll get out a boat next!" I said. "Pull, Alano; put every ounce of -muscle into the stroke." - -"I am doing that already," he gasped. "We must be getting near the -shore. What about the guard there?" - -"We'll have to trust to luck," I answered. - -Another shot came booming over the misty waters, and this time we -heard the sizz of the cannon ball as it hit the waves and sank. We were -now in the glare of the searchlight, but the mist and rain were in our -favor. - -"There is the shore!" I cried, on looking around a few seconds later. -"Now be prepared to run for it as soon as the boat beaches!" - -With a rush our craft shot in between a lot of sea grass and stuck her -bow into the soft mud. Dropping our oars, we sprang to the bow and took -long leaps to solid ground. We had hardly righted ourselves when there -came a call out of the darkness. - -"_Quien va?_" And thus challenging us, a Spanish soldier who was on -guard along the water's edge rushed up to intercept our progress. His -bayonet was within a foot of my breast, when Alano jumped under and -hurled him to the ground. - -"Come!" he cried to me. "Come, ere it is too late!" and away we went, -doing the best sprinting we had ever done in our lives. Over a marsh -and through a thorny field we dashed, and then struck a narrow path -leading directly into a woods. The guard yelled after us and fired his -gun, but that was the last we saw or heard of him. - -[Illustration: "AN ALARM RANG OUT, A SOUND WHICH FILLED US BOTH WITH -FEAR."] - -Fearful, however, of pursuit, we did not slacken our pace until -compelled to; and then, coming to a thick clump of grass at the foot of -a half-decayed banana tree, we sank down completely out of breath. I -had never taken such fearful chances on my life before, and I trusted -I would never have to do so again, little dreaming of all the perils -which still lay before us. - -"I believe we are safe for the present," said Alano, when he could get -his breath. "I wonder where we are?" - -"We're in a very dark, dirty, and wet woods," I returned gloomily. -"Have we got to remain here all night?" - -"It's better than being in a Spanish prison," replied my Cuban chum -simply. "We can go on after we are a bit rested." - -The rain was coming down upon the broad leaves of the banana tree at a -lively rate, but Alano said he thought it must be a clearing shower, -and so it soon proved to be. But scarcely had the drops ceased to fall -than a host of mosquitoes and other insects arose, keeping us more than -busy. - -"We must get out of this!" I exclaimed, when I could stand the tiny -pests no longer. "I'm being literally chewed up alive. And, see, there -is a lizard!" And I shook the thing from my arm. - -"Oh, you mustn't mind such things in Cuba!" said Alano, laughing -shortly. "Why, we have worse things than that--snakes and alligators, -and the like. But come on, if you are rested. It may be we'll soon -strike some sort of shelter." - -Luckily, through all the excitement we had retained our valises, which -were slung across our backs by straps thrown over the shoulder. From my -own I now extracted a large handkerchief, and this served, when placed -in my broad-brimmed hat, to protect my neck and ears from the insects. -As for Alano, he was acclimated and did not seem to be bothered at all. - -We pursued our way through the woods, and then ascended a steep bank -of clay, at the top of which was a well-made road leading to the -northward. We looked up and down, but not a habitation or building of -any kind was in sight. - -"It leads somewhere," said Alano, after a pause. "Let us go on, but -with care, for perhaps the Spanish Government has guards even as far -out as this." - -On we went once more, picking our way around the numerous pools and -bog-holes in the road. The stars were now coming out, and we could -consequently see much better than before. - -"A light!" I cried, when quarter of a mile had been traversed. "See, -Alano." - -"It must be from a plantation," he answered. "If it is, the chances -are that the owner is a Spanish sympathizer--he wouldn't dare to be -anything else, so close to the city." - -"But he might aid us in secret," I suggested. - -Alano shrugged his shoulders, and we proceeded more slowly. Then he -caught my arm. - -"There is a sugar-house back of that canefield," he said. "We may find -shelter there." - -"Anywhere--so we can catch a few hours' nap." - -We proceeded around the field with caution, for the plantation house -was not far away. Passing a building where the grinding was done, we -entered a long, low drying shed. Here we struck a match, and by the -flickering light espied a heap of dry husks, upon which we immediately -threw ourselves. - -"We'll have to be up and away before daybreak," said my chum, as he -drew off his wet coat, an example which I at once followed, even though -it was so warm I did not suffer greatly from the dampness. "We would -be sorry fellows to give an explanation if we were stopped in this -vicinity." - -"Yes, and for the matter of that, we had better sleep with one eye -open," I rejoined. And then we turned in, and both presently fell -asleep through sheer exhaustion. - -How long I had been sleeping I did not know. I awoke with a start, to -find a cold nose pressing against my face. - -"Hi! get out of here!" I cried, and then the owner of the nose leaped -back and uttered the low, savage, and unmistakable growl of a Cuban -bloodhound! - - - - -CHAPTER III. - -IN THE WILDS OF THE ISLAND. - - -To say that I was alarmed when I found that the intruder in our -sleeping quarters was a bloodhound would be to put the fact very -mildly. I was truly horrified, and a chill shook my frame as I had a -momentary vision of being torn to pieces by the bloodthirsty animal. - -My cry awoke Alano, who instantly asked what was the matter, and then -yelled at the beast in Spanish. As the creature retreated, evidently -to prepare for a rush upon us, I sprang to my feet and grasped a short -ladder which led to the roof of the shed. - -"Come!" I roared to my chum, and Alano did so; and both of us scrambled -up, with the bloodhound snarling and snatching at our feet. He even -caught the heel of my boot, but I kicked him off, and we reached the -top of the shed in temporary safety. Baffled, the dog ran out of the -shed and began to bay loudly, as though summoning assistance. - -"We're in for it now!" I groaned. "We can't get away from the dog, and -he'll arouse somebody before long." - -"Well, we can't help ourselves," replied Alano, with a philosophical -shrug of his shoulders. "Ha! somebody is coming now!" - -He pointed through the semi-darkness, for it was close to sunrise. A -Cuban negro was approaching, a huge fellow all of six feet tall and -dressed in the garb of an overseer. He carried a little triangular -lantern, and as he drew closer he yelled at the bloodhound in a Cuban -_patois_ which was all Greek to me, but which Alano readily understood. -The dog stopped baying, but insisted upon leading his master to the -very foot of the shed, where he stood with his nose pointed up at us. - -There was no help for it, so Alano crawled to the edge of the roof and -told the overseer what was the trouble--that the dog had driven us -hither and that we were afraid of being killed. A short conversation -followed, and then my chum turned to me. - -"We can go down now," he said. "The overseer says the dog will not -touch us so long as he is around." - -We leaped to the ground, although I must admit I did not do so with a -mind perfectly at ease, the bloodhound still looked so ugly. However, -beyond a few sniffs at my trousers-leg and a deep rumble of his voice, -he offered no further indignities. - -"He wants to know who we are," said Alano, after more conversation. -"What shall I tell him?" - -"Tell him the truth, and ask him for help to reach your father's -plantation, Alano. He won't know we escaped from Santiago de Cuba -without permission." - -Alano did as directed. At the mention of Senor Guerez' name the -overseer held up his hands in astonishment. He told Alano that he knew -his father well, that he had met the señor only two weeks previously, -and that both Alano's father and my own had thrown in their fortunes -with the insurgents! - -"Is it possible!" I ejaculated. "My father, too! Why, he must be still -lame!" - -"He is," said Alano, after further consultation with the newcomer. -"My father, it seems, had to join the rebels, or his plantation would -have been burned to the ground. There was a quarrel with some Spanish -sympathizers, and in the end both your father and mine joined the -forces under General Calixto Garcia." - -"And where are they now?" - -"The overseer does not know." - -"What of your mother and sisters?" - -"He does not know about them either;" and for a moment Alano's -handsome and manly face grew very sober. "Oh, if I was only with them!" - -"And if I was only with my father!" I cried. My father was all the -world to me, and to be separated from him at such a time was more than -painful. "Do you think he will help us?" I went on, after a moment of -silence. - -The overseer agreed to do what he could for us, although that would not -be much. He was an insurgent at heart, but his master and all around -him were in sympathy with the Spanish Government. - -"He says for us to remain here and he will bring us breakfast," said -Alano, as the man turned and departed, with the bloodhound at his side. -"And after that he will set us on a road leading to Tiarriba and gave -us a countersign which will help us into a rebel camp if there is any -around." - -We secreted ourselves again in the cane shed, and it was not long -before the overseer returned, bringing with him a kettle of steaming -black coffee, without which no Cuban breakfast seems complete, and some -fresh bread and half a dozen hard-boiled eggs. He had also a bag of -crackers and a chunk of dried beef weighing several pounds. - -"Put those in your bags," he said to Alano, indicating the beef and -crackers. "You may find it to your interest to keep out of sight for a -day or two, to avoid the Spanish spies." - -The breakfast was soon dispatched, the provisions stored in our -valises, and then the overseer took us up through the sugar-cane fields -to where a brook emptied into a long pond, covered with green weeds, -among which frogs as broad as one's hand croaked dismally. We hurried -around the pond, and our guide pointed out a narrow, winding path -leading upward through a stony woods. Then he whispered a few words to -Alano, shook us both by the hand, and disappeared. - -"He says the countersign is 'Sagua'--after the river and city of that -name," explained my chum as we tramped along. "You must wave your hand -so if you see a man in the distance," and Alano twirled his arm over -his head. - -Stony though it was in the woods, the vegetation was thick and rank. On -every side were the trunks of decaying trees, overgrown with moss--the -homes of beetles, lizards, and snakes innumerable. The snakes, most of -them small fellows not over a foot long, at first alarmed me, but this -only made Alano laugh. - -"They could not harm you if they tried," he said. "And they are very -useful--they eat up so many of the mosquitoes and gnats and lizards." - -"But some of the snakes are dangerous," I insisted. - -"Oh, yes; but they are larger." - -"And what of wild animals?" - -"We have nothing but wild hogs and a few deer, and wild dogs too. And -then there are the alligators to be found in the rivers." - -The sun had risen clear and hot, as is usual in that region after a -shower. Where the trees were scattered, the rays beat down upon our -heads mercilessly, and the slippery ground fairly steamed, so rapid was -the evaporation. By noon we had reached the top of a hill, and here -we rested and partook of several crackers each and a bit of the beef, -washing both down with water from a spring, which I first strained -through a clean handkerchief, to get clear of the insects and tiny -lizards, which abounded everywhere. - -"I can see a house ahead," announced Alano, who had climbed a palm tree -to view the surroundings. "We'll go on and see what sort of a place it -is before we make ourselves known." - -Once again we shouldered our traps and set out. The way down the hill -was nearly as toilsome as the upward course on the opposite side had -been, for gnarled roots hidden in the rank grasses made a tumble easy. -Indeed, both of us went down several times, barking our shins and -scratching our hands. Yet we kept on, until the house was but a short -distance off. - -It was set in a small clearing; and as we approached we saw a man come -out of the front door and down the broad piazza steps. He was dressed -in the uniform of a captain in the Spanish army. - -"Back!" cried Alano; but it was too late, for by pure accident the -military officer had caught sight of us. He called out in Spanish to -learn who we were. - -"He is a Spanish officer!" I whispered to Alano. "Shall we face him and -trust to luck to get out of the scrape?" - -"No, no! Come!" and, catching me by the arm, Alano led the way around -the clearing. - -It was a bad move, for no sooner had we turned than the officer called -out to several soldiers stationed at a stable in the rear of the house. -These leaped on their horses, pistols and sabers in hand, and, riding -hard, soon surrounded us. - -"_Halte!_" came the command; and in a moment more my Cuban chum and -myself found ourselves prisoners. - - - - -CHAPTER IV. - -IN A NOVEL PRISON. - - -I looked with much foreboding upon the faces of the soldiers who had -surrounded us. All were stern almost to the verge of cruelty, and the -face of the captain when he came up was no exception to the rule. Alano -and I learned afterward that Captain Crabo had met the day previous -with a bitter attack from the insurgents, who had wounded six of his -men, and this had put him in anything but a happy frame of mind. - -"Who are you?" he demanded in Spanish, as he eyed us sharply. - -Alano looked at me in perplexity, and started to ask me what he had -best say, when the Spanish captain clapped the flat side of his sword -over my chum's mouth. - -"Talk so that I can understand you, or I'll place you under arrest," he -growled. And then he added, "Are you alone?" - -"Yes," said Alano. - -"And where are you going?" - -"I wish to join my father at Guantanamo. His father is also with -mine," and my chum pointed to me. - -"Your name?" - -Seeing there was no help for it, Alano told him. Captain Crabo did not -act as if he had heard it before, and we breathed easier. But the next -moment our hearts sank again. - -"Well, we will search you, and if you carry no messages and are not -armed, you can go on." - -"We have no messages," said Alano. "You can search us and welcome." - -He handed over his valise, and I followed suit. Our pistols we had -placed in the inner pockets of our coats. By his easy manner my chum -tried to throw the Spaniards off their guard, but the trick did not -work. After going through our bags, and confiscating several of my silk -handkerchiefs, they began to search our clothing, even compelling us to -remove our boots, and the weapons were speedily brought to light. - -"Ha! armed!" cried Captain Crabo. "They are not so innocent as they -seem. We will look into their history a little closer ere we let -them go. Take them to the smoke-house until I have time to make an -investigation to-night. We must be off for Pueblo del Cristo now." - -Without ceremony we were marched off across the clearing and around the -back of the stable, where stood a rude stone building evidently built -many years before. Alano told me what the captain had said, and also -explained that the stone building was a smoke-house, where at certain -seasons of the year beef and other meat were hung up to be dried and -smoked, in preference to simple drying in the sun. - -As might be expected, the smoke-house was far from being a clean place; -yet it had been used for housing prisoners before, and these had taken -the trouble to brush the smut from the stones inside, so it was not so -dirty as it might otherwise have been. - -We were thrust into this building minus our pistols and our valises. -Then the door, a heavy wooden affair swinging upon two rusty iron -hinges, was banged shut in our faces, a hasp and spike were put into -place, and we were left to ourselves. - -"Now we are in for it," I began, but Alano stopped me short. - -"Listen!" he whispered, and we did so, and heard all of our enemies -retreat. A few minutes later there was the tramping of horses' feet, -several commands in Spanish, and the soldiers rode off. - -"They have left us to ourselves, at any rate," said my chum, when we -were sure they had departed. "And we are made of poor stuff indeed if -we cannot pick our way out of this hole." - -At first we were able to see nothing, but a little light shone in -through several cracks in the roof, and soon our eyes became accustomed -to the semi-darkness. We examined the walls, to find them of solid -masonry. The roof was out of our reach, the floor so baked it was like -cement. - -"We are prisoners now, surely, Mark," said Alano bitterly. "What will -be our fate when that _capitan_ returns?" - -"We'll be sent back to Santiago de Cuba most likely, Alano. But we must -try to escape. I have an idea. Can you balance me upon your shoulders, -do you think?" - -"I will try it. But what for?" - -"I wish to examine the roof." - -Not without much difficulty I succeeded in reaching my chum's broad -shoulders and standing upright upon them. I could now touch the ceiling -of the smoke-house with ease, and I had Alano move around from spot to -spot in a close inspection of every bit of board and bark above us. - -"Here is a loose board!" I cried in a low voice. "Stand firm, Alano." - -He braced himself by catching hold of the stone wall, and I shoved -upward with all of my strength. There was a groan, a squeak; the board -flew upward, and the sun shone down on our heads. I crawled through -the opening thus made, and putting down my hand I helped Alano to do -likewise. - -"Drop out of sight of the house!" he whispered. "Somebody may be -watching this place." - -We dropped, and waited in breathless silence for several minutes, but -no one showed himself. Then we held a consultation. - -"They thought we couldn't get out," I said. "More than likely no one is -left at the homestead but a servant or two." - -"If only we could get our bags and pistols," sighed Alano. - -"We must get them," I rejoined, "for we cannot go on without them. Let -us sneak up to the house and investigate. I see no dogs around." - -With extreme caution we left the vicinity of the smoke-house, and, -crawling on hands and knees, made our way along a low hedge to where -several broad palms overshadowed a side veranda. The door of the -veranda was open, and, motioning to Alano to follow, I ascended the -broad steps and dashed into the house. - -"Now where?" questioned my Cuban chum, as we hesitated in the broad and -cool hallway. "Here is a sitting room," and he opened the door to it. - -A voice broke upon our ear. A negro woman was singing from the -direction of the kitchen, as she rattled among her earthenware pots. -Evidently she was alone. - -"If they left her on guard, we have little to fear," I said, and we -entered the sitting room. Both of us uttered a faint cry of joy, for -there on the table rested our valises and provisions, just as they had -been taken from us. Inside of Alano's bag were the two pistols with the -cartridges. - -"Now we can go at once," I said. "How fortunate we have been! Let us -not waste time here." - -"They owe us a meal for detaining us," replied my chum grimly. "Let me -explore the pantry in the next room." - -He went through the whip-end curtains without a sound, and was gone -several minutes. When he came back his face wore a broad smile and he -carried a large napkin bursting open with eatables of various kinds, a -piece of cold roast pork, some rice cakes, buns, and the remains of a -chicken pie. - -"We'll have a supper fit for a king!" he cried. "Come on! I hear that -woman coming." - -And coming she was, in her bare feet, along the polished floor. We -had just time left to seize our valises and make our escape when she -entered. - -"_Qué quiere V.?_ [What do you want?]" she shouted, and then called -upon us to stop; but, instead, we ran from the dooryard as fast as we -could, and did not halt until the plantation was left a good half mile -behind. - -"We are well out of that!" I gasped, throwing myself down under the -welcome shade of a cacao tree. "Do you suppose she will send the -soldiers in pursuit?" - -"They would have hard work to find us," replied Alano. "Here, let us -sample this eating I brought along, and then be on our way. Remember we -have still many miles to go." - -We partook of some of the chicken pie and some buns, the latter so -highly spiced they almost made me sneeze when I ate them, and then went -on our way again. - -Our run had warmed us up, and now the sun beat down upon our heads -mercilessly as we stalked through a tangle where the luxurious -vegetation was knee-high. We were glad enough when we reached another -woods, through which there was a well-defined, although exceedingly -poor, wagon trail. Indeed, let me add, nearly all of the wagon roads -in Cuba, so I have since been told, are wretched affairs at the best. - -"We ought to be in the neighborhood of Tiarriba," said Alano about the -middle of the afternoon. - -"We won't dare enter the town," I replied. "Those soldiers were going -there, you must remember." - -"Oh, the chances are we'll find rebels enough--on the quiet," he -rejoined. - -On we went, trudging through sand and shells and not infrequently -through mire several inches to a foot deep. It was hard work, and I -wished more than once that we were on horseback. There was also a brook -to cross, but the bridge was gone and there was nothing left to do but -to ford the stream. - -"It's not to our boot-tops," said Alano, after an examination, "so we -won't have to take our boots and socks off. Come; I fancy there is a -good road ahead." - -He started into the water, and I went after him. We had reached the -middle of the stream when both of us let out a wild yell, and not -without reason, for we had detected a movement from the opposite bank, -and now saw a monstrous alligator bearing swiftly down upon us! - - - - -CHAPTER V. - -LOST AMONG THE HILLS. - - -Both Alano and I were almost paralyzed by the sight of the huge -alligator bearing down upon us, his mouth wide open, showing his cruel -teeth, and his long tail shifting angrily from side to side. - -"Back!" yelled my Cuban chum, and back we went, almost tumbling over -each other in our haste to gain the bank from where we had started. - -The alligator lost no time in coming up behind, uttering what to me -sounded like a snort of rage. He had been lying half-hidden in the mud, -and the mud still clung to his scaly sides and back. Altogether, he was -the most horrible creature I had ever beheld. - -Reaching the bank of the brook, with the alligator not three yards -behind us, we fled up a series of rocks overgrown with moss and vines. -We did not pause until we were at the very summit, then both of us drew -our pistols and fired at the blinking eyes. The bullets glanced from -the "'gator's" head without doing much harm, and with another snort -the terrifying beast turned back into the brook and sank into a pool -out of sight. - -"My gracious, Alano, supposing he had caught us!" I gasped, when I -could catch my breath. - -"We would have been devoured," he answered, with a shudder, for of -all creatures the alligator is the one most dreaded by Cubans, being -the only living beast on the island dangerous to life because of its -strength. - -"He must have been lying in wait for somebody," I remarked, after a -moment's pause, during which we kept our eyes on the brook, in a vain -attempt to gain another look at our tormentor. - -"He was--it is the way they do, Mark. If they can, they wait until you -are alongside of them. Then a blow from the tail knocks you flat, and -that ends the fight--for you," and again Alano shuddered, and so did I. - -"We can't cross," I said, a few minutes later, as all remained quiet. -"I would not attempt it for a thousand dollars." - -"Nor I--on foot. Perhaps we can do so by means of the trees. Let us -climb yonder palm and investigate." - -We climbed the palm, a sloping tree covered with numerous trailing -vines. Our movements disturbed countless beetles, lizards, and a dozen -birds, some of the latter flying off with a whir which was startling. -The top of the palm reached, we swung ourselves to its neighbor, -standing directly upon the bank of the brook. In a few minutes we had -reached a willow and then a cacao, and thus we crossed the stream in -safety, although not without considerable exertion. - -The sun was beginning to set when we reached a small village called by -the natives San Lerma--a mere collection of thatched cottages belonging -to some sheep-raisers. Before entering we made certain there were no -soldiers around. - -Our coming brought half a dozen men, women, and children to our side. -They were mainly of negro blood, and the children were but scantily -clothed. They commenced to ask innumerable questions, which Alano -answered as well as he could. One of the negroes had heard of Señor -Guerez' plantation, and immediately volunteered to furnish us with -sleeping accommodations for the night. - -"Many of us have joined the noble General Garcia," he said, in almost a -whisper. "I would join too, but Teresa will not hear of it." Teresa was -his wife--a fat, grim-looking wench who ruled the household with a rod -of iron. She grumbled a good deal at having to provide us with a bed, -but became very pleasant when Alano slipped a small silver coin into -her greasy palm. - -Feeling fairly secure in our quarters, we slept soundly, and did not -awaken until the sun was shining brightly. The inevitable pot of black -coffee was over the fire, and the smoke of bacon and potatoes frying in -a saucepan filled the air. Breakfast was soon served, after which we -greased our boots, saw to our other traps and our bag of provisions, -which we had not opened, and proceeded on our way--the husband of -Teresa wishing us well, and the big-eyed children staring after us in -silent wonder and curiosity. - -"That is a terrible existence," I said to Alano. "Think of living in -that fashion all your life!" - -"They know no better," he returned philosophically. "And I fancy they -are happy in their way. Their living comes easy to them, and they never -worry about styles in clothing or rent day. Sometimes they have dances -and other amusements. Didn't you see the home-made guitar on the wall?" - -On we went, past the village and to a highway which we had understood -would take us to Tiarriba, but which took us to nothing of the sort. As -we proceeded the sun grew more oppressive than ever, until I was glad -enough to take Alano's advice, and place some wet grass in my hat to -keep the top of my head cool. - -"It will rain again soon," said Alano, "and if it comes from the right -quarter it will be much cooler for several days after." - -The ground now became hilly, and we walked up and down several places -which were steep enough to cause us to pant for breath. By noon we -reckoned we had covered eight or nine miles. We halted for our midday -rest and meal under some wild peppers, and we had not yet finished when -we heard the low rumble of thunder. - -"The storm is coming, sure enough!" I exclaimed. "What had we best -do--find some shelter?" - -"That depends, Mark. If the lightning is going to be strong, better -seek the open air. We do not want to be struck." - -We went on, hoping that some village would soon be found, but none -appeared. The rain commenced to hit the tree leaves, and soon there was -a steady downpour. We buttoned our coats tightly around the neck, and -stopped under the spreading branches of an uncultivated banana tree, -the half-ripe fruit of which hung within easy reach. - -The thunder had increased rapidly, and now from out of the -ominous-looking clouds the lightning played incessantly. Alano shook -his head dubiously. - -"Do you know what I think?" he said. - -"Well?" - -"I think we have missed our way. If we were on the right road we would -have come to some dwelling ere this. I believe we have branched off on -some forest trail." - -"Let us go on, Alano. See, the rain is coming through the tree already." - -It was tough work now, for the road was uphill and the clayey ground -was slippery and treacherous. It was not long before I took a tumble, -and would have rolled over some sharp rocks had Alano not caught my -arm. At one minute the road seemed pitch-dark, at the next a flash of -lightning would nearly blind us. - -Presently we gained the crest of a hill a little higher than its -fellows, and gazed around us. On all sides were the waving branches of -palms and other trees, dotted here and there with clearings of rocks -and coarse grasses. Not a building of any kind was in sight. - -"It is as I thought," said my Cuban chum dubiously. "We have lost our -way in the hills." - -"And what will we have to do--retrace our steps?" I ventured anxiously. - -"I don't know. If we push on I suppose we'll strike some place sooner -or later." - -"Yes, but our provisions won't last forever, Alano." - -"That is true, Mark, but we'll have to---- Oh!" - -Alano stopped short and staggered back into my arms. We had stepped for -the moment under the shelter of a stately palm. Now it was as if a wave -of fire had swept close to our face. It was a flash of lightning; and -it struck the tree fairly on the top, splitting it from crown to roots, -and pinning us down under one of the falling portions! - - - - -CHAPTER VI. - -FROM ONE DIFFICULTY TO ANOTHER. - - -How we ever escaped from the falling tree I do not fully know to this -day. The lightning stunned me almost as much as my companion, and both -of us went down in a heap in the soft mud, for it was now raining in -torrents. We rolled over, and a rough bit of bark scraped my face; and -then I knew no more. - -When I came to my senses I was lying in a little gully, part of the way -down the hillside. Alano was at my side, a deep cut on his chin, from -which the blood was flowing freely. He lay so still that I at first -thought him dead, but the sight of the flowing blood reassured me. - -A strong smell of sulphur filled the air, and this made me remember the -lightning stroke. I looked up the hill, to see the palm tree split as I -have described. - -"Thank God for this escape!" I could not help murmuring; and then I -took out a handkerchief, allowed it to become wet, and bound up Alano's -cut. While I was doing this he came to, gasped, and opened his eyes. - -"_Què_--_què_----" he stammered. "Wha--what--was it, Mark?" - -I told him, and soon had him sitting up, his back propped against a -rock. The cut on his chin was not deep, and presently the flow of blood -stopped and he shook himself. - -"It was a narrow escape," he said. "I warned you we must get out into -the open." - -"We'll be more careful in the future," I replied. And then I pointed to -an opening in the gully. "See, there is a cave. Let us get into that -while the storm lasts." - -"Let us see if it is safe first. There may be snakes within," returned -Alano. - -With caution we approached the entrance to the cave, which appeared -to be several yards deep. Trailing vines partly hid the opening; and, -thrusting these aside, we took sticks, lit a bit of candle I carried, -and examined the interior. Evidently some wild animal had once had its -home there, but the cave was now tenantless, and we proceeded to make -ourselves at home. - -"We'll light a fire and dry our clothing," suggested Alano. "And if the -rain continues we can stay here all night." - -"We might as well stay. To tramp through the wet grass and brush would -be almost as bad as to have it rain--we would be soaked from our waists -down." - -"Then we'll gather wood and stay," said he. - -Quarter of an hour later we had coaxed up quite a respectable fire in -the shadow of a rock at the entrance to the cave, which was just high -enough to allow us to stand upright, and was perhaps twelve feet in -diameter. We piled more wood on the blaze, satisfied that in its damp -condition we could not set fire to the forest, and then retired to dry -our clothing and enjoy a portion of the contents of the provision bag -Alano had improvised out of the purloined napkin. - -As we ate we discussed the situation, wondering how far we could be -from some village and if there were any insurgents or Spanish soldiers -in the vicinity. - -"The rebels could outwit the soldiers forever in these hills," remarked -Alano--"especially those who are acquainted in the vicinity." - -"But the rebels might be surrounded," I suggested. - -"They said at Santiago they had too strong a picket guard for that, -Mark." - -"But we have seen no picket guard. Supposing instead of two boys a body -of Spanish soldiers had come this way, what then?" - -"In that case what would the Spanish soldiers have to shoot at?" he -laughed. "We have as yet seen no rebels." - -"But we may meet them--before we know it," I said, with a shake of my -head. - -Scarcely had I uttered the words than the entrance to our resting-place -was darkened by two burly forms, and we found the muzzles of two -carbines thrust close to our faces. - -"Who are you?" came in Spanish. "Put up your hands!" - -"Don't shoot!" cried Alano in alarm. - -"Come out of that!" - -"It's raining too hard, and we have our coats off, as you see. Won't -you come in?" - -At this the two men, bronzed and by no means bad-looking fellows, -laughed. "Only boys!" murmured one, and the carbines were lowered and -they entered the cave. - -A long and rapid conversation with Alano, which I could but imperfectly -understand, followed. They asked who we were, where we were going, how -we had managed to slip out of Santiago, if we were armed, if we carried -messages, if we had the countersign, how we had reached the cave, and -a dozen other questions. Both roared loudly when Alano said he thought -they were rebels. - -"And so we are," said the one who appeared to be the leader. "And we -are proud of it. Have you any objections to make?" - -"No," we both answered in a breath, that being both English and -Spanish, and I understanding enough of the question to be anxious to -set myself right with them. - -"I think our fathers have become rebels," Alano answered. "At least, we -were told so." - -"Good!" said the leader. "Then we have nothing to fear from two -such brave lads as you appear to be. And now what do you propose to -do--encamp here for the night?" - -"Unless you can supply us with better accommodations," rejoined my chum. - -"We can supply you with nothing. We have nothing but what is on us," -laughed the second rebel. - -Both told us later that they were on special picket duty in that -neighborhood. They had been duly enlisted under General Garcia, but -were not in uniform, each wearing only a wet and muddy linen suit, -thick boots, and a plain braided palm hat. Around his waist each had -strapped a leather belt, and in this stuck a machete--a long, sharp, -and exceedingly cruel-looking knife. Over the shoulder was another -strap, fastened to a canvas bag containing ammunition and other -articles of their outfit. - -These specimens of the rebels were hardly what I had expected to see, -yet they were so earnest in their manner I could not help but admire -them. One of them had brought down a couple of birds, and these were -cooked over our fire and divided among all hands, together with the few -things we had to offer. After the meal each soldier placed a big bite -of tobacco in his mouth, lit a cigarette, and proceeded to make himself -comfortable. - -"The Spaniards will not move in this weather," said one. "They are too -afraid of getting wet and taking cold." - -Darkness had come upon us, and it was still raining as steadily as -ever. Our clothing was dry; and, as the cave was warmed, the rebel -guards ordered us to put out the fire, that it might not attract -attention during the night. - -We were told that we had made several mistakes on the road and were -far away from Tiarriba. If we desire to go there, the rebels said they -would put us on the right road. - -"But if you are in sympathy with us, you had better pass Tiarriba by," -said one to Alano. "The city is filled with Spanish soldiers, and you -may not be able to get away as easily as you did from Santiago." - -Alano consulted with me, and then asked the rebel what we had best do. - -"That depends. Do you want to join the forces under General Garcia?" - -"We want to join our fathers at or near Guantanamo." - -"Garcia is pushing on in that direction. You had best join the army and -stay with it until Guantanamo is reached." - -"But we will have to fight?" said my Cuban chum. - -The guard smiled grimly, exhibiting a row of large white teeth. - -"As you will. The general will not expect too much from boys." - -There the talk ended, one of the rebels deeming it advisable to take a -tramp over to the next hill and back, and the other crouching down in a -corner for a nap. With nothing else to do, we followed the example of -the latter, and were soon in dreamland. - -A single call from the man who had slept beside us brought us to our -feet at daybreak. The storm had cleared away, and now it was positively -cool--so much so that I was glad enough to button my coat up tightly -and be thankful that the fire had dried it so well. The second rebel -was asleep, and had been for two hours. We followed one out of the cave -without arousing the other. - -A tramp of half a mile brought us to a high bank, and here our rebel -escort left us. - -"Across the bank you will find a wagon-road leading to the west," he -said. "Follow that, and you cannot help but meet some of our party -sooner or later. Remember the new password, 'Maysi,' and you will be -all right," and then he turned and disappeared from sight in the bush. - -The climb to the top of the bank was not difficult, and, once over -it, the road he had mentioned lay almost at our feet. We ran down to -it with lighter hearts than we had had for some time, and struck out -boldly, eating a light breakfast as we trudged along. - -"I hope we strike no more adventures until the vicinity of Guantanamo -is reached," I observed. - -"We can hardly hope for that, Mark," smiled my chum. "Remember we are -journeying through a country where war is raging. Let us be thankful if -we escape the battles and skirmishes." - -"And shooting down by some ambitious sharpshooter," I added. "By the -way, I wonder if our folks are looking for us?" - -"It may be they sent word not to come, when they saw how matters were -going, Mark. I am sure your father would not want you to run the risk -that----Look! look! We must hide!" - -Alano stopped short, caught me by the arm, and pointed ahead. Around a -turn in the road a dozen horsemen had swept, riding directly toward us. -A glance showed that they were Spanish guerrillas! - - - - -CHAPTER VII. - -FOOLING THE SPANISH GUERRILLAS. - - -"_Halte!_" - -It was the cry of the nearest of the Spanish horsemen. He had espied -us just as Alano let out his cry of alarm, and now he came galloping -toward us at a rapid gait. - -"Let us run!" I ejaculated to my Cuban chum. "It is our only chance." - -"Yes, yes! but to where?" he gasped, staring around in bewilderment. On -one side of the road was a woods of mahogany, on the other some palms -and plantains, with here and there a great rock covered with thick -vines. - -"Among the rocks--anywhere!" I returned. "Come!" And, catching his -hand, I led the way from the road while the horseman was yet a hundred -feet from us. - -Another cry rang out--one I could not understand, and a shot followed, -clipping through the broad leaves over our heads. The horseman left the -road, but soon came to a stop, his animal's progress blocked by the -trees and rocks. He yelled to his companions, and all of the guerrillas -came up at topmost speed. - -"They will dismount and be after us in a minute!" gasped Alano. "Hark! -they are coming already!" - -"On! on!" I urged. "We'll find some hiding-place soon." - -Around the rocks and under the low-hanging plantains we sped, until the -road was left a hundred yards behind. Then we came to a gully, where -the vegetation was heavy. Alano pointed down to it. - -"We can hide there," he whispered. "But we will be in danger of snakes. -Yet it is the best we can do." - -I hesitated. To make the acquaintanceship of a serpent in that dense -grass was not pleasant to contemplate. But what else was there to do? -The footsteps of our pursuers sounded nearer. - -Down went Alano, making leaps from rock to rock, so that no trail -would be left. I followed at his heels, and, coming to a rock which -was partly hollowed out at one side and thickly overgrown, we crouched -under it and pulled the vines and creepers over us. - -It was a damp, unwholesome spot, but there was no help for it, and -when several enormous black beetles dropped down and crawled around my -neck I shut my lips hard to keep from crying out. We must escape from -the enemy, no matter what the cost, for even if they did not make us -prisoners we knew they would take all we possessed and even strip the -coats from our backs. - -Peering from between the vines, we presently caught sight of three of -the Spaniards standing at the top of the gully, pistols in hand, on the -alert for a sight of us. They were dark, ugly-looking fellows, with -heavy black mustaches and faces which had not had a thorough washing in -months. They were dressed in the military uniform of Spain, and carried -extra bags of canvas slung from their shoulders, evidently meant for -booty. That they were tough customers Alano said one could tell by -their vile manner of speech. - -"Do you see them, Carlo?" demanded one of the number. "I thought they -went down this hollow?" - -"I see nothing," was the answer, coupled with a vile exclamation. "They -disappeared as if by magic." - -"They were but boys." - -"Never mind, they were rebels--that is enough," put in the third -guerrilla, as he chewed his mustache viciously. "I wish I could get a -shot at them." - -At this Alano pulled out his pistol and motioned for me to do the same. - -"We may as well be prepared for the worst," he whispered into my ear. -"They are not soldiers, they are robbers--bandits." - -"They look bad enough for anything," I answered, and produced my -weapon, which I had not discharged since the brush with the alligator. - -"If they are in the hollow it is odd we do not see them on their -trail," went on one of the bandits. "Perhaps they went around." - -His companions shook their heads. - -"I'll thrash around a bit," said one of them; and, leaving the brink of -the gully, he started straight for our hiding-place. - -My heart leaped into my throat, and I feared immediate discovery. As -for Alano, he shoved his pistol under his coat, and I heard a muffled -click as the hammer was raised. - -When within ten feet of us the ugly fellow stopped, and I fairly held -my breath, while my heart appeared to beat like a trip-hammer. He -looked squarely at the rock which sheltered us, and I could not believe -he would miss discovering us. Once he started and raised his pistol, -and I imagined our time had come; but then he turned to one side, and I -breathed easier. - -"They did not come this way, _capitan_!" he shouted. "Let us go around -the hollow." - -In another moment all three of the bandits were out of sight. We heard -them moving in the undergrowth behind us, and one of them gave a scream -as a snake was stirred up and dispatched with a saber. Then all became -quiet. - -"What is best to do now?" I asked, when I thought it safe to speak. - -"Hush!" whispered Alano. "They may be playing us dark." - -A quarter of an hour passed,--it seemed ten times that period of time -just then,--and we heard them coming back. They were very angry at -their want of success; and had we been discovered, our fate would -undoubtedly have been a hard one. They stalked back to the road, and a -moment later we heard the hoof-strokes of their horses receding in the -distance. - -"Hurrah!" I shouted, but in a very subdued tone. "That's the time we -fooled them, Alano." - -My Cuban chum smiled grimly. "Yes, Mark, but we must be more careful in -the future. Had we not been so busy talking we might have heard their -horses long before they came into view. However, the scare is over, so -let us put our best foot forward once again." - -"If only we had horses too!" I sighed. "My feet are beginning to get -sore from the uneven walking." - -"Horses would truly be convenient at times. But we haven't them, and -must make the best of it. When we stop for our next meal you had best -take off your boots and bathe your feet. You will be astonished how -much rest that will afford them." - -I followed this advice, and found Alano was right; and after that -I bathed my feet as often as I got the chance. Alano suffered no -inconvenience in this particular, having climbed the hills since -childhood. - -We were again on rising ground, and now passed through a heavy wood of -cedars, the lower branches sweeping our hats as we passed. This thick -shade was very acceptable, for the glare of the sun had nearly blinded -me, while more than once I felt as if I would faint from the intense -heat. - -"It's not such a delightful island as I fancied it," I said to my chum. -"I much prefer the United States." - -"That depends," laughed Alano. "The White Mountains or the Adirondacks -are perhaps nicer, but what of the forests and everglades in Florida?" - -"Just as bad as this, I suppose." - -"Yes, and worse, for the ground is wetter, I believe. But come, don't -lag. We must make several more miles before we rest." - -We proceeded up a hill and across a level space which was somewhat -cleared of brush and trees. Beyond we caught sight of a thatched hut. -Hardly had it come into view than from its interior we heard a faint -cry for help. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. - -ANDRES. - - -"What is that?" ejaculated Alano, stopping short and catching my arm. - -"A cry of some kind," I answered. "Listen!" - -We stepped behind some trees, to avoid any enemies who might be about, -and remained silent. Again came the cry. - -"It is a man in distress!" said Alano presently. "He asks us not to -desert him." - -"Then he probably saw us from the window of the hut. What had we best -do?" - -"You remain here, and I will investigate," rejoined my Cuban chum. - -With caution he approached the thatched hut, a miserable affair, -scarcely twelve feet square and six feet high, with the trunks of palm -trees as the four corner-posts. There were one tiny window and a narrow -door, and Alano after some hesitation entered the latter, pistol in -hand. - -"Come, Mark!" he cried presently, and I ran forward and joined him. - -A pitiable scene presented itself. Closely bound to a post which ran -up beside the window was a Cuban negro of perhaps fifty years of age, -gray-haired and wrinkled. He was scantily clothed, and the cruel -green-hide cords which bound him had cut deeply into his flesh, in many -places to such an extent that the blood was flowing. The negro's tongue -was much swollen, and the first thing he begged for upon being released -was a drink of water. - -We obtained the water, and also gave him what we could to eat, for -which he thanked us over and over again, and would have kissed our -hands had we permitted it. He was a tall man, but so thin he looked -almost like a skeleton. - -"For two days was I tied up," he explained to Alano, in his Spanish -_patois_. "I thought I would die of hunger and thirst, when, on raising -my eyes, I beheld you and your companion. Heaven be praised for sending -you! Andres will never forget you for your goodness, never!" - -"And how came you in this position?" questioned my chum. - -"Ah, dare I tell, master?" - -"You are a rebel?" - -The negro lowered his eyes and was silent. - -"If you are, you have nothing to fear from us," continued Alano. - -"Ah--good! good!" Andres wrung his hand. "Yes, I am a rebel. For two -years I fought under our good General Maceo and under Garcia. But I -am old, I cannot climb the mountains as of yore, and I got sick and -was sent back. The Spanish soldiers followed me, robbed me of what -little I possessed, and, instead of shooting me, bound me to the post -as a torture. Ah, but they are a cruel set!" And the eyes of the negro -glowed wrathfully. "If only I was younger!" - -"Were the Spaniards on horseback?" asked Alano. - -"Yes, master--a dozen of them." - -Alano described the bandits we had met, and Andres felt certain they -must be the same crowd. The poor fellow could scarcely stand, and sank -down on a bed of cedar boughs and palm branches. We did what we could -for him, and in return he invited us to make his poor home our own. - -There was a rude fireplace behind the hut, and here hung a great iron -pot. Rekindling the fire, we set the pot to boiling; and Andres hobbled -around to prepare a soup, or rather broth, made of green plantains, -rice, and a bit of dried meat the bandits had not discovered, flavoring -the whole mess with garlic. The dish was not particularly appetizing to -me, but I was tremendously hungry and made way with a fair share of -it, while Alano apparently enjoyed his portion. - -It was dark when the meal was finished, and we decided to remain at -the hut all night, satisfied that we would be about as secure there -as anywhere. The smoke of the smoldering fire kept the mosquitoes -and gnats at a distance, and Andres found for us a couple of grass -hammocks, which, when slung from the corner-posts, made very -comfortable resting-places. - -During the evening Alano questioned Andres closely, and learned that -General Garcia was pushing on toward Guantanamo, as we had previously -been informed. Andres did not know Señor Guerez, but he asserted that -many planters throughout the district had joined the rebel forces, -deserting their canefields and taking all of their help with them. - -"The men are poorly armed," he continued. "Some have only their -canefield knives--but even with these they are a match for the Spanish -soldiers, on account of their bravery"--an assertion which later on -proved, for the greater part, to be true. - -The night passed without an alarm of any kind, and before sunrise we -were stirring around, preparing a few small fish Alano had been lucky -enough to catch in a near-by mountain stream. These fish Andres baked -by rolling them in a casing of clay; and never have I eaten anything -which tasted more delicious. - -Before we left him the Cuban negro gave us minute directions for -reaching the rear guard of the rebel army. He said the password was -still "Maysi." - -"You had better join the army," he said, on parting. "You will gain -nothing by trying to go around. And you, master Alano--if your father -has joined the forces, it may be that will gain you a horse and full -directions as to just where your parent is," and as we trudged off -Andres wished us Godspeed and good luck over and over again, with a -friendly wave of his black bony hand. - -The cool spell, although it was really only cool by contrast, had -utterly passed, and as the sun came up it seemed to fairly strike one -a blow upon the head. We were traveling along the edge of a low cliff, -and shade was scarce, although we took advantage of every bit which -came in our way. The perspiration poured from our faces, necks, and -hands; and about ten o'clock I was forced to call a halt and throw -myself on my back on the ground. - -"I knew it would be so," said my chum. "That is why I called for -an early start. We might as well rest until two or three in the -afternoon. Very few people travel here in the heat of the day." - -"It is suffocating," I murmured. "Like one great bake-oven and -steam-laundry combined." - -"That is what makes the vegetation flourish," he smiled. "Just see how -it grows!" - -I did not have far to look to notice it. Before us was a forest of -grenadillo and rosewood, behind us palms and plantains, with an -occasional cacao and mahogany tree. The ground was covered with long -grass and low brush, and over all hung the festoons of vines of many -colors, some blooming profusely. A smell of "something growing green" -filled the hot air, and from every side arose the hum of countless -insects and the occasional note of a bird. - -"I wouldn't remain on the ground too long," remarked Alano presently. -"When one is hot and lies down, that is the time to take on a fever. -Better rest in yonder tree--it is more healthy; and, besides, if there -is any breeze stirring, there is where you will catch it." - -"We might as well be on a deserted island as to be in Cuba," I said, -after both of us had climbed into a mahogany tree. "There is not a -building nor a human soul in sight. I half believe we are lost again." - -Alano smiled. "Let us rather say, as your Indian said, 'We are not -lost, we are here. The army and the towns and villages are lost,'" and -he laughed at the old joke, which had been the first he had ever read, -in English, in a magazine at Broxville Academy. - -"Well, it's just as bad, Alano. I, for one, am tired of tramping up -hill and down. If we could reach the army and get a couple of horses, -it would be a great improvement." - -My chum was about to reply to this, when he paused and gave a start. -And I started, too, when I saw what was the trouble. On a limb directly -over us, and ready to descend upon our very heads, was a serpent all of -six feet in length! - - - - -CHAPTER IX. - -ACROSS THE CANEFIELDS. - - -"Look, Mark!" ejaculated Alano. - -"A snake!" I yelled. "Drop! drop!" - -I had already dropped to the limb upon which I had been sitting. Now, -swinging myself by the hands, I let go and descended to the ground, a -distance of twelve or fifteen feet. - -In less than a second my Cuban chum came tumbling after me. The fall -was no mean one, and had the grass under the tree been less deep we -might have suffered a sprained ankle or other injury. As it was, we -both fell upon our hands and knees. - -Gazing up at the limb we had left, we saw the serpent glaring down at -us, its angry eyes shining like twin diamonds. How evil its intention -had been we could but surmise. It was possible it had intended to -attack us both. It slid from the upper limb to the lower, and stretched -out its long, curling neck, while it emitted a hiss that chilled my -blood. - -"It's coming down! Run!" I began; when bang! went Alano's pistol, and I -saw the serpent give a quiver, and coil and uncoil itself around the -limb. The bullet had entered its neck, but it was not fatally wounded; -and now it came for us, landing in the grass not a dozen feet from -where we stood. - -Luckily, while traveling along the hills, we had provided ourselves -with stout sticks to aid us in climbing. These lay near, and, picking -one up, I stood on the defensive, certain the reptile would not dare to -show much fight. But it did, and darted for me with its dull-colored -head raised a few inches out of the grass. - -With all of the strength at my command I swung the stick around the -instant it came within reach. It tried to dodge, but failed; and, -struck in the neck, turned over and over as though more than half -stunned. - -By this time Alano had secured the second stick, and now he rushed in -and belabored the serpent over the head and body until it was nearly -beaten into a jelly. I turned sick at the sight, and was glad enough -when it was all over and the reptile was dead beyond all question. - -"That was a narrow escape!" I panted. "Alano, don't you advise me to -rest in a tree again. I would rather run the risk of fever ten times -over." - -"Serpents are just as bad in the grass," he replied simply. "Supposing -he had come up when you were flat on your back!" - -"Let us get away from here--there may be more. And throw away that -stick--it may have poison on it." - -"That serpent was not poisonous, Mark. But I will throw it away,--it is -so covered with blood,--and we can easily cut new ones." - -The excitement had made me forget the heat, and we went on for over a -mile. Then, coming to a mountain stream, we sat down to take it easy -until the sun had passed the zenith and it was a trifle cooler. - -About four o'clock in the afternoon, or evening, as they call it in -Cuba, we reached the end of the woods and came to the edge of an -immense sugar-cane field. The cane waved high over our heads, so that -what buildings might be beyond were cut off from view. There was a -rough cart-road through the field, and after some hesitation we took to -this, it being the only road in sight. - -We had traveled on a distance of half a mile when we reached a series -of storehouses, each silent and deserted. Beyond was a house, probably -belonging to the overseer of the plantation, and this was likewise -without occupant, the windows and doors shut tightly and bolted. - -"All off to the war, I suppose," I said. "And I had half an idea we -might get a chance to sleep in a bed to-night." - -"We might take possession," Alano suggested. - -But to this proposition I shook my head. "We might be caught and shot -as intruders. Come on. Perhaps the house of the owner is further on." - -Stopping for a drink at an old-fashioned well, we went on through the -sugar cane until we reached a small stream, beyond which was a boggy -spot several acres in extent. - -"We'll have to go around, Alano," I said. "Which way will be best?" - -"The ground appears to rise to our left," he answered. "We'll try in -that direction." - -Pushing directly through the cane, I soon discovered, was no mean work. -It was often well-nigh impossible to break aside the stout stalks, and -the stubble underfoot was more than trying to the feet. We went on a -distance of a hundred yards, and then on again to the stream, only to -find the same bog beyond. - -"We'll have to go further yet," said Alano. "Come, Mark, ere the sun -gets too low." - -"Just a few minutes of rest," I pleaded, and pulled down the top of a -cane. The sweet juice was exceedingly refreshing, but it soon caused a -tremendous thirst, which I gladly slaked at the not over clear stream. -Another jog of quarter of an hour, and we managed to cross at a point -which looked like solid ground. - -"How far do you suppose this field extends?" I asked. - -"I have no idea; perhaps but a short distance, and then again it may be -a mile or more. Some of the plantations out here are very large." - -"Do you think we can get back to the road? I can't go much further -through this stubble." - -"I'll break the way, Mark. You follow me." - -On we went in the direction we imagined the trail to be, but taking -care to avoid the bog. I was almost ready to drop from exhaustion, when -Alano halted. - -"Mark!" - -"What now, Alano?" - -"Do you know where we are?" - -"In a sugar-cane field," I said, trying to keep up my courage. - -"Exactly, but we are lost in it." - -I stared at him. - -"Can one become lost in a sugar-cane field?" I queried. - -"Yes, and badly lost, for there is nothing one can climb to take a view -of the surroundings. Even if you were to get upon my shoulders you -could see but little." - -"I'll try it," I answered, and did so without delay, for the sun was -now sinking in the west. - -But my chum had been right; try my best I could not look across the -waving cane-tops. We were hedged in on all sides, with only the setting -sun to mark our course. - -"It's worse than being out on an open prairie," I remarked. "What shall -we do?" - -"There is but one thing--push on," rejoined Alano gravely; "unless you -want to spend a night here." - -Again we went on, but more slowly, for even my chum was now weary. The -wet ground passed, we struck another reach of upland, and this gave -us hope, for we knew the sugar cane would not grow up the hills. But -the rise soon came to an end, and we found ourselves going down into -a worse hollow than that we had left. Ere we knew it, the water was -forming around our boots. - -"We must go back!" I cried. - -"I think it is drier a few yards beyond," said Alano. "Don't go back -yet." - -The sun had set, so far as we were concerned, and it was dark at the -foot of the cane-stalks. We plowed on, getting deeper and deeper into -the bog or mire. It was a sticky paste, and I could hardly move one -foot after another. I called to Alano to halt, and I had scarcely done -so when he uttered an ejaculation of disgust. - -"What is it?" I called. - -"I can't move--I am stuck!" - -I looked ahead and saw that he spoke the truth. He had sunk to the -tops of his boots, and every effort to extricate himself only made him -settle deeper. - -I endeavored to gain his side and aid him, but it was useless. Ere I -was aware I was as deep and deeper than Alano, and there we stood,--and -stuck,--unable to help ourselves, with night closing rapidly in upon -us. - - - - -CHAPTER X. - -A COUNCIL OF THE ENEMY. - - -"Well, this is the worst yet," I said, after a minute of silence. -Somehow, I felt like laughing, yet our situation was far from being a -laughing matter. - -"We have put our foot into it, and no mistake," rejoined Alano -dubiously. - -"Say feet, Alano,--and legs,--and you'll be nearer it. What on earth is -to be done?" - -"I don't know. See, I am up to my thighs already. In an hour or so I'll -be up to my neck." - -To this I made no reply. I had drawn my pistol, and with the crook of -the handle was endeavoring to hook a thick sugar-cane stalk within my -reach. Several times I had the stalk bent over, but it slipped just as -I was on the point of grasping it. - -But I persevered,--there was nothing else to try,--and at last my eager -fingers encircled the stalk. I put my pistol away and pulled hard, and -was overjoyed to find that I was drawing myself up out of my unpleasant -position. - -"Be careful--or the stalk will break," cautioned my Cuban chum, when -crack! it did split, but not before I was able to make a quick leap on -top of the clump of roots. Here I sank again, but not nearly as deeply -as before. - -The leap I had taken had brought me closer to Alano, and now I was -enabled to break down a number of stalks within his reach. He got a -firm hold and pulled with all of his might, and a moment later stood -beside me. - -"Oh, but I'm glad we're out of that!" were his first words. "I thought -I was planted for the rest of my life." - -"We must get out of the field. See, it will be pitch dark in another -quarter of an hour." - -"Let us try to go back--it will be best." - -We turned around, and took hold of each other's hands, to balance -ourselves on the sugar-cane roots, for we did not dare to step in the -hollows between. Breaking down the cane was slow and laborious work, -and soon it was too dark to see our former trail. We lost it, but this -was really to our advantage, for, by going it blindly for another -quarter of an hour, we emerged into an opening nearly an acre square -and on high and dry ground. - -Once the patch was reached, we threw ourselves down on the grass -panting for breath, the heavy perspiration oozing from every pore. We -had had another narrow escape, and silently I thanked Heaven for my -deliverance. - -Toward the higher end of the clearing was a small hut, built of logs -plastered with sun-baked clay. We came upon it by accident in the dark, -and, finding it deserted, lit our bit of candle before mentioned and -made an examination. - -"It's a cane-cutter's shanty," said Alano. "I don't believe anybody -will be here to-night, so we might as well remain and make ourselves -comfortable." - -"We can do nothing else," I returned. "We can't travel in the darkness." - -Both of us were too exhausted to think of building a fire or preparing -a meal. We ate some of our provisions out of our hands, pulled off our -water-soaked boots, and were soon asleep on the heaps of stalks the -shanty contained. Once during the night I awoke to find several species -of vermin crawling around, but even this was not sufficient to make me -rouse up against the pests. I lay like a log, and the sun was shining -brightly when Alano shook me heartily by the shoulder. - -"Going to sleep all day?" he queried. - -"Not much!" I cried, springing up. "Hullo, if you haven't got breakfast -ready!" I added, glancing to where he had built a fire. - -"Yes; I thought I'd let you sleep for a while," he answered. "Fall to, -and we'll be on our way. If we have good luck we may strike a part of -General Garcia's army to-day." - -"If we can get out of this beastly canefield." - -"I've found a way out, Mark. Finish your meal, and I'll show you." - -Breakfast was speedily dispatched, and, having put on my boots, which -were stiff and hard from the wetting received, and taken up my valise, -I followed Alano to the extreme southwest end of the clearing. Here -there was an ox-cart trail, leading in a serpentine fashion through the -canefield to still higher ground. Beyond were the inevitable rocks and -woods. - -"We seem to have missed everything," I said pointedly. "We have been -lost several times, and even now we don't know where we are." - -"We know we're not sinking to the bottom of that sugar-cane field," -replied my Cuban chum grimly. "That's something to be thankful for. Ah, -look--there is quite a respectable-looking highway. Let us take to that -and keep our eyes and ears open. It must lead to somewhere." - -We had reached the highway at right-angles, and now we pursued a course -directly eastward, which we felt must bring us closer and closer to the -vicinity of Guantanamo. I asked Alano if he recognized the country at -all, but he shook his head. - -"I was never out in this direction," he explained. "My journeys have -always been from Guantanamo to Santiago by water." - -As we progressed we passed several isolated huts, and then a village -containing perhaps a score of dwellings. The separate huts were -deserted without exception, but in the village we came across three -tall and bony colored women, who eyed us with great suspicion. - -Alano began to open a friendly conversation in Spanish with them, and -offered to pay them well if they would get us up a good dinner. But -this they could not do, for there was little to be had outside of some -vegetables. They said they had had some meat, but it had all been -confiscated by the soldiers who had passed through only the evening -before. - -"She means a body of Spanish soldiers," said Alano, after some more -talk with the oldest of the women. "She says there were about a hundred -of them on horseback, and they were following up a detachment of -General Garcia's volunteers." - -"If that is so they can't be far off," I rejoined. "We must be more -careful than ever." - -"If only we could catch up to them, get around them, and warn our -fellows!" remarked Alano, his black eyes sparkling. - -"It's easy to see you're a rebel," I said, laughing. - -"And why not--if my father is one? Come, what do you say?" - -"I am with you, if it can be done. But we mustn't run into needless -danger, Alano." - -"We will take care, Mark." - -Luckily, the sun had gone under the clouds, so it was not so warm when -we resumed our journey, after the negro women had supplied us with the -best meal at their command. They smiled broadly when Alano told them -he was a rebel sympathizer, and each declared her husband had joined -General Garcia's army several weeks previously. - -The road now led along the southern edge of a deep ravine, bordered -upon either side with wild plantains and cacao trees, with here and -there an occasional palm. The highway was stony, and presently Alano -called a halt. - -"Hark!" he said, holding up his hand; and we listened, to discern the -tramping of horses' hoofs some distance ahead. - -"There are a good many horses," I said. "Perhaps it is the Spanish -detachment." - -Alano nodded. "Follow me, and take to the woods if I hiss," he replied. - -On we went again, but slower than before. The road now wound around -to the right, up under a cliff backed up by a small mountain. As the -sun was behind the mountain, the path was dark in its more sheltered -portions. - -Suddenly Alano let out a soft hiss, and we leaped back behind a -convenient rock. - -"They are just ahead!" he cried softly. "They have quartered themselves -for the middle of the day in a cave-like opening under the cliff, where -it is, no doubt, cool and pleasant." - -"Well, what had we best do?" - -"Get around them, by some means, Mark. But, hold up! Wouldn't it be -fine if we could draw close enough to overhear them--if they are -talking over their plans!" - -"It would be risky," I hesitated. - -"Yes, but think of the service we might do my countrymen!" - -"That is true. Well, I'm with you, Alano, but for gracious' sake be -careful!" - -We talked the matter over for a few minutes, and then retraced our -steps to where a narrow path led to the top of the cliff. Climbing -this, we crawled along the edge of the cliff until we reached a spot -directly over the encamped Spaniards. - -They were a hearty, bold-looking set of men, handsomely uniformed -and thoroughly armed, presenting a decided contrast to the dirty -guerrillas we had previously encountered. A number of the soldiers were -reclining upon the ground smoking, but a half-dozen of them, evidently -officers, were gathered in a circle, conversing earnestly. - -"They are holding a council of war!" cried Alano, after he had strained -his ears to catch what was being said. "They are waiting for Captain -Crabo to join them with another detachment, and then they are to aid -some others in surrounding the left wing of General Garcia's army, -which is encamped in the valley on the other side of this mountain." - - - - -CHAPTER XI. - -A WILD RIDE ON HORSEBACK. - - -I was of course deeply interested in what Alano had to say, and my -heart gave a sudden leap when he mentioned that General Garcia's wing -of the rebel army was so close at hand. Instantly I thought of my -father. Was he in the ranks? - -I was about to speak when my Cuban chum motioned me to silence. As -cautiously as a cat he drew closer to the edge of the cliff, throwing -himself flat on his face as he made the movement. I followed suit, -knowing full well that I would scarcely be able to understand the -council of war being held below, but anxious to get a better view of -the soldiery we now considered our enemies. - -Evidently the Spanish officers did not imagine any outsiders were -near, for they spoke rather loudly, while each gesticulated a good -deal in his own particular manner. Ten minutes passed, and then there -came a pause. Alano touched me on the arm, and, as silently as we had -advanced, we turned and retreated into the brush back of the cliff. - -"I have their plans well in mind, Mark," he whispered. "Oh, if only we -could find General Garcia and tell him all!" - -"Did you find out just where the general is located?" - -"Pretty nearly--in that direction"--my Cuban chum waved his hand. -"There is a ravine to cross and then a pass through the mountains. I -believe the rebels now hold the pass, but the Spaniards mean to gain -the high ground and hem them in. If they do that, my people will be -slaughtered like cattle in a pen." - -"And supposing our fathers are with the rebels?" I put in quickly. - -"Yes, I was thinking of that, Mark. We had best---- Hist!" - -Alano stopped short. From a distance came the sounds of horses' hoofs. - -"It must be Captain Crabo," said Alano. "Lay low!" - -We drew still further into the brush and waited. Nearer and nearer came -the horses. Then came a shout and a sudden halting. - -"They've challenged the newcomers," whispered Alano, as we heard the -words "_Quien va?_" - -Evidently the reply was satisfactory, for in a moment more the new -arrivals had joined the force under the cliff. Looking from our -shelter, we saw that Captain Crabo was the same individual who had had -us locked up in the smoke-house some days previously. - -"We don't want him to lay hands on us again," I said, and Alano smiled -grimly. "Why not get out at once?" I went on. - -"Wait till I hear what Captain Crabo has to say, Mark. He may bring -news, and we want to learn as much as we can. If they----" - -My Cuban chum was forced to stop speaking, for with a quick movement I -had placed a warning hand over his mouth. Some of the soldiers who had -been resting were coming up the cliff, evidently to take a look at the -surroundings. - -"Come!" I whispered into Alano's ear, and turned to retreat. He -followed me, and a distance of fifty feet was covered through the -undergrowth, when we found ourselves at the edge of another cliff and -actually hemmed in by the advancing men. - -What were we to do? It was a serious question, and one to be decided -instantly. Already the foremost of the men was less than two rods -behind us. We looked around for a place to hide, but none was at hand. -Then Alano gave a cry. - -"They are coming from the other direction too! We are lost!" - -Scarcely had the words left his lips than we heard a yell from two of -the Spanish soldiers. We were discovered, and all thoughts of further -concealment in that hemmed-in spot were out of the question. - -Hardly realizing what I was doing in my agitated frame of mind, I ran -down to the very edge of the cliff at a point about a hundred and fifty -feet above where the soldiers were encamped. Looking down I discovered -a series of crags leading to the highway below. Here a score or more of -horses were tethered to a mahogany tree. - -"Come, it's our only chance!" I ejaculated, and leaped for the nearest -crag below me at the imminent peril of tumbling and breaking my neck. - -Down I went, jumping and rolling from one projection of rocks to -another, with Alano but a short distance behind me. I heard a command -to stop, and then a shot, but paid no heed. With a final bump I reached -the foot of the cliff, less than a dozen feet from where the horses -were standing. - -My sudden appearance startled several of the animals, and they plunged -and broke their halters. But they did not run away, and the fact that -they were loose gave me another idea. - -"The horses, Alano! Let us ride away on them!" - -"Yes! yes!" he replied, and in a twinkle we had secured two of the -nearest of the animals. We leaped into the saddle just as a second shot -rang out. The bullet struck my horse a glancing blow on the flank, and -off he tore up the highway as though dug with a spur. - -I heard Alano coming behind me, but did not dare look back, for the -highway was a poor one and my beast needed all of my attention. -Fortunately, riding had been taught to me at Broxville Military -Academy, so I felt fairly well at home in the saddle. Gathering up the -reins, I sent the animal along at all the speed at his command. The -shouting behind continued, but no more shots were fired, for the trees -now hid both of us from our pursuers. - -"That was a clever move," cried Alano, as he presently ranged up beside -me. "We have escaped them and provided ourselves with as good horses as -one would wish to ride." - -"They will certainly follow us, Alano. We must see if we can't throw -them off the trail." - -"I see no side road." - -"Well, come on until we strike something." I answered. - -Forward we went, making both horses do their best. Half a mile was -covered and we forded a small mountain torrent. As the animals paused -to stick their noses into the cooling liquid, we listened and heard the -Spaniards coming after us on the remainder of the animals. - -"Quick!" cried Alano. "They have lost no time in following." - -"There is a side road, leading into the mountains," I returned. "We had -better take that." - -We turned off as I had advised, and it was not long before another -half-mile was covered. Having reached an elevation of several hundred -feet, the road became broad and tolerably level, and we went on faster -than ever. - -"We ought to be getting close to the rebel camp," said Alano, a while -later. "By the looks of the country we should be near that pass the -rebels are supposed to be occupying." - -"I doubt if it is long before we strike some of your people now," I -answered. "But supposing we slack up a bit? The horses can't stand this -strain in the heat." - -"Oh, they are used to the heat. But we can take it easier if you say -so. There isn't any use of our riding ourselves sore the first day in -the saddle." - -"I suppose they can put us down for horse thieves if they want to." - -"Not much, Mark. Why, it's more than likely these horses were -confiscated from my countrymen in the first place." - -Thus conversing, we galloped along for half a mile further. Then, as -Alano paused to readjust his horse's saddle, I fancied I heard some -suspicious sounds behind us, and drew my chum's attention to them. - -"Horses!" cried Alano. "They must have found our trail, and are coming -after us! Come ahead, or we'll be captured after all!" - -Once more we urged our animals forward. But not for long. Coming to a -turn in the road, Alano yelled to me to halt, and pointed ahead. - -I gave a groan as I looked. A mountain stream, all of twelve feet wide -and twice as deep, crossed the roadway. There had been a rude bridge -of tree trunks, but this was torn away, and thus our further retreat -seemed hopelessly cut off. - - - - -CHAPTER XII. - -A DARING LEAP. - - -For the moment neither Alano nor myself spoke as we gazed at the gap -before us. Then I gave a groan which seemed to come from my very soul. - -"We are lost, Alano! They have hemmed us in!" - -My Cuban chum did not answer. Instead, he gazed to the right and the -left. - -But this was useless. On our right was a stony undergrowth impossible -to traverse, on the left a thick jungle leading down into what looked -like a bottomless morass. - -The hoof-strokes of the pursuing horses sounded nearer, and I expected -every moment to see the band of Spanish cavalrymen dash into sight -with drawn arms, ready to shoot or cut us down. Alano must have been -thinking the same, for I saw him grate his teeth hard. - -"Mark!" he cried suddenly. "Come, it's our only hope." - -"What?" - -"To cross the stream." - -"But how? We can't jump it." - -"We'll make the horses do it. Be quick, or it will be too late. Watch -me. I am certain these horses know how to do the trick." - -He rode back a distance of two hundred feet. Then on he came, like the -wind, his animal well in hand. A cry of command, and the horse rose in -the air and went over the chasm like a bird. - -Could I do as well? There was no time left to speculate on the subject. -Our pursuers were but just around the turn. I rode back as Alano had -done and started to make the leap. - -"_Halte!_" It was the cry of Captain Crabo, who was in the lead of the -oncoming cavalrymen. I paid no attention. The edge of the mountain -stream was reached, and I cried to my horse to move forward. - -But he was stubborn, and made a balk for which I was hardly prepared. -Down went his front feet against a bit of sharp rock, and the shock -threw me over his head and directly into the middle of the mountain -torrent! - -I heard Alano give a cry of alarm, and then the waters closed over my -head. Down and down I went, for at this point the water was at least -fifteen feet deep. The sunlight was shut out as I passed under several -overhanging rocks, only to bump up against the roots of a tree, where -the water rushed rapidly in several directions. - -Dazed to such an extent that I hardly knew what I was doing, I caught -at the roots, held fast, and drew my head above the surface of the -stream. I was out of sight of those who were after me, and prudently -concluded to remain where I was. - -My hiding-place was far from agreeable. The tree roots were slimy, and -I imagined they must be the home of water snakes. Just over my head was -a mass of soil over which crawled innumerable black beetles, some as -big as a man's thumb. Within reach of my hand, a large green-and-white -frog blinked at me in amazement. - -The shouts of the Spaniards reached me in a muffled way, as I heard -them dismount and tramp up and down the torrent in search of me. I -expected every moment to be discovered, but that moment did not come, -and quarter of an hour passed. - -By this time I could scarcely hold on longer to the tree roots. I -listened as well as I could, and, hearing no sound, let go my hold. The -rush of water speedily carried me fifteen feet further down the stream, -and here I caught hold of some bushes and pulled myself up on the bank -and out of sight. - -I was now on the same side to which Alano had crossed, and I soon -discovered that several of the Spaniards had also come over, although -on foot. They were in the neighborhood of the highway, and I could make -out enough of their talk to know they were deploring their luck in not -being able to find me and stop my Cuban chum. - -Feeling that it would be foolhardy to leave my place of concealment -for some time to come, I endeavored to make myself as comfortable as -possible under the shelter of a clump of wild orange trees. These were -full of the tempting-looking fruit, which, however, I found on sampling -was so bitter it fairly puckered my mouth. But in my bag were some -biscuits, and, as these were thoroughly water-soaked, I ate several -with a relish. - -Twice did the Spaniards pass within fifty feet of my hiding-place, and -each time I felt like giving myself up for lost. They remained in the -vicinity until nearly sundown, and then withdrew in the direction from -whence they had come, growling volubly among themselves over their -ill-luck. - -With cautious steps I left the clump of wild oranges, and hurried to -the highway. As Alano was on horseback, I felt he must have kept to the -road. How far he had gone there was no telling, although it must be -several miles if not much further. - -While at the military academy we boys had, like many other school -fellows, adopted a peculiar class whistle. This I felt certain Alano -would remember well, and, at the risk of being spotted, I emitted the -whistle with all the strength of my lungs, not once, but half a dozen -times. - -I listened intently, but no answer came back; and, satisfied that my -chum was not within hearing, I went on my way, up the road, keeping an -eye open for any enemy who might be in ambush. - -It was now growing dark, and I felt that in another half-hour night -would be upon me. To be alone in that wilderness was not pleasant, but -just then there appeared to be no help for it. - -At the distance of half a mile I stopped again to whistle. While I was -listening intently I fancied I heard a rustle among the trees to my -right. I instantly dove out of sight behind some brush, but the noise -did not continue, and I concluded it must have been made by some bird. - -Presently the road took another turn and made a descent into a canyon -from which the light of day had long since fled. I hesitated and looked -forward. Certainly the prospect was not an inviting one. But to turn -back I felt would be foolish, so I went on, although more cautiously -than ever. - -At the bottom of the hollow was a bit of muddy ground, over which a -mass of cut brush had been thrown, probably to make the passage safer -for man and beast. I had just stepped on this brush when something -whizzed through the air and encircled my neck. Before I could save -myself, I was jerked backward and felt a rawhide lasso cutting into my -windpipe. I caught hold of the rawhide and tried to rise, but several -forms arose out of the surrounding gloom and fell upon me, bearing me -to the earth. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. - -FRIENDS IN NEED. - - -I speedily found that my enemies were five in number; and, as they were -all tall and powerful men, to struggle against them would have been -foolhardy. - -"Don't choke me--I give in," I gasped, and then the pressure on my neck -was relieved. - -"_Americano_," I heard one of the fellows mutter. "No talk, you!" he -hissed into my ear, and flourished a knife before my eyes to emphasize -his words. - -I shut my mouth, to signify that I agreed, and then I was allowed to -rise, and in a twinkle my hands were tied behind my back. Two of the -men conducted me away from the spot, while a third followed us. The -other two men remained on guard at the highway. - -I wondered if Alano had been captured, but just then did not give the -subject much thought. There was no telling whether the men were Spanish -or Cuban sympathizers; but, no matter to what side they belonged, -I noted with a shudder that they were a decidedly tough class of -citizens. - -Leaving the highway, we made our way along a rocky course leading to a -small clearing at the top of a plateau. Back of the clearing was a rude -hut, set in a grove of sapodilla trees. Around the hut half a dozen -dirty soldiers were lying, who leaped up at our approach. An earnest -conversation in a Spanish _patois_ followed, and then one of the men -spoke to me in Spanish. - -"No speak Spanish, eh?" he growled, in return to my assertion to that -effect. "Who you be? Where you go to?" - -"I am on my way to Guantanamo, to join my father," I said, and made as -much of an explanation as I deemed necessary. - -The soldiers glared suspiciously at me when my words were translated to -them. Then, without ceremony, they began to search me, taking all I had -of value from me. - -"You are not going to rob me, I trust," I said, and the man who could -speak English laughed coarsely. - -"We take all we get," he replied. "All right in war, _amigo_." - -I was not his _amigo_, or friend, but I was forced to submit; and, -even as it was, I was thankful my life had been spared, for they were -a cruel-looking band, with less of the soldier than the bandit about -them. - -When I saw a chance, I started in to question them concerning Alano, -but the nearest fellow, with a flat blow from his dirty hand, stopped -me. - -"No talk!" growled he who could speak English. - -After this I said no more, but from where I had been placed, at the -rear of the hot and ill-ventilated hut, I watched the men narrowly -and tried to understand what they were talking about. I heard General -Garcia mentioned and also the word "machete," the name of the long, -deadly knives most of the Cuban soldiers carried. - -At last the men around the hut began to grow sleepy, and one after -another sought a suitable spot and threw himself down to rest. The -youngest of the party, a fellow not over twenty, was left on guard. - -With his pistol in his lap, this guard sat on a flat rock, rolling -cigarette after cigarette and smoking them. From my position in the hut -I could just catch his outline, and I watched him eagerly. I pretended -to go to sleep, but I was very wide awake. - -It must have been well past midnight, and I was giving up in despair, -when the last of the cigarettes went out and the guard's head fell -forward on his breast. In the meantime I had been silently working at -the rawhide which bound my hands. In my efforts my wrists were cut not -a little, but at last my hands were free. - -Feeling that the guard and the others were all asleep, I arose as -silently as a shadow. Several of my captors lay between me and the -entrance of the hut, and it was with extreme caution that I stepped -over them. The last man sighed heavily and turned over just as I went -by, and with my heart in my throat I leaped out into the open. - -But he did not awaken, nor did the guard notice my appearance. As I -passed the latter I saw something shining on the ground. It was the -pistol, which had slipped from the guard's lap. I hesitated only an -instant, then picked it up and glided onward to the end of the plateau. - -"_Halte!_" The command, coming so suddenly, was enough to startle -anybody, and I leaped back several feet. A man had appeared before -me, one of the fellows left to guard the highway below. Following the -command came an alarm in Spanish. - -On the instant the camp was in commotion. The guard was the first to -awaken, and his anger when he found his pistol gone was very great. -While he was searching for his weapon, the others poured from the hut -and ran toward me, leveling their weapons as they came. - -I was caught between two fires, for the man before me also had his -pistol raised, and I did not know what to do. Then, to avoid being -struck, and not wishing to shed blood, I leaped toward some near-by -bushes. - -Bang! crack! A musket and a pistol went off almost simultaneously, and -I heard a clipping sound through the trees. Just as my former captors -turned to follow me into the thicket, there came another shot from down -in the hollow of the highway. - -"_Cuba libre!_" I heard echo upon several sides, and a rattle of -musketry followed. From a dozen spots in the hollow I saw the long -flashes of fire, and I at once knew that a portion of the Cuban army -was at hand and had surprised the Spanish sympathizers who were -attempting to hold the highway. - -The moment the battle started below the plateau those who had held me -captive gave up pursuing me, and rushed back to the hut to obtain their -entire belongings--feeling, doubtless, that the region would soon get -too hot to hold them. I watched them turn away with keen satisfaction, -and remained where I was, the guard's pistol still in my possession. - -For fully half an hour the firing kept up, and then came a rush along -the highway and again I heard the cry of "_Cuba libre!_" raised, -showing that the rebels were getting the best of the encounter and had -driven the Spanish soldiers from their hiding-places. On went one body -of men after the other down the road, until the sounds of their voices -and firearms were almost lost in the distance. - -Certain that the plateau was now absolutely deserted, I ran back to the -hut and found my valise, which had been thrown in a corner. My pistol -was gone, but as I had another, fully loaded and just as good, I did -not mind this. With my satchel over my shoulder, I crawled cautiously -down to the highway and hurried in the direction I had before been -pursuing. - -I had just reached the opposite side of the hollow, where all was pitch -dark, on account of the shade, when a feeble moan came to my ears. -Moving silently in the direction, I found a negro lying on his back, a -fearful wound in his shoulder. - -The man could speak nothing but a Cuban _patois_, yet I understood -that he was in pain and desired his shoulder bound up. Wetting my -handkerchief in the water at the hollow, I washed the wound as best I -could and tied it up with strips of muslin torn from the sleeve of his -ragged shirt and my own shirt sleeve. For this, I could note by his -manner, that he was extremely grateful. - -"_Americano?_" he said. - -"Yes," I replied. - -Then he asked me several other questions, from which I made out that he -wanted to know which side I was on. Feeling certain I was safe, I said -"Cuba," and he smiled faintly. - -"I want to find General Garcia," I continued, emphasizing the name. -Then I tapped my breast, said General Garcia again, and pointed off -with my finger. - -He nodded and attempted to sit up. With his bony finger he pointed -up the highway, and circled his finger to the northwest to signify I -was to turn off in that direction. Then he caught me by the arm and -whispered "Maysi" into my ear--the password. - -Feeling I could do no more for him at present, I went on, and at the -distance of an eighth of a mile came to a side road, which was the -one he had described to me. It was narrow and rocky, and I had not -proceeded over two hundred feet in the direction when a soldier leaped -out from behind a banana tree and presented his gun. - -"_Halte!_" he cried. - -"Maysi!" I called promptly. - -The gun was lowered, and, seeing I was but a boy, the guard smiled and -murmured "_Americano?_" to which I nodded. - -"General Garcia," I said, and tapped my breast to signify I wished to -see the great Cuban leader. - -Without a word the guard led me on a distance of a hundred feet and -called another soldier. A short talk ensued, and the second man -motioned me to follow him through a trail in the brush. We went on for -ten minutes, then came to a clearing hemmed in by a cliff and several -high rocks. - -Here were over a hundred soldiers on foot and twice as many on -horseback. In the midst of the latter was the Cuban general I had asked -to see--the gallant soldier who had fought so hard in the cause of -Cuban liberty. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. - -GENERAL CALIXTO GARCIA. - - -My first view of General Calixto Garcia was a disappointing one. -For some reason, probably from the reports I had heard concerning -his bravery, I had expected to see a man of great proportions and -commanding aspect. Instead, I saw an elderly gentleman of fair figure, -with mild eyes and almost white mustache and beard, the latter trimmed -close. But the eyes, though mild, were searching, and as he turned them -upon me I felt he was reading me through and through. - -He was evidently surprised to see a boy, and an American at that. He -spoke but little English, but an interpreter was close at hand, who -immediately demanded to know who I was, where I had come from, and what -I wanted. - -"My name is Mark Carter, and I have journeyed all the way from Santiago -de Cuba," I replied. "I heard that my father and his friend, Señor -Guerez, had joined General Garcia's forces." - -"You are Señor Carter's son!" exclaimed the Cuban officer, and turned -quickly to General Garcia. The two conversed for several minutes, and -then the under-officer turned again to me. - -"General Garcia bids you welcome," he said, and at the same time the -great Cuban leader smiled and extended his hand, which I found as hard -and horny as that of any tiller of the soil. "He knows your father and -Señor Guerez well." - -"And where are they now?" I asked quickly. - -"They were with the army two days ago, but both went off to escort the -ladies of Señor Guerez' family to a place of safety. The señor was -going to take his wife and daughters to an old convent up a river some -miles from here." - -This was rather disheartening news, yet I had to be content. I asked if -my father was well. - -"Very well, although hardly able to walk, on account of a leg he broke -some time ago." - -"And have you seen Alano Guerez? He is about my own age, and was with -me up to this morning," I went on, and briefly related my adventures on -the road, to which the officer listened with much interest. - -"We have seen nothing of him," was the reply I received. "But he may be -somewhere around here." - -The officer wished to know about the Spanish detachment we had met, and -I told him all I knew, which was not much, as I had not understood -the Spanish spoken and Alano had not interpreted it for me. But even -the little I had to say seemed to be highly important, and the officer -immediately reported the condition of affairs to General Garcia. - -By this time some of the soldiers who had taken part in the fight at -the foot of the plateau came back, bringing with them several wounded -men, including the negro whose wound I had bound up. The disabled ones -were placed in a temporary hospital, which already sheltered a dozen -others, and General Garcia rode off with his horsemen, leaving the foot -soldiers to spread out along the southeastern slope of the mountain. - -Left to myself, I hardly knew what to do. A black, who could speak a -few words of "Englis'," told me I could go where I wanted, but must -look out for a shot from the enemy; and I wandered over to the hospital -and to the side of the fellow I had formerly assisted. - -The hospital, so called, consisted of nothing more than a square of -canvas stretched over the tops of a number of stunted trees. From one -tree to another hammocks, made of native grass, were slung, and in -these, and on piles of brush on the ground, rested the wounded ones. -Only one regular doctor was in attendance, and as his surgical skill -and instruments were both limited, the sufferings of the poor fellows -were indeed great. - -"Him brudder me--you help him," said the black who spoke "Englis'," as -he pointed to the fellow whose wound I had dressed. "Jorge Nullus no -forget you--verra good you." - -"Is your name Jorge Nullus?" - -"Yeas, señor--him brudder Christoval." - -"Where did you learn English?" - -"Me in Florida once--dree year ago--stay seex months--no like him -there--too hard work," and Jorge Nullus shrugged his shoulders. "You -verra nice leetle man, señor," and he smiled broadly at his open -compliment. - -"Do you know Señor Guerez?" I questioned quickly. - -"Me hear of him--dat's all." - -"Do you know where the old convent on the river is?" I continued. - -The Cuban nodded. "Yeas--been dare many times--bring 'taters, onions, -to Father Anuncio." - -"Could you take me there--if General Garcia would let you go?" - -"Yeas, señor. But Spaniards all around--maybe shoot--bang!--dead," and -he pointed to his wounded brother. The brother demanded to know what -we were talking about, and the two conversed for several minutes. Then -Jorge turned again to me. - -[Illustration: "GENERAL GARCIA, THE GALLANT SOLDIER WHO HAD FOUGHT SO -HARD IN THE CAUSE OF CUBAN LIBERTY."] - -"Christoval say me take you; you verra good leetle man, señor. We go -now, you say go." - -"Will you be allowed to go?" - -"Yeas--General Garcia no stop me--he know me all right," and the negro -grinned and showed his teeth. - -I was tempted to start at once, but decided to wait until morning, in -the hope of finding Alano. In spite of the fact that I knew my chum -would be doubly cautious, now we were separated, I felt decidedly -anxious about him. The Spanish troops were on every side, and the -soldiers would not hesitate to shoot him down should they learn who he -was. - -The night passed in comparative quietness. Toward morning we heard -distant firing to the northwest, and at five o'clock a messenger dashed -into camp with the order to move on to the next mountain, a distance -of two miles. Through Jorge I learned that the Spaniards had been -outwitted and driven back to the place from whence they had come. - -There now seemed nothing for me to do but to push on to the convent on -the river, in the hope of there joining my father. We were, so I was -told, but a few miles from Guantanamo, but the route to the convent -would not take us near the town. - -Jorge's brother felt much better, so the negro went off with a light -heart, especially after I had made it plain to him that my father would -reward him for any trouble he took on my account. I told him about -Alano, and before leaving camp we walked around among the sentries in -the hope of gaining some information concerning him. But it was all -useless. - -"Maybe he went on to Father Anuncio's," said my negro guide, and this -gave me a grain of comfort. - -The soldiers and Jorge and myself left the camp at about the same -time, but we did not take the same road, and soon my guide and I found -ourselves on a lonely mountain trail overlooking a valley thick with -brush and trees. The sun shone brightly, but the air was clear and -there was a fine breeze blowing, and this made it much cooler than it -would otherwise have been. - -I missed the horse, and wondered if Alano still had the animal he had -captured. It might be possible he had ridden straight on to Guantanamo, -and was now bound from there up the river. If that was so, we might -meet on the river road. - -"Werry bad road now," said Jorge, as we came to a halt on the mountain -side. "Be careful how you step, Señor Mark." - -He pointed ahead, to where a narrow trail led around a sharp turn. Here -the way was rocky and sloped dangerously toward the valley. He went on -ahead, and I followed close at his heels. - -"No horse come dis way," observed Jorge, as he came to another turn. -"Give me your hand--dis way. Now den, jump!" - -We had reached a spot where a tiny mountain stream had washed away a -portion of the trail. I took his hand, and we prepared to take the leap. - -Just then the near-by crack of a rifle rang out on the morning air. -Whether or not the shot was intended for us I cannot say, but the -sound startled me greatly and I stumbled and fell. Jorge tried to grab -me, but failed, and down I shot head first into the trees and bushes -growing twenty feet below the trail! - - - - -CHAPTER XV. - -A PRISONER OF WAR. - - -By instinct more than reason, I put out both hands as I fell, and this -movement saved me from a severe blow on the head. My hands crashed -through the branches of a tree, bumped up against the trunk, and then I -bounced off into the midst of a clump of brush and wild peppers. - -"Hi, yah!" I heard Jorge cry out, but from my present position I could -not see him. "Is you killed?" he went on. - -"No, but I'm pretty well shook up and scratched up," I answered. - -"Take care--somebody shoot," he went on. - -I concluded I was pretty well out of sight, and I kept quiet and tried -to get back the breath which had been completely knocked out of me. A -few minutes later I heard a crashing through the brush, and my guide -stood beside me. - -"Lucky you no killed," he observed. "Bad spot dat." - -He searched around and soon found a hollow containing some water, with -which I bathed the scratches on my face and hands. In the meantime he -gazed around anxiously in the direction from which he imagined the shot -had come. - -"Maybe no shoot at us," he said, quarter of an hour later. "Me find -out." - -With his ever-ready machete he cut down a young tree and trimmed the -top branches off, leaving the stumps sticking out about six inches on -every side. On the top of the tree he stuck his hat, and then, having -no coat, asked me for mine, which he buttoned about the tree a short -distance under the hat, placing a fluttering handkerchief between the -two. - -With this rude dummy, or scarecrow, he crawled up the side of the gully -until almost on a level with the trail. Then he hoisted the figure up -cautiously and moved it forward. - -No shot was fired, and after waiting a bit Jorge grew bolder and -climbed up to the trail himself. Here he spent a long time in viewing -the surroundings, and finally called to me. - -"Him no shoot at us. Maybe only hunter. Come up." - -Not without some misgivings, I followed directions. To gain the trail -again was no easy matter, but he helped me by lowering the end of the -tree and pulling me up. Once more we proceeded on our way, but with -eyes and ears on guard in case anybody in the shape of an enemy should -appear. - -By noon Jorge calculated we had covered eight miles, which was -considered a good distance through the mountains, and I was glad enough -to sit down in a convenient hollow and rest. He had brought along a -good stock of provisions, with which the rebel camp had happened to be -liberally provided, and we made a meal of bread, crackers, and cold -meat, washed down with black coffee, cooked over a fire of dead and -dried grass. - -"We past the worst of the road now," remarked Jorge, as we again moved -on. "Easy walkin' by sundown." - -He was right, for about four o'clock we struck an opening among the -mountains where there was a broad and well-defined road leading past -several plantations. The plantations were occupied by a number of -Cubans and blacks, who eyed me curiously and called out queries to -Jorge, who answered them cheerfully. - -The plantations left behind, we crossed a brook which my guide said -ran into the river, and took to a path running along a belt of oak and -ebony trees, with here and there a clump of plantains. We had gone but -a short distance when we crossed another trail, and Jorge called a halt -and pointed to the soft ground. - -The hoofprints of half a dozen horses were plainly visible, and as they -were still fresh we concluded they had been made that very day, and -perhaps that afternoon. - -"Who do you think the horsemen are, Jorge?" I asked. - -He shrugged his shoulders. - -"Can't say--maybe soon tell--me see," and on he went, with his eyes -bent on the ground. - -For my part, I thought it best to keep a watch to the right and the -left. We went on slowly until the evening shadows began to fall. Then -Jorge was about to speak, when I motioned him to be silent. - -"There is something moving in yonder brush," I said, pointing with my -hand. "I think I saw a horse." - -We left the road and proceeded in the direction, moving along slowly -and silently. I had been right; there was not one horse, but half a -dozen, tethered to several stunted trees. - -No human beings were present, but from a distance we presently heard -the murmur of voices, and a minute later two Spanish soldiers came into -view. Jorge drew his pistol, but I restrained him. - -The soldiers had evidently come up to see if the horses were still -safe. Satisfied on this point, one passed to the other a roll of -tobacco for a bite, and both began to converse in a low but earnest -tone. - -Jorge listened; and, as the talk ran on, his face grew dark and full -of hatred. The backs of the two Spaniards were toward us, and my guide -drew his machete and motioned as if to stab them both. - -I shook my head, horrified at the very thought. This did not suit -Jorge, and he drew me back where we might talk without being overheard. - -"What is the use of attacking them?" I said. "Let us be on our way." - -"Them men fight General Garcia's men--maybe hurt my brudder," grunted -Jorge wrathfully. "They say they have prisoner--kill him soon." - -"A prisoner?" - -"Yes." - -"Where?" - -"At camp down by river. They kill udder prisoner, now rob dis one an' -kill too. Bad men--no good soldiers." - -I agreed with him on this point. Yet I was not satisfied that he should -go back and attack the pair while they were off their guard. - -"It would not be fair," I said, "and, besides, the noise may bring more -soldiers down upon us. I wish we could do something for their prisoner, -whoever he is." - -We talked the matter over, and, seeing the soldiers depart, concluded -to follow them. We proceeded as silently as two shadows, and during the -walk Jorge overheard one soldier tell the other that the prisoner was -to be shot at sunrise. - -A turn in the path brought us to a broad and roughly flowing stream. -Here a temporary camp had been pitched. Half a dozen dirty-looking -Spaniards were lolling on the ground, smoking and playing cards. From -their talk Jorge said they were waiting for some of their former -comrades to join them, when all were to travel back to where the -Spanish commander, Captain Campona, had been left. - -"There ees the prisoner," said Jorge, in a whisper, and pointed along -the river shore to where rested a decaying tree, half in and half out -of the water. The prisoner was strapped with rawhides to one of the -tree branches, and it was--my chum Alano! - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. - -A RESCUE UNDER DIFFICULTIES. - - -Mere words cannot express my astonishment and alarm when I saw who the -prisoner tied to the tree was. As I gazed at Alano my heart leaped into -my throat, and like lightning I remembered what Jorge had told me the -Spaniards had said, that the prisoner was to be shot at sunrise. - -Alano shot! I felt an icy chill creep over me. My own chum! No, no, -it must not be! In my excitement I almost cried aloud. Noting how -strangely I was affected, my guide placed his hand over my mouth and -drew me back into a thicket. - -"It is Alano Guerez!" I whispered, as soon as I was calm enough to -speak--"Señor Guerez' son!" - -"Ah, yah!" ejaculated Jorge. "I see he is but a boy. _Perros!_ [Dogs!]" - -"We must save Alano," I went on. "If he was shot, I--I would never -forgive myself." - -Jorge shrugged his shoulders. "How?" he asked laconically. "Too many -for us." - -"Perhaps we can do something when it grows darker." - -The guide drew down the corners of his mouth. Then, as he gazed at the -river, his big black eyes brightened. - -"Yeas, when it is darker we try. But must be careful." - -"Perhaps we can get to him by the way of the river." - -Jorge smiled grimly. Catching me by the arm he led me along the bank, -overgrown with grass and rushes. Not far away was something that looked -like a half-submerged log covered with mud. Taking a stone he threw it, -and the "log" roused up and flopped angrily into the stream. - -"Alligators!" I cried, with a shiver. "No, we won't be able to get to -him by way of the river. But we must do something." - -"We cross river, and I tell you what we do," replied my guide. - -Crossing was not an easy matter, as neither of us cared to attempt -swimming or fording with alligators in the vicinity. But by passing -along the bank we presently discovered a spot where half a dozen rocks -afforded a footing, and over we went in the semi-darkness, for the sun -was now setting. - -As we hurried down the course of the stream again, Jorge cut several -cedar and pine branches which appeared to be particularly dry. Then he -handed me a number of matches, of which, fortunately, he had an entire -box. - -"We will put one pile of branches here," he said, "and another further -down, and one further yet. Den I go back to camp. You watch tree over -there. When you see light wait few minutes, den light all dree fires." - -"But how will that help us?" - -"Soldiers see fires, want to know who is dar--don't watch Alano--me go -in and help him. After you make fires you run back to where we cross on -stones." - -Jorge's plan was not particularly clear to me, yet I agreed to it, and -off he sped in the gloom. Left to myself, I made my way cautiously to -the water's edge, there to await the signal he had mentioned. - -It was a hot night and the air was filled with myriads of mosquitoes, -gnats, flies, and other pests. From the woods behind me came the -occasional cry of a night bird, otherwise all was silent. Frogs as big -as one's two hands sat on the rocks near by, on the watch for anything -in the shape of a meal which might come their way. - -But bad as the pests around me were, I gave them scant consideration. -My whole mind was concentrated upon Alano and what Jorge proposed to -do. Silently I prayed to Heaven that the guide might be successful in -rescuing my chum. - -About half an hour went by,--it seemed an extra long wait to me,--when -suddenly I saw a flash of fire, in the very top of a tree growing -behind the Spaniards' camp. The flash lasted but a second, then died -out instantly. - -Arising from my seat, I ran to the furthest pile of boughs and waited -while I mentally counted off a hundred and eighty seconds, three -minutes. Then I struck a match, ignited the heaped-up mass, and ran to -the second pile. - -In less than ten minutes the three fires, situated about three hundred -feet apart, were burning fiercely, and then I ran at topmost speed -for the spot where the river had been crossed. I had just reached the -locality when I heard a shout ring out, followed by two musket shots. - -A painful, anxious two minutes followed. Were Alano and Jorge safe? was -the question I asked myself. I strained my eyes to pierce the gloom -which hung like a pall over the water. - -Footsteps on the rocks greeted my ears. Someone was coming, someone -with a heavy burden on his back. Once or twice the approaching person -slipped on the rocks and I heard a low cry of warning. - -"Mark!" - -It was the voice of Alano, and my heart gave a joyful bound. In another -second my Cuban chum appeared in view, carrying on his manly back the -form of Jorge. - -"Alano," I ejaculated excitedly, "what is the matter with him?" - -"He has been shot in the leg," was the reply. "Come on, help me carry -him and get to cover. I am afraid they are on my track!" - -"Run into the woods!" groaned Jorge. "Den we take to trees--dat's best." - -As Alano was almost exhausted, I insisted that the guide be transferred -to my back, and this was speedily done, and on we went, away from the -river and directly into the forest. Of course, with such a burden I -could not go far, and scarcely a hundred yards were traversed when I -came to a halt, at the foot of a giant mahogany tree. - -Not without a good deal of difficulty Jorge was raised up into the -branches of the tree, and we followed. - -"Still now and listen!" cried Jorge, with a half-suppressed groan. - -With strained ears we sat in the mahogany tree for fully half an hour -without speaking. We heard the Spaniards cross the river and move -cautiously in the direction of the three fires, and presently they -returned to their own camp. - -"Thank fortune, we have outwitted them!" murmured Alano, the first to -break the silence. "You poor fellow!" he went on to Jorge; "you saved -my life." - -He asked about the wound which had been received, and was surprised, -and so was I, to learn that it was but slight, and what had caused the -guide's inability to run had been a large thorn which had cut through -his shoe into his heel. By the light of a match the thorn was forced -out with the end of Jorge's machete, and the foot was bound up in a bit -of rag torn from my coat sleeve, for I must admit that rough usage had -reduced my clothing to a decidedly dilapidated condition. - -As we could not sleep very well in the tree without hammocks, we -descended to the ground and made our way to a bit of upland, where -there was a small clearing. Here we felt safe from discovery and lay -down to rest. But before retiring Alano thanked Jorge warmly for what -he had done, and thanked me also. - -"I thought you were a goner," he said to me. "How did you escape when -the horse balked and threw you into the stream?" - -I told him, and then asked him to relate his own adventures, which he -did. After leaving me, he said, his horse had taken the bit in his -teeth and gone on for fully a mile. When the animal had come to a halt -he had found himself on a side trail, with no idea where he was. - -His first thought was to return to the stream where the mishap had -occurred, his second to find General Garcia. But Providence had willed -otherwise, for he had become completely tangled up in the woods and -had wandered around until nightfall. In the morning he had mounted his -horse and struck a mountain path, only to fall into the hands of the -Spanish soldiers two hours later. These soldiers were a most villainous -lot, and, after robbing him of all he possessed, had decided to take -his life, that he might not complain of them to their superior officer. - -"From what I heard them say," he concluded, "I imagine they have a very -strict and good man for their leader--a man who believes in carrying on -war in the right kind of a way, and not in such a guerrilla fashion as -these chaps adopt." - -"I don't want any war, guerrilla fashion or otherwise," I said warmly. -"I've seen quite enough of it already." - -"And so have I," said my Cuban chum. - -Of course he was greatly interested to learn that his father was on the -way to place his mother and sisters in the old convent on the river. -He said that he had seen the place several years before. - -"It is a tumbled-down institution, and Father Anuncio lives there--a -very old and a very pious man who is both a priest and a doctor. I -shouldn't wonder if the old building has been fitted up as a sort of -fort. You see, the Spaniards couldn't get any cannon to it very well, -to batter it down, and if they didn't have any cannon the Cubans could -hold it against them with ease." - -"Unless they undermined it," I said. - -"Our people would be too sharp for that," laughed my Cuban chum. "They -are in this fight to win." - -Jorge now advised us to quit talking, that our enemies might not detect -us, and we lay down to rest as previously mentioned. I was utterly worn -out, and it did not take me long to reach the land of dreams, and my -companions quickly followed suit. - -In the morning our guide's heel was rather sore, yet with true pluck he -announced his readiness to go on. A rather slim and hasty breakfast was -had, and we set off on a course which Jorge announced must bring us to -the river by noon. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. - -A TREACHEROUS STREAM TO CROSS. - - -I must mention that now that we had gained the high ground of the -mountains the air was much cooler and clearer than it was in the -valleys, and, consequently, traveling was less fatiguing. - -Jorge went ahead, limping rather painfully at times, but never uttering -a word of complaint. Next to him came Alano, while I brought up in the -rear. It is needless to state that all of us had our eyes and ears wide -open for a sight or sound of friend or enemy. - -The road was a hard one for the most part, although here and there -would be found a hollow in which the mud was from a few inches to -several feet deep. Jorge always warned us of these spots, but on -several occasions I stepped into the innocent-looking mud only to find -that it was all I could do to get clear of the dark, glue-like paste. - -It was but eleven o'clock when we came in sight of the river, which at -this point was from thirty to forty feet wide. Looking up and down the -water-course, we saw that it wound its way in and out among the hills -in serpentine fashion. The bottom was mostly of rough stones, and the -stream was barely three to four feet deep. - -"How will we get over?--by swimming?" I questioned, as we came to a -halt on a bank that was twenty feet above the current. - -"Find good place by de rocks," said Jorge. "Must be careful. Water -werry swift." - -I could see that he was right by the way the water dashed against the -rocks. Our guide led the way along the bank for a distance of several -hundred feet and began to climb down by the aid of the brush and roots. - -"That doesn't look pleasant," remarked Alano, as he hesitated. "Just -look at that stream!" - -Picking up a dry bit of wood he threw it into the water. In a few -seconds it was hurried along out of our sight. - -Nevertheless, we followed Jorge down to the water's edge. Before us was -a series of rocks, which, had the stream been a bit lower, would have -afforded an excellent fording-place. - -"De river higher dan I think," said our guide. "You take off boots, -hey?" - -"That we will," I answered, and soon had my boots slung around my neck. -Alano followed my example, and with extreme caution we waded down and -out to the first rock. - -"Any alligators?" I cried, coming to a pause. - -"No 'gators here," answered Jorge. "Water too swift--'gators no like -dat." - -This was comforting news, and on I went again, until I was up to my -knees. The water felt very refreshing, and I proposed to Alano that we -take advantage of our situation and have a bath. - -"I feel tremendously dirty, and it will brace us up. We needn't lose -more than ten minutes." - -My Cuban chum was willing, and we decided to take our bath from the -opposite shore. Jorge declined to go swimming and said he would try his -luck at fishing, declaring that the river held some excellent specimens -of the finny tribe. - -We had now reached the middle of the stream. I was two yards behind -Alano, while Jorge was some distance ahead. We were crossing in a -diagonal fashion, as the fording rocks ran in that direction. - -Suddenly Alano muttered an exclamation in Spanish. "It's mighty swift -out here!" he cried. "Look out, Mark, or----" - -He did not finish. I saw him slip and go down, and the next instant his -body was rolling over and over as it was being carried along by the -rushing current. - -"Jorge, Alano is gone!" I yelled, and took a hasty step to catch hold -of my chum's coat. The movement was a fatal one for me, and down I -went precisely as Alano had done. The water entered my eyes and mouth, -and for the moment I was blinded and bewildered. I felt my feet touch -bottom, but in the deeper water to obtain a footing was out of the -question. - -When my head came up I found myself at Alano's side. I saw he had a -slight cut on the forehead and was completely dazed. I caught him by -the arm until he opened his eyes and instinctively struck out. - -"We're lost, Mark!" he spluttered. - -"Not yet," I returned. "Strike out for the shore." - -With all the strength at our command we struck out. To make any headway -against that boiling current was well-nigh impossible, and on and on -we went, until I was almost exhausted. Alano was about to sink when he -gave a cry. - -"The bottom!" he announced, and I put down both feet, to find the -stream less than three feet deep. With our feet down, we were now able -to turn shoreward; and five minutes later Jorge had us both by the -hands and was helping us out. - -"Well, we wanted a bath and we got it," were Alano's first words. "Have -you had enough, Mark?" - -"More than sufficient," I replied, with a shudder. "Ugh, but that is a -treacherous stream, and no mistake!" - -"You lucky boys," said Jorge. "Horse get in and roll over, he lose his -life." - -We stopped long enough to wring out our clothing and put on our boots, -and then followed our guide again. Half an hour later we reached a -sheltered spot and here took dinner. By the time the repast was ended -our light summer suits were almost dried. Luckily, through it all each -of us had retained his hat. - -"We haven't had the fish Jorge promised us," said Alano, as we were -preparing to resume our journey. "A bit of something baked wouldn't go -bad." - -"Fish to-night," said the guide. - -"Have you a line and hook, Jorge?" I asked. - -"Yes, always carry him," he answered; and, upon further questioning, I -learned that to carry a fishing outfit was as common among the rebels -as to carry a pistol or the ever-ready machete. They had to supply -themselves with food, and it was often easier and safer to fish in the -mountain streams than to shoot game or cattle. - -We made a camp that night under the shelter of a clump of grenadillo -trees; and, as Jorge had promised, he tried his luck at fishing in a -little pool under some rocks. He remained at his lines, two in number, -for nearly an hour, and in that time caught four fish--three of an -eel-like nature and a perch. These were cooked for supper, and tasted -delicious. - -"When will we reach the old convent?" I asked, as we were about to turn -in. - -"Reach him by to-morrow afternoon maybe, if no storm come," said Jorge. - -"Do you think there will be a storm?" - -The guide shrugged his shoulders. - -"Maybe--time for storm now." - -The fire had been put out as soon as the fish were baked, that it -might not attract the attention of any Spaniards who might be in the -neighborhood. At eight o'clock we turned in, making our beds on a -number of cedar boughs, which were easy to obtain in this mountainous -locality. We had no coverings but our coats, but found these sufficient -under the shelter of the grenadillos. - -How long I slept I did not know. I awoke with a start and raised up. -All was silent. I gazed around in the gloom, and saw that Alano and our -guide slumbered soundly. - -"I must have been dreaming," I muttered to myself, when a rustle in -the brush behind me caused me to leap to my feet. There was another -rustle, and then came what I imagined was a half-subdued growl of rage. - -Fearful that we were on the point of being attacked by some wild -animal, I bent over my companions and shook them. - -"Wake up! Wake up!" I cried. "There are wild beasts about! Quick, and -get your pistols ready!" - -And then I looked toward the bushes again, to see an ugly, hairy head -thrust forward and a pair of glaring eyes fastened full upon me! - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. - -ALONE. - - -"What is it?" cried Alano, as he scrambled to his feet. - -"I don't know!" I yelled. "Look! look!" - -As I spoke I pulled out my pistol. By this time Jorge was also aroused. - -"_Que ha dicho V.?_ [What did you say?]" he demanded, leaping up and -catching at his machete. - -"An animal--a bear, or something!" I went on. "There he is!" - -I raised my pistol, and at the same time our guide looked as I had -directed. I was about to pull the trigger of my weapon when he stopped -me. - -"No shoot! _Puerco!_" he cried, and gave a laugh. Leaping forward, he -made after the animal, which turned to run away. But Jorge was too -quick for him. Presently there was a grunt and a prolonged squeal, and -then I understood what my wild beast was--nothing but a wild pig! In -a couple of minutes Jorge came back to camp dragging the tough little -porker by the hind legs. He had killed the animal in true butcher's -style. - -"We have pork to-morrow," he grinned, for Cuban negroes are as fond of -pig meat as their Northern brothers. Taking a short rope from one of -his pockets, he attached it to the pig's hind legs and hung the body up -on a convenient tree branch. - -The incident had upset my nerves, and for the balance of the night I -slept only by fits and starts, and I was glad when dawn came and the -rising sun began to gild the tops of the surrounding hills. The sight -was a beautiful one, and I gazed at it for some time, while Jorge -prepared some pork chops over a tiny fire he had kindled. - -"We carry what pork we can," he said. "No use to leave it behind. -Father Anuncio very glad to get pig, so sweet!" and once again Jorge -grinned. After breakfast the guide cut up the balance of the animal, -wrapped the parts in wet palm leaves, and gave us each our share to -carry. - -Our involuntary bath had done me good, and I stepped out feeling -brighter and better than I had for several days. I was becoming -acclimated, and I was glad of it, for had I been taken down with a -fever I do not know what I would have done. - -Alano was as eager as myself to reach the old convent on the river, -and we kept close upon Jorge's heels as our guide strode off down the -mountain side toward a forest of sapodillas and plantains. - -"I trust we find everybody safe and sound," I remarked. "The fact that -your father thought it best to conduct your mother and sisters to the -convent would seem to indicate he was disturbed about their safety." - -"I am hoping he did it only to be clear to join the rebel army," -replied Alano. "I hope both your father and mine are in the ranks, and -that we are allowed to join too." - -I did not wish to discourage my Cuban chum on this point, yet I had my -own ideas on the subject. I was not anxious to join any army, at least -not while both sides to the controversy were conducting the contest in -this guerrilla-like fashion. I was quite sure, from what I had heard -from various sources, that up to that date no regular battle had been -fought in the eastern portion of Cuba, although the western branch -of the rebel army, under General Gomez, was doing much regular and -effective work. - -The reasons for this were twofold. In the first place, General Gomez' -forces were composed mainly of white men, while a large portion of the -soldiers under General Garcia were black. Nearly all of the Americans -who came to Cuba to fight for Cuban liberty, came by way of Havana or -Jibacoa and joined General Gomez, and these fellows brought with them a -large stock of arms and ammunition. It was said that there were three -armed men in the West to every man who had even a pistol in the East. -Many of the negroes were armed only with their machetes, which they -tied to their wrists with rawhides, that they might not lose this sole -weapon while on the march or in a skirmish. To shoot off a cartridge in -a pistol without doing some effective work with it was considered under -General Garcia and his brother officers almost a crime. - -The guerrilla warfare in the mountains I felt could be kept up for -a long time, perhaps indefinitely. The Spanish troops had sought to -surround General Garcia a dozen times, only to discover, when too late, -that he and his men had left the vicinity. The Cuban forces moved -almost always at night, and often detachments of soldiers were sent off -on swift horses to build false campfires dozens of miles away from the -real resting-place of the army. - -In the valley we crossed through a large coffee plantation. In the -center was a low, square house with several outbuildings. The house was -closed tightly, and so were the other buildings, yet as we drew close -I fancied I heard sounds from within. - -I notified Jorge, and a halt ensued. Hardly had we stopped than the -door of the house flew open and out rushed half a dozen well-dressed -Spanish soldiers. - -"_Halte!_" came the command, but instead of halting we turned and -fled--I in one direction, and Alano and our guide in another. Bang! -bang! went a couple of guns, and I heard the bullets clipping through -the trees. Surprised and alarmed, I kept on, past a field of coffee -and into a belt of palms. Several of the soldiers came after me, and I -heard them shouting to me to stop and promising all sorts of punishment -if I did not heed their command. - -But I did not intend to stop, and only ran the faster, past the palms -and into a mass of brushwood growing to a height of ten or twelve feet. -At first the bushes were several feet apart, and I went on with ease; -but soon the growth was more dense, and numerous vines barred the way; -and at last I sank down in a hollow, unable to go another step, and -thoroughly winded. - -I remained in the hollow at least half an hour, trying to get back my -breath and listening intently to the movements of my pursuers. The -soldiers passed within fifty feet of me, but that was as close as they -got, and presently they went off; and that was the last I heard of -them. - -In the excitement of the chase I had dropped my pig meat, and now I -discovered that nearly all of my other traps were gone, including my -pistol, which had left my hand during a nasty trip-up over a hidden -tree root. The trip-up had given me a big bump on the temple and nearly -knocked me unconscious. - -Crawling around, I found a pool of water, in which I bathed my -forehead, and then I set about finding out what had become of Alano and -Jorge. I moved with extreme caution, having no desire to be surprised -by the enemy, who might be lying in ambush for me. - -Moving onward in the brush I soon discovered was no light undertaking, -and it was fully an hour before I found my way out to where the vines -grew less profusely. The spot where I emerged was not the same as -that at which I had entered the undergrowth, and on gazing around I -was dismayed to find that the whole topography of the country looked -different. - -I was lost! - -The thought rushed upon me all in an instant, and I half groaned -aloud as I realized my situation. I must be all of a mile from the -plantation, and where my friends were I had not the remotest idea. - -The sun beat down hotly in the valley, and it was not long before I was -both dry and hungry. I searched around for another pool, but could not -find any, and had to content myself with the taste of a wild orange, -far from palatable. - -Noon came and went and found me still tramping around the valley -looking for Alano and Jorge. In my passage through the bushes my -already ragged clothing was torn still more, until I felt certain that -any half-decent scarecrow could discount me greatly in appearance. - -At four o'clock, utterly worn out, I threw myself on the ground in a -little clearing and gave myself up to my bitter reflections. I felt -that I was hopelessly lost. Moreover, I was tremendously hungry, with -nothing in sight with which to satisfy the cravings of my appetite. -Night, too, was approaching. What was to be done? - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. - -THE CAVE IN THE MOUNTAIN. - - -I lay in the clearing in the valley for all of half an hour. Then, -somewhat rested, I arose, unable to endure the thought that night would -find me in the wilds alone and unarmed. - -I could well remember how the sun had stood when I had separated from -my companions, and now, using the sun as a guide, I endeavored once -more to trace my steps to the path leading down to the river. Once the -stream was gained, I resolved to search up and down its banks until the -old convent was sighted. - -My course led me up the side of a small mountain, which I climbed with -great difficulty, on account of the loose stones and dirt, which more -than once caused my ankle to give a dangerous twist. A sprained ankle -would have capped the climax of my misfortunes. - -Just as the sun was beginning to set behind the peaks to the westward -of me, I reached a little plateau which divided a ridge from the -mountain proper. Here I rested for a few minutes and obtained a -refreshing drink at a spring under some rocks. Then I went on, in some -manner satisfied that I was on the right path at last. - -But, alas! hardly had I taken a score of steps than I stepped on a bit -of ground which appeared solid enough, but which proved to be nothing -but a mass of dead brushwood lying over a veritable chasm. The whole -mass gave way, and with a lurch I was hurled forward into black space. - -As I went down I put out my hands to save myself. But, though I caught -hold of several roots and bits of rocks, this did not avail; and I did -not stop descending until I struck a stone flooring twenty feet below -the top of the opening. Fortunately the floor was covered with a large -mass of half-decayed brush, otherwise the fall must have been a serious -if not a fatal one. - -As I went down, on hands and knees, a lot of loose branches, dirt, and -small stones rolled on top of me, and for the minute I had a vision of -being buried alive. But the downfall soon ceased; and, finding no bones -broken, I crawled from under the load and surveyed the situation. - -I felt that I was now worse off than ever. The well-hole--I can call -it nothing else--was about ten feet in diameter, and the walls were -almost smooth. The top of the opening was far out of my reach, and, as -for a means of escape, there seemed to be none. - -However, I was not to be daunted thus easily, and, striking a match -and lighting a cedar branch, I set about looking for some spot where I -might climb up. But the spot did not present itself. - -But something else did, and that was an opening leading directly into -the mountain. On pulling at a projecting rock, I felt it quiver, -and had just time to leap back, when it fell at my feet. Behind the -rock was a pitch-black hole, into which I thrust the lighted branch -curiously. There was a cave beyond--how large was yet to be discovered. - -I had no desire to explore any cave at that moment, my one idea being -to get out of the well-hole and proceed on my way. But getting out of -the hole was impossible, and I was forced to remain where I was, much -to my disgust and alarm. - -Jorge had been right about the coming storm. At an hour after sunset -I heard the distant rumble of thunder, and soon a lively breeze blew -through the trees and brush on the mountain side. A few flashes of -lightning followed, and then came a heavy downpour of rain. - -Not wishing to be soaked, I retreated to the cave I had discovered, -although with caution, for I had no desire to take another tumble into -a deeper hole. But the floor of the cavern appeared to be quite level, -and with rising curiosity I took up my lighted cedar branch, whirled it -around to make it blaze up, and started on a tour of investigation and -discovery. - -That I should not miss my way back, I lit a pile of small brush at the -mouth of the opening. Then I advanced down a stony corridor, irregular -in shape, but about fifty feet wide by half as high. - -The opening appeared to be a split in the mountain, perhaps made ages -before by volcanic action. I felt certain there was an opening above, -for in several spots the rain came down, forming small pools and -streams of water. - -Suddenly the idea struck me to watch which way the water ran, and I did -so and learned that its course was in the very direction I was walking. -Moreover the tiny streams merged one into another, until, several -hundred feet further on, they formed quite a water course. - -"If only this stream flows into the main river!" I thought, and on -the spur of the moment resolved to follow it as far as I was able, -satisfied that if it led to nowhere in particular I could retrace my -steps to its source. - -I now found the cave growing narrower, and presently it grew less than -a dozen feet in width, and the stream covered the entire bottom to the -depth of several inches. Throwing my boots over my shoulders, I began -wading, feeling sure of one step ere I trusted myself to take another. - -It took me fully ten minutes to proceed a hundred feet in this fashion. -The stream was now not over six feet wide and all of a foot deep. - -Making sure that my torch was in no danger of going out, I continued -to advance, but now more slowly than ever, for in the distance I could -hear the water as it fell over a number of rocks. There was a bend -ahead; and this passed, I fervently hoped to emerge into the open air, -on the opposite side of the mountain and close to the bank of the river -for which I was seeking. - -At the bend the water deepened to my knees, and I paused to roll up my -trousers, in the meantime resting the torch against the wall, which -afforded a convenient slope for that purpose. - -I had just finished arranging my trouser-legs to my satisfaction, when -a rumble of thunder, echoing and re-echoing throughout the cavern, made -me jump. My movement caused the cedar branch to roll from the rocks, -and it slipped with a hiss into the stream. I made a frantic clutch for -it, and, in my eagerness to save it from going out or getting too wet, -I fell on it in the very middle of the stream. - -With a splutter I arose to find myself in utter darkness. Moreover, -the cedar branch was thoroughly soaked, and it would take a good many -matches to light it again. And what was still worse, every match my -pocket contained was soaked as badly as the torch. - -I must confess that I was utterly downcast over my mishap, and if there -had been any dry ground handy I would have thrown myself down upon it -in abject despair. But there was only water around, and, disconsolate -as I was, I felt I must either go forward or backward. - -How I became turned about I do not know, but certain it is that, in -essaying to return to the spot from whence I had come, I continued on -down the stream. I did not notice the mistake I had made until fifty -yards had been passed and I brought up against an overhanging rock with -my shoulder. Putting up my hands, I was dismayed to discover that the -passage-way was just high enough to clear my head. - -Realizing that I must be walking into a trap, I endeavored to turn -about, when I slipped and went down again. Before I could gain my -footing I was swept around a bend and into a much broader stream. All -was as dark as before, and I soon learned that the bottom of the new -water-course was beyond my reach. Putting my hand up, I learned that -the rocky ceiling was not over two feet above the surface of the water, -and the distance between the two was gradually but surely growing less! - - - - -CHAPTER XX. - -SEÑOR GUEREZ. - - -I was horrified over the discovery that I had made. Here I was, in -absolute darkness, hemmed in by water and rocky walls, and drifting -rapidly I knew not whither. - -In my terror I cried aloud, but only echo answered me--a peculiar echo -which made me shiver from head to foot. - -On and on, and still on, was I dashed by the underground current, -which seemed to grow more powerful as I advanced, until my head grazed -repeatedly against the wall over me, and I felt like giving myself up -for lost. Oh, how bitterly I regretted the curiosity which had led me -to explore the cavern in which chance had so strangely placed me! - -But now what was this--a light? At first I could scarcely believe the -evidence of my senses. There was a bright flash--then total blackness -again. - -What could it mean? Perhaps I was dreaming--or the fearful situation -had turned my brain. Then came a second flash and a revelation. - -It was the lightning from without, shining through some opening into -the waters under and around me! I was nearing the outer world. Oh, for -a breath of fresh air again! - -Even as the thought crossed my mind, my head struck the rocky ceiling -again, and under I went, to find that I could not come up, the water -now rising to the very rocks. But a stronger light could be seen, and -I dove along, came up once, twice--and then emerged into the open air -with a splutter and a gasp, on the verge of exhaustion. - -The underground stream emerged at the very base of the mountain, and -on both sides were level stretches of swamps, covered with rushes and -other tropical growths. Swimming for the nearest bank, I drew myself up -and fell on my breast, too worn out to stand. - -It did not matter to me just then that it was night, that I was alone, -and that it was raining in torrents. I was safe from drowning--that was -my one thought, and never was a thought sweeter to a boy. - -For fully fifteen minutes I remained on the bank of the stream. Then, -having recovered somewhat from the effects of my awful experience, I -arose and took as good a view of my situation as was possible. I waited -for a strong flash of lightning, and by this saw that my former wish -had been realized and that I was within a few hundred feet of the river -upon which the convent was said to be located. - -While the storm and the night lasted there was nothing to do but to -seek shelter wherever it might be found; and, as the lightning now -appeared to die away, I walked to the very mountain side, and found -shelter under an overhanging rock, flanked by several tall trees. -Here I wrung what water I could from my clothing and made myself as -comfortable as my miserable condition permitted. - -Never was a person more glad to see the sun than I. Old Sol came up -clear and strong, and my clothing quickly dried upon my body as I -walked along. - -Passing around the swamps, which were full of monstrous toads and -numerous lizards, I reached the bank of the larger stream and started -to hunt for the convent for which Alano, Jorge, and myself had been -bound. As I hurried on, as rapidly as the formation of the ground -permitted, I could not help but wonder what had become of my chum -and our negro guide. Had they escaped, to roam around looking for -me, or had they fallen into the hands of the Spaniards at the coffee -plantation? - -Having had no breakfast, it was not long before I began to feel hungry. -To satisfy the cravings of my appetite I picked several almost ripe -plantains, which, however, proved rather poor eating. I also spent some -time in a hunt for berries, but none were to be found. - -By noon I calculated I had covered four or five miles, and reached a -narrow woods, growing on both sides of the river. Beyond the woods was -a village, a decidedly poor-looking settlement composed of a score of -rude dwellings built of logs and thatched with palm leaves to keep out -the rain. - -I did not know whether to enter the village or not, and remained in the -woods for some time, watching the inhabitants, consisting of a score of -men and women and perhaps fifty children of all ages. The children were -dirty, and wore hardly any clothing, but they seemed to be as happy as -though such a thing as war had never been mentioned. Most of the men -were at work curing some wild-hog meat, while the women were engaged in -braiding mats and other articles for sale or exchange. - -At last three of the children, running close to the woods, espied me, -and set up a shout of wonder and alarm, at which the men stopped work -and came rushing forward with their clubs and machetes. Seeing there -was no help for it, I stepped out into the open, and was immediately -surrounded. - -Not a soul in the settlement, which went by the name of Jiawacadoruo, -could speak a word of English, and for the time being I was partly at a -loss to make them understand that I came as a friend who meant no harm. -At the word "_Americano_" they grinned, and one of them queried "_Cuba -libre?_ [For Cuban liberty?]" and I nodded. Then I pointed to my mouth -and stomach to signify that I was hungry. - -At once half a dozen of the women rushed off, and soon I was presented -with several bowls of broth, made of chicken meat and vegetables, -strongly flavored with the inevitable garlic, and a pot of strong black -coffee. There was also a dish of boiled arrowroot, made from the native -maranta, and this tasted best of all to me. - -While I was eating I tried, by every means in my power, to make these -Cubans understand that I wanted to find the old convent, but failed -utterly. Finally an idea struck me, and I essayed to carry it out. -Tearing a page from a blank book in my pocket, I drew upon it a rough -representation of a river and pointed to the stream, at which the men -gathered around nodded that they understood. - -Next I drew the picture of a boy at one end of the river, and pointed -to myself. I am not by any means an artist; but we had had drawing -lessons at Broxville Academy, and I managed to represent the boy as -walking rapidly, as if in a great hurry to get to where he was going. -This caused the men to laugh heartily. - -The next thing to do was to draw the old convent. Never having heard -the structure described, I had to draw entirely upon my imagination, -and my knowledge of convent architecture was decidedly limited. Yet -I managed to draw a fairly good representation of a ruined stone -building, with a cross at the top, and before it put a priest, to whom, -by an inspiration, I suddenly pointed and cried "Father Anuncio." - -A dozen exclamations followed, and the men nodded to show that they now -knew what was wanted. A parley followed, and one tall negro stepped -forth and motioned that he was ready to be my guide by pointing first -to me and then to my picture of the old convent. - -Luckily I still retained a few silver pieces in my pocket, and before -leaving I left two of these behind, to be divided among the crowd of -negroes, for let me say in passing that all of the inhabitants of -Jiawacadoruo are people of color. With my newly made guide I started up -the river, and the settlement was soon lost to sight. - -I wondered how long it would take to reach the old convent, and tried -to put the question to Bumbo, as I made his name out to be, but -without success. Instead of answering with his fingers or by pointing -to the sun, he merely grinned and walked faster, until it was all I -could do to keep up with him. - -It was almost sundown when we passed a bend in the stream and mounted -a bluff overlooking a wide expanse of swamp land. The topmost point of -the bluff reached, the guide pointed ahead, and there, almost at our -feet, I saw the massive outlines of what long years before had been -an imposing Spanish convent, planted in that out-of-the-way spot for -certain noble families who had left Spain under a cloud during the wars -of the seventeenth century. - -As we approached the building, which was now little more than a mass -of ruins, I saw several men standing just outside of the inclosed -courtyard. One was a priest, and two others were in the uniform of -officers in the Cuban army. One of the latter I recognized as Señor -Guerez, having met the gentleman once while he was on a business visit -to the United States. - -"Señor Guerez!" I called out, as I ran to him; and he turned in -amazement. - -"Mark Carter!" he ejaculated, with a strong Spanish accent. "I am much -astonished." - -"Is my father with you?" I demanded eagerly, as I looked around. - -"No, my boy; I am sorry to say it." - -"And where is he?" I went on, my heart rising to my throat, as I saw a -look of anxiety cross the gentleman's bronzed features. - -"Your father was made a prisoner by the Spanish authorities two days -ago," replied the señor, and the answer all but prostrated me. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI. - -THE ATTACK ON THE OLD CONVENT. - - -"My father a prisoner!" I gasped out, when I could speak. - -"Yes, Mark." - -"And how was he captured? and why?" - -"It is rather a long story. But tell me, where is Alano?" And now it -was Señor Guerez' turn to become anxious. - -In a few words I explained matters, to which the planter listened with -close attention. His brow darkened when I mentioned the Spaniards up at -the coffee plantation. - -"I know them," he said. "We are expecting an attack from them every -day." - -"An attack at this place?" - -"Yes." He turned to his companions, and introduced me to Father Anuncio -and to Lieutenant Porlando, both of whom shook hands warmly when they -were informed who I was. "You see, many of the planters have brought -their families here," Señor Guerez went on, "and the Spanish think to -subdue us if they can make our wives and daughters prisoners. But that -shall never be while we have strength to fight." - -"Tell me of my father," I said impatiently. - -"Come inside, my boy," said Alano's father; and giving Bumbo a bit of -silver I sent him off, and followed the others into the courtyard, -in the rear of which was the convent building proper, although wings -extended out upon both sides. - -In a shady corner I was introduced to La Señora Guerez and to Alano's -two sisters, Inez and Paula, two girls of ten and twelve, now quite as -dark as their father and mother, and very beautiful, with their black -wavy hair and sparkling eyes full of good humor and merriment. Mother -and daughters could speak a little English, and for Alano's sake they -fairly made me feel like one of the family. - -I was impatient to hear about my father; and as soon as the señor had -told the others of what I had said concerning Alano, Señor Guerez told -me his story. - -"As soon as we felt that the war was going to be severe and probably of -long duration," said he, "your father and I telegraphed to Dr. Walford -to keep you at Broxville Academy until you heard from us by letter. Two -days later came a return message stating that you had already gone to -New York and taken steamer for Cuba. The worthy doctor could not tell -by what route you had gone. - -"This being the case, your father and I concluded to let you come on, -and I dispatched Pedro, one of my faithful servants, to meet you at -Santiago de Cuba and conduct you in safety to the plantation, where -your father was still down with his broken leg, which was, however, -mending rapidly. - -"Several days went by, and matters became very troublesome about my -plantation. Some of the men had joined the Cuban forces under Brigadier -General José Maceo, a brother to the late Antonio Maceo, and my -neighbors begged me to join also and become captain of a company of -white Cubans--they not caring to serve under Maceo or Garcia and also -not caring to go as far west as where the forces under General Gomez -were located. - -"While I was deliberating, a body of Spanish guerrillas came along -and burned down two of my largest storehouses and threatened my wife -with violence. This angered me, and I got my gun and shot two of the -rascals--one in the leg and the other in the shoulder. A battle royal -ensued between my workmen and the guerrillas, and the guerrillas -received the worst of the encounter and were forced to retreat, with -three men wounded and one man dead. - -"This settled the matter, and I joined the Cuban forces under Garcia -without delay. Your father also took part in the battle and saved my -wife from great indignities. When I called my white men together, and -my white neighbors, they speedily formed a company of volunteers, and I -was chosen the captain, with Lieutenant Porlando for my first officer -and your father for second lieutenant. We were all supplied with good -horses and first-class weapons, and the very next day after effecting -our organization defeated a body of the Spanish troops and drove them -ten miles up the road and away from the mountains which General Garcia -is using as a stronghold. - -"As it was perilous in the extreme to leave the women-folks home alone -while the men were away, it was decided by me and my neighbors to bring -them all here and leave them with Father Anuncio and a strong guard. It -was believed that no one would dare molest any woman while sheltered by -this old convent. There are within the walls over a dozen ladies and -nearly thirty children, besides a company of picked men and six men who -were wounded at one time or another." - -"But my father?" I put in, as the señor paused. - -"I am coming to that, Mark. It was two days ago that our company was -in the vicinity of Guantanamo. I had received valuable information -concerning the contemplated movements of the Spanish troops, and this -information I wished to place in the hands of General Garcia and his -staff. Your father offered to find a certain captain, while another of -the company rode off to find the general. - -"Your father was accompanied by a private named Hawley, an American -who settled near me several years ago. The pair were gone about six -hours when Hawley came riding back to our camp, severely wounded in -the thigh. He said they had met a company of Spanish soldiers, who -had discovered them ere they were aware. Your father had been taken a -prisoner, while Hawley had had a hard time of it to escape." - -"And have you heard of him since then?" I asked anxiously. - -"I heard from him yesterday. Some of our soldiers, while tramping -through the woods, came across a Spaniard who was severely wounded. -They treated him as well as he could possibly expect, dressed his -wounds, and gave him a supply of water and bread and meat; and in -return he told them about their prisoner, your father. He said your -father was to be sent on to the authorities at Santiago as an American -spy." - -"A spy!" - -"Yes, my boy, a spy. It is, of course, a foolish charge, but I am -afraid it may cause your father a good deal of trouble." - -"Why, they place spies in dungeons and often shoot them, Señor Guerez!" - -"Let us hope for the best, Mark," he returned soothingly. - -"Would they dare shoot an American citizen?" - -"Unfortunately your father was caught wearing a Cuban uniform and with -our flag pinned to his hat--as I have it." - -I bowed my head, and something like tears started to my eyes. This news -was awful. Supposing my father was shot as a spy? I would be left alone -in the world. Overcome by my emotions, I felt compelled to turn away, -when Señor Guerez placed a kindly hand on my shoulder. - -"Don't be too downcast, my boy. It may not go so badly with your -parent, and I will do all I can for both of you. As soon as I can -arrange certain matters with the men who are in charge here, I will -follow up those who have your father in charge and see if he cannot be -rescued." - -"Oh, will you do that?" I cried, catching his hand. "You are more than -kind, Señor Guerez!" - -We were about to continue the conversation, when the lieutenant to -whom I had been introduced came rushing up all out of breath. He had -been walking down by the river, field-glass in hand, and had made an -important discovery, which he imparted to the others in Spanish. - -It was to the effect that a large body of Spanish soldiers were riding -through the woods, back of the river, and it looked as if they were -bound for the old convent. They were heavily armed, and on the back of -a mule could be seen a small cannon. - -"As I expected," muttered Señor Guerez. "I'll take a look at them." - -He ran up to the roof of the convent, glass in hand, and, nobody -stopping me, I followed him. A long, searching look and he dashed down -the glass, hurried below, and issued a dozen rapid orders. - -Men flew in all directions, some to get their guns and pistols, and -others to shut the gates leading to the courtyard and to place square -bits of blocks into the deep windows. - -I tried to get an explanation from somebody, but all were too busy. -Señor Guerez was the only one who gave me a hint of what was wrong. - -"'Tis a body of Spanish soldiers led by a priest who is a rival to -Father Anuncio. He wishes to get the good father to give up this old -convent, which means that we must vacate too. It is a ruse of the -enemy." - -No more was said. Quarter of an hour later a white flag was waved and -a man came up to the old convent gates. A short talk ensued between -him, Señor Guerez, Father Anuncio, and several others, and then the man -withdrew. - -Hardly had he gone than all of us heard the cracks of a dozen or more -guns, and as many bullets flattened themselves on the convent walls. - -"They have opened the fight," remarked Señor Guerez grimly, while -several of the women and children shrieked. "Now we will show them what -we can do." - -He selected the best of his soldiers, and placed them at convenient -loopholes in the upper part of the old building. Weapons were ready for -use, and at a word of command the fire of the Spaniards was returned. - -A yell of surprise and rage went up, and there immediately followed -another volley of musketry from without. This was returned, and this -sort of thing lasted for quarter of an hour, when the enemy retired -behind the bluff I have previously mentioned. - -But they did not remain quiet long. Presently, looking through his -field-glass, Señor Guerez announced that they had succeeded in mounting -the cannon they had brought along. The weapon was duly loaded and -sighted, and we awaited with thrilling interest the effect of this -rather formidable weapon. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII. - -THE ROUTING OF THE ENEMY. - - -Boom! - -The Spanish gunners had fired the cannon perched on the bluff, its -muzzle pointed directly for the doors of the old convent. - -Hardly had we heard the report than there was a crash and the splinters -flew in every direction. The shot had struck the frame of the doors and -shattered it badly. - -A cry of rage went up from the Cubans, and, rushing to the loopholes -left in the blocked-up windows, they sought to pick off the gunners -with their carbines. But the Spaniards prudently kept out of sight, so -this movement was useless. - -"Two more shots like that, and the doors will come down," muttered -Señor Guerez, with a grave shake of his head. "I wish we had a cannon -to fire in return." - -A consultation was held, and all of the women and children were told to -retire to an inner room of the convent, where the damage done by the -cannon might not reach them. - -This had scarcely been accomplished when the Spaniards fired a second -shot. But their aim was poor, and the ball only plowed up the ground -fifty feet outside of the courtyard. - -Señor, or rather Captain, Guerez, as I should now call him, collected -his men together, and a short but exciting debate took place, only a -few words of which were plain to me. Alano's father favored leaving the -convent by a rear passage-way leading to a woods and surprising the -enemy by coming up in their rear. - -Just as a third shot from the cannon struck the roof of the convent and -tore off a corner of the stonework, it was agreed upon to carry out -this project. Four men were left to exhibit themselves occasionally, so -that the Spaniards might think the soldiers still there, and Alano's -father asked me to remain with them. - -"I do not advise you to take part in the fighting," he said. "But if -you find it necessary to defend yourself, you'll find guns in plenty in -the dining-hall closet, with cartridges in one of the drawers." - -In less than ten minutes the company of soldiers, fifty-six strong, -were on their way, leaving the convent as silently as shadows. The -moment the last of them had taken to the passage-way, the entrance -was closed and bolted, and I found myself left behind with the women -and children and the four guards, none of whom could speak a word of -English. - -After firing the third shot the Spaniards paused, probably to hold -a council of war. To divert suspicion from the movements of Captain -Guerez and his men, the four guards and myself passed out in plain -sight of them several times. Of course we did not remain long, nor did -we show ourselves in the same place twice. Our appearance called forth -half a dozen shots from as many muskets, but we were too far off for -these to have any effect. One bullet did hit near where a guard had -shown himself, but its force was spent and it did no damage. - -Nearly half an hour had passed, when suddenly we heard a yell and a -wild shouting, and all of the Spaniards dashed into view, running -hither and thither as though panic-stricken. Captain Guerez had -surprised them completely, and they thought it was a re-enforcement -for the old convent and not the soldiers from that place themselves. -A hundred shots rang out, and, using a field-glass, I saw that the -Spaniards were completely demoralized. They formed into a hollow square -once, but this was speedily broken up, and then off they rode and ran, -helter-skelter, down the bluff and across the river, some fording and -some swimming, for their very lives. - -The engagement had lasted less than quarter of an hour when some of the -Cubans came riding toward the convent gates, bringing with them several -wounded men--some of their own party--and three of the Spaniards who -had been captured. - -Captain Guerez had, in the meantime, followed the Spanish leader across -the stream. The pursuit was kept up for nearly half an hour, at the end -of which time the Spaniards were driven so far off it was likely they -would not dare to return for a long while, if at all. - -When Alano's father came back it was found he had received a sword -thrust through the fleshy part of the leg. The wound was not a -dangerous one, but it was painful, and his wife and daughters did all -they could to ease his sufferings. - -"I am sorry for your sake, Mark, that I am wounded," he remarked, as he -rested upon a cot. "I will have to keep quiet for a few days, and thus -our quest after your father will have to be delayed." - -"You wouldn't dare to leave here just yet anyway, would you?" I asked, -much disappointed, yet feeling that it was no more than I could expect. - -"Hardly, my boy. I do not expect those Spaniards to return; we have -given them far more than they expected. They would not attack us -without re-enforcements, and there are no other Spanish troops within a -good many miles." - -Now that the old convent had been once attacked, it was decided to keep -a strict watch, day and night, upon the roof and through the grounds. -A detail of men was formed, instructions to keep a constant lookout -given, and then Captain Guerez passed over his command temporarily to -Lieutenant Porlando. - -The remainder of the day passed quietly enough, I occupying the time -in repairing my clothing, which needed many a stitch. In this work -the elder of Alano's sisters helped me, Señora Guerez keeping by her -husband's side and having the younger sister to assist her. - -I found Inez Guerez a most companionable girl. Her stock of English was -as limited as was my knowledge of Spanish, yet we managed to make each -other understand, laughing roundly over the mistakes we made. When I -mentioned Alano and told what great friends we were, tears stood in her -dark eyes, and she said she trusted he would soon reach the old convent -in safety. My father and she had also become great friends, and she -said she hoped he would escape from his Spanish captors ere they had a -chance to thrust him into a dungeon at Santiago. - -Having had no sleep the night before, I retired early, and was soon -in the land of dreams, despite the many misgivings I had concerning -my father's welfare. Fervently I prayed that he might escape from the -Spaniards who held him, and that we might speedily be reunited. - -When I awoke in the morning the sky was darkly overcast and it was -raining furiously. The downpour caused the river to rise, and the lower -end of the old convent was partly under water. - -A fair breakfast was had, consisting of coffee, bread, and some fried -plantains, which to me tasted particularly fine, and then I went to -Captain Guerez, to find him much improved and in good spirits. - -"We would not go off anyway in such a storm as this," he said, as he -sipped a bowl of coffee. "It will be fresh and cool after it is over, -and by that time I think I will be able to ride once more, and I think -my cousin will come to remain with my wife and girls." - -The downpour up to noon was terrific, then the sun came out strongly, -and the hills and valleys were covered with a heavy mist as the water -evaporated. By sundown it became cooler, and the roof of the old -convent proved a most delightful lounging place. - -We were all out there, watching the shadows as the sun set behind the -hills in the west, when one of the guards announced that two men were -approaching from a trail leading through the woods to the northwest. A -field-glass was at once procured, and Lieutenant Porlando took a long -look at them. - -"A black and a boy," he announced in Spanish, and I leaped forward and -begged for the use of the glass for a minute. My request was readily -granted, and I waited for the two newcomers to reappear among the trees. - -"They are Alano and Jorge!" I exclaimed a minute later. - -"Alano!" cried my chum's sisters. "Are you certain?" - -"Yes, it is Alano, and he carries his arm in a sling." - -And down we rushed in a body and asked to be let out of the courtyard. -Inez was the first to emerge into the open, and off she rushed at full -speed, to find herself a minute later in Alano's arms, with Paula close -behind. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII. - -ON THE TRAIL OF MY FATHER. - - -"Mark!" ejaculated my Cuban chum, when, on releasing himself from his -sisters' embraces, he espied me. "So you have reached here before me. I -am very glad to see it." - -"You are wounded?" I queried, as we shook hands. Had it not been for -the girls and Jorge we would have fairly hugged each other. "How did -that happen?" - -"It's quite a story. Are my father and mother safe?" - -"Yes, although your father, too, is wounded." - -"Those soldiers at the coffee plantation, then, did not manage to catch -you?" - -"No." - -"They caught me and Jorge, and we were their prisoners for five or six -hours. We would not have gotten away, only Jorge bribed one of the -servants at the plantation, another negro. He cut the cords with which -we were bound, and we got out of the cellar into which we were put at -night." - -"And that wound?" - -"I got that when they came after us, ten minutes later. They couldn't -see us and fired blindly, and I got a bullet across the forearm. But -it's a mere scratch," Alano added, as he saw Inez and Paula look -serious. - -He wanted to know all about my adventures, but there was no time to -tell of them just then, for the convent gates were soon reached and -here Alano's mother met him and, after a warm embrace, led him to his -father's side. It was a happy family gathering, and I thought it best -to withdraw for the time being. I walked again to the roof; and an hour -later Alano joined me there. - -His story was soon told. After escaping from the coffee plantation he -and Jorge had become lost like myself in the forest. They, however, -had not made their way to the mountain side, but had entered a valley -between that mountain and the next, and, coming to a branch of the -river, had floated down it until overtaken by the storm at night. - -The storm had driven them to shelter under some shelving rocks, and -here a temporary camp was made and Jorge went out on a search for food. -Little could be found, but in the morning the guide had brought down -several birds with a stick and these they had cooked and eaten with -keen relish. The way was then resumed, when, at noon, they had found -themselves on the wrong road and many miles out of their way. - -[Illustration: "THE SPANIARDS WERE COMPLETELY DEMORALIZED."] - -Jorge was much chagrined at his mistake and wanted Alano to kick him -for his thoughtlessness. The stream was left, and they took a cut -through the woods, which at last brought them to the old convent, as -described. - -When Alano had finished, I told him my story in all of its details, -especially my adventures in the mountain stream and on the underground -river. He listened in silent amazement. - -"It was a wonderful escape!" he cried, when I was through. "A wonderful -escape! I would like some day to explore that cave." - -"It was nothing but a big hole in the ground, and I never want to see -it again," I answered, with a shudder. "But now you are here, what do -you expect to do?" - -"If my father will permit me, I'll join you and him in the search for -your father," he answered. "But it may be that he will wish me to -remain here with my mother and my sisters." - -"Yes, somebody ought to remain with them, Alano." - -"My father is expecting Señor Noenti, a relative of mine. If he comes -he will look after my mother and sisters. He is a very brave and -powerful man." - -Alano and I slept together that night, just as we had often done at -Broxville Academy. It was a good deal to me to have my chum by me -again. We had missed each other more than mere words can tell. - -We had just finished breakfast the next day, and Captain Guerez was -trying to walk around a bit on his wounded leg, when several newcomers -were announced. Among them was Señor Noenti, who was warmly received by -the Guerez family. - -During the morning it was arranged that he should remain at the old -convent during Captain Guerez' absence, and by hard pleading Alano -obtained permission to join us in our hunt for my father. Jorge and -three other trusty men were to go along also. Alano's father pronounced -himself quite able to ride, and each of us was fitted out with a good -horse, a brace of pistols, and a quantity of ammunition sufficient -to last for several engagements. We also carried with us two days' -rations. When they were gone we would have to depend upon what we found -for our meals. But armed as we were, and in a country where everything -grew in profusion, it was not likely that such a small body would lack -for something to eat. Starvation was common in the regular Cuban army, -but only when the troops remained in one mountainous region for a long -while and ate up everything in sight. - -Captain Guerez had a well-formed idea concerning the highways and -trails the party having my father a prisoner would take; and, after -an affectionate farewell to his wife and daughters, he led our little -party up past the bluff the Spaniards had occupied and along a path -skirting the mountain which had caused me so much trouble. Our horses -were fresh, and we made good time until sunset, when we reached a small -village called Molino. Here there were a number of blacks and the -poorer class of whites. All, however, made us welcome, and here it was -decided to remain for the night. - -The principal man living in the place was a Spaniard named Curilos, -a fellow who years before had been a sailor. He was a comical fellow -in the extreme and a good singer, accompanying himself in singing on -a home-made guitar, a rough-looking instrument, but one very sweet in -tone. How a sailor had ever settled there was a mystery to me, but -there he was and apparently more than content. - -Curilos' home was of long tree branches, fastened together with tough -vines, which grow everywhere in profusion. The branches were twined and -intertwined and lashed to four corner-posts. The roof of this abode -was covered with dried palm leaves, and was quite water-proof. In one -corner was a rude fireplace of stone, and the smoke curled up through a -hole in a corner of the building. - -I slept in this structure on a hammock stretched from one corner-post -to another. It was as good a bed as one would desire had it not been -for one thing, as disgusting to me as it was annoying: the house was -overrun with vermin--a not uncommon thing, even in the dwellings of the -middle classes. - -It was hardly sunrise when Alano's father called us for breakfast, -after which we leaped into the saddle once more and rode off at a stiff -gait. The ride of the afternoon had left me a little sore, I not as yet -being used to such traveling, but I made up my mind not to complain, as -it would do no good and only worry Captain Guerez and my chum. Riding -never bothered Alano, as he had been used to the high, stiff Spanish -saddle from early boyhood. - -As we proceeded on our way we of course kept a strict lookout for -enemies, and on more than one occasion Alano's father called a halt, -while he rode ahead to make certain that the road was clear. - -"If we're not careful the Spaniards may surprise us and make us all -prisoners," he said grimly. "Although I hardly think any troops are -near us at present," he added a minute later. - -Having stopped for dinner in the middle of a dense woods, we rode out -in the afternoon on a broad plateau overlooking numerous valleys. Far -to the southward could be seen the buildings in Guantanamo. By the aid -of the field-glass Captain Guerez pointed out a portion of his immense -plantation. - -As this was the first sight I had had of Alano's home, I gazed at it -with interest. While I was looking, I saw a small column of smoke -curling upward from a broad stretch of canefields. I watched it for -several seconds, and then called Alano's attention to it. - -"There should be no smoke there," he said gravely, and called his -father, who had turned away for the moment to give Jorge some -directions. - -"What is it--smoke?" cried Captain Guerez, snatching the glass. "Let -me see if you are not mistaken." He gave a searching look and then a -groan. "You are right, boys, the Spaniards have kept their word. They -threatened to burn down my fields if I did not declare in their favor, -and now they are doing it. In a few hours the whole of my property will -be nothing more than a blackened waste!" - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV. - -IN THE BELT OF THE FIREBRANDS. - - -"Do you mean to say, father, that they will dare to burn down all of -our sugar-cane fields?" demanded Alano. - -"Dare, Alano? They will dare do anything, now they have heard that I -have thrown in my fortunes with the insurgents," replied Captain Guerez -bitterly. - -"What of your house and barns?" I put in soberly. - -"Most likely they will be ransacked first and then the torch will be -applied," answered Alano's father with increased bitterness. "Ah, well, -such are the fortunes of war. _Cuba libre!_" he muttered firmly. - -Alano's parent was first tempted to ride in the direction of his -plantation in the hope of saving something, but speedily gave up the -idea. There was no direct course hither, and the roundabout trail -which must be pursued would not bring him to Guantanamo until the next -morning. - -"And by that time the Spaniards will have done their dastardly work -and gone on," he remarked. - -Several times as we rode along the plateau, Captain Guerez stopped to -take a look through the field-glass, but he said nothing more excepting -in an undertone to his son. - -By sundown the plateau came to an end, and we plunged into a valley -which was for the most part divided into immense sugar plantations, -some of them half a mile or more in length. - -"This is something like that at home," remarked Alano to me, as we -moved on side by side. "That is, like it was," he hastened to add. - -"The fields will grow again, won't they?" I asked. - -"Oh, yes; but my father's loss will be very great." - -"I suppose so. Did he have much sugar on hand?" - -"The storehouses were full. You see, shipments have been at a -standstill for a year or more." - -"It will take a long while, after the war is over, to get back to -prosperity, I am afraid, Alano?" - -"It will take years, and perhaps prosperity will never come. General -Garcia is determined to fight to the bitter end, and so is General -Gomez, and so long as both remain among the mountains and forests it -will be impossible for the Spaniards to make them surrender. I heard -father say we could lead the Spanish troops a dance from one spot to -another for years, and in the meantime Spain will get no revenue from -Cuba, while the expense of keeping the war up will foot up to millions -of piasters--something that even Spain cannot stand." - -"I wish it was all over, and that we were all safe," I returned -shortly. "I've seen all the war I want." - -"And yet you haven't seen any regular battle," laughed my Cuban chum. -"I'm afraid you wouldn't make much of a fighter, Mark, if Uncle Sam got -into a muss." - -"Oh, that would be different!" I burst out. "I would fight for our -country every time." - -Alano laughed more loudly than ever. "That's just it--you would fight -for the United States just as we are now willing to fight for our -beloved Cuba." - -I had to smile, for I saw that he was right. Cuba was as much to him as -our United States was to me, and let me add that I am a Yankee lad to -the backbone, and always hope to be. - -Having passed the end of a large plantation, we came to several -storehouses, which were wide-open and empty, and here we pitched our -camp for the night. - -"How close are we to the spot where my father was taken?" I asked of -Alano's father after supper. - -"We have passed that locality," was the answer, which surprised me not -a little. "By to-morrow noon I hope to reach a village called Rodania, -where I will be able probably to learn something definite concerning -his whereabouts." - -This was certainly encouraging, and I went to bed with a lighter heart -than I had had since leaving the old convent. Hope in a youthful breast -is strong, and I could not but believe that so far all had gone well -with my parent. - -Fortunately, the storehouse in which I slept with Alano and Captain -Guerez was a clean affair, so we were not troubled as we had been at -Molino with vermin. We turned in at nine o'clock, and ten minutes -sufficed to render me forgetful of all of my surroundings. - -I awoke with a cough. I could not breathe very well, and sat up in the -darkness to learn what was the matter. The wind had banged shut the -storehouse door, and it was strangely hot within. - -"I'll open the door and let in some fresh air," I said to myself, and -arose from the bunch of straw upon which I had made my bed. - -As I moved across the storehouse floor I heard several of the horses -which were tethered outside let out snorts of alarm. Feeling something -was surely wrong, I called to Alano and his father. - -"What's the trouble?" cried Captain Guerez and Alano in a breath. - -"I don't know, but the horses are alarmed," I answered. - -By this time all were aroused by a shout from Jorge, who had been left -on guard. As we stepped into the open air, he came running up from a -path leading into the immense sugar-cane field back of the storehouse. - -"_Fuego! fuego!_ [Fire! fire!]" he shouted at the top of his powerful -lungs. - -"Where?" demanded Alano's father quickly. - -"In the fields! A band of Spanish guerrillas just came up and set fire -all around." - -"That cannot be, Jorge. This is the plantation of Señor Corozan, a -stanch supporter of Spain. They would not burn his fields." - -"Then they are rebels like ourselves." - -This last remark proved true, although we did not learn the fact until -some time later. It seemed Señor Corozan had left the plantation -immediately after refusing the demands of a Cuban officer for food for -his soldiers, and in consequence the rebel had dispatched a detachment -to burn up everything in sight. It was a wanton destruction of -property, but it could not very well be avoided, through the peculiar -conditions under which the war was being carried on. - -Just now, however, there was no time left to think of these matters. -A stiff breeze was blowing, and looking over the sugar-cane fields we -could see the fire leaping from place to place. Then, turning about, -we made another discovery. The very storehouse in which we had been -sleeping was on fire. The smoke from the smoldering straw was what had -caused me to cough and wake up. - -"To horse, everyone!" shouted Captain Guerez. "We had best get out of -here, for there is no telling how far this fire extends, or how the -wind may shift around!" - -Everyone understood what he meant--that we were in danger of being -caught in the midst of the conflagration; and everyone lost not an iota -of time in loosening his animal and saddling him. In less than three -minutes we were off, and riding down a narrow trail between the fields -with all the speed at our animals' command. - -As we passed along, the sky above us grew brighter, and we could hear -the crackling of the cane in the distance. Then I felt a live ember -drop upon my neck, which raised a small blister before I could brush it -off. - -"Jupiter! but this is getting hot!" I gasped, as I urged my horse on -beside that of Alano. "I wonder if there is any danger of that fire -catching us?" - -"I don't know, I'm sure," he panted. "The only thing we can do is to -ride for the hills, where the fire won't have such a chance." - -On and on we went, now in a bunch and then again scattered into two or -three groups. To gain the hills we had to cross a bit of a valley, and -here our poor horses sunk into the mud half up to their knees. - -Captain Guerez had been riding in the rear, but now he went ahead, to -shout a word of guidance to the men in advance. Alano dashed on with -his father, expecting me to follow. But my horse had become temporarily -stuck, and ere he could extricate himself I had to dismount. - -Once free again, I was on the point of leaping into the saddle as -before, when a turn of the wind brought a shower of burning embers in a -whirl over our very heads. I ducked and shook them off, letting go of -my steed for that purpose. - -It was a foolish movement, for the embers also struck the animal, who -instantly gave a snort and a bound and ran off. I made a clutch at his -tail as he passed, but missed it, and a second later I found myself -utterly alone, with the fire of the sugar-cane fields hemming me in on -all sides! - - - - -CHAPTER XXV. - -ESCAPING THE FLAMES. - - -My situation was truly an appalling one. Here I was, with the fierce -fire from the sugar-cane fields swirling about me, my horse and -companions gone, left utterly alone, with the horrifying thought that -each moment must be my last. - -As the horse disappeared in a cloud of eddying smoke, I attempted to -rush after him, only to slip in the mire and roll over and over. When -I scrambled up I was covered with mud from head to foot, and the live -embers from the burning fields were coming down more thickly than ever. - -But life is sweet to all of us, and even in that supreme moment of -peril I made a desperate effort to save myself. Seeing a pool of water -and mud just ahead of me, I leaped for it and threw myself down. - -It was a bath far from sweet, yet at that time a most agreeable one. I -allowed what there was of the water to cover my head and shoulders and -saw to it that all of my clothing was thoroughly saturated. Then I -arose again, and, pulling my coat collar up over my ears, leaped on in -the direction taken by my companions. - -The air was like that of a furnace, and soon the smoke became so thick -I could scarcely see the trail. The wind was blowing the fire directly -toward me, and to have stood that onslaught for long would have been -utterly impossible. - -But just as I felt that I must sink, and while I murmured a wild prayer -for deliverance, the wind shifted and a cooling current of air reached -me. This was wonderfully reviving, and, breathing deeply, I gathered -courage and continued on my way. - -Almost quarter of a mile was covered, and I had gained the base of -the hills, when the wind shifted again, and once more the fire rushed -onward and it became so hot I could not breathe except with difficulty. - -"Mark! Mark! where are you?" - -It was a most welcome cry, coming from Captain Guerez. In an instant -more Alano's father dashed up through the smoke. - -"Captain Guerez!" I gasped, and ran up to his side. "Save me!" - -"Where is your horse?" he asked, as he caught me up and assisted me to -mount behind him. - -"He ran away." - -No more was said. Turning his animal about, Captain Guerez dug his -spurs deep into the horse's flesh, and away we went up the hillside at -a rate of speed which soon left the roaring and crackling sugar-cane -fields far behind. - -In fifteen minutes we had joined the others of the party, on a plateau -covered with stunted grass and well out of reach of the fire. Here -it was found that my runaway horse had quietly joined his fellows. I -was tempted to give him a whipping for leaving me in the lurch, but -desisted upon second thought, as it would have done no good and I knew -the animal had only done what I was trying to do--save my life. - -"That was a narrow escape for you, Mark!" cried Alano, as he came up -with an anxious look on his face. "You ought to be more careful about -your horse in the future." - -"You can be sure I will be, Alano," I answered; and then turned to -Captain Guerez and thanked him for what he had done for me. - -It was hardly dawn; yet, as all had had a fair night's rest, it was -determined to proceed on our way and take a somewhat longer rest during -the hot noon hour. - -"This fire will necessitate a change in our course," said Captain -Guerez to me. - -"Will that delay us much?" - -"Not over a few hours. We will reach Rodania by nightfall." - -The captain was right, for it was not yet six o'clock when, from the -side of one mountain, we saw the buildings of Rodania perched upon the -side of another. We traveled across the tiny valley separating the two, -and just outside of the town Captain Guerez called a halt. - -"I think I had better send Jorge ahead and see if the coast is clear," -he said. "The coming of the negro into town will not be noticed, and he -can speedily learn if there are any Spaniards about." - -This was agreed upon, and, after receiving his instructions, the -colored guide hurried away, to be gone less than half an hour. - -"Spanish soldiers dare yesterday," he announced. "All gone now--on the -road to Cubineta." - -"Did they have any prisoners?" questioned Captain Guerez. - -"Yes, dree--two Cubans and an _Americano_." - -"My father!" I cried. "Oh, Captain Guerez, cannot we overtake them -before they manage to get him to some fort or prison?" - -"We'll try our best, Mark," replied Alano's father. - -"Why can't we travel after them at once?" put in Alano, fairly taking -the words out of my mouth. - -"We will," replied his father. "The long noontime rest has left our -horses still fresh. Forward, all of you! We will take a short cut, and -not visit Rodania at all." - -During the halt I had taken the opportunity to brush off my clothing, -which was now thoroughly dry. I had taken a bath at noon, so now felt -once more like myself, although several blisters on my neck and hands, -received from the fire, hurt not a little. I told Jorge of the bums, -and he ran into the woods for several species of moss, which he crushed -between two rocks, putting the crushed pulp on the blisters. - -"Take burn out soon," he announced; and he was right. In less than half -an hour after the application was made the smarting entirely ceased. - -We were now in the depths of a valley back of Rodania, and here the -trail (they are called roads in Cuba, but they are only trails, and -sometimes hardly that) was so choked up with vines and so soft that our -progress was greatly impeded, and about eight o'clock we came to a halt -in the darkness. - -"The mud beyond is all of two feet deep, and we can't get through it," -declared one of the men, who had been sent in advance. "We'll have to -go back." - -This was discouraging news, and I looked in perplexity at Alano's -father, whose brow contracted. - -"I'll take a look myself," he said, and, dismounting so that his horse -might not get stuck, advanced on foot. - -In my impatience I went with him. The way was very dark, and I -suggested that a torch be lighted. - -"An excellent plan," said Alano's father, and immediately cut a cedar -branch. By its blaze we were enabled to see quite well, and succeeded -in finding another path around the muddy spot. - -To save our horses we walked them for half a mile. It was tough -traveling, and the clouds of mosquitoes made the journey almost -unendurable. I was glad when, at early dawn, we emerged from the valley -on a bit of a rise, where the ground was firm and the growth somewhat -limited. - -A broad highway now lay before us, the main road from Rodania to -Cubineta. It was one of the best highways I had seen since leaving -Santiago de Cuba, and this was explained by Captain Guerez, who said -the road had been put into condition just previous to the breaking out -of the war. - -As usual, one of the party was in advance, and this was a lucky thing, -for about ten o'clock the soldier came tearing toward us on his horse -and motioning us to take to the woods. - -Captain Guerez was on the lookout, and turned to us quickly. - -"Dismount!" he cried in Spanish, and we leaped to the ground, and led -our animals into a thicket growing to the left of the highway. The -vidette followed us, stating that a large body of Spanish cavalry was -approaching. - -We forced our horses into the thicket for fully a hundred feet and tied -them fast. Then, with cautious steps, we returned to the vicinity of -the road and concealed ourselves behind convenient trees and bushes. - -By this time a thunder of hoofs could be heard, and soon the cavalry -appeared, at least two hundred strong. They were the finest body of -men I had seen in the island, and looked as if they had just come over -from Spain, their uniforms and weapons were so clean and new. They were -riding at a brisk pace, and hardly had we caught a good look at them -than they were gone, leaving a cloud of dust behind them. - -Captain Guerez was the first to speak, when they were well out of -hearing. - -"It's a good thing we did not run into them," he remarked grimly. "Our -little detachment would have stood small chances with such a body of -well-armed men." - -"They form a great contrast to the rebels," I could not help but murmur. - -"They do indeed, Mark. But why not? The rebels, especially in this -district, were never soldiers. When the war broke out they were -without uniforms or weapons; and what was and is worse, many of them -knew nothing about the use of a firearm. You will find the men in the -western provinces, where the whites predominate, both better trained -and clothed--although, let me add, their hearts are no more sturdy or -loyal than you will find here in the East." - -Thus talking, we went on and on, until Alano, who had gone ahead this -time, came back with the information that Cubineta was in sight. - -"And the village seems to be under guard of the Spanish soldiery," he -added, words which caused me, at least, considerable dismay. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI. - -A DISHEARTENING DISCOVERY. - - -"Under Spanish guard!" I cried, and looked questioningly at Alano's -father. - -"That's too bad," he said gravely. "However, there is no help for this -unexpected turn of affairs, and we must make the best of it. Alano, my -son, you are sure you are not mistaken?" - -"There are a number of Spanish soldiers on the highway, and with the -field-glass I saw that more soldiers were scattered round about." - -"Then your report must be true. I'll ride ahead and take a view of the -situation." - -I begged to go along, and Captain Guerez agreed. Alano came too, while -the others withdrew to a thicket, to avoid being surprised by any of -the Spaniards who might be out foraging. - -A turn in the highway brought us in full view of Cubineta. Of course we -were not foolish enough to expose ourselves. Screened behind bushes and -vines, we took a survey through the glass of the place, its people, and -the soldiers. - -Cubineta was not a large village, but it was a pretty place and -evidently thriving--or had been thriving before the war put a blight -upon all Cuban industries. There was one long street of stores and -dwellings, a church, a _casa_ or town-house, and at the farthest end -what looked to be a hastily constructed fort, built of heavy logs and -sods. - -"The Spaniards are evidently going to use the place as a center or -depot for supplies," was Captain Guerez' comment. "Under the present -circumstances I hardly know what is best to do." - -"Perhaps they have my father a prisoner in that fortress," I suggested. - -"It is not unlikely, Mark--if the men who held him have not yet gone -further than Cubineta." - -"Can't we steal into town under cover of night?" I continued. - -"We might do that--if it would do any good." - -"I want to join my father at any hazard." - -"That might be very foolish, Mark. How can you assist him if you are -yourself made a prisoner?" - -"Would they hold a boy like myself?" - -"You are not so young as you would like to make them imagine," laughed -Alano's father shortly. "Besides, if left free, they would be afraid -you would carry messages for your father. I think the best thing we can -do just now is to let Jorge go into town, pretending he is half starved -and willing to do anything for anybody who will give him food. By -taking this course, no one will pay much attention to him, as there are -many such worthless blacks floating about, and he can quietly find his -way around the fort and learn what prisoners, if any, are being kept -there." - -This was sensible advice, and, impatient as I was to catch sight of my -parent, I agreed to wait. We rode back to where the others had made -their camp, and Jorge was called up and duly instructed. The black -grinned with pleasure, for he considered it a great honor to do spy -work for such an influential planter as Captain Guerez. Possibly he had -visions of a good situation on the plantation after the war was over; -but, if so, he kept his thoughts on that point to himself. - -Jorge gone, the time hung heavily on the hands of all; but I believe -I was the most impatient of the crowd, and with good reason. Alano -noticed how uneasily I moved about, and soon joined me. - -"You must take things easy, Mark," he said. "Stewing won't do any good, -and it will only make you sick, combined with this hot weather, which, -I know, is about all you can stand." - -"If only I felt certain that my father was safe, Alano! Remember, he is -all I have in the world. My mother has been dead for years, and I never -had a brother or a sister." - -"I think it will all come out right in the end," he answered, doing his -best to cheer me up. "They won't dare to--to----" He did not finish. - -"To shoot him? That's just what I fear they will do, Alano. From what -I heard at Santiago de Cuba, the Spaniards are down on most Americans, -for they know we sympathize with you and think Cuba ought to be free, -or, at least ought to have a large hand in governing itself." - -When nightfall came most of the others lay down to sleep. But this was -out of the question for me, tired though I was physically, and so I was -left on guard, with instructions to call one of the men at midnight. - -Slowly the hours went by, with nothing to break the stillness of the -night but the hum of countless insects and the frequent note of a -night bird. We had not dared to build a campfire, and in consequence -there was no getting where the smoke drifted and out of the way of the -mosquitoes. - -At midnight I took a walk around to see if all was safe. The man I -was to call slept so soundly I had not the heart to wake him up, so I -continued on guard until one, when a noise down by the road attracted -my attention. - -Pistol in hand I stalked forward, when I heard a low voice and -recognized Jorge. The negro had been walking fast, and he was almost -out of breath. - -"Well?" I inquired anxiously. "Is my father there?" - -"I think he is, señor," replied the guide. "I go to prison-fort--da -have six Cubans dare an' one _Americano_." - -"My father!" - -"I talk to some men, an' da tell me prisoners come in last night--some -from Rodania, udders from udder places. _Americano_ in a prison by -himself, near the river. I swim up close to dat prison--maybe we make -hole in wall an' git him out." - -"Could we do that, Jorge, without being discovered?" - -"Tink so, señor--work at night--now, maybe. Swim under river an' come -up by fort, den dig with machetes--make hole under fort." - -"If only we could do that!" I cried; and then, struck with a sudden -idea, I caught Jorge by the arm. "Jorge, if I go, will you come and -show me the way and help me?" - -"Yes, señor." - -"Then let us go at once, without arousing the others. More than two -might spoil the plan. Go back to the road and wait for me." - -The guide did as directed, and I turned back into camp. Here I awoke -the man previously mentioned, and told him I was going off to meet -Jorge. He but partly understood, but arose to do guard duty, and I -hurried off. - -I felt that I was not doing just right in not notifying Captain Guerez -and Alano, but I was impatient to meet my father and was afraid if I -told them what Jorge had said they would want to delay matters. As -events turned out it would probably have been much better had I been -guided by their advice. - -A short but brisk walk brought the guide and myself in sight of the -town. On the outskirts the campfires of the Spanish soldiers burned -brightly. These we carefully avoided, and made a détour, coming up -presently to the bank of the stream upon which the fort was located. - -The river was broad and shallow, and as it ran but sluggishly we might -have forded across, but this would have placed us in plain view of the -sentries, who marched up and down along the river bank and in front of -the prison-house. - -Disdaining to undress, we dropped down into the stream and swam over, -with only our faces out of water, and without a sound, to a spot -behind the building opposite. We came up in a tiny hollow, screened by -several small bushes, and crawled on our stomachs to the rear of the -wing in which the guide said the American prisoner was incarcerated. - -I had a long and broad dagger which I had picked up the day previous, -and Jorge had his machete, and with these we began to dig a tunnel -leading under the wooden wall of the fort. Fortunately, the ground was -not hard, and soon we broke through the very flooring of the prison. I -was in the lead, and in great eagerness I poked up my head and gazed -around me. - -"Hullo, who's there?" cried a startled voice, in English, and my heart -sank completely, for the prisoner was not my father at all. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII. - -GILBERT BURNHAM. - - -"Are you alone?" I asked, when I had recovered sufficiently to speak. - -"An American!" came the low cry. "Yes, I am alone. Who are you, and -what do you want?" - -"I came to save you--that is, I thought my father was a prisoner here," -I stammered. "Are you tied up?" - -"Worse, chained. But I think the chain can easily be broken. If you'll -help me get away from here, I'll consider myself in your debt for life." - -"I'll do what I can for you. But keep quiet, for there are a number of -guards about," I whispered. - -With an effort I squeezed through the hole that had been made, and felt -my way to the prisoner's side, for the interior of the cell was dark. -He had a chain around one wrist, and the chain was fastened by a large -staple driven into a log of the wall of the fort. - -Jorge had come up behind me, and, learning of the staple, began to cut -at the woodwork surrounding it with his machete. The lower end of the -blade was fairly keen, and he made such rapid progress that in less -than five minutes a sharp jerk cleared the staple from the log, and the -prisoner was free. - -"Good for you," he whispered to the colored guide. "Now which is the -way out of this hole?" - -"Follow me, and keep very quiet," I whispered, and motioned to Jorge to -lead the way. - -Soon the guide had disappeared into the opening we had made. Going from -the prison was worse than getting in, and the man we were trying to -rescue declared the passage-way too small for him. - -We commenced to enlarge it, I with my dagger and he with his hands. We -had just made it of sufficient size when we heard a cry from outside. -Jorge had emerged into the open, only to be discovered by a sentry -who chanced to be looking his way. There was a shot, and half a dozen -soldiers came running up, at which the guide took to the river with a -loud splash. - -"I'm afraid we are lost!" I cried, and stopped, half in and half out -of the hole. Then the prison door was banged open, and the rays of a -lantern flared into the cell. - -The American I had discovered promptly showed fight by leaping on the -intruder. But this was madness, as the soldier was backed up by four -others, all armed with pistols and guns. In the meantime another light -flashed from outside the hole, and I felt myself caught, very much like -a rat in a trap. - -"_De donde viene V.?_ [Where do you come from?]" demanded a cold, stern -voice, and I felt myself grabbed by the hair. Realizing that resistance -was useless, I gave myself up, and immediately found myself surrounded -by a dozen Spanish soldiers. In the meantime Jorge had made good his -escape. - -The soldiers marched me around to the entrance of the fort, where an -officer began to question me in Spanish. He could speak no English, and -as soon as he found my command of Spanish was very limited he sent off -for an interpreter. Then I was taken inside the fort and consigned to -one of the prison cells. - -My feelings can be better imagined than described. Bitterly I regretted -having started on my midnight quest without notifying Captain Guerez. -My hasty action had brought me to grief and placed me in a position -from which escape seemed impossible. What my captors would do with -me remained to be seen. That they would treat me in anything like a -friendly fashion was out of the question to expect. It was likely that -they would hold me as a prisoner of war. - -Presently the door of the cell was opened, and somebody else was thrown -in bodily and with such force that he fell headlong. The door was -banged shut and bolted, and the crowd which had been outside went away. - -The new arrival lay like a log where he had been thrown, and for a few -minutes I fancied he must be dead from the way he had been treated. - -I bent over him, and in the dim light of the early dawn made out that -it was the American I had sought to rescue. I placed my hand over his -heart and discovered that he still breathed, although but faintly. - -There was nothing at hand with which I could do anything for him. My -own pockets had been turned inside out by my captors, and even my -handkerchief, with which I might have bound up an ugly wound on his -brow, was gone. I opened his coat and vest and his shirt around the -neck, and gave him as much air as I could. - -"Oh!" he groaned, as he finally came to his senses. "Oh! Don't kick me -any more! I give in!" - -"You're all right--they have put you in a cell with me," I hastened to -reassure him, and then he sat up. - -"Who--what----" he paused. "In a cell, eh? And they caught you, too?" - -"Yes." - -"That's too bad." He drew a deep breath. "Did you fight with them?" - -"No. I saw it would be no use." - -"I was a fool to do it. I'm too hot-blooded for this sort of work. I -ought to have stayed in Boston reporting local affairs." - -"Are you a reporter?" - -"Hush! Yes; but I don't want it to become known if I can help it. They -think I am nothing more than an inquisitive American." - -"Then why did they lock you up?" - -"That was more of my hot-headedness. I was sketching a picture of the -town and this fort or prison, when a Spanish officer came up and tried -to snatch the drawing from my hand. Instead of demanding an explanation -I promptly knocked him down. Then a couple of guards ran for me, and I -dusted. But it was no use. They sent a company of soldiers after me, -and here I am." - -"And here we are both likely to remain for some time to come," I added -bitterly. - -"Looks that way, that's a fact. By the way, you said something about -your father, didn't you?" - -"Yes. My father is a prisoner of the Spaniards, and I felt almost -certain he was in this fort." - -"What's your father's name?" - -"Richard Carter. My name is Mark." - -"And my name is Gilbert Burnham. I've heard of your father, come to -think of it. He joined the Cuban army along with a plantation owner -named Guerez and another American named Hawley." - -"You are right. Did you hear anything at all of him here in Cubineta or -the vicinity?" - -"No. But then, you see, that is not strange, as I talk very little -Spanish. I certainly haven't seen any Americans here but you and -myself." - -Gilbert Burnham asked me to tell him my story; and, feeling that I -could lose nothing by so doing, I favored him with a recital of my -efforts to get to my father. He was quite interested. - -"By Jove, young man, if I get clear from here I'll do what I can to -help you," he said. - -Then he told me his own history--how he had grown tired of newspaper -reporting in Boston and begged the head editor of the paper he -represented to send him on an "assignment" to Cuba. He had been in the -island four months, and had had a varied list of adventures, although -none of a particularly thrilling or perilous nature. - -"But now it looks as though I was in for it," he concluded moodily. -"That officer I knocked down will make matters as hard as he can for -me." - -"And I'm afraid trying to break away from prison won't help matters," I -said. - -"You are right there. But, heigho! we must make the best of it." - -Yet making the best of it was small satisfaction to me. Tired out in -body and mind, I sank down in a corner of the gloomy and damp cell and -gave myself up to my bitter reflections. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII. - -A BATTLE ON LAND AND WATER. - - -It was about eight o'clock in the morning that the door of the prison -cell was opened and Gilbert Burnham and I were ordered to march out -into a larger apartment. - -The order was given by a Spanish officer who spoke fairly good English, -and the officer was backed up by a guard of eight men, all well armed. - -"They are going to run no chances on us now," remarked the newspaper -correspondent, as he arose from the floor, upon which he had been -resting. - -"We had better be as civil as possible," I answered. "If we anger them -they have it in their power to make us mighty uncomfortable." - -"I'll keep as civil as my hot-headedness will permit," he grumbled. - -We were led from one end of the fort to the other, where there was a -narrow room, provided with a small, square table and half a dozen -benches. At the table sat several officers I had seen before. One was a -particularly ugly-looking fellow, and Burnham nudged me and said this -chap was the fellow he had knocked down. - -"And he's got it in for me," he added. - -I was marched to the front of the table, and the officer who could -speak English forced me to clasp my hands behind me. This done, one of -the officers at the table asked a number of questions in Spanish. - -"_No habla V. castellano?_ [Do you not speak Spanish?]" he asked me. - -"No, señor," I replied. - -He glared at me suspiciously for a moment, then spoke to the other -officer. - -"Who you are?" demanded the latter. - -"I am Mark Carter, an American boy. I came to Cuba to join my father, -who was stopping at a plantation near Guantanamo." - -This was repeated in Spanish. At the mention of my name several of -those present exchanged glances. - -"You son of Richard Carter?" was the next question. - -"Yes, señor. I understand he is a prisoner. Is it true?" - -My question remained unanswered, and it was plain that my captors -intended to give me no information. - -"Why you break in the fort? Did this man pay you to do that?" And the -Spanish officer pointed to Gilbert Burnham. - -"I never saw or heard of this man before, señor. I broke in because I -thought my father was a prisoner there. I heard an American was there, -and I thought it must be he." - -"Aha, I see! Well, your father is not here, as you have found out." - -"Where is he?" - -This question also remained unanswered. The officers began to consult -among themselves, and then I was ordered back to the cell. I tried to -protest, and pleaded for liberty, for a chance to find my parent, but -it was all in vain. I was hustled off without ceremony and made as -close a prisoner as before. - -It was nearly noon before Gilbert Burnham joined me. In the meantime -I had had nothing to eat or drink, and was beginning to wonder if my -enemies meant to let me die of hunger and thirst. - -The face of the newspaper correspondent was much downcast. - -"I'm to catch it now," he said. "To-morrow morning they are going to -start to transport me to some regular fortress, and there I suppose -I'll be permitted to languish until this bloody war is over. I wish I -had made a dash for liberty when I was out in that courtroom." - -"They would have shot you dead. They were too well armed for anything -of the sort." - -"Maybe. But this is tough. Is there a pitcher of water anywhere?" - -"Not a drop." - -At this he stormed more than ever, and finally shouted to the guard to -bring some _agua_. But no one paid any attention to his cries, further -than to order him to be silent, under penalty of being gagged, and then -he subsided. - -Slowly the morning wore away. The sun was shining brightly outside, and -the cell, with only one narrow window, high up to the ceiling, was like -a bake-oven. Once I climbed up to the window sill and looked out, only -to have the muzzle of a gun thrust into my face, while a guard outside -ordered me to drop. I dropped, and made no further attempt to get a -whiff of fresh air. - -I wondered if Jorge had escaped in safety and if Captain Guerez would -do anything to save me. I felt certain he would be very angry over the -way I had acted, and, looking back, I felt that I richly deserved to be -censured. - -It was high noon, and I and my companion were walking the floor, -impatient for food and drink, when the door opened and a guard came in -with a platter and an earthenware pitcher. He set both on the floor -and withdrew without a word. - -"Well, here's something, anyway," remarked Gilbert Burnham. "Bah! a -stew of onions and garlic, not fit for a dog to eat. Let me have some -of the water." - -Neither of us could do more than taste the mess which had been served; -and as for the water, it looked as if it had been scooped from the -river, and was both warm and muddy. I had just finished taking a -gingerly drink, when a shot from outside startled both of us. Several -more shots followed, and then came a blast on a trumpet from somewhere -in the distance. - -"Hullo! that means a fight!" ejaculated Gilbert Burnham, his face -brightening. "I hope it's a body of rebels to the rescue." - -"So do I, and I further hope they release us," I replied. - -At the first shot an alarm had been sounded in and about the fort. We -could hear the soldiers hurrying in several directions and a number of -orders issued in Spanish. The firing now continued to increase, and -presently we heard a crash of splintered woodwork. - -"It's getting interesting, eh, Carter?" said Gilbert Burnham. "If only -they don't grow too enthusiastic and fire in here!" - -Scarcely had he spoken than we heard a little noise up at the window. -A bullet had entered and buried itself in the woodwork opposite. - -"Better lay down," I urged, and set the example, which the newspaper -man was not long in following. The firing and shouting kept on -steadily, and we heard the occasional splashing of water, telling that -the encounter was taking place on the river as well as on land. - -The battle had been going on with more or less violence for half an -hour, when there came a wild rush through the fort, and some shooting -just outside of our cell. Then the door went down with a crash, and we -found ourselves confronted by a score or more of dusky rebels, all of -whom wore the flag of Cuba pinned to their hats and coats. - -"_Americano!_" shouted one of them, and allowed us to come outside. -Then, without waiting to question us, the crowd dashed to the entrance -of another cell and succeeded in liberating several of their own -countrymen. But now the soldiers of the fort rallied, and the intruders -were driven back. - -Feeling it was our one chance to escape, we went with the insurgents, -and soon found ourselves on the outskirts of Cubineta, in a spot backed -up by a forest of palms and oaks. As we ran along Gilbert Burnham -paused and pointed to the dead body of a Spanish soldier. - -"He won't need his weapons any more, poor fellow," he said, and -stooping down secured two pistols, one of which he gave to me. There -was also a belt of cartridges, and this was speedily divided between us. - -"I think the road to the camp I left is behind us," I remarked, as I -took a view of the situation, in the meantime screening myself from our -enemies by diving behind a clump of trees. "I think I'll go in that -direction. Do you want to come along?" - -My companion was willing to go anywhere, so long as we kept clear of -the Spanish forces, and off we went on an easy run down the highway, -keeping our pistols in our hands and our eyes to the right and the -left, as well as ahead. Quarter of an hour of this sort of traveling -brought us to the spot where I had left Alano and the others. - -The temporary camp was deserted. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIX. - -LOOKING FOR MY CUBAN CHUM. - - -"Gone, eh?" remarked Gilbert Burnham, as he saw the disappointed look -upon my face. "Well, you could hardly expect anything different, with -the fighting going on. It's more than likely they took part in the -attack." - -"I presume so," I answered. "But where can they be now? The firing has -about ceased." - -"The rebels have withdrawn from the town, that's certain. Let us try to -find the main body of the insurgents, and there we'll probably learn of -the whereabouts of your friends." - -I considered this good advice, and, leaving the vicinity of what had -been the former camp, we struck out on a trail which took us in a -semi-circle around Cubineta. - -It was one of the hottest days I had yet experienced since landing on -the island, and we had not progressed a half-mile before I was fairly -panting for breath. As for Gilbert Burnham, he declared that he must -halt or collapse. - -"Talk about balmy groves and summer skies," he growled. "I would rather -be at the North Pole any time. Why, I'll bet a dollar you could bake -bread on that bit of ground out there!" and he pointed to a stretch of -dark soil, dried as hard as stone by the fierce rays of the sun. - -"The average Cuban never thinks of traveling in the sun between eleven -and three o'clock, and I don't blame him," I rejoined. "Let us climb a -tree and take it easy." - -We mounted an oak, I making certain first that there was no snake on -it, and took seats near the very top. By parting the branches we could -get a fair view of Cubineta, and we saw that the attack was at an end. -The rebels had retreated out of sight, but not before setting fire to -the fort, which was burning fiercely, with nothing being done to save -it from destruction. - -"To me it looks as if the rebels were bunched in the woods to the -north," I said, after a long and careful survey. "I wish we had a -field-glass." - -"I'm glad we took the pistols, Carter. They may come in very handy -before we reach safe quarters again." - -"I'm sure I don't want to shoot anyone, Burnham," I answered. - -"But you believe in defending yourself?" - -"Yes. But what do you propose to do, now you have escaped?" - -"Get back to the coast and take the first vessel I can find for the -United States." - -"Then you've had sufficient of reporting down here?" - -"Yes, indeed! If any other young man wants to come down here and take -my place, he is welcome to do so." And Gilbert Burnham spoke with an -emphasis that proved he meant every word he uttered. - -As soon as we were cooled off and rested, we resumed our way, through -a heavy undergrowth which, on account of the entangling vines, often -looked as if it would utterly stay our progress. But both of us were -persevering, and by four o'clock had reached the section of country I -had fancied the rebels were occupying. - -My surmise was correct. Hardly had we proceeded a dozen yards along a -side road than three Cubans leaped from behind some brush and commanded -us to halt. We did so and explained that we were Americans, at the -same time pointing to the burning fort and then crossing our wrists as -though tied. - -The rebels understood by this that we had been prisoners, and as we did -not attempt to draw our pistols, they shouldered their long guns and -conducted us to the officer in command. - -"Look for Captain Guerez?" said the officer, whose name I have -forgotten. "He ride off dat way!" and he pointed with his hand to the -westward. "He look for you, I tink." - -This was comforting news, and I asked if Alano's father had taken part -in the attack on Cubineta, to which I received the reply that both the -captain and all under him had taken part and that one of the insurgents -had been killed. - -"Was it his boy Alano?" - -"No, man named Ciruso." - -I waited to hear no more, but, thanking the officer for his trouble, -hurried off down a trail leading to the westward, with Burnham at my -side. - -We were descending a short hill, covered with a stunted growth of -brush, which tripped us up more than once, when my companion suddenly -uttered a howl and tumbled over me in his effort to retreat. - -"What is it?" I asked. - -"Spiders, or crabs, as big as your foot," he cried. "Look! look!" He -pointed to several holes in the sand, beside a small brook. At the -entrance to each hole sat an enormous land crab, gray in color, with -round, staring eyes, well calculated to give anyone a good scare. - -"They are only crabs, and won't hurt you, unless you try to catch hold -of them," I laughed. "Alano told me of them, and I've met them before." - -"More of the beauties of this delightful country," said Burnham -sarcastically. - -I advanced and stamped my foot, and instantly each crab scampered for -his hole, in the clumsy fashion all crabs have. I fancied some of them -hissed at us, but I might have been mistaken. - -The brook crossed, we ascended the next hill and entered a plantain -grove where the fruit hung in profusion on all sides. We found some -that was almost ripe, and made a refreshing meal. - -"Hullo, Mark!" - -The welcome voice rang out from a grove of oaks on the other side of -the plantains. I started, then rushed ahead, to find myself, a minute -later, in Alano's arms, with Captain Guerez looking on, highly pleased. - -"We thought you were killed!" ejaculated my Cuban chum, when our -greeting was over. "Where on earth have you been?" - -"Haven't you seen Jorge?" - -"No," put in Alano's father. - -"It's a long story. Let me introduce another American," and I presented -Gilbert Burnham. - -Sitting down in as cool a spot as we could find, each related all he -had to tell. My story is already known. - -"When you did not show up in camp I was much worried," said the -captain, "and I sent men out at once to hunt up both you and Jorge. -During this search one of the men, Circuso, met some of the Spanish -troops, and fought desperately to escape them, but was shot and killed." - -"Poor chap!" I could not help but murmur. "Did he leave a family?" - -"No; he was a bachelor, without kith or kin." - -"I think he might have escaped," put in Alano, "but he was so fierce -against the soldiers from Spain. He said they had no right to come over -here and fight us, and he was in for killing every one of them." - -"While the hunt for you and Jorge was going on," continued Alano's -father, "the rebel leader, Captain Conovas, arrived and said he had -instructions to attack Cubineta and make an attempt to release the -prisoners at the fort. I decided to join him in the attack, at the same -time thinking you might be a prisoner with your father. - -"We operated from the south and from across the river, and soon took -possession of the fort, only to be repulsed with a heavy loss. Then our -party withdrew to this quarter, and here we are." - -"And what of my father?" I asked anxiously. "He was not at the fort, -nor have I been able to hear anything of him." - -"The Cuban forces captured several prisoners, and they are being held -in a valley just below here. I was on the point of journeying hither to -interview them on that point when Alano discovered you coming through -the plantain grove," answered Captain Guerez. - -"Then let us go and question them now," I cried. - -The captain was willing, and off we hurried on horseback, Burnham and -myself being provided with steeds which had belonged to the Spanish -prisoners. - -Riding was much more comfortable than walking, and the road being -fairly level the distance to the valley mentioned was soon covered. -Here it was found that four of the Spaniards had died of their wounds, -but there were six others, and these Captain Guerez proceeded to -examine carefully, taking each aside for that purpose. - -"Your father is _en route_ for Santiago," he said, when the examination -was over. "When he arrives there he is to be tried by court-martial for -plotting against the life of a certain Spanish leader, General Gonza. -If we wish to save him we must start after him without an instant's -delay." - - - - -CHAPTER XXX. - -ONCE MORE AMONG THE HILLS. - - -Fortunately the road leading to the northern shore of Santiago Bay was -well known to Captain Guerez, who at one time had been a commissioner -of highways in that district. - -"I do not know how we will fare on this trip," he remarked, as we rode -off only four strong--the captain, Alano, Burnham, and myself. "At one -spot we will have to pass the railroad, and I understand that is now -under strict Spanish surveillance." - -"We'll have to take matters as they come," I returned. "We must save my -father at any cost--at least, I shall attempt to do so." - -"I am with you, Mark," said the captain earnestly. "Next to my family, -there is no one to whom I am more attached." - -"And I go in for helping any American," put in Burnham. - -Alano simply smiled at me. But that smile was enough. I felt that my -Cuban chum could be depended upon to stick to me through thick and thin. - -Nightfall found us in the midst of a long range of hills, covered -with a heavy growth of oaks, cedars, and mahogany. The vines which -I mentioned before were here as thick as ever, and in the darkness -Gilbert Burnham suddenly gave a yell and slid from the back of his -horse to the ground. - -"What's the matter?" we cried in chorus. - -"Matter!" he growled. "Nothing, only a vine caught me under the chin, -and I thought I was about to be hung." - -We laughed at this, but my humor was soon short, as another vine -slipped over my forehead, taking my Panama hat with it. - -After this we were more careful, fearful that some of us might be -seriously injured, and a little later we went into camp in the midst of -a tiny clearing. - -We were just finishing our supper when a most doleful howl arose on the -air, coming from the rear and to the right of us. I leaped up and drew -my pistol, expecting to be attacked by some wild animal. - -"Here's excitement!" ejaculated the newspaper correspondent. "What can -it be--a bear?" - -He had hardly finished when a perfect chorus of howls arose, coming -closer. I gazed in alarm at Captain Guerez and Alano. My chum laughed -outright. - -"Don't get scared, Mark; they are only wild dogs." - -"Wild dogs!" put in Burnham. "Well that is the worst yet! And they are -not dangerous?" - -"If you met a large number of them alone they might be," replied -Captain Guerez. "But they won't think of attacking such a party as -ours. They'll hang around until we leave and then search the camp for -stray food." - -In spite of this explanation, however, Burnham insisted that a guard be -kept during the night, and we each took two hours at the task. Before -the sun had struck us from over the treetops, we had breakfast and were -off. Sure enough, the wild dogs rushed in the moment we had left the -opening. They were a lean and ugly-looking set of curs. - -"It's a terrible thing when these wild dogs and a bloodhound on the -trail meet," observed Captain Guerez. "Of course one wild dog cannot do -much, but the whole pack will fall on the bloodhound, and in the end -the larger dog will be killed and literally torn to shreds." - -A storm was approaching, but this did not discourage us, although -Burnham growled as usual. In fact, we soon found that he was a chronic -fault-finder, but then he seldom meant half that he said, and, taken -all in all, he was good company. - -"If the storm grows heavy it will give us a good chance to cross the -railroad tracks," remarked the captain. "The sentries will relax their -vigilance and more than likely seek shelter under the trees." - -"Won't we strike some settlement before that?" I asked. - -"Oh, yes; we are on the outskirts of Los Hanios now." - -Five minutes later we rode into a small village occupied principally -by half a hundred cattlemen, for we were now coming to the meadows and -valleys in which immense herds of cows and sheep are pastured. The -people of Los Hanios took but little interest in the revolution, and as -a consequence had been but little molested either by the Spaniards or -Cubans, although a portion of their cattle had been confiscated. - -From one of the head cattlemen Captain Guerez learned that a body of -Spaniards had passed through the village the afternoon before bound for -Santiago. They had several prisoners, who were tied hands and feet, and -fast to the mules which carried them. At least one of the prisoners had -been _un Americano_. - -At Los Hanios we procured dinner, a splendid meal--the best I had -eaten since leaving the steamer, for it consisted of prime roast beef -done to a turn, potatoes and beans and coffee. Burnham attended to -the cooking, saying he had cooked many a meal for himself during his -Bohemian life at the "Hub," and consequently all the dishes were turned -out in true American style, garlic and such stuff being for once -tabooed. - -Yet I hurried matters, wishing to catch up with my father as soon as -possible. I wondered if he knew I was after him, and how he was faring. -I felt certain that to be bound to the back of a mule over these rough -trails could be anything but a pleasant sensation. - -While we were still in sight of Los Hanios it began to rain, and we -had not made over a mile when the downpour became very heavy. Burnham -wished to take shelter under some trees, but I would not hear of it, -and Alano and his father backed me up in my idea. - -"We can rest a-plenty when Mr. Carter is once more safe," said the -captain, and that ended the discussion. - -On and on we went, until, looking ahead, we espied a turn in the road. -Beyond this was a bank six or eight feet in height, and this was where -the railroad tracks were located. - -"We had best dismount and go ahead on foot," said the captain. "A -sentry could easily see our animals if he had his eyes about him." - -"If he wasn't asleep," put in Burnham. "I fancy these Spaniards and -Cubans do a lot of sleeping whenever they get the chance." - -"Not in war-times," said Alano, who did not fancy this slur upon his -countrymen. "Of course we are not so nervous and impatient as some of -the Americans," he added pointedly, and Burnham took the hint and said -no more on the subject. - -A fierce rattle of thunder stopped all talking soon after. The -lightning became almost incessant, and glared and flared along the -railroad tracks as far as eye could see. We came together close to a -clump of berry bushes. - -"Wait a moment," whispered Captain Guerez. "I think I saw a sentry not -over fifty feet away!" - -At this announcement all of us crouched down, and each looked to his -weapons, feeling that a crisis might be at hand. Alano's father moved -like a shadow up to the railroad bank. - -"I was right," he announced, after a particularly bright flash of -lightning; "I saw his gun-barrel plainly." - -"Can we pass him?" asked Alano. - -"We can try, but----" - -"If he sees us why can't we make him a prisoner?" I broke in. "If we -did that, we would have a chance to bring our horses up the bank and -over the tracks." - -"I was thinking as much," said the captain. "The horses must be gotten -over; that is necessary." - -He deliberated for a minute, and then motioned us forward, warning -us at the same time to keep perfectly silent. On we went, to where -something of a trail led up over the railroad embankment. There were a -few bushes growing in the vicinity, and we skulked beside these, almost -crawling along the ground. - -Several minutes passed, and the top of the embankment was reached and -we stood on the glistening tracks. Down we plunged on the opposite -side, and not over a dozen paces from where the Spanish sentry was -standing. - -"_Halte!_" came the unexpected cry, and the man rushed forward, -pointing his gun as he ran. But for once fate was in our favor. A -trailing vine tripped him up and he went headlong. - -Before the Spanish soldier could collect his senses, or make a movement -to rise, Captain Guerez and myself were on him. The captain sat down -astride of the fellow's back, while I secured his gun and clapped my -hand over his mouth, to keep him from calling for assistance. A second -later Alano and the newspaper man came up, and the Spaniard was our -prisoner. - -"Now bring the horses over, as quickly as possible!" said the captain -to his son and Burnham. "Mark and I will guard this fellow." - -At once Alano and Burnham departed. The prisoner struggled wildly to -escape, but we held him fast, and presently Captain Guerez pulled out -his sword and pointed it at the fellow's throat. - -"Not a sound, on your life!" he commanded in Spanish, and the prisoner -became mute instantly. - -The sharpness of the lightning and the deafening thunder had frightened -our animals a good deal, and Alano and the newspaper man had all they -could do to bring them up the embankment, which in one spot was quite -steep. Just as the railroad tracks were reached one of the horses broke -away, and with a loud snort ran down the road, his hoofs clattering -loudly on the ties and the iron rails. Alano endeavored to catch him, -with the result that another broke loose and went up the road in the -same fashion. - -"_Halte!_" came from half a dozen different directions, and as if by -magic as many Spanish sentries showed themselves along the embankment. -A flash of lightning revealed Alano and Burnham, and crack! crack! -crack! went three carbines almost simultaneously. The alarm was taken -up on several sides, and soon we found the best part of a company of -Spanish soldiery swooping down upon us. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXI. - -THE BATTLE AT THE RAILROAD EMBANKMENT. - - -"We are lost!" cried my Cuban chum, as he came stumbling down to where -his father and I stood, with our prisoner between us. - -"We're in for it, that's a fact!" ejaculated Gilbert Burnham, as he -came after Alano, bringing the remaining two horses. "Come on, can't we -ride two on a horse and escape them?" - -Captain Guerez shook his head. There was no time left to answer, for -some of the soldiers were already less than a score of yards away. The -captain waved his hand and ran off, followed by all of us, and leaving -our late prisoner standing with mouth wide open in amazement. - -To try to go back whence we had come, and thus expose ourselves on the -top of the railroad embankment, would have been foolhardy. Instead, -the captain led the way directly into a grove of sapodilla trees some -distance up the track. - -Our Spanish pursuers called upon us to halt, not once, but many times; -and when we did not heed their repeated commands, they opened fire in -a manner which made us feel far from comfortable, for a bullet grazed -the captain's hand, and another whizzed so closely to my ear that I -nearly fell from ducking. There may be those who can stand up coolly -under fire; but I must confess I am not one of them, and I am willing -to give a flying bullet all the room it wishes in which to spend itself. - -Hardly had we reached the grove of sapodillas than Captain Guerez -swung around and began to use his own pistol in a most effective -way, wounding two of the soldiers in advance of the main body of the -Spaniards. Seeing this, the rest of us took courage and also opened -fire, although I must confess I aimed rather low, having no desire to -kill anyone. The cracks from our four pistols brought consternation to -our pursuers, and they halted and fell back a dozen paces. - -"Come on," whispered Captain Guerez. "Our only hope is to lose -ourselves in the woods. The enemy outnumbers us five to one." - -Away he went again, with all of us close upon his heels. Another volley -from the Spaniards rang out, but did no damage, as the trees and brush -now hid us from view. - -We had passed along a distance of a hundred feet when we heard a -crashing in the brush coming from a direction opposite to that being -taken by ourselves. Fearing another company of Spanish infantry was -coming up, Captain Guerez called us to his side. - -"Here is a narrow ravine, leading under the railroad tracks," he said -hurriedly. "Let us go down into that and work our way to the other side -of the embankment." - -No opposition was made, and into the ravine we fairly tumbled, just as -the soldiers came up once more. Bushes and stones hid us from view, and -we went on only when the thunder rolled, that no sounds of our progress -might reach our enemies' ears. - -Ten minutes later found us close to the railroad embankment. But here -we came to a halt in dismay. The ravine had been filled up by the -recent rains, so that crawling under the tracks was out of the question. - -"Now what is to be done?" asked Alano in a low voice. "We can't stay -here, that's certain." - -"Some of the soldiers are coming up the ravine after us!" exclaimed -Burnham a moment later. "Hark!" - -We listened, and found that he was right. At least half a dozen of the -Spaniards were advancing in a cautious manner, their guns ready for -immediate use. - -"Let us climb this tree," said Captain Guerez, pointing to a tall -monarch of the forest, whose spreading branches reached nearly to the -opposite side of the embankment. "Be quick, all of you!" - -He leaped for the tree, and Burnham followed. I gave Alano a boost up, -and he gave me a hand; and inside of forty seconds all of us were safe -for the time being. As we rested on the upper branches of the tree we -heard the far-away whistle of a locomotive. - -"A train is coming!" said Alano. - -"If we could only board it!" I put in eagerly. "It would carry us part -of the way to Guantanamo, wouldn't it?" - -"It would--going in that direction," said Captain Guerez, with a wave -of his hand. "But the train may be filled with Spanish soldiers, and -what then?" - -The locomotive kept coming closer, and presently we heard the rattle of -the cars as they bumped over the rails, which were far from being well -ballasted. The captain was peering out from behind the tree branches, -and he gave a deep breath as a flash of lightning lit up the scene. - -"It is a freight train!" he exclaimed softly. "Come down to the branch -below, all of you!" - -We understood him, and one after another we dropped to the branch -mentioned. It was directly over the track upon which the freight was -pounding along, and we calculated that the distance to the top of the -tallest cars would not be over six or eight feet. - -"We can't jump with that train running at twenty or thirty miles an -hour," I said, with a shudder. "We'll slip and be ground to death under -the car wheels." - -"Mark is right--a jump is out of the question," added Gilbert Burnham. -"I'd rather risk staying here." - -"The train may have supplies for the soldiers about here and stop," -whispered Captain Guerez. "Watch your chances." - -On and on came the train, and in a few seconds more we realized that -those in charge had no intention of stopping in that vicinity. Yet as -the headlight came closer we lowered ourselves in readiness to make a -leap. - -Suddenly there was a shrill whistle, and down went some of the brakes -on the long train. I glanced in the opposite direction from whence -the freight had come and saw on the tracks one of our runaway horses, -which stood staring in alarm at the glaring headlight. Evidently the -engineer had been startled by the sudden appearance of the animal, and, -not realizing exactly what it was, had, on the impulse of the moment, -reversed the locomotive's lever and whistled for brakes. - -The train could not be stopped in time to save the beast, which was -struck and sent rolling over and over down the embankment. Then the -train went on still further, the locomotive finally coming to a halt -about fifty yards beyond the tree upon which all of us were perched. - -As it slowed up the top of one of the tall freight cars rolled directly -beneath us. Giving the word to follow, Captain Guerez let himself drop -on the "running board," as it is termed by train hands--that is, the -board running along the center of the top of a freight car from end to -end. All of us came after him, the quartette landing in a row less than -two yards apart. As soon as each had struck in safety he lay down flat, -that those below the embankment, as well as those on the train, might -not have such an easy chance to discover us. - -Scarcely had the train halted than some of the Spanish soldiers -came running up to ascertain why it had stopped. But their shouting -evidently frightened the train hands, who possibly thought a band of -rebels was at hand and that the horse on the track had been a ruse to -stop them. The engineer whistled to release brakes, and put on a full -head of steam, and on went the train, while the Spaniards yelled in -dismay and flourished their weapons. - -"By Jove! that was a move worth making!" remarked Gilbert Burnham, -after the long train had covered at least an eighth of a mile. "We are -clear of those chaps now." - -"Where will this train take us?" asked Alano of his father. - -"The next village is Comaro, but I do not know if the train will stop," -was the reply. "Two miles further on is Los Harmona, but we must not go -there, for I understand there is a strong Spanish garrison stationed in -the village. Let us get down between the cars and watch our chance to -spring off. If we remain here some of the brakemen may come along and -give the alarm." - -The lightning and thunder were decreasing in violence, and the rain -had settled into a thin but steady downpour. The captain was nearest -to the front end of the freight car, and led the way down the narrow -ladder to the platform below. Once on this, and on the platform of the -car ahead, we divided into pairs on either side and awaited a favorable -opportunity to leave the train. - -Comaro was reached and passed in the darkness, and the long freight -began to pull out for Los Harmona at a steady rate of twenty-five -miles or more an hour. No chance had been given us to jump off without -great danger, and now it began to look as if we would be carried right -into the fortified town, or further. - -"Some distance below here is, unless I am greatly mistaken, a wide -patch of meadow," said Captain Guerez. "I do not believe a leap into -the water and mud would hurt any of us very much, and, under the -circumstances, I am in favor of taking the risk, in preference to being -carried into Los Harmona." - -"If you go I will follow," I said, and Alano said the same. - -"Well, I don't intend to be left alone," smiled Burnham grimly. "But -what will we do after we strike the meadow?" - -"The meadow is not very broad," answered the captain, "and beyond is a -highway leading almost directly into Guantanamo. We will take to this -highway and trust to luck to get on as originally intended. Of course -the loss of our horses is a heavy one, but this cannot be helped. If -we---- Ha!" - -Captain Guerez stopped short, and not without good reason. From the -interior of the freight car had come the unmistakable sounds of human -voices. We heard first two men talking, then a dozen or more. The -conversation was in Spanish, and I did not understand it. But Alano -and his father did, and my Cuban chum turned to Burnham and me in high -excitement. - -"What do you think!" he whispered. "This car is filled with Spanish -soldiers bound for Guantanamo! They heard us talking, and they are -going to investigate and find out where we are and who we are!" - - - - -CHAPTER XXXII. - -A LEAP IN THE DARK. - - -My readers can readily believe that all of us were much alarmed at -the prospect ahead. We had not dreamed that the freight car contained -soldiers, although all of us had heard that the Spanish Government was -transporting troops by this means wherever the railroads ran. - -Alano had scarcely explained the situation, when Captain Guerez -motioned us to withdraw from the side edges of the platforms, so that -the soldiers looking out of the broad side doors of the car could not -catch sight of us. - -"We must jump as soon as the meadow appears," whispered the captain. -"Be prepared, all of you." - -He had scarcely finished when we heard a clatter of feet, and knew that -one or more of the Spaniards had crawled from a side door to the top of -the car. Then followed cautious footsteps in the direction of the rear -platform. Finding no one there, the Spanish soldiers came forward. - -"Ha!" cried one, as he espied Captain Guerez. "Who are you?" - -"Friends," was the reply, of course in Spanish. - -"Friends? And why ride out here, then?" - -"We have no money, _capitan_. We are dirt-poor." - -"And where do you intend to go?" - -"Los Harmona--if the train will ever reach there." - -"What will you do there?" - -"We may join the Spanish soldiery, _capitan_--if you will take us." - -"Ha!" The Spanish officer tugged at his heavy mustache. He was only a -sergeant, but it pleased him to be called captain. "Why did you not -come into the car instead of sneaking around outside? If you want to -become soldiers we will take you along fast enough. But you must not -play us false. Come up here." - -"I am afraid--I may fall off," answered Alano's father, in a trembling -voice. - -All the while the conversation had been carried on he had been peering -sharply ahead for the meadow and the water to appear. We now shot out -of the woods, and on either side could be seen long stretches of swamp. -He turned to us and spoke in English. "All ready to jump?" - -"Yes," we answered in concert. - -"Then jump--all together!" - -And away we went, leaving the rude steps of the freight cars with an -impetus that took each several yards from the tracks. I made a straight -leap and landed on my feet, but as quickly rolled over on my shoulder -in the wet grass. Burnham came close to me, but took a header, which -filled his nose and one ear with black mud. Alano and his father were -on the opposite side of the track. - -A pistol shot rang out, followed by half a dozen more, but the bullets -did not reach any of us. In a moment the long train had rolled out of -sight. We watched its rear light for fully an eighth of a mile, when it -disappeared around a bend behind a bit of upland. - -"Hullo, Mark, how are you?" It was the voice of Alano, who came up on -the tracks directly the freight had passed. He was not hurt in the -least. Captain Guerez had scratched one arm on a bit of low brush, but -outside of this the entire party was uninjured. - -"Come now, follow me; there is no time to be lost," said the captain. -"Those soldiers may take it into their heads to have the train run back -in search of us." - -"Yes, that's true," said Burnham. "Which way now?" - -"We'll walk back on the tracks until we reach dry ground." - -The plunge into the wet meadow had completed the work of the rain in -soaking us to the skin, but as the night was warm we did not mind this. -Keeping our eyes on the alert for more Spanish sentries, we hurried -along the railroad embankment for a distance of several hundred yards. -Then we left the tracks and took a trail leading southward. - -Our various adventures for the past few hours had completely exhausted -Burnham, while the others of the party were greatly fatigued. The -newspaper man was in favor of stopping under a clump of palm trees and -resting, but Captain Guerez demurred. - -"We'll reach a hut or a house ere long," he said. "And there the -accommodations will be much better." - -"Well, we can't reach a resting-place too soon," grumbled Burnham. -"I can scarcely drag one foot after the other, and it's so close my -clothing is fairly steaming." - -"You are no worse off than any of us," I made answer, as cheerfully as -I could. - -The highway was a stony one, and the rains had washed away what little -dirt there was, making walking difficult. However, we had not very far -to go. A turn brought us in sight of a long, low house built of logs -and thatched with palm; and Captain Guerez called a halt. - -"I'll go forward and investigate," he said. "In the meantime be on -guard against anybody following us from the railroad." - -He was gone less than quarter of an hour, and on returning said it -was all right. A very old man named Murillo was in sole charge of the -house, and he was a strong Cuban sympathizer. - -The place reached, we lost no time in divesting ourselves of a portion -of our clothing and making ourselves comfortable in some grass hammocks -spread between the house posts. - -"We ought to start early in the morning," I said, my thoughts still on -my father. - -"We will start at four o'clock," announced Captain Guerez. "So make the -most of your rest." - -The captain had intended to divide up the night into watches, but -Murillo came forward and volunteered to stand guard. - -"You go to sleep," he said in Spanish. "I sleep when you are gone. I -know how to watch." - -Feeling the old man could be trusted, we all retired. In a few minutes -Burnham was snoring, and shortly after the others also dropped asleep. - -It lacked yet a few minutes of four o'clock in the morning when Murillo -came stealing into the house and shook everyone by the shoulder. - -"Spanish soldiers down by the railroad," he explained hurriedly. "They -intend to come up this road." - -"Then let us be off!" cried Captain Guerez. - -All of us were already arranging our toilets. In a few seconds we were -ready to leave, and Murillo was paid for the trouble he had taken in -our behalf. - -"Have they horses?" asked Captain Guerez; and Murillo nodded. - -"Then come, all of you!" cried Alano's father. He started out of the -door, and we came after him. Hardly, however, had he taken a dozen -steps than he pushed each of us behind a clump of bushes. - -"Soldiers!" he muttered. "They are coming from the opposite direction!" - -"We are caught in a trap!" exclaimed Alano. "We cannot go back, and we -cannot go forward." - -"Here is a how d'ye do!" put in Burnham. "I'm sure I don't want to take -to those beastly swamps." - -Murillo had followed us to the doorway. His face took on a troubled -look, for he wanted us to get away in safety. - -"More soldiers coming the other way!" he cried. "What will you do? Ah, -I have it! Come into the house at once?" - -"But what will you do?" queried Captain Guerez impatiently. - -"I'll show you. Come, and you shall be safe." - -The old man spoke so confidently that we followed him inside at once. -Pushing aside a rude table which stood over a rush matting, he caught -hold of a portion of the flooring. A strong pull, and up came a -trapdoor, revealing a hole of inky darkness beneath. - -"Into that, all of you!" he cried; and down we went, to find ourselves -in a rude cellar about ten feet square and six feet deep. As soon as -the last of us was down, Murillo replaced the trapdoor, matting, and -table, and we heard him throw off some of his clothing and leap into -one of the hammocks. - -We had been left in total darkness, and now stood perfectly still and -listened intently. Not more than three minutes passed, when we heard -the tramping of horses' hoofs on the rocky road. The house reached, the -animals came to a halt, and several soldiers dismounted. A rough voice -yelled out in Spanish: - -"Hullo, in there! Who lives here?" - -"I do," replied Murillo, with a start and a yawn, as though he had just -awakened from a long sleep. - -"Have you seen anything of four strangers around here?" - -"No, _capitan_." - -There was a pause, and the leader of the soldiers came tramping inside. - -"You are sure you are telling me the truth?" - -"Yes, _capitan_." - -"It is strange." - -The newcomer was about to go on, when a shout from outside attracted -his attention. The soldiers from the opposite direction had come up. -A short conference was held, of which, however, we heard nothing -distinctly. Then some of the soldiers came inside, and we heard their -heavy boots moving directly over our heads. - -"You say you saw nobody?" was again asked of Murillo. - -"No, _capitan_, not a soul. But then I have been asleep since evening. -I am an old man, and I need a great deal of rest." - -"You are lazy, no doubt," came with a rough laugh. "Andros, what do you -think?" - -"What should I think? There seems to be no one around. We might make a -search." - -"Yes, we'll do that. It can do no harm. Tell the other men to scour the -woods and brush." - -The order was given; and a moment later those who had first come in -began to search the house. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIII. - -CAPTAIN GUEREZ MAKES A DISCOVERY. - - -We listened in much consternation while the soldiers overhead moved -from one portion of the dwelling to another. Would they discover us? - -"Be prepared for anything!" whispered Captain Guerez, and they were the -only words spoken. - -There was no second story to the house, so the search through the rooms -took but a few minutes, and the soldiers came to a halt around the -table. - -"I suppose you are a rebel," said the officer abruptly to Murillo. - -"I am an old man, _capitan_; I wish to end my days in peace." - -"I know your kind." The officer paused. "Well, comrades, we may as well -be on our way." - -These words caused me to utter a deep sigh of relief. They had not -discovered us, and now they were going away. But the next words sent a -chill down my backbone. - -"Can there be a cellar under the house?" questioned one of the others. - -"There is no cellar," said Murillo simply. "There is a little hole, -half full of water. You can look down if you wish." - -"We will." - -What could it mean? We held our breath as the old man led the way to -the apartment used as a kitchen. We heard him raise another trapdoor, -some distance behind us. - -"Humph! A man would be a fool to get in there!" we heard the officer -remark, and then the trap was dropped again into place. "We will go." - -The soldiers passed through the kitchen and toward the front door. One -of them must have taken a last look around, for suddenly he uttered a -cry. - -"Ha! what is this? A collar and a tie! Do you wear these?" - -"Confound it, my collar and tie," murmured Burnham. "I knew I forgot -something." - -"They belong to my nephew," said Murillo calmly. - -"Your nephew? Where is he?" - -"He is now at Baiquiri at work on one of the shipping wharves." - -"He must dress well?" remarked the officer dryly. - -"Alfredo earns much money. He was educated at the college." - -The officer tapped the floor with his heavy boot. "You tell a good -story," he said. "Beware lest we find you have been lying. Come!" The -last word to his companions. - -The soldiers went outside, and we heard a call to the men sent out into -the woods and brush. A few minutes later there followed the sounds of -horses' hoofs receding in the distance. - -"Now we can get out of this hole, thank goodness!" burst out Burnham. - -"Wait--Murillo will inform us when the coast is clear," said Captain -Guerez. - -Fully five minutes passed before the old man raised the trap. His face -wore a satisfied smile. - -"We fooled them nicely, did we not, _capitan_?" he said. - -"You did well, Murillo," said Alano's father. "Here is a gold piece for -your trouble." - -But the old man drew back, and would not accept the coin. "I did it not -alone for you," he said. "_Cuba libre!_" - -We all thanked him heartily, and then Alano's father asked him in what -directions the two bodies of soldiers had gone. That from the railroad -had taken the highway to Canistero. - -"We will have to take another road, not quite so short," said Captain -Guerez. "It is unfortunate, Mark, but it cannot be helped. Forward!" - -Much refreshed by our night's rest, we struck out rapidly, and by -noon calculated that we had covered eight miles, a goodly distance in -that hilly district. A little before noon we came out on a clearing -overlooking a long stretch of valley and swamp lands. - -"Just below here is the village of San Luardo," said the captain. "It -is there we ought to find out something concerning your father. It may -be possible he is quartered somewhere in the village, that is, if the -journey to Santiago has been delayed." - -"Is the village under guard?" I questioned anxiously, my heart giving a -bound when I thought how close to my parent I might be. - -"Yes, every village in this district is under Spanish rule." - -"Then how can we get in?" - -"I have been trying to form a plan," was the slow answer. "Let us get a -little closer, and I will see what can be done." - -We descended from the clearing, and just before noon reached the -outskirts of the village. The captain had been right; two companies of -freshly imported soldiers were in control of San Luardo. - -As we surveyed the situation from a bit of woodland, we heard the heavy -creaking of an ox-cart on the stony road. Looking down we saw the -turnout coming slowly along, loaded with hay and straw, probably for -the horses of the Spanish soldiers. - -"I will go into town in that!" cried Captain Guerez. "Stop that -fellow!" and he indicated the driver. - -A rush was made, and the ox-cart came to a sudden halt. When the -dirty fellow who drove it saw us he turned pale, but a few words from -Alano's father soon reassured him, and he readily consented to allow -the captain to hide himself under the hay and straw and thus pass the -guards. The driver was working for the Spaniards, but his heart was -with the insurgents. - -Stripping himself of his coat and everything else which gave him a -military appearance, Captain Guerez rubbed a little dirt on his face, -neck, and hands, leaped into the ox-cart, and dove beneath the straw. -If discovered, he intended to explain that he was out of work and was -willing to do anything the Spaniards desired. - -Once more the cart creaked on its way toward the village, and we were -left alone. Withdrawing to a safe and cool shelter, we sat down to rest -and to await the captain's return. - -"I wish I could have gone along," I said to my chum. - -"Father can do the work better alone," replied Alano, who had great -faith in his parent's ability. - -"Perhaps so. He wouldn't want me anyway--after the mess I made of it -when I discovered Mr. Burnham." - -"Mess!" cried the newspaper man. "Why, it was through you that I -escaped, my boy. You're all right. But I fancy Captain Guerez knows -just exactly what he wishes to do, and probably one person can do it -better than two." - -"The fact that you are an American would make everyone regard you with -suspicion," added Alano. - -Two hours went by, which to me seemed a day, and then came a peculiar -whistle from the road. At once Alano leaped to his feet. - -"My father is back!" he announced, and we ran forth to meet the -captain. At first we hardly knew him, for he had taken some grease and -some burnt cork and transformed himself into a negro. He was out of -breath, and one of his hands was much scratched. - -"I had a narrow escape," he panted. "Come with me! There is not a -moment to lose!" - -Although almost out of breath, he ran off, and we went with him through -the woods and up the side of a small hill, which course took us around -San Luardo. Not until the town was left well behind did the captain -stop and throw himself on a patch of deep grass. He was too exhausted -to speak, yet he saw my anxiety and smiled. - -"Don't worry, Mark; so far your father is safe," were his brief words. - -"That's good!" I cried, with a weight lifted from my heart, for during -the wait I had conjured up any number of dreadful thoughts concerning -my parent. - -"Yes, so far he is safe. They have him a prisoner at San Luardo, but -they intend to remove him to Santiago before nightfall." - -"Before nightfall!" My heart seemed to stop beating. "How will they do -it? Can't we stop them and rescue him?" - -"We must rescue him," was the reply. "That is why I hurried back. If -they get him to Santiago he will be--that is, Mark, I am afraid you -will never see him alive again." - -I understood Captain Guerez only too well. My father was doomed to die -the death of a spy, and he would be shot very shortly after his removal -to the seaport town. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIV. - -THE DOGS OF CUBAN WARFARE. - - -In a few minutes Alano's father recovered sufficiently to tell his -story. He had entered the village in safety, and soon put himself into -communication with several citizens who were Cuban sympathizers. From -one of these he had learned that my father was being kept a prisoner -in what had formerly been a cattle-house, but which was now doing duty -as a Spanish prison. No one was allowed to talk to the prisoners, but -by bribing the man who owned the building the captain had succeeded -in getting word to my father that he was around and that I was with -him, and that both of us intended to do all in our power to effect his -release. - -This word having been passed to my parent, Captain Guerez has set -about perfecting a plan whereby my father might be supplied with tools -for freeing himself, and also a pistol. But in this work he had been -discovered, and a struggle and flight followed. Luckily, the Spaniards -had not discovered whom he was working for in particular, there being a -dozen prisoners in the same building, so it was not likely my parent -would suffer in consequence. - -"We must watch the road to Santiago," said Captain Guerez, when he had -finished, washed himself, and had a refreshing drink of water. "It is -our one chance." - -"If only we had horses!" put in Alano. - -"We must find animals, my son." - -The captain spoke decidedly. "Necessity knows no law," and it was easy -to see he intended to obtain the horses--if not in one way, then in -another. Of course I did not blame him. To me it seemed a matter of -life and death. - -As rapidly as we could, we made our way around the hills to the -Santiago road. We had just reached it when Burnham, who was slightly in -advance, halted us and announced a camp off to our left. Captain Guerez -surveyed the situation and smiled. - -"Cattle dealers," he said. "They have brought in horses to sell to the -Spanish authorities. I'll make a deal with them." - -He went off, with Alano at his side. Instead of following, Burnham and -I concealed ourselves in the bushes, to watch who might pass on the -highway to the seaport town. There was no telling when those who had my -father in custody would be along. - -It was a long while before the captain and my chum came back, but when -they did each rode a strong horse and led another behind. Burnham and -I were soon in the saddle; and then all of us felt safer, for being -in the saddle would place us in a position equally as good as that -occupied by any of our enemies. - -"Look well to your pistols," said the captain. "It may be that a sharp -and wild dash will be the only way in which Mark's father can be -rescued." - -"I hope the guard having him in charge is not too large," I answered, -as I did as he suggested. - -"We'll all hope that, Mark." - -With pistols ready for use, we ranged up behind a heavy clump of trees -and awaited the coming of the guard from San Luardo. I was on pins and -needles, as the saying goes, and started up at the slightest sound. For -this Burnham poked fun at me; yet he himself was on the alert, as I -could see by the way he compressed his lips and worked at the ends of -his mustache. - -"Hark!" said Captain Guerez presently, and we all sat like statues and -listened. From down the road came the tramp of a dozen or more horses -and mules. The guard with the prisoners was advancing. The decisive -moment was at hand. I swallowed a strange lump in my throat and -grasped my pistol tighter. For my father's sake I would fight to the -bitter end. - -From out of a cloud of dust rode a vidette, heavily armed and with -his eyes and ears on the alert for anything which might sound or look -suspicious. As he came nearer we drew back behind the trees, and -Captain Guerez motioned us to absolute silence. - -The vidette passed, and then the main body of the guard came on. There -were three soldiers in front and three behind, and between rode two -prisoners on mules, both whites and evidently Americans. I strained my -eyes to their utmost, and soon distinguished my father's familiar face -and form. - -My father! The sight thrilled me to the soul, and I had all I could do -to restrain myself from riding forth to meet him. An exclamation came -to my lips, but the hand of my chum checked it, while a look from him -told plainer than words that he realized how I felt. - -"Attention!" whispered Captain Guerez. "Are you all prepared to fight? -I think these guards are raw recruits, and if so a few volleys will -cause them to take to their heels." - -"I am ready," I said grimly. - -"And I," added Alano. - -"You can count on me," put in Burnham. - -"Very well. I will take the first fellow to the left. Alano, you take -the second; Mark, you the third; and you, Burnham, take any one in the -rear you choose." - -"I'll take the middle guard," muttered the newspaper man. - -"I know you can all fire well, so aim for the sword arm," went on the -captain. "There is no necessity for killing the fellows, unless it -comes to close quarters. Ready? Take aim--fire!" - -The words "Take aim!" had been spoken aloud, causing several of the -guards to draw rein in alarm. At the command to fire, our pistols -blazed away simultaneously, and our several aims were so good that four -of the guards were hit, three in the arms and one in the side. - -"Forward, and fire again!" shouted the gallant captain, and out of the -clearing we dashed, discharging our weapons a second time. - -The detachment of Spanish soldiers was taken completely by surprise. -The lieutenant in command had been wounded, and when he saw us coming -from the woods he imagined we must outnumber his men, for he gave a -hasty order to retreat, and led the way. For a third time we fired, -and scarcely had the echo died among the hills than every one of the -soldiers was going back the way he had come, as rapidly as his horse -would carry him, the vidette, who had turned also, going with them. - -"Mark!" cried my father, when he saw me. "Is it possible!" - -"Father!" was all I could say. With my knife I cut the rawhide thongs -which bound him to the mule's back, and in a second more we were in -each other's arms. The other prisoner was also released, and both were -speedily provided with weapons. - -"We must not lose time here--follow me!" shouted Captain Guerez. "You -can talk all you please later on," he added to me and my happy parent. - -All of us followed him back into the woods, and along a trail which he -declared must bring us to another seaport town, eight miles to the east -of Santiago Bay. We put spurs to our steeds, and long before nightfall -half a dozen miles of the uneven way had been covered. - -As fast as we were able to do so, my father and I rode side by side, -and never had I felt happier than then, while he was equally pleased. -As we journeyed along I told my story from beginning to end, and then -he told his own--how he had been captured and taken for a spy, how -cruelly he had been treated, and all. Just before he had received -Captain Guerez' message he had given up all hope, and even while on the -road he had been fearful that the plan to rescue him would miscarry. - -"What do you think we had best do?" I asked, after our stories were -told. - -"I wish to get out of the country as soon as possible, Mark. I cannot -stand the climate. Half a dozen times I have felt as if I was going to -be taken down with the fever. That injured leg took away a good bit of -my strength." - -"Can we take passage from the town to which we are bound?" - -"We can try," answered my father. - -Another half-mile was covered, and we were beginning to consider that -we had made good our retreat from the spot where the encounter with the -Spanish soldiers had occurred, when suddenly a deep baying broke out at -our rear, causing Alano and the captain to give a simultaneous cry of -alarm. - -"What is it?" asked Burnham. - -"What is it!" was the answer from the captain. "Can't you hear? The -heartless wretches have set several bloodhounds on our trail!" - -"Bloodhounds!" we echoed. - -"Yes, bloodhounds!" ejaculated Alano. "Hark! there must be three, if -not four, of the beasts!" - -"Will they attack us--on horseback?" - -"Certainly--they'll fly right at a fellow's throat." - -"But how can they track us--we have not been on foot." - -"They are tracking the mules Señor Carter and Señor Raymond ride," put -in Captain Guerez. "Hark! they are coming nearer! In a few minutes more -they will be upon us! Out with your pistols and fight the beasts as -best you can. It is our only hope!" - - - - -CHAPTER XXXV. - -THE LAST OF THE BLOODHOUNDS. - - -The announcement that the bloodhounds would soon be upon us filled me -with dread. I had had one experience with this class of beasts, and I -did not wish to have another. I looked around at our party and saw that -the others, even to the captain, were as agitated as myself. A Cuban -dreads an unknown bloodhound worse than a native African does a lion or -an American pioneer does a savage grizzly bear. - -"Have your pistols ready!" went on the captain, when an idea came into -my head like a flash, and I turned to him. - -"If they are following the mules, why not turn the mules into a side -trail?" I said. "My father can ride with me, and Mr. Raymond can double -with somebody else." - -"A good idea!" cried Captain Guerez. "Quick, let us try it." - -In a twinkle my father had leaped up behind me, and Alano motioned Mr. -Raymond to join him. A small side trail was close at hand, and along -this we sent the mules at top speed, cutting them deeply with our -whips to urge them along. - -"Now to put distance between them and ourselves!" cried my father, and -once more we went on. As we advanced we listened to the bloodhounds. In -a few minutes more we heard them turn off in the direction the mules -had taken, and their bayings gradually died away in the distance. Then -we slackened our speed a bit, and all breathed a long sigh of relief. - -"That was a brilliant idea, my boy!" said Mr. Raymond warmly. "Mr. -Carter, you have a son to be proud of." - -"I am proud of him," said my father, and he gave my arm a tight -squeeze. From that moment on, Mr. Raymond, who was a business man from -the West, became my warm friend. - -It must not be supposed that we pursued our journey recklessly. Far -from it. The captain rode in advance continually, and on several -occasions called a halt while he went forward to investigate. But -nothing offered itself to block our progress, and late that night, -saddle-weary and hungry, we came in sight of the seaport town for which -we were bound. - -"I believe the bark _Rosemary_ is in port here," said Mr. Raymond. "And -if that is so, we ought to be able to get on board, for I know the -captain well." - -"Then that will save us a good deal of trouble," replied my father. -"But of course we can't go aboard openly--the Spanish authorities -wouldn't allow that." - -How to get into the town unobserved was a question. Finally Alano's -father said he would ride in as a horse dealer, taking all of our -animals with him. To disguise himself he dirtied his face once more, -and put on my hat and coat, both rather small for him. Then driving -three of the horses before him, he went on. - -We went into camp under some plantains, and it was not until three -o'clock in the morning that Captain Guerez came back. He returned with -a smile on his face, for he had sold two of the worst of the steeds at -a good price and had in addition found the _Rosemary_ and interviewed -her captain. - -"The captain said he couldn't do anything for you to-night," he -explained. "But to-morrow, if it is dark, he will send a rowboat up -the shore to a rock he pointed out to me with his glass. You are to be -at the rock at one o'clock sharp--if it's dark. If it is not, you are -to wait until the next night. He says to try to come on board from the -quay will only bring you to grief." - -"Good for Captain Brownley!" cried Mr. Raymond. "I felt sure he would -not go back on me. Once on board, Mr. Carter, and the three of us will -be safe." - -"There is, therefore, nothing to do but to wait," went on Captain -Guerez. "I shall see you safe off, and then return to Father Anuncio's -convent with Alano and join the rest of my family once more." - -As soon as it was light we rode and tramped through the woods and the -swamps to the seacoast, where it did not take long to locate the rock -the captain of the _Rosemary_ had pointed out to Captain Guerez. This -accomplished, we retired to a near-by plantain grove, there to eat and -rest, and spend a final day together. - -The thought of parting with my chum was a sad one, yet I felt it my -duty to remain with my father. Alano was also affected, and often -placed his brown hand affectionately on my shoulder while we conversed. - -"Let us both hope that this cruel and senseless warfare will soon -cease, and that Cuba will be free," I said. - -"Yes, Mark, and that we will soon be together again," he replied. "I -hope your journey proves a safe one; and when you get back you must -remember me to all of the other boys." - -"I'll do it; and you must remember me to your mother and your two -sisters," I said. - -With it all, however, the day passed somewhat slowly, for we were -impatient to see what the night would bring forth. The sun set clearly, -and soon the heavens were bespangled with countless stars. - -Mr. Raymond shook his head. "Captain Brownley won't risk coming -to-night," he remarked. "They could easily spot a boat from the town -shore, it is so clear." - -But about ten o'clock it began to cloud over, and at eleven it started -to rain, a gentle but steady downpour. Not a star remained, and out on -the water it was as dark as Erebus. - -"A kind Providence is with us!" cried my father. "We could not possibly -imagine a better night." - -Slowly the time wore on, until Captain Guerez' watch indicated ten -minutes to one. We sat close beside the rock, paying no attention to -the rain, although it was gradually soaking us to the skin. - -"Here they come!" whispered my father, and a few seconds later a -rowboat containing four sailors loomed up through the darkness. As -silently as a shadow the boat glided up past the rock and into the -swamp grass. - -"On time, I see," said Mr. Raymond, as he advanced. "Is Captain -Brownley here?" - -"No, he's watching at the ship, and will give us the signal when to -come aboard," replied one of the sailors, who was in command. "Come -aboard, if you are ready, sir." - -"We are," said my father. - -There was a short but affectionate good-by on both sides. Captain -Guerez wrung my hand tightly, and I gave Alano a warm squeeze. Then Mr. -Raymond, Burnham, father, and myself stepped into the rowboat, and the -sailors pushed off with their long oars. In another instant the craft -swung clear of the shore and was turned in the direction from whence we -had come. I was going to cry out a last parting to my chum, when the -sailor sitting nearest checked me. - -"Be silent, my lad; if we're discovered we'll all be shot." - -"Yes," put in my father, "don't make a sound. Leave everything to these -men. They have their instructions and know what they are doing." - -On and on over the Bay of Guantanamo glided the rowboat. The rain still -came down, and if anything the night was blacker than ever. I wondered -how the sailors could steer, until I saw one of them consulting a -compass which lay in the bottom of the craft, looking it by the rays of -a tiny dark-lantern. - -I reckoned that the best part of half an hour had gone by, when the -sailors rested on their oars, while one took up a night-glass. For five -minutes he waited, then put the glass down. - -"It's all right," he whispered. "Let fall. No noise now, on your life!" - -Forward went our craft again, and now I noticed that each oar was bound -with rubber at the spot where it touched the rowlock, to keep it from -scraping. Thus we moved onward in absolute silence. - -From out of the darkness we now saw a number of lights, coming from -the town and the shipping. A few minutes later we ran up to the dark -hull of a large vessel. A rope ladder was thrown down to us, and a -sailor whispered to us to go up. We followed directions as rapidly as -we could, and once on the deck we were hurried below, while the rowboat -was swung up on the davits. - -"Ah, Mr. Raymond, glad to see you!" said Captain Brownley, a bluff New -Englander, as he extended his hand. "A fine night to come on board." -And then he turned to us and we were introduced. - -The _Rosemary_ was bound for Philadelphia, but would not sail for three -days. She was under strict Spanish watch, so it was necessary for us -to keep out of sight. We were locked in a stateroom, but made as -comfortable as circumstances permitted. - -From time to time during the three days the captain came to us with -various bits of news. One was to the effect that the Spanish detachment -which had had my father and Mr. Raymond in charge had reported a -conflict with a Cuban force fifty or sixty strong. Another was that -the United States had declared war upon Spain and was going to bombard -Havana. - -"I wonder if it is true that we are to fight Spain?" I said to Burnham. -"What do you think?" - -"We ought to fight Spain," answered the newspaper man. "Cuba deserves -her freedom, and if she can't help herself against Spanish imposition -and brutality we ought to give her a friendly hand." - -We talked the matter over at some length; but neither of us knew the -truth--that war was really declared, and that not Havana, but Santiago, -was to be attacked by the time the year was half over. - -At last came the hour when the ship's anchors were hove apeak and the -sails were set. We sailed at high noon, and, having a good wind, soon -passed outside of Guantanamo Bay, which, as my readers may know, is -situated but a few miles to the eastward of Santiago Bay. - -"Free at last!" cried my father, as he came on deck to get the fresh -air. "I must say I am not sorry to leave Cuba--since the times have -grown so troublesome." - -He had scarcely spoken when a small Spanish revenue cutter hove in -sight, steaming down the coast evidently from Santiago Bay. While -Captain Brownley was examining the craft, there was a flash of fire, -and a dull boom sounded over the water. - -"Great Scott! What does that mean?" demanded Burnham, leaping up from -his seat near the rail. - -"It's an order to heave to," answered Captain Brownley grimly. "We are -not yet out of the woods, it would seem." - -"Then that means for us to get out of sight again," said my father, -and, as the captain nodded, the four of us ran for the companion-way, -descended to the cabin, and secreted ourselves in the cabin pantry. - -Five minutes later the Spanish revenue cutter steamed alongside, and -we heard the tramp of half a dozen strange pairs of feet on the deck -above. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVI. - -CAST INTO A SANTIAGO DUNGEON. - - -"Those fellows evidently mean business," whispered Mr. Raymond, as an -angry discussion drifted down to us. "Is it possible they got wind that -we are on board?" - -"Let us hope not," shuddered my father. "Hist! they are coming down -into the cabin!" - -After this we remained as quiet as mice, hardly daring to breathe. -We heard loud talking, partly in Spanish and a few words in very bad -English. "I know they are here," growled one Spaniard. "We shall make a -large hunt, _capitan_." - -"If you insist, I cannot help myself," answered Captain Brownley. "But -it is a most unusual proceeding." - -At this the Spaniard muttered something in his own language. He began -to hunt in one direction, while his followers hunted in another. Soon -two of the men came to the pantry and forced the door. We tried to -escape observation, but could not manage it, and were ordered forth at -the point of several long pistols. - -"Ha! as I suspected! All _Americanos_!" muttered the Spanish commander -of the revenue cutter. "A fine haul! A fine haul, indeed!" - -Then turning to his second in command he issued orders that some irons -be brought on board. At the same time a dozen Spanish marines from the -cutter were formed in line, with loaded carbines, to cover the crew of -the _Rosemary_. - -"I place all of you under arrest," said the Spanish captain. -"You"--pointing to my father, Burnham, Mr. Raymond, and myself--"as -spies; and you and your men"--this to Captain Brownley--"as enemies of -Spain, assisting these spies to escape." - -In vain Captain Brownley tried to argue the matter. The Spanish -commander would not listen to a word. "The Yankee pigs have declared -war on us!" he burst out at last. "Now let them take care of -themselves." - -"Then war is really declared?" came from several of us simultaneously. - -"Yes, war has been declared. More than that, we have already -whipped the Yankee pigs who dared to attack our noble ships in the -Philippines," said the Spaniard bombastically. - -But, as all American boys know, the Spaniard was mistaken. The American -squadron under Commodore, afterward Admiral, George Dewey, was not -defeated. Instead, it gained a most glorious victory, some of the -particulars of which will be related in a volume to follow this, of -which more later. - -The news was staggering, and while we talked it over among ourselves, -each of us was handcuffed, I being linked to Mr. Raymond, while my -father was linked to Burnham. Captain Brownley and his first mate -were also handcuffed, and the sailors were told to obey the Spanish -captain's orders or run the risk of being shot down. - -The announcement that a naval battle had been fought in the Philippines -seemed to worry Mr. Raymond a good deal. "I wonder if Oliver knows -anything of this?" he half muttered. - -"Oliver, who is he?" I asked. - -"Oliver is my son," answered the merchant. "He took a trip to China -a year ago, and from there went to Manila, the principal city of the -Philippines. I haven't heard of him for a number of months now. He is -perhaps a year older than you." - -"I never heard much of the Philippines," I answered. "I know they are -a good way off--somewhere between Australia, the Hawaiian Islands, and -China. Do they belong to Spain?" - -"Yes, but she is having as much trouble to hold them as she is having -to hold Cuba." - -We were now ordered to keep silent, and compelled to march from the -cabin of the _Rosemary_ to the deck of the Spanish vessel. Here we were -made to stand in a line, our weapons having previously been taken from -us. The course of the sailing vessel had been eastward toward Cape -Maysi, but now both craft were headed westward. - -"I'll wager we are bound for Santiago," murmured Burnham, who stood -beside me, and he was right, for in a little over an hour the narrow -entrance to Santiago Bay came into view, with Morro Castle, a famous -old fortress, standing high upon the rocks to the right. - -The bay is several miles long, and Santiago stands well in on the -northeast shore. The land-locked harbor was alive with vessels, but not -one of them floated the familiar Stars and Stripes of our own country. - -"There is where we made our way across the bay when first Alano Guerez -and I escaped from Santiago," I whispered. "I am afraid I'll not get -another such chance now." - -Soon one of the numerous docks in front of the city was reached, and we -were marched ashore. The news of our capture had spread, and a large -crowd of curiosity-seekers gathered, to jeer and pass all sorts of -unpleasant remarks. The city was now under stricter Spanish rule than -ever before, and as we marched from the dock to the city prison not -another American was to be seen. - -At the prison a brief examination was held. When it was learned that my -father was present, I was thrust aside and told that he could speak for -me. Yet he was allowed to say but little. The authorities were certain -that he, Burnham, and Mr. Raymond were spies, and the four of us were -sentenced to confinement in another prison several squares away--a low, -dingy pile of stone, every opening of which was heavily barred and -grated. - -Within this prison came the hardest parting of all. I was separated -from my father, and, when I remonstrated, received a sharp blow on my -shoulder from a jailer's sword. Mr. Raymond and I were paired off as -before, and conducted through a long stone passage-way and down a dirty -flight of steps. Sunshine and fresh air were left behind, and the way -was lit up by a smoky kerosene lamp. We were taken to a dungeon cell -several feet below the sidewalk and locked in, and then our jailer left -us. - -I was too overcome to speak when we were left alone. Mr. Raymond -strained his eyes and peered around at the four bare walls, the bare -ceiling overhead, and the stone flooring with its water pitcher and -heap of musty straw in one corner. - -"This is awful!" he murmured. "Mark, how long do you think you can -stand living in this place?" - -"No longer than I have to!" I cried. "I'll get out just as fast as ever -I can." - -"If we ever do get out!" he concluded significantly. - -The remainder of the day passed slowly. For supper the jailer brought -us some stale bread and some more water, no fresher than that already -in the pitcher. That night I did not sleep a wink. - -I expected that another examination would be held the next day, or, -at the latest, within a week; but I was doomed to disappointment. No -one but the jailer came near us, and he only to bring us our bread -and water and occasionally a stew of ill-flavored meat and potatoes, -reeking with garlic. Of this both of us tried bits of the potatoes, and -sometimes mouthfuls of the meat, but it was all we could do to choke -them down. - -"How long is this to last?" I asked Mr. Raymond one day, as both of us -walked up and down the narrow cell like two caged animals. - -"God alone knows, Mark," he answered. "If there is no change soon I -shall go mad!" - -"It is inhuman!" I went on. "A Christian would not treat a dog like -this." - -"They are very bitter against us Americans, Mark. Now the United States -have declared war against them, they must realize that Cuban freedom is -assured." - -Another week went on, and then we were taken up into the prison yard. -Here I saw my father,--thin, pale, and sick,--but I was not permitted -to converse with him. We were placed in two rows with a hundred other -prisoners, and inspected by General Toral, the military governor of -Santiago and surrounding territory. After the inspection we went back -to our various dungeon cells; and many weary weeks of close confinement -followed. - -One day a curious booming reached our ears, coming from we knew not -where. I heard it quite plainly, and called Mr. Raymond's attention to -it. - -"It is the discharging of cannon," he said. "And it is not a salute -either," he added, as the booming became more rapid and violent. - -It was not until long afterward that I learned the truth, that a fleet -of Spanish warships commanded by Admiral Cervera had been "bottled -up" in Santiago Bay by our own warships under Admiral Sampson and -Commodore Schley, and that the Yankee gunners were now trying what they -could do in the way of bombarding Morro Castle and the ships which lay -hidden from them behind the mountains at the harbor's entrance. - -The booming of cannon kept up for several hours and then died away -gradually, but a few days later the bombardment was continued. We -now felt certain that a battle of some sort was on, and Mr. Raymond -questioned the jailer. - -"The Yankee pigs will be well whipped," growled the fellow, and that -was all we could get out of him. - -Again the days lengthened into weeks, and nothing of importance -happened--to us. But in the outside world great events were taking -place. The entrance to Santiago Bay was being blockaded by the vessels -under Sampson's command, and an army of invasion was gathering at -Tampa, Fla., to land on the southeastern coast of Cuba and attack -Santiago from the rear. The army of invasion, under command of General -Shafter, was sixteen thousand strong, and left Tampa in between thirty -and forty transports. - -A landing of the army was effected at Baiquiri and other points, and -here General Shafter consulted with General Garcia, and it was decided -that about three thousand Cuban troops should co-operate with the -United States forces. Among the Cuban troops was the company commanded -by Alano's father; and my chum, let me add right here, was in the fight -from start to finish. - -The Spanish authorities now saw what the Americans were up to, and -without delay Santiago was fortified from end to end. Every road -leading from the city was barricaded with logs and earthworks, and -barriers of barbed wire were strung in various directions. Thousands -of Spanish troops had been gathered in the vicinity, and these were -hurried to San Juan Hill, El Caney, and other points of vantage just -outside of Santiago proper. - -As the American forces advanced closer and closer to the city Admiral -Cervera became anxious for the safety of his fleet. He knew that if -Santiago was captured there would be nothing left for him to do but to -try to escape from the bay, and that would mean to go forth and fight -the American warships stationed on the blockade beyond Morro Castle. - -One day the jailer came in evidently much depressed. We had expected -the usual stew that day, but got only a chunk of dry bread. "And you -are lucky to get even so much," said the Spaniard, as he hurried out. - -"Something has gone wrong," remarked Mr. Raymond, as he translated the -fellow's words to me. "I begin to believe that Santiago is suffering -some sort of an attack." - -He had hardly spoken when the dull booming of cannon broke once more on -our ears. It was a strange sound, and I threw myself down on our straw -bed to listen. - -I was half in a doze,--dreaming of my school days at Broxville,--when -suddenly came an awful crash that to me sounded like the crack of doom, -and the dungeon was filled with pieces of stone, dirt, and cement, and -a thick smoke that all but choked us. Mr. Raymond was hurled flat on -top of me, and for the space of several seconds neither of us could -speak or move. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVII. - -THE FALL OF THE SPANISH STRONGHOLD. - - -"Wha--what does this mean?" I managed to gasp at last. - -"The dungeon has been struck by a shell!" answered Mr. Raymond, -breathing with difficulty. "There is a bombardment going on!" - -"But we may be killed!" - -"Let us trust not, Mark. Are you hurt much?" - -"I have a cut in my cheek, and another in my left arm." - -"And I have a bad bruise in the right leg," answered my fellow -prisoner. "But still----Oh, Mark, look! The sunshine!" - -Mr. Raymond broke off short and pointed upward. He was right. The shell -which had torn up the sidewalk above us had left a hole in the dungeon -ceiling nearly a foot in diameter. - -"Can we get out?" I burst out eagerly. - -"Perhaps--but the city is in the hands of our enemies." - -"I don't care," I went on recklessly. "Anything is better than staying -here." - -"That is true." Mr. Raymond arose and measured the distance from the -hole to the cell floor. "It's all of ten feet, Mark." - -"Let me balance myself on your shoulders," I said, and now my athletic -training at the military school stood me in good stead. Mr. Raymond -raised me up into the air, and I caught the edge of the hole with ease. - -Yet to pull myself up was no mean task. But I worked desperately, and -finally found myself on the pavement. Crowds of people were rushing -hither and thither, and no one paid any attention to me. Slipping off -my jacket, I let down one sleeve. - -"Take hold of that, and I'll pull you up!" I cried to Mr. Raymond; and -he did as bidden, and soon stood beside me. - -A guard was now running toward us, and as he came on he discharged -his Mauser rifle, but the bullet flew wide of its mark. "_Halte!_" he -yelled, but we did nothing of the sort, but took to our heels and ran -as if the very Old Nick was after us. Our course soon took us into a -crowd of Cubans, and leaving these we made our way into a street which -was little better than an alleyway for width. Finding the door of a -house wide open, we slipped into the building and hid ourselves in an -apartment in the rear. - -All day long the tumult continued, but we could not learn what it was -about, excepting that a force of American soldiers were advancing -upon El Caney and San Juan. "If our forces take those hills," said Mr. -Raymond, "Santiago is doomed, for the heavy artillery and siege guns -can knock down every building here." - -"Then I hope we get out before the hills are taken," I answered. - -We remained in the building all day, and during that time I managed -to scrape up a loaf of bread and the larger part of a knuckle of ham, -besides several cocoanuts. On these we lived for the next twenty-four -hours, and we had more than many starving Cubans still staying in the -doomed city. - -As we waited for nightfall I wondered how my father was faring. It was -not likely that the prison had been struck more than once. Probably -he was still in his dungeon cell. Oh, if only I could get to him and -liberate him! - -But Mr. Raymond shook his head at the idea. "You would only be captured -yourself, Mark. Better try to escape with me to the American camp. If -Santiago is taken, your father will be sure to be liberated sooner or -later." - -I thought it over, and decided to accept his advice. We left the -building at eleven o'clock. The moon was shining, but it had been -raining and the clouds were still heavy in the sky. - -As silently as possible we stole along one street and then another -until the outskirts of Santiago were reached. Once we met a detachment -of Spanish soldiery, but avoided them by crouching behind an abandoned -barricade until they had passed. - -The hardest part of our task was still before us--that of getting -beyond the Spanish picket line. On and on we went, but now much slower, -for we felt that we were running not only the risk of capture but the -risk of being shot down without warning. - -At four o'clock in the morning we felt we could go no further for the -present and climbed into the limbs of a mahogany tree. We had been -sitting here several hours when suddenly a fierce rattle of musketry -rang out. It was the attack of General Lawton's infantry upon El Caney. -The attack had but fairly opened, when we saw the pickets around us -ordered forward and then to the right. The way was now open for us to -escape, and, descending to the ground, we hurried on, through the brush -and over the rocks, carefully to avoid any well-defined trail which the -Spaniards might be covering. - -An hour of hard traveling brought us to a valley to the north of -El Caney, and here we encountered a body of several hundred Cuban -soldiers. - -"Mark!" came the cry, and a moment later I found myself confronted by -Alano, while Captain Guerez sat on horseback but a short distance away. - -Now was no time to compare notes, and soon both Mr. Raymond and myself -were supplied with guns taken from several of the enemy that had died -on the field of battle. Then, with a good-by to Alano, I set off for -the American forces, accompanied by Mr. Raymond. - -The gallant attacks upon El Caney and San Juan hills are now matters of -history. All know how the brave boys of the American army were repulsed -several times, only to dash to the very tops of the hills at last, -carrying all before them, and causing the Spaniards to fall back to the -intrenchments before Santiago. - -We had fallen in with a body of Regulars sent to Cuba from the West, -and I think I can safely say that I never fought harder in my life than -on that day, and on the day following, when the Spaniards tried to -drive us from the position we had gained on the top of El Caney Hill. -I was in the very front in the final attack, and when it was all over -discovered that I had received a severe wound in the left arm, one from -which I have not fully recovered to the present time. - -The hills were now ours, and everywhere along the American lines it -was felt that Santiago was doomed. This was on the 2d of July. On -the 3d, early in the morning, Admiral Cervera attempted to escape -with his fleet from Santiago Bay by running the gantlet of United -States warships stationed outside. It was Sunday, and in less than -fifteen minutes after his first vessel appeared around the rocks of -Morro Castle, one of the fiercest naval battles of history was on. The -Spanish admiral had four powerful fighting ships and two torpedo-boat -destroyers, but they were no match for the warships under gallant -Commodore Schley, who was in command during Admiral Sampson's absence. -The enemy tried to escape by running along the shore westward, but the -fire from our side was too heavy; and in less than three hours the -battle was over, and all of the Spanish ships were either sunk or run -ashore, and over seven hundred men were taken prisoner. The loss to the -Americans was but one man killed and no ship seriously injured! - -What a cheer went up when the news of the Spanish fleet's destruction -reached the soldier boys! The hooraying lasted the best part of the -day, and many of the soldiers cut up like a lot of schoolboys just out -of school. It was a scene I shall never forget. - -Admiral Cervera had aided the Spanish army in the attack on our forces, -by throwing shells over Santiago into our ranks. Now he was gone, -Santiago was even more defenseless than ever, and General Shafter -immediately sent word to General Toral that unless he surrendered the -American artillery would bombard the city. - -There were several days of delay, and finally the Spanish general, -seeing how useless it would be to continue the fight, agreed to -surrender under certain conditions. These conditions were not accepted, -and another wait of several days took place--a time that to me seemed -an age, so anxious was I to get word concerning my father's welfare. - -At last, on the 14th of July, General Toral gave up the struggle, and -three days later the American troops marched into the city and hoisted -the glorious Stars and Stripes over the civic-government building. - -It was a grand time, never to be forgotten. As our boys came in -the soldiers of Spain went out, giving up their arms as they left. -Twenty-four hours later, I received an order which permitted me to call -upon my father and Burnham. - -"Mark! alive and well!" burst from my parent's lips on seeing me. "They -said you were dead--that a shell had killed you." - -"That shell did not kill me; it gave me my liberty," I answered, and -told my story, to which my father and Burnham listened with keen -interest. My father was much broken in health, and as soon as I could I -had him removed to a hotel, where care and good food soon restored him -to his accustomed vitality. - -The Cuban troops, as a body, were not permitted to come into Santiago -at once, the authorities fearing a riot between them and the Spaniards, -but Alano and his father visited us, and a joyous reunion was had all -around. - -"Cuba will be free now," said Captain Guerez. "If Spain knows when she -has enough, she will now bring this war to a close." - -Alano's father was right; the Santiago campaign was the first and last -to be fought by the American troops on Cuban soil, and soon after Spain -asked that a peace commission be appointed to settle the matter without -further appeal to arms. This was done; and the war ceased. Cuba was -granted her absolute freedom, with the United States to protect her -until all internal difficulties were settled and she was fully able to -manage her own affairs. - -Alano and his father remained in the Cuban army, and were later on -stationed but a short distance away from the plantation owned by -Captain Guerez. Thus they were near their home and able to visit -constantly the other members of the family, who at that time returned -to the plantation. Burnham remained in Santiago, reporting constantly -for the newspaper he represented. - -Two months after my father was released from prison we set sail for -the United States. Mr. Raymond accompanied us, and we made the trip -in the _Rosemary_, under our former friend Captain Brownley, who had -succeeded, though not without much difficulty, in having both himself -and his vessel released. - -"How good to be back home again!" I cried, as we stepped ashore. -"Foreign countries are all well enough, but as for me--give me our own -United States every time!" - -"You are right, Mark," answered my father. "There is no better place on -earth to live than in our own dear native land." - - * * * * * - -Here I bring to a close my story of adventures in Cuba during the -Cuban-Spanish conflict and the Spanish-American campaign. I had seen -many startling happenings, and was, as told above, heartily glad to -sail away and leave the Queen of the Antilles to carve out her future -without my aid. - -During my confinement with Mr. Raymond I had become much interested in -that gentleman and what he had to say concerning his son Oliver, then -supposed to be at Manila, where the first naval battle of our war with -the Dons had occurred. As a matter of fact, Oliver Raymond had been -with the Asiatic squadron when the fight came off, and the news he sent -to his father was truly interesting. But I will let him tell his own -tale in another volume, to be entitled "A Sailor Boy with Dewey; or, -Afloat in the Philippines," after which I will expect to be with my -readers again in still another story to be called "Off for Hawaii; or, -the Mystery of a Great Volcano." - -And now for the present, kind reader, good-by and good luck to you. - - -THE END. - - - * * * * * - - -Transcriber Note - - -Que, Què and Qué all appear once and left as is. Ciruso and Circuso are -each used once but may represent the same individual. Due to context, -granadilla (Passionfruit) on page 57 was assumed a typo for grenadillo -trees (p. 121). The images were repositioned so as to not split -paragraphs. The cover image was constructed from images provided by the -University of Michigan and The Internet Archive and is placed in the -Public Domain. - - - - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of When Santiago Fell, by -Captain Ralph Bonehill and Edward Stratemeyer - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHEN SANTIAGO FELL *** - -***** This file should be named 51798-8.txt or 51798-8.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/1/7/9/51798/ - -Produced by David Edwards, Tom Cosmas and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at -http://gutenberg.org/license). - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at -http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at -809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email -business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact -information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official -page at http://pglaf.org - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit http://pglaf.org - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - http://www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/51798-8.zip b/old/51798-8.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d836094..0000000 --- a/old/51798-8.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h.zip b/old/51798-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c970f16..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/51798-h.htm b/old/51798-h/51798-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 211450f..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/51798-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10619 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - When Santiago Fell, by Captain Ralph Bonehill, a Project Gutenberg eBook. - </title> - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover_epub.jpg" /> - <style type="text/css"> - -body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} - -p {margin-top: .75em; text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .75em; text-indent: 1.5em;} - -hr {width: 33%; color: #000; background-color:#000; - margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; - margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; clear: both;} - -hr.tb {width: 45%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin: 2em auto;} -hr.r10 {width: 10%;} - -table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; border-collapse: collapse;} -.toc td {padding: 0 1em;} -.pagenum {position: absolute; right: 3.5%; - font-size: small; text-align: right; color: #808080;} /* page numbers */ -.bbox {border: solid #000 1px;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} -.center {text-align: center; margin:0; text-indent: 0;} -.smaller {font-size: 0.8em;} -.gesspert {letter-spacing: 0.125em;} -.tdl {text-align: left;} -.tdr {text-align: right;} -.tdr2 {text-align: right; padding-right:2em;} -.tdl2 {text-align: left; padding-left:2em;} -.p0 {text-indent: 0;} -.ind2em {padding-left: 2em;} -h1, h2 {font-weight: bold; text-align: center; text-indent: 0;} -.caption2, .caption3 {font-weight: bold; text-align: center; text-indent: 0;} -.caption2 {font-size:1.50em; margin-top: 1em;} -.caption3 {font-size:1.25em; margin-top: 0.5em; padding-bottom: 1.0em;} -.caption4nb {font-size:1.15em; text-align: center; text-indent: 0; margin-top: 0.5em; padding-bottom: 1.0em;} -.pmt2 {margin-top: 2em;} -.pmt4 {margin-top: 4em;} -.pmb2 {margin-bottom: 2em;} -.pmb4 {margin-bottom: 4em;} - -/* Images */ - -.fig_center {margin: auto; text-align: center;} - -.fig_caption {font-weight: bold; font-size: 1.15em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: justify;} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.trans_notes {background-color: #e6e6fa; color: black; padding:1.5em; - margin-bottom:5em;} - - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of When Santiago Fell, by -Captain Ralph Bonehill and Edward Stratemeyer - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - - -Title: When Santiago Fell - or The War Adventures of Two Chums - -Author: Captain Ralph Bonehill - Edward Stratemeyer - -Release Date: April 19, 2016 [EBook #51798] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHEN SANTIAGO FELL *** - - - - -Produced by David Edwards, Tom Cosmas and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - - - - - -</pre> - - - - - - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 220px;"> -<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="220" height="344" alt="" /> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 410px;"> -<img src="images/frontis.png" width="410" height="638" alt="" /> -<div class="fig_caption">“A RUSH WAS MADE AND THE OX CART CAME TO A SUDDEN HALT.”</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[Pg i]</a></span></p> - - - - -<h1><a name="WHEN_SANTIAGO_FELL" id="WHEN_SANTIAGO_FELL">WHEN SANTIAGO FELL</a></h1> - -<p class="center">OR</p> - -<p class="caption2"><i>THE WAR ADVENTURES OF<br /> -TWO CHUMS</i></p> - -<p class="center">BY</p> - -<p class="caption2">CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL</p> - -<p class="center pmb2">AUTHOR OF “A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY,” “OFF FOR HAWAII,”<br /> -“GUN AND SLED,” “LEO, THE CIRCUS BOY,”<br /> -“RIVAL BICYCLISTS,” ETC.</p> - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 26px;"> -<img src="images/whorl.png" width="26" height="27" alt="whorl" /> -</div> - -<p class="caption3 gesspert pmt2">CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY</p> - -<p class="caption3 pmb4">NEW YORK, N. Y.</p> - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[Pg ii]</a></span></p> - - -<div class="bbox" style="width: 25em; margin:0 auto;"> - -<p class="caption3">BY THE SAME AUTHOR</p> - -<p class="p0 ind2em">WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS;<br /> - Or, A Young Scout among the Indians.<br /> -<br /> -BOYS OF THE FORT;<br /> - Or, A Young Captain’s Pluck.<br /> -<br /> -THE YOUNG BANDMASTER;<br /> - Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield.<br /> -<br /> -WHEN SANTIAGO FELL;<br /> - Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums.<br /> -<br /> -A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY;<br /> - Or, Afloat in the Philippines.<br /> -<br /> -OFF FOR HAWAII;<br /> - Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano.</p> - -<hr class="r10" /> - -<p class="center"><i>12mo, finely illustrated and bound in cloth.<br /> -Price, per volume, 60 cents.</i></p> - -<hr class="r10" /> - -<p class="caption4nb"><span class="smaller">NEW YORK</span><br /> - -CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY<br /> - -<span class="smaller">1905</span></p> - -</div> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap smaller">Copyright, 1899, by</span></p> - -<p class="center">THE MERSHON COMPANY</p> - - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[Pg iii]</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="PREFACE" id="PREFACE">PREFACE.</a></h2> - - -<p>“When Santiago Fell,” while a complete -story in itself, forms the first volume of a line to -be issued under the general title of the “Flag of -Freedom Series” for boys.</p> - -<p>My object in writing this story was to present -to American lads a true picture of life in the -Cuba of to-day, and to show what a fierce struggle -was waged by the Cubans against the iron-handed -mastery of Spain previous to the time -that our own glorious United States stepped in -and gave to Cuba the precious boon of liberty. -The time covered is the last year of the Cuban-Spanish -War and our own campaign leading up -to the fall of Santiago.</p> - -<p>It may be possible that some readers may -think the adventures of the two chums over-drawn, -but this is hardly a fact. The past few -years have been exceedingly bitter ones to all -living upon Cuban soil, and neither life nor -property has been safe. Even people who were -peaceably inclined were drawn into the struggle -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span> -against their will, and the innocent, in many -cases, suffered with the guilty.</p> - -<p>This war, so barbarously carried on, has now -come to an end; and, under the guiding hand of -Uncle Sam, let us trust that Cuba and her people -will speedily take their rightful place among the -small but well-beloved nations of the world—or, -if not this, that she may join the ever-increasing -sisterhood of our own States.</p> - -<p>Once more thanking my numerous young -friends for their kind reception of my previous -works, I place this volume in their hands, trusting -that from it they may derive much pleasure -and profit.</p> - -<p class="tdr2"><span class="smcap">Captain Ralph Bonehill.</span></p> - -<p class="tdl2"><i>January 1, 1899.</i></p> - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</a></span></p> - - -<h2>CONTENTS.</h2> - - -<table class="toc" summary="ToC"> -<tr> - <td class="tdl smaller">CHAPTER</td> - <td class="tdr smaller" colspan="2">PAGE</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">I.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Off for the Interior</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_I">1</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">II.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Escape from the Gunboat</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_II">8</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">III.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">In the Wilds of the Island</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">15</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">IV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">In a Novel Prison</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">22</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">V.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Lost among the Hills</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_V">30</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">VI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">From One Difficulty to Another</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">37</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">VII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Fooling the Spanish Guerrillas</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">45</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">VIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Andres</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">52</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">IX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Across the Canefields</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">59</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">X.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Council of the Enemy</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_X">66</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Wild Ride on Horseback</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">74</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Daring Leap</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">81</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Friends in Need</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">87</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XIV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">General Calixto Garcia</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">95</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Prisoner of War</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">102</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XVI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Rescue under Difficulties</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">108</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XVII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Treacherous Stream to Cross</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">116</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XVIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Alone</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">123</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XIX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Cave in the Mountain</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">130</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Señor Guerez</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">137</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Attack on the Old Convent</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">145</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Routing of the Enemy</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">154</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">On the Trail of My Father</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">161</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXIV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">In the Belt of the Firebrands</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV">168</a></td> - -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Escaping the Flames</span> - <span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</a></span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV">176</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXVI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Disheartening Discovery</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI">184</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXVII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Gilbert Burnham</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII">191</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXVIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Battle on Land and Water</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII">198</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXIX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Looking for my Cuban Chum</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX">205</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXX.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Once More among the Hills</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX">212</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Battle at the Railroad Embankment</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI">220</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Leap in the Dark</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII">229</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXIII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Captain Guerez Makes a Discovery</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIII">238</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXIV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Dogs of Cuban Warfare</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIV">244</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXV.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Last of the Bloodhounds</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXV">252</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXVI.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Cast into a Santiago Dungeon</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXVI">261</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdr">XXXVII.</td> - <td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Fall of the Spanish Stronghold</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXVII">271</a></td> -</tr> -</table> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1"></a></span></p> - - - - -<h1 class="pmt4">WHEN SANTIAGO FELL.</h1> - -<hr class="r10" /> - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">OFF FOR THE INTERIOR.</p> - - -<p>“We cannot allow you to leave this city.”</p> - -<p>It was a Spanish military officer of high rank -who spoke, and he addressed Alano Guerez and -myself. I did not understand his words, but -my companion did, and he quickly translated -them for my benefit.</p> - -<p>“Then what are we to do, Alano?” I questioned. -“We have no place to stop at in Santiago, -and our money is running low.”</p> - -<p>Alano’s brow contracted into a perplexing -frown. He spoke to the officer, and received a -few curt words in reply. Then the Spaniard -turned to others standing near, and we felt that -we were dismissed. A guard conducted us to -the door, and saluted us; and we walked away -from the headquarters.</p> - -<p>The reason for it all was this: Less than a -month before we had left the Broxville Military -Academy in upper New York State to join -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">« 2 »</a></span> -Alano’s parents and my father in Cuba. Alano’s -father was a Cuban, and owned a large sugar -plantation some distance to the eastward of -Guantanamo Bay. He was wealthy, and had -sent Alano to America to be educated, as many -rich Cubans do. As my father and Señor Guerez -were well acquainted and had strong business -connections, it was but natural that Alano -should be placed at the boarding school which -I attended, and that we should become firm -friends. For a long time we played together, -ate together, studied together, and slept together, -until at last as chums we became almost -inseparable.</p> - -<p>Some months back, and while the great -struggle for liberty was going on between the -Cubans and their rulers in Spain, certain business -difficulties had taken my father to Cuba. -During his stop in the island he made his home -for the greater part with Señor Guerez, and -while there was unfortunate enough during a -trip on horseback to fall and break his leg.</p> - -<p>This accident placed him on his back longer -than was first expected, for the break was a bad -one. In the meantime the war went on, and the -territory for many miles around Santiago de -Cuba was in a state of wild excitement.</p> - -<p>Not knowing exactly what was going on, -Alano wrote to his parents begging that he be -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">« 3 »</a></span> -allowed to come to them, and in the same mail -I sent a communication to my father, asking if -I could not accompany my Cuban chum. To -our delight the answer came that if we wished -we might come without delay. At the time -this word was sent neither Señor Guerez nor my -father had any idea that the war would assume -such vast proportions around Santiago, involving -the loss of many lives and the destruction of -millions of dollars of property.</p> - -<p>Alano and I were not long in making our -preparations. We left Broxville two days after -permission was received, took the cars to the -metropolis, and engaged immediate passage -upon the <i>Esmeralda</i> for Santiago de Cuba.</p> - -<p>We had heard of the war a hundred times on -the way, but even on entering the harbor of the -city we had no thought of difficulty in connection -with our journey on rail and horseback outside -of the city. We therefore suffered a rude -awakening when the custom-house officials, -assisted by the Spanish military officers, made -us stand up in a long row with other passengers, -while we were thoroughly searched from -head to foot. Each of us had provided himself -with a pistol; and these, along with the cartridges, -were taken from us. Our baggage, -also, was examined in detail, and everything in -the way of a weapon was confiscated.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">« 4 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“War means something, evidently,” was the -remark I made, but how much it meant I did -not learn until later. Our names were taken -down, and we were told to remain in the city -over night and report at certain headquarters in -the morning. We were closely questioned as -to where we had come from; and when I injudiciously -mentioned the Broxville Military -Academy, our questioner, a swarthy Spanish -lieutenant, glared ominously at us.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid you put your foot into it when -you said that,” was Alano’s comment at the -hotel that evening, when we were discussing our -strange situation. “They are on the watch for -people who want to join the insurgents.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps your father has become a rebel,” I -ventured.</p> - -<p>“It is not unlikely. He has spoken to me of -Cuban independence many times.”</p> - -<p>As might be expected, we passed an almost -sleepless night, so anxious were we to learn -what action the Spanish authorities would take -in our case. When the decision came, as noted -at the opening of this story, I was almost dumb-founded.</p> - -<p>“We’re in a pickle, Alano,” I said, as we -walked slowly down the street, lined upon either -side with quaint shops and houses. “We can’t -stay here without money, and we can’t get out.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">« 5 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“We must get out!” he exclaimed in a low -tone, so as not to be overheard. “Do you suppose -I am going to remain here, when my father -and mother are in the heart of the war district, -and, perhaps, in great danger?”</p> - -<p>“I am with you!” I cried. “For my father -is there too. But how can we manage it? I -heard at the hotel last night that every road -leading out of the city is well guarded.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll find a way,” he rejoined confidently. -“But we’ll have to leave the bulk of our baggage -behind. The most we can carry will be a -small valise each. And we must try to get hold -of some kind of weapons, too.”</p> - -<p>We returned to our hotel, and during the day -Alano struck up an acquaintanceship with a -Cuban-American who knew his father well. -Alano, finding he could trust the gentleman, -took him into his confidence, and, as a result, we -obtained not only a good pistol each,—weapons -we immediately secreted in our clothing,—but -also received full details of how to leave Santiago -de Cuba by crossing the bay in a rowboat -and taking to the woods and mountains -beyond.</p> - -<p>“It will be rough traveling,” said the gentlemen -who gave us the directions, "but you’ll find -your lives much safer than if you tried one of -the regular roads—that is, of course, after you -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">« 6 »</a></span> -have passed the forts and the gunboats lying in -the harbor."</p> - -<p>Both Alano and I were much taken with this -plan, and it was arranged we should leave the -city on the first dark night. Two days later it -began to rain just at sunset, and we felt our time -had come. A small rowboat had already been -procured and was secreted under an old warehouse. -At ten o’clock it was still raining and -the sky was as black as ink, and we set out,—I -at the oars, and Alano in the bow,—keeping the -sharpest of lookouts.</p> - -<p>We had agreed that not a word should be -spoken unless it was necessary, and we moved -on in silence. I had spent many hours on the -lake facing Broxville Academy, and these now -stood me in good stead. Dropping my oars -without a sound, I pulled a long, steady stroke -in the direction I had previously studied out.</p> - -<p>We were about halfway across the bay when -suddenly Alano turned to me. “Back!” he -whispered, and I reversed my stroke as quickly -as possible.</p> - -<p>“There is a gunboat or something ahead,” he -went on. “Steer to the left. See the lights?”</p> - -<p>I looked, and through the mists made out several -signals dimly. I brought the boat around, -and we went on our way, only to bring up, a -few seconds later, against a huge iron chain, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">« 7 »</a></span> -attached to one of the war vessels' anchors, for -the vessel had dragged a bit on the tide.</p> - -<p>The shock threw Alano off his feet, and he -tumbled against me, sending us both sprawling. -I lost hold of one of the oars, and at the same -moment an alarm rang out—a sound which -filled us both with fear.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">« 8 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE ESCAPE FROM THE GUNBOAT.</p> - - -<p>“We are lost!” cried Alano, as he sought to -pick himself up. “Oh, Mark, what shall we -do?”</p> - -<p>“The oar—where is that oar?” I returned, -throwing him from me and trying to pierce the -darkness.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. I—— Oh!”</p> - -<p>Alano let out the exclamation as a broad sheet -of light swept across the rain and the waters beneath -us—light coming from a search-lantern -in the turret of the gunboat. Fortunately the -rays were not lowered sufficiently to reach us, -yet the light was strong enough to enable me -to see the missing oar, which floated but a few -feet away. I caught it with the end of the other -oar, and then began pulling at the top of my -speed.</p> - -<p>But all of this took time, and now the alarm -on board of the war vessel had reached its -height. A shot rang out, a bell tolled, and several -officers came rushing to the anchor chains. -They began shouting in Spanish, so volubly I -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">« 9 »</a></span> -could not understand a word; and now was no -time to question Alano, who was doing his best -to get out a second pair of oars which we had, -fortunately, placed on board at the last moment. -He had often rowed with me on the lake at -Broxville; and in a few seconds he had caught -the stroke, and away we went at a spinning -speed.</p> - -<p>“They are going to fire on us!” he panted, -as the shouting behind increased. “Shall we -give up?”</p> - -<p>“Not on my account.”</p> - -<p>“Nor on mine. If we give up, they’ll put us -in prison, sure. Pull on!”</p> - -<p>And pull we did, until, in spite of the cold rain, -each of us was dripping with perspiration and -ready to drop with exhaustion.</p> - -<p>Boom! a cannon shot rang out, and involuntarily -both of us ducked our heads. But the -shot flew wide of its mark—so wide, in fact, that -we knew not where it went.</p> - -<p>“They’ll get out a boat next!” I said. -“Pull, Alano; put every ounce of muscle into -the stroke.”</p> - -<p>“I am doing that already,” he gasped. “We -must be getting near the shore. What about -the guard there?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to trust to luck,” I answered.</p> - -<p>Another shot came booming over the misty -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">« 10 »</a></span> -waters, and this time we heard the sizz of the -cannon ball as it hit the waves and sank. We -were now in the glare of the searchlight, but the -mist and rain were in our favor.</p> - -<p>“There is the shore!” I cried, on looking -around a few seconds later. “Now be prepared -to run for it as soon as the boat beaches!”</p> - -<p>With a rush our craft shot in between a lot of -sea grass and stuck her bow into the soft mud. -Dropping our oars, we sprang to the bow and -took long leaps to solid ground. We had -hardly righted ourselves when there came a call -out of the darkness.</p> - -<p>“<i>Quien va?</i>” And thus challenging us, a -Spanish soldier who was on guard along the -water’s edge rushed up to intercept our progress. -His bayonet was within a foot of my -breast, when Alano jumped under and hurled -him to the ground.</p> - -<p>“Come!” he cried to me. “Come, ere it is -too late!” and away we went, doing the best -sprinting we had ever done in our lives. Over -a marsh and through a thorny field we dashed, -and then struck a narrow path leading directly -into a woods. The guard yelled after us and -fired his gun, but that was the last we saw or -heard of him.</p> - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 509px;"> -<img src="images/page10f.png" width="509" height="352" alt="" /> -<div class="fig_caption">“AN ALARM RANG OUT, A SOUND WHICH FILLED US BOTH WITH FEAR.”</div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">« 11 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Fearful, however, of pursuit, we did not -slacken our pace until compelled to; and then, -coming to a thick clump of grass at the foot of -a half-decayed banana tree, we sank down completely -out of breath. I had never taken such -fearful chances on my life before, and I trusted -I would never have to do so again, little dreaming -of all the perils which still lay before us.</p> - -<p>“I believe we are safe for the present,” said -Alano, when he could get his breath. “I wonder -where we are?”</p> - -<p>“We’re in a very dark, dirty, and wet woods,” -I returned gloomily. “Have we got to remain -here all night?”</p> - -<p>“It’s better than being in a Spanish prison,” -replied my Cuban chum simply. “We can go -on after we are a bit rested.”</p> - -<p>The rain was coming down upon the broad -leaves of the banana tree at a lively rate, but -Alano said he thought it must be a clearing -shower, and so it soon proved to be. But -scarcely had the drops ceased to fall than a host -of mosquitoes and other insects arose, keeping -us more than busy.</p> - -<p>“We must get out of this!” I exclaimed, -when I could stand the tiny pests no longer. -“I’m being literally chewed up alive. And, -see, there is a lizard!” And I shook the thing -from my arm.</p> - -<p>“Oh, you mustn’t mind such things in -Cuba!” said Alano, laughing shortly. "Why, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">« 12 »</a></span> -we have worse things than that—snakes and alligators, -and the like. But come on, if you are -rested. It may be we’ll soon strike some sort of -shelter."</p> - -<p>Luckily, through all the excitement we had -retained our valises, which were slung across our -backs by straps thrown over the shoulder. -From my own I now extracted a large handkerchief, -and this served, when placed in my broad-brimmed -hat, to protect my neck and ears from -the insects. As for Alano, he was acclimated -and did not seem to be bothered at all.</p> - -<p>We pursued our way through the woods, and -then ascended a steep bank of clay, at the top -of which was a well-made road leading to the -northward. We looked up and down, but not -a habitation or building of any kind was in sight.</p> - -<p>“It leads somewhere,” said Alano, after a -pause. “Let us go on, but with care, for perhaps -the Spanish Government has guards even -as far out as this.”</p> - -<p>On we went once more, picking our way -around the numerous pools and bog-holes in -the road. The stars were now coming out, and -we could consequently see much better than -before.</p> - -<p>“A light!” I cried, when quarter of a mile -had been traversed. “See, Alano.”</p> - -<p>“It must be from a plantation,” he answered. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">« 13 »</a></span> -“If it is, the chances are that the owner is -a Spanish sympathizer—he wouldn’t dare to be -anything else, so close to the city.”</p> - -<p>“But he might aid us in secret,” I suggested.</p> - -<p>Alano shrugged his shoulders, and we proceeded -more slowly. Then he caught my arm.</p> - -<p>“There is a sugar-house back of that canefield,” -he said. “We may find shelter there.”</p> - -<p>“Anywhere—so we can catch a few hours' -nap.”</p> - -<p>We proceeded around the field with caution, -for the plantation house was not far away. -Passing a building where the grinding was done, -we entered a long, low drying shed. Here we -struck a match, and by the flickering light -espied a heap of dry husks, upon which we -immediately threw ourselves.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to be up and away before daybreak,” -said my chum, as he drew off his wet -coat, an example which I at once followed, even -though it was so warm I did not suffer greatly -from the dampness. “We would be sorry fellows -to give an explanation if we were stopped -in this vicinity.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and for the matter of that, we had better -sleep with one eye open,” I rejoined. And -then we turned in, and both presently fell asleep -through sheer exhaustion.</p> - -<p>How long I had been sleeping I did not know. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">« 14 »</a></span> -I awoke with a start, to find a cold nose pressing -against my face.</p> - -<p>“Hi! get out of here!” I cried, and then the -owner of the nose leaped back and uttered the -low, savage, and unmistakable growl of a Cuban -bloodhound!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">« 15 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">IN THE WILDS OF THE ISLAND.</p> - - -<p>To say that I was alarmed when I found that -the intruder in our sleeping quarters was a -bloodhound would be to put the fact very -mildly. I was truly horrified, and a chill shook -my frame as I had a momentary vision of being -torn to pieces by the bloodthirsty animal.</p> - -<p>My cry awoke Alano, who instantly asked -what was the matter, and then yelled at the -beast in Spanish. As the creature retreated, -evidently to prepare for a rush upon us, I sprang -to my feet and grasped a short ladder which led -to the roof of the shed.</p> - -<p>“Come!” I roared to my chum, and Alano -did so; and both of us scrambled up, with the -bloodhound snarling and snatching at our feet. -He even caught the heel of my boot, but I -kicked him off, and we reached the top of the -shed in temporary safety. Baffled, the dog ran -out of the shed and began to bay loudly, as -though summoning assistance.</p> - -<p>“We’re in for it now!” I groaned. "We -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">« 16 »</a></span> -can’t get away from the dog, and he’ll arouse -somebody before long."</p> - -<p>“Well, we can’t help ourselves,” replied -Alano, with a philosophical shrug of his shoulders. -“Ha! somebody is coming now!”</p> - -<p>He pointed through the semi-darkness, for it -was close to sunrise. A Cuban negro was approaching, -a huge fellow all of six feet tall and -dressed in the garb of an overseer. He carried -a little triangular lantern, and as he drew closer -he yelled at the bloodhound in a Cuban <i>patois</i> -which was all Greek to me, but which Alano -readily understood. The dog stopped baying, -but insisted upon leading his master to the very -foot of the shed, where he stood with his nose -pointed up at us.</p> - -<p>There was no help for it, so Alano crawled to -the edge of the roof and told the overseer what -was the trouble—that the dog had driven us -hither and that we were afraid of being killed. -A short conversation followed, and then my -chum turned to me.</p> - -<p>“We can go down now,” he said. “The -overseer says the dog will not touch us so long -as he is around.”</p> - -<p>We leaped to the ground, although I must admit -I did not do so with a mind perfectly at ease, -the bloodhound still looked so ugly. However, -beyond a few sniffs at my trousers-leg and a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">« 17 »</a></span> -deep rumble of his voice, he offered no further -indignities.</p> - -<p>“He wants to know who we are,” said Alano, -after more conversation. “What shall I tell -him?”</p> - -<p>“Tell him the truth, and ask him for help to -reach your father’s plantation, Alano. He -won’t know we escaped from Santiago de Cuba -without permission.”</p> - -<p>Alano did as directed. At the mention of -Senor Guerez' name the overseer held up his -hands in astonishment. He told Alano that he -knew his father well, that he had met the señor -only two weeks previously, and that both -Alano’s father and my own had thrown in their -fortunes with the insurgents!</p> - -<p>“Is it possible!” I ejaculated. “My father, -too! Why, he must be still lame!”</p> - -<p>“He is,” said Alano, after further consultation -with the newcomer. “My father, it seems, -had to join the rebels, or his plantation would -have been burned to the ground. There was a -quarrel with some Spanish sympathizers, and in -the end both your father and mine joined the -forces under General Calixto Garcia.”</p> - -<p>“And where are they now?”</p> - -<p>“The overseer does not know.”</p> - -<p>“What of your mother and sisters?”</p> - -<p>“He does not know about them either;” and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">« 18 »</a></span> -for a moment Alano’s handsome and manly -face grew very sober. “Oh, if I was only with -them!”</p> - -<p>“And if I was only with my father!” I cried. -My father was all the world to me, and to be -separated from him at such a time was more -than painful. “Do you think he will help us?” -I went on, after a moment of silence.</p> - -<p>The overseer agreed to do what he could for -us, although that would not be much. He was -an insurgent at heart, but his master and all -around him were in sympathy with the Spanish -Government.</p> - -<p>“He says for us to remain here and he will -bring us breakfast,” said Alano, as the man -turned and departed, with the bloodhound at -his side. “And after that he will set us on a -road leading to Tiarriba and gave us a countersign -which will help us into a rebel camp if there -is any around.”</p> - -<p>We secreted ourselves again in the cane shed, -and it was not long before the overseer returned, -bringing with him a kettle of steaming black -coffee, without which no Cuban breakfast seems -complete, and some fresh bread and half a dozen -hard-boiled eggs. He had also a bag of -crackers and a chunk of dried beef weighing -several pounds.</p> - -<p>“Put those in your bags,” he said to Alano, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">« 19 »</a></span> -indicating the beef and crackers. “You may -find it to your interest to keep out of sight for a -day or two, to avoid the Spanish spies.”</p> - -<p>The breakfast was soon dispatched, the provisions -stored in our valises, and then the overseer -took us up through the sugar-cane fields to -where a brook emptied into a long pond, covered -with green weeds, among which frogs as -broad as one’s hand croaked dismally. We -hurried around the pond, and our guide pointed -out a narrow, winding path leading upward -through a stony woods. Then he whispered a -few words to Alano, shook us both by the hand, -and disappeared.</p> - -<p>“He says the countersign is ‘Sagua’—after -the river and city of that name,” explained my -chum as we tramped along. “You must wave -your hand so if you see a man in the distance,” -and Alano twirled his arm over his head.</p> - -<p>Stony though it was in the woods, the vegetation -was thick and rank. On every side were -the trunks of decaying trees, overgrown with -moss—the homes of beetles, lizards, and snakes -innumerable. The snakes, most of them small -fellows not over a foot long, at first alarmed me, -but this only made Alano laugh.</p> - -<p>“They could not harm you if they tried,” he -said. “And they are very useful—they eat up so -many of the mosquitoes and gnats and lizards.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">« 20 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“But some of the snakes are dangerous,” I -insisted.</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; but they are larger.”</p> - -<p>“And what of wild animals?”</p> - -<p>“We have nothing but wild hogs and a few -deer, and wild dogs too. And then there are -the alligators to be found in the rivers.”</p> - -<p>The sun had risen clear and hot, as is usual in -that region after a shower. Where the trees -were scattered, the rays beat down upon our -heads mercilessly, and the slippery ground fairly -steamed, so rapid was the evaporation. By -noon we had reached the top of a hill, and here -we rested and partook of several crackers each -and a bit of the beef, washing both down with -water from a spring, which I first strained -through a clean handkerchief, to get clear of the -insects and tiny lizards, which abounded everywhere.</p> - -<p>“I can see a house ahead,” announced Alano, -who had climbed a palm tree to view the surroundings. -“We’ll go on and see what sort -of a place it is before we make ourselves -known.”</p> - -<p>Once again we shouldered our traps and set -out. The way down the hill was nearly as toilsome -as the upward course on the opposite side -had been, for gnarled roots hidden in the rank -grasses made a tumble easy. Indeed, both of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">« 21 »</a></span> -us went down several times, barking our shins -and scratching our hands. Yet we kept on, -until the house was but a short distance off.</p> - -<p>It was set in a small clearing; and as we approached -we saw a man come out of the front -door and down the broad piazza steps. He was -dressed in the uniform of a captain in the -Spanish army.</p> - -<p>“Back!” cried Alano; but it was too late, for -by pure accident the military officer had caught -sight of us. He called out in Spanish to learn -who we were.</p> - -<p>“He is a Spanish officer!” I whispered to -Alano. “Shall we face him and trust to luck to -get out of the scrape?”</p> - -<p>“No, no! Come!” and, catching me by the -arm, Alano led the way around the clearing.</p> - -<p>It was a bad move, for no sooner had we -turned than the officer called out to several soldiers -stationed at a stable in the rear of the -house. These leaped on their horses, pistols -and sabers in hand, and, riding hard, soon surrounded -us.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” came the command; and in a moment -more my Cuban chum and myself found -ourselves prisoners.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">« 22 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">IN A NOVEL PRISON.</p> - - -<p>I looked with much foreboding upon the faces -of the soldiers who had surrounded us. All -were stern almost to the verge of cruelty, and -the face of the captain when he came up was no -exception to the rule. Alano and I learned -afterward that Captain Crabo had met the day -previous with a bitter attack from the insurgents, -who had wounded six of his men, and this -had put him in anything but a happy frame of -mind.</p> - -<p>“Who are you?” he demanded in Spanish, -as he eyed us sharply.</p> - -<p>Alano looked at me in perplexity, and started -to ask me what he had best say, when the -Spanish captain clapped the flat side of his -sword over my chum’s mouth.</p> - -<p>“Talk so that I can understand you, or I’ll -place you under arrest,” he growled. And then -he added, “Are you alone?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Alano.</p> - -<p>“And where are you going?”</p> - -<p>"I wish to join my father at Guantanamo. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">« 23 »</a></span> -His father is also with mine," and my chum -pointed to me.</p> - -<p>“Your name?”</p> - -<p>Seeing there was no help for it, Alano told -him. Captain Crabo did not act as if he had -heard it before, and we breathed easier. But -the next moment our hearts sank again.</p> - -<p>“Well, we will search you, and if you carry no -messages and are not armed, you can go on.”</p> - -<p>“We have no messages,” said Alano. “You -can search us and welcome.”</p> - -<p>He handed over his valise, and I followed suit. -Our pistols we had placed in the inner pockets -of our coats. By his easy manner my chum -tried to throw the Spaniards off their guard, but -the trick did not work. After going through -our bags, and confiscating several of my silk -handkerchiefs, they began to search our clothing, -even compelling us to remove our boots, -and the weapons were speedily brought to light.</p> - -<p>“Ha! armed!” cried Captain Crabo. “They -are not so innocent as they seem. We will look -into their history a little closer ere we let them -go. Take them to the smoke-house until I -have time to make an investigation to-night. -We must be off for Pueblo del Cristo now.”</p> - -<p>Without ceremony we were marched off -across the clearing and around the back of the -stable, where stood a rude stone building evidently -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">« 24 »</a></span> -built many years before. Alano told me -what the captain had said, and also explained -that the stone building was a smoke-house, -where at certain seasons of the year beef and -other meat were hung up to be dried and -smoked, in preference to simple drying in the -sun.</p> - -<p>As might be expected, the smoke-house was -far from being a clean place; yet it had been -used for housing prisoners before, and these had -taken the trouble to brush the smut from the -stones inside, so it was not so dirty as it might -otherwise have been.</p> - -<p>We were thrust into this building minus our -pistols and our valises. Then the door, a heavy -wooden affair swinging upon two rusty iron -hinges, was banged shut in our faces, a hasp and -spike were put into place, and we were left to -ourselves.</p> - -<p>“Now we are in for it,” I began, but Alano -stopped me short.</p> - -<p>“Listen!” he whispered, and we did so, and -heard all of our enemies retreat. A few minutes -later there was the tramping of horses' feet, several -commands in Spanish, and the soldiers rode -off.</p> - -<p>“They have left us to ourselves, at any rate,” -said my chum, when we were sure they had departed. -"And we are made of poor stuff indeed -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">« 25 »</a></span> -if we cannot pick our way out of this -hole."</p> - -<p>At first we were able to see nothing, but a -little light shone in through several cracks in the -roof, and soon our eyes became accustomed to -the semi-darkness. We examined the walls, to -find them of solid masonry. The roof was out -of our reach, the floor so baked it was like -cement.</p> - -<p>“We are prisoners now, surely, Mark,” said -Alano bitterly. “What will be our fate when -that <i>capitan</i> returns?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll be sent back to Santiago de Cuba -most likely, Alano. But we must try to escape. -I have an idea. Can you balance me upon your -shoulders, do you think?”</p> - -<p>“I will try it. But what for?”</p> - -<p>“I wish to examine the roof.”</p> - -<p>Not without much difficulty I succeeded in -reaching my chum’s broad shoulders and standing -upright upon them. I could now touch the -ceiling of the smoke-house with ease, and I had -Alano move around from spot to spot in a close -inspection of every bit of board and bark -above us.</p> - -<p>“Here is a loose board!” I cried in a low -voice. “Stand firm, Alano.”</p> - -<p>He braced himself by catching hold of the -stone wall, and I shoved upward with all of my -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">« 26 »</a></span> -strength. There was a groan, a squeak; the -board flew upward, and the sun shone down on -our heads. I crawled through the opening -thus made, and putting down my hand I helped -Alano to do likewise.</p> - -<p>“Drop out of sight of the house!” he whispered. -“Somebody may be watching this -place.”</p> - -<p>We dropped, and waited in breathless silence -for several minutes, but no one showed himself. -Then we held a consultation.</p> - -<p>“They thought we couldn’t get out,” I said. -“More than likely no one is left at the homestead -but a servant or two.”</p> - -<p>“If only we could get our bags and pistols,” -sighed Alano.</p> - -<p>“We must get them,” I rejoined, “for we -cannot go on without them. Let us sneak up -to the house and investigate. I see no dogs -around.”</p> - -<p>With extreme caution we left the vicinity of -the smoke-house, and, crawling on hands and -knees, made our way along a low hedge to -where several broad palms overshadowed a side -veranda. The door of the veranda was open, -and, motioning to Alano to follow, I ascended -the broad steps and dashed into the house.</p> - -<p>“Now where?” questioned my Cuban chum, -as we hesitated in the broad and cool hallway. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">« 27 »</a></span> -“Here is a sitting room,” and he opened the -door to it.</p> - -<p>A voice broke upon our ear. A negro woman -was singing from the direction of the kitchen, as -she rattled among her earthenware pots. Evidently -she was alone.</p> - -<p>“If they left her on guard, we have little to -fear,” I said, and we entered the sitting room. -Both of us uttered a faint cry of joy, for there -on the table rested our valises and provisions, -just as they had been taken from us. Inside of -Alano’s bag were the two pistols with the cartridges.</p> - -<p>“Now we can go at once,” I said. “How -fortunate we have been! Let us not waste time -here.”</p> - -<p>“They owe us a meal for detaining us,” replied -my chum grimly. “Let me explore the -pantry in the next room.”</p> - -<p>He went through the whip-end curtains without -a sound, and was gone several minutes. -When he came back his face wore a broad smile -and he carried a large napkin bursting open -with eatables of various kinds, a piece of cold -roast pork, some rice cakes, buns, and the remains -of a chicken pie.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have a supper fit for a king!” he cried. -“Come on! I hear that woman coming.”</p> - -<p>And coming she was, in her bare feet, along -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">« 28 »</a></span> -the polished floor. We had just time left to -seize our valises and make our escape when she -entered.</p> - -<p>“<i>Qué quiere V.?</i> [What do you want?]” she -shouted, and then called upon us to stop; but, -instead, we ran from the dooryard as fast as we -could, and did not halt until the plantation was -left a good half mile behind.</p> - -<p>“We are well out of that!” I gasped, throwing -myself down under the welcome shade of -a cacao tree. “Do you suppose she will send -the soldiers in pursuit?”</p> - -<p>“They would have hard work to find us,” replied -Alano. “Here, let us sample this eating I -brought along, and then be on our way. Remember -we have still many miles to go.”</p> - -<p>We partook of some of the chicken pie and -some buns, the latter so highly spiced they -almost made me sneeze when I ate them, and -then went on our way again.</p> - -<p>Our run had warmed us up, and now the sun -beat down upon our heads mercilessly as we -stalked through a tangle where the luxurious -vegetation was knee-high. We were glad -enough when we reached another woods, -through which there was a well-defined, although -exceedingly poor, wagon trail. Indeed, -let me add, nearly all of the wagon roads in -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">« 29 »</a></span> -Cuba, so I have since been told, are wretched -affairs at the best.</p> - -<p>“We ought to be in the neighborhood of -Tiarriba,” said Alano about the middle of the -afternoon.</p> - -<p>“We won’t dare enter the town,” I replied. -“Those soldiers were going there, you must remember.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, the chances are we’ll find rebels enough—on -the quiet,” he rejoined.</p> - -<p>On we went, trudging through sand and -shells and not infrequently through mire several -inches to a foot deep. It was hard work, and I -wished more than once that we were on horseback. -There was also a brook to cross, but the -bridge was gone and there was nothing left to -do but to ford the stream.</p> - -<p>“It’s not to our boot-tops,” said Alano, after -an examination, “so we won’t have to take our -boots and socks off. Come; I fancy there is a -good road ahead.”</p> - -<p>He started into the water, and I went after -him. We had reached the middle of the stream -when both of us let out a wild yell, and not without -reason, for we had detected a movement -from the opposite bank, and now saw a monstrous -alligator bearing swiftly down upon us!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">« 30 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">LOST AMONG THE HILLS.</p> - - -<p>Both Alano and I were almost paralyzed by -the sight of the huge alligator bearing down -upon us, his mouth wide open, showing his cruel -teeth, and his long tail shifting angrily from side -to side.</p> - -<p>“Back!” yelled my Cuban chum, and back -we went, almost tumbling over each other in -our haste to gain the bank from where we had -started.</p> - -<p>The alligator lost no time in coming up behind, -uttering what to me sounded like a snort -of rage. He had been lying half-hidden in the -mud, and the mud still clung to his scaly sides -and back. Altogether, he was the most horrible -creature I had ever beheld.</p> - -<p>Reaching the bank of the brook, with the alligator -not three yards behind us, we fled up a -series of rocks overgrown with moss and vines. -We did not pause until we were at the very summit, -then both of us drew our pistols and fired at -the blinking eyes. The bullets glanced from -the “'gator’s” head without doing much harm, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">« 31 »</a></span> -and with another snort the terrifying beast -turned back into the brook and sank into a pool -out of sight.</p> - -<p>“My gracious, Alano, supposing he had -caught us!” I gasped, when I could catch my -breath.</p> - -<p>“We would have been devoured,” he answered, -with a shudder, for of all creatures the -alligator is the one most dreaded by Cubans, -being the only living beast on the island dangerous -to life because of its strength.</p> - -<p>“He must have been lying in wait for somebody,” -I remarked, after a moment’s pause, during -which we kept our eyes on the brook, in a -vain attempt to gain another look at our -tormentor.</p> - -<p>“He was—it is the way they do, Mark. If -they can, they wait until you are alongside of -them. Then a blow from the tail knocks you -flat, and that ends the fight—for you,” and -again Alano shuddered, and so did I.</p> - -<p>“We can’t cross,” I said, a few minutes later, -as all remained quiet. “I would not attempt it -for a thousand dollars.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I—on foot. Perhaps we can do so by -means of the trees. Let us climb yonder palm -and investigate.”</p> - -<p>We climbed the palm, a sloping tree covered -with numerous trailing vines. Our movements -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">« 32 »</a></span> -disturbed countless beetles, lizards, and a dozen -birds, some of the latter flying off with a whir -which was startling. The top of the palm -reached, we swung ourselves to its neighbor, -standing directly upon the bank of the brook. -In a few minutes we had reached a willow and -then a cacao, and thus we crossed the stream in -safety, although not without considerable exertion.</p> - -<p>The sun was beginning to set when we -reached a small village called by the natives San -Lerma—a mere collection of thatched cottages -belonging to some sheep-raisers. Before entering -we made certain there were no soldiers -around.</p> - -<p>Our coming brought half a dozen men, -women, and children to our side. They were -mainly of negro blood, and the children were -but scantily clothed. They commenced to ask -innumerable questions, which Alano answered -as well as he could. One of the negroes had -heard of Señor Guerez' plantation, and immediately -volunteered to furnish us with sleeping -accommodations for the night.</p> - -<p>“Many of us have joined the noble General -Garcia,” he said, in almost a whisper. “I would -join too, but Teresa will not hear of it.” Teresa -was his wife—a fat, grim-looking wench who -ruled the household with a rod of iron. She -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">« 33 »</a></span> -grumbled a good deal at having to provide us -with a bed, but became very pleasant when -Alano slipped a small silver coin into her greasy -palm.</p> - -<p>Feeling fairly secure in our quarters, we slept -soundly, and did not awaken until the sun was -shining brightly. The inevitable pot of black -coffee was over the fire, and the smoke of bacon -and potatoes frying in a saucepan filled the air. -Breakfast was soon served, after which we -greased our boots, saw to our other traps and -our bag of provisions, which we had not opened, -and proceeded on our way—the husband of Teresa -wishing us well, and the big-eyed children -staring after us in silent wonder and curiosity.</p> - -<p>“That is a terrible existence,” I said to -Alano. “Think of living in that fashion all -your life!”</p> - -<p>“They know no better,” he returned philosophically. -“And I fancy they are happy in -their way. Their living comes easy to them, -and they never worry about styles in clothing -or rent day. Sometimes they have dances and -other amusements. Didn’t you see the home-made -guitar on the wall?”</p> - -<p>On we went, past the village and to a highway -which we had understood would take us to -Tiarriba, but which took us to nothing -of the sort. As we proceeded the sun grew -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">« 34 »</a></span> -more oppressive than ever, until I was glad -enough to take Alano’s advice, and place some -wet grass in my hat to keep the top of my head -cool.</p> - -<p>“It will rain again soon,” said Alano, “and if -it comes from the right quarter it will be much -cooler for several days after.”</p> - -<p>The ground now became hilly, and we walked -up and down several places which were steep -enough to cause us to pant for breath. By -noon we reckoned we had covered eight or nine -miles. We halted for our midday rest and meal -under some wild peppers, and we had not yet -finished when we heard the low rumble of -thunder.</p> - -<p>“The storm is coming, sure enough!” I exclaimed. -“What had we best do—find some -shelter?”</p> - -<p>“That depends, Mark. If the lightning is -going to be strong, better seek the open air. -We do not want to be struck.”</p> - -<p>We went on, hoping that some village would -soon be found, but none appeared. The rain -commenced to hit the tree leaves, and soon -there was a steady downpour. We buttoned -our coats tightly around the neck, and stopped -under the spreading branches of an uncultivated -banana tree, the half-ripe fruit of which hung -within easy reach.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">« 35 »</a></span></p> - -<p>The thunder had increased rapidly, and now -from out of the ominous-looking clouds the -lightning played incessantly. Alano shook his -head dubiously.</p> - -<p>“Do you know what I think?” he said.</p> - -<p>“Well?”</p> - -<p>“I think we have missed our way. If we -were on the right road we would have come to -some dwelling ere this. I believe we have -branched off on some forest trail.”</p> - -<p>“Let us go on, Alano. See, the rain is coming -through the tree already.”</p> - -<p>It was tough work now, for the road was uphill -and the clayey ground was slippery and -treacherous. It was not long before I took a -tumble, and would have rolled over some sharp -rocks had Alano not caught my arm. At one -minute the road seemed pitch-dark, at the next -a flash of lightning would nearly blind us.</p> - -<p>Presently we gained the crest of a hill a little -higher than its fellows, and gazed around us. -On all sides were the waving branches of palms -and other trees, dotted here and there with -clearings of rocks and coarse grasses. Not a -building of any kind was in sight.</p> - -<p>“It is as I thought,” said my Cuban chum -dubiously. “We have lost our way in the hills.”</p> - -<p>“And what will we have to do—retrace our -steps?” I ventured anxiously.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">« 36 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“I don’t know. If we push on I suppose -we’ll strike some place sooner or later.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but our provisions won’t last forever, -Alano.”</p> - -<p>“That is true, Mark, but we’ll have to—— Oh!”</p> - -<p>Alano stopped short and staggered back into -my arms. We had stepped for the moment -under the shelter of a stately palm. Now it was -as if a wave of fire had swept close to our face. -It was a flash of lightning; and it struck the tree -fairly on the top, splitting it from crown to -roots, and pinning us down under one of the -falling portions!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">« 37 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">FROM ONE DIFFICULTY TO ANOTHER.</p> - - -<p>How we ever escaped from the falling tree I -do not fully know to this day. The lightning -stunned me almost as much as my companion, -and both of us went down in a heap in the soft -mud, for it was now raining in torrents. We -rolled over, and a rough bit of bark scraped my -face; and then I knew no more.</p> - -<p>When I came to my senses I was lying in a -little gully, part of the way down the hillside. -Alano was at my side, a deep cut on his chin, -from which the blood was flowing freely. He -lay so still that I at first thought him dead, but -the sight of the flowing blood reassured me.</p> - -<p>A strong smell of sulphur filled the air, and -this made me remember the lightning stroke. -I looked up the hill, to see the palm tree split as -I have described.</p> - -<p>“Thank God for this escape!” I could not -help murmuring; and then I took out a handkerchief, -allowed it to become wet, and bound -up Alano’s cut. While I was doing this he -came to, gasped, and opened his eyes.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">« 38 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“<i>Què</i>—<i>què</i>——” he stammered. “Wha—what—was -it, Mark?”</p> - -<p>I told him, and soon had him sitting up, his -back propped against a rock. The cut on his -chin was not deep, and presently the flow of -blood stopped and he shook himself.</p> - -<p>“It was a narrow escape,” he said. “I -warned you we must get out into the open.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll be more careful in the future,” I replied. -And then I pointed to an opening in the -gully. “See, there is a cave. Let us get into -that while the storm lasts.”</p> - -<p>“Let us see if it is safe first. There may be -snakes within,” returned Alano.</p> - -<p>With caution we approached the entrance to -the cave, which appeared to be several yards -deep. Trailing vines partly hid the opening; -and, thrusting these aside, we took sticks, lit a -bit of candle I carried, and examined the interior. -Evidently some wild animal had once had its -home there, but the cave was now tenantless, -and we proceeded to make ourselves at home.</p> - -<p>“We’ll light a fire and dry our clothing,” suggested -Alano. “And if the rain continues we -can stay here all night.”</p> - -<p>“We might as well stay. To tramp through -the wet grass and brush would be almost as bad -as to have it rain—we would be soaked from our -waists down.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">« 39 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Then we’ll gather wood and stay,” said he.</p> - -<p>Quarter of an hour later we had coaxed up -quite a respectable fire in the shadow of a rock -at the entrance to the cave, which was just high -enough to allow us to stand upright, and was -perhaps twelve feet in diameter. We piled -more wood on the blaze, satisfied that in its -damp condition we could not set fire to the -forest, and then retired to dry our clothing and -enjoy a portion of the contents of the provision -bag Alano had improvised out of the purloined -napkin.</p> - -<p>As we ate we discussed the situation, wondering -how far we could be from some village and -if there were any insurgents or Spanish soldiers -in the vicinity.</p> - -<p>“The rebels could outwit the soldiers forever -in these hills,” remarked Alano—“especially -those who are acquainted in the vicinity.”</p> - -<p>“But the rebels might be surrounded,” I suggested.</p> - -<p>“They said at Santiago they had too strong -a picket guard for that, Mark.”</p> - -<p>“But we have seen no picket guard. Supposing -instead of two boys a body of Spanish -soldiers had come this way, what then?”</p> - -<p>“In that case what would the Spanish soldiers -have to shoot at?” he laughed. “We -have as yet seen no rebels.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">« 40 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“But we may meet them—before we know -it,” I said, with a shake of my head.</p> - -<p>Scarcely had I uttered the words than the -entrance to our resting-place was darkened by -two burly forms, and we found the muzzles of -two carbines thrust close to our faces.</p> - -<p>“Who are you?” came in Spanish. “Put -up your hands!”</p> - -<p>“Don’t shoot!” cried Alano in alarm.</p> - -<p>“Come out of that!”</p> - -<p>“It’s raining too hard, and we have our coats -off, as you see. Won’t you come in?”</p> - -<p>At this the two men, bronzed and by no -means bad-looking fellows, laughed. “Only -boys!” murmured one, and the carbines were -lowered and they entered the cave.</p> - -<p>A long and rapid conversation with Alano, -which I could but imperfectly understand, followed. -They asked who we were, where we -were going, how we had managed to slip out of -Santiago, if we were armed, if we carried messages, -if we had the countersign, how we had -reached the cave, and a dozen other questions. -Both roared loudly when Alano said he thought -they were rebels.</p> - -<p>“And so we are,” said the one who appeared -to be the leader. “And we are proud of it. -Have you any objections to make?”</p> - -<p>“No,” we both answered in a breath, that -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">« 41 »</a></span> -being both English and Spanish, and I understanding -enough of the question to be anxious -to set myself right with them.</p> - -<p>“I think our fathers have become rebels,” -Alano answered. “At least, we were told so.”</p> - -<p>“Good!” said the leader. “Then we have -nothing to fear from two such brave lads as you -appear to be. And now what do you propose -to do—encamp here for the night?”</p> - -<p>“Unless you can supply us with better accommodations,” -rejoined my chum.</p> - -<p>“We can supply you with nothing. We -have nothing but what is on us,” laughed the -second rebel.</p> - -<p>Both told us later that they were on special -picket duty in that neighborhood. They had -been duly enlisted under General Garcia, but -were not in uniform, each wearing only a wet -and muddy linen suit, thick boots, and a plain -braided palm hat. Around his waist each had -strapped a leather belt, and in this stuck a -machete—a long, sharp, and exceedingly cruel-looking -knife. Over the shoulder was another -strap, fastened to a canvas bag containing -ammunition and other articles of their outfit.</p> - -<p>These specimens of the rebels were hardly -what I had expected to see, yet they were so -earnest in their manner I could not help but admire -them. One of them had brought down a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">« 42 »</a></span> -couple of birds, and these were cooked over our -fire and divided among all hands, together with -the few things we had to offer. After the meal -each soldier placed a big bite of tobacco in his -mouth, lit a cigarette, and proceeded to make -himself comfortable.</p> - -<p>“The Spaniards will not move in this -weather,” said one. “They are too afraid of -getting wet and taking cold.”</p> - -<p>Darkness had come upon us, and it was still -raining as steadily as ever. Our clothing was -dry; and, as the cave was warmed, the rebel -guards ordered us to put out the fire, that it -might not attract attention during the night.</p> - -<p>We were told that we had made several mistakes -on the road and were far away from -Tiarriba. If we desire to go there, the rebels -said they would put us on the right road.</p> - -<p>“But if you are in sympathy with us, you had -better pass Tiarriba by,” said one to Alano. -“The city is filled with Spanish soldiers, and -you may not be able to get away as easily as you -did from Santiago.”</p> - -<p>Alano consulted with me, and then asked the -rebel what we had best do.</p> - -<p>“That depends. Do you want to join the -forces under General Garcia?”</p> - -<p>“We want to join our fathers at or near -Guantanamo.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">« 43 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Garcia is pushing on in that direction. You -had best join the army and stay with it until -Guantanamo is reached.”</p> - -<p>“But we will have to fight?” said my Cuban -chum.</p> - -<p>The guard smiled grimly, exhibiting a row of -large white teeth.</p> - -<p>“As you will. The general will not expect -too much from boys.”</p> - -<p>There the talk ended, one of the rebels deeming -it advisable to take a tramp over to the next -hill and back, and the other crouching down in -a corner for a nap. With nothing else to do, -we followed the example of the latter, and were -soon in dreamland.</p> - -<p>A single call from the man who had slept beside -us brought us to our feet at daybreak. The -storm had cleared away, and now it was positively -cool—so much so that I was glad enough -to button my coat up tightly and be thankful -that the fire had dried it so well. The second -rebel was asleep, and had been for two hours. -We followed one out of the cave without arousing -the other.</p> - -<p>A tramp of half a mile brought us to a high -bank, and here our rebel escort left us.</p> - -<p>“Across the bank you will find a wagon-road -leading to the west,” he said. "Follow that, -and you cannot help but meet some of our party -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">« 44 »</a></span> -sooner or later. Remember the new password, -‘Maysi,’ and you will be all right," and then he -turned and disappeared from sight in the bush.</p> - -<p>The climb to the top of the bank was not difficult, -and, once over it, the road he had mentioned -lay almost at our feet. We ran down to -it with lighter hearts than we had had for some -time, and struck out boldly, eating a light breakfast -as we trudged along.</p> - -<p>“I hope we strike no more adventures until -the vicinity of Guantanamo is reached,” I -observed.</p> - -<p>“We can hardly hope for that, Mark,” smiled -my chum. “Remember we are journeying -through a country where war is raging. Let us -be thankful if we escape the battles and skirmishes.”</p> - -<p>“And shooting down by some ambitious -sharpshooter,” I added. “By the way, I wonder -if our folks are looking for us?”</p> - -<p>“It may be they sent word not to come, when -they saw how matters were going, Mark. I am -sure your father would not want you to run the -risk that——Look! look! We must hide!”</p> - -<p>Alano stopped short, caught me by the arm, -and pointed ahead. Around a turn in the road -a dozen horsemen had swept, riding directly -toward us. A glance showed that they were -Spanish guerrillas!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">« 45 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">FOOLING THE SPANISH GUERRILLAS.</p> - - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>”</p> - -<p>It was the cry of the nearest of the Spanish -horsemen. He had espied us just as Alano let -out his cry of alarm, and now he came galloping -toward us at a rapid gait.</p> - -<p>“Let us run!” I ejaculated to my Cuban -chum. “It is our only chance.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, yes! but to where?” he gasped, staring -around in bewilderment. On one side of the -road was a woods of mahogany, on the other -some palms and plantains, with here and there -a great rock covered with thick vines.</p> - -<p>“Among the rocks—anywhere!” I returned. -“Come!” And, catching his hand, I led the -way from the road while the horseman was yet -a hundred feet from us.</p> - -<p>Another cry rang out—one I could not -understand, and a shot followed, clipping -through the broad leaves over our heads. The -horseman left the road, but soon came to a stop, -his animal’s progress blocked by the trees and -rocks. He yelled to his companions, and all of -the guerrillas came up at topmost speed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">« 46 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“They will dismount and be after us in a -minute!” gasped Alano. “Hark! they are -coming already!”</p> - -<p>“On! on!” I urged. “We’ll find some hiding-place -soon.”</p> - -<p>Around the rocks and under the low-hanging -plantains we sped, until the road was left a hundred -yards behind. Then we came to a gully, -where the vegetation was heavy. Alano pointed -down to it.</p> - -<p>“We can hide there,” he whispered. “But -we will be in danger of snakes. Yet it is the -best we can do.”</p> - -<p>I hesitated. To make the acquaintanceship -of a serpent in that dense grass was not pleasant -to contemplate. But what else was there to do? -The footsteps of our pursuers sounded nearer.</p> - -<p>Down went Alano, making leaps from rock -to rock, so that no trail would be left. I followed -at his heels, and, coming to a rock which -was partly hollowed out at one side and thickly -overgrown, we crouched under it and pulled the -vines and creepers over us.</p> - -<p>It was a damp, unwholesome spot, but there -was no help for it, and when several enormous -black beetles dropped down and crawled around -my neck I shut my lips hard to keep from crying -out. We must escape from the enemy, no matter -what the cost, for even if they did not make -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">« 47 »</a></span> -us prisoners we knew they would take all we -possessed and even strip the coats from our -backs.</p> - -<p>Peering from between the vines, we presently -caught sight of three of the Spaniards standing -at the top of the gully, pistols in hand, on the -alert for a sight of us. They were dark, ugly-looking -fellows, with heavy black mustaches and -faces which had not had a thorough washing in -months. They were dressed in the military uniform -of Spain, and carried extra bags of canvas -slung from their shoulders, evidently meant for -booty. That they were tough customers Alano -said one could tell by their vile manner of -speech.</p> - -<p>“Do you see them, Carlo?” demanded one of -the number. “I thought they went down this -hollow?”</p> - -<p>“I see nothing,” was the answer, coupled -with a vile exclamation. “They disappeared as -if by magic.”</p> - -<p>“They were but boys.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind, they were rebels—that is -enough,” put in the third guerrilla, as he chewed -his mustache viciously. “I wish I could get a -shot at them.”</p> - -<p>At this Alano pulled out his pistol and motioned -for me to do the same.</p> - -<p>“We may as well be prepared for the worst,” -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">« 48 »</a></span> -he whispered into my ear. “They are not soldiers, -they are robbers—bandits.”</p> - -<p>“They look bad enough for anything,” I answered, -and produced my weapon, which I had -not discharged since the brush with the alligator.</p> - -<p>“If they are in the hollow it is odd we do not -see them on their trail,” went on one of the bandits. -“Perhaps they went around.”</p> - -<p>His companions shook their heads.</p> - -<p>“I’ll thrash around a bit,” said one of them; -and, leaving the brink of the gully, he started -straight for our hiding-place.</p> - -<p>My heart leaped into my throat, and I feared -immediate discovery. As for Alano, he shoved -his pistol under his coat, and I heard a muffled -click as the hammer was raised.</p> - -<p>When within ten feet of us the ugly fellow -stopped, and I fairly held my breath, while my -heart appeared to beat like a trip-hammer. He -looked squarely at the rock which sheltered us, -and I could not believe he would miss discovering -us. Once he started and raised his pistol, -and I imagined our time had come; but -then he turned to one side, and I breathed -easier.</p> - -<p>“They did not come this way, <i>capitan</i>!” he -shouted. “Let us go around the hollow.”</p> - -<p>In another moment all three of the bandits -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">« 49 »</a></span> -were out of sight. We heard them moving in -the undergrowth behind us, and one of them -gave a scream as a snake was stirred up and -dispatched with a saber. Then all became -quiet.</p> - -<p>“What is best to do now?” I asked, when I -thought it safe to speak.</p> - -<p>“Hush!” whispered Alano. “They may be -playing us dark.”</p> - -<p>A quarter of an hour passed,—it seemed ten -times that period of time just then,—and we -heard them coming back. They were very -angry at their want of success; and had we been -discovered, our fate would undoubtedly have -been a hard one. They stalked back to the -road, and a moment later we heard the hoof-strokes -of their horses receding in the distance.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” I shouted, but in a very subdued -tone. “That’s the time we fooled them, -Alano.”</p> - -<p>My Cuban chum smiled grimly. “Yes, Mark, -but we must be more careful in the future. -Had we not been so busy talking we might have -heard their horses long before they came into -view. However, the scare is over, so let us put -our best foot forward once again.”</p> - -<p>“If only we had horses too!” I sighed. -“My feet are beginning to get sore from the -uneven walking.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">« 50 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Horses would truly be convenient at times. -But we haven’t them, and must make the best of -it. When we stop for our next meal you had -best take off your boots and bathe your feet. -You will be astonished how much rest that will -afford them.”</p> - -<p>I followed this advice, and found Alano was -right; and after that I bathed my feet as often as -I got the chance. Alano suffered no inconvenience -in this particular, having climbed the -hills since childhood.</p> - -<p>We were again on rising ground, and now -passed through a heavy wood of cedars, the -lower branches sweeping our hats as we passed. -This thick shade was very acceptable, for the -glare of the sun had nearly blinded me, while -more than once I felt as if I would faint from the -intense heat.</p> - -<p>“It’s not such a delightful island as I fancied -it,” I said to my chum. “I much prefer the -United States.”</p> - -<p>“That depends,” laughed Alano. “The -White Mountains or the Adirondacks are perhaps -nicer, but what of the forests and everglades -in Florida?”</p> - -<p>“Just as bad as this, I suppose.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and worse, for the ground is wetter, I -believe. But come, don’t lag. We must make -several more miles before we rest.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">« 51 »</a></span></p> - -<p>We proceeded up a hill and across a level -space which was somewhat cleared of brush and -trees. Beyond we caught sight of a thatched -hut. Hardly had it come into view than from -its interior we heard a faint cry for help.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">« 52 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ANDRES.</p> - - -<p>“What is that?” ejaculated Alano, stopping -short and catching my arm.</p> - -<p>“A cry of some kind,” I answered. -“Listen!”</p> - -<p>We stepped behind some trees, to avoid any -enemies who might be about, and remained silent. -Again came the cry.</p> - -<p>“It is a man in distress!” said Alano presently. -“He asks us not to desert him.”</p> - -<p>“Then he probably saw us from the window -of the hut. What had we best do?”</p> - -<p>“You remain here, and I will investigate,” -rejoined my Cuban chum.</p> - -<p>With caution he approached the thatched hut, -a miserable affair, scarcely twelve feet square -and six feet high, with the trunks of palm trees -as the four corner-posts. There were one tiny -window and a narrow door, and Alano after -some hesitation entered the latter, pistol in hand.</p> - -<p>“Come, Mark!” he cried presently, and I ran -forward and joined him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">« 53 »</a></span></p> - -<p>A pitiable scene presented itself. Closely -bound to a post which ran up beside the window -was a Cuban negro of perhaps fifty years of age, -gray-haired and wrinkled. He was scantily -clothed, and the cruel green-hide cords which -bound him had cut deeply into his flesh, in many -places to such an extent that the blood was flowing. -The negro’s tongue was much swollen, -and the first thing he begged for upon being released -was a drink of water.</p> - -<p>We obtained the water, and also gave him -what we could to eat, for which he thanked us -over and over again, and would have kissed our -hands had we permitted it. He was a tall man, -but so thin he looked almost like a skeleton.</p> - -<p>“For two days was I tied up,” he explained -to Alano, in his Spanish <i>patois</i>. “I thought I -would die of hunger and thirst, when, on raising -my eyes, I beheld you and your companion. -Heaven be praised for sending you! Andres -will never forget you for your goodness, never!”</p> - -<p>“And how came you in this position?” questioned -my chum.</p> - -<p>“Ah, dare I tell, master?”</p> - -<p>“You are a rebel?”</p> - -<p>The negro lowered his eyes and was silent.</p> - -<p>“If you are, you have nothing to fear from -us,” continued Alano.</p> - -<p>“Ah—good! good!” Andres wrung his hand. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">« 54 »</a></span> -“Yes, I am a rebel. For two years I fought -under our good General Maceo and under Garcia. -But I am old, I cannot climb the mountains -as of yore, and I got sick and was sent -back. The Spanish soldiers followed me, -robbed me of what little I possessed, and, instead -of shooting me, bound me to the post as a -torture. Ah, but they are a cruel set!” And -the eyes of the negro glowed wrathfully. “If -only I was younger!”</p> - -<p>“Were the Spaniards on horseback?” asked -Alano.</p> - -<p>“Yes, master—a dozen of them.”</p> - -<p>Alano described the bandits we had met, -and Andres felt certain they must be the same -crowd. The poor fellow could scarcely stand, -and sank down on a bed of cedar boughs and -palm branches. We did what we could for him, -and in return he invited us to make his poor -home our own.</p> - -<p>There was a rude fireplace behind the hut, -and here hung a great iron pot. Rekindling -the fire, we set the pot to boiling; and Andres -hobbled around to prepare a soup, or rather -broth, made of green plantains, rice, and a bit of -dried meat the bandits had not discovered, -flavoring the whole mess with garlic. The dish -was not particularly appetizing to me, but I was -tremendously hungry and made way with a fair -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">« 55 »</a></span> -share of it, while Alano apparently enjoyed his -portion.</p> - -<p>It was dark when the meal was finished, and -we decided to remain at the hut all night, satisfied -that we would be about as secure there as -anywhere. The smoke of the smoldering fire -kept the mosquitoes and gnats at a distance, and -Andres found for us a couple of grass hammocks, -which, when slung from the corner-posts, made -very comfortable resting-places.</p> - -<p>During the evening Alano questioned Andres -closely, and learned that General Garcia was -pushing on toward Guantanamo, as we had previously -been informed. Andres did not know -Señor Guerez, but he asserted that many -planters throughout the district had joined the -rebel forces, deserting their canefields and taking -all of their help with them.</p> - -<p>“The men are poorly armed,” he continued. -“Some have only their canefield knives—but -even with these they are a match for the Spanish -soldiers, on account of their bravery”—an -assertion which later on proved, for the greater -part, to be true.</p> - -<p>The night passed without an alarm of any -kind, and before sunrise we were stirring around, -preparing a few small fish Alano had been lucky -enough to catch in a near-by mountain stream. -These fish Andres baked by rolling them in a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">« 56 »</a></span> -casing of clay; and never have I eaten anything -which tasted more delicious.</p> - -<p>Before we left him the Cuban negro gave us -minute directions for reaching the rear guard of -the rebel army. He said the password was still -“Maysi.”</p> - -<p>“You had better join the army,” he said, on -parting. “You will gain nothing by trying to -go around. And you, master Alano—if your -father has joined the forces, it may be that will -gain you a horse and full directions as to just -where your parent is,” and as we trudged off -Andres wished us Godspeed and good luck over -and over again, with a friendly wave of his black -bony hand.</p> - -<p>The cool spell, although it was really only -cool by contrast, had utterly passed, and as the -sun came up it seemed to fairly strike one a blow -upon the head. We were traveling along the -edge of a low cliff, and shade was scarce, although -we took advantage of every bit which -came in our way. The perspiration poured -from our faces, necks, and hands; and about ten -o’clock I was forced to call a halt and throw myself -on my back on the ground.</p> - -<p>“I knew it would be so,” said my chum. -"That is why I called for an early start. We -might as well rest until two or three in the afternoon. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">« 57 »</a></span> -Very few people travel here in the heat -of the day."</p> - -<p>“It is suffocating,” I murmured. “Like one -great bake-oven and steam-laundry combined.”</p> - -<p>“That is what makes the vegetation flourish,” -he smiled. “Just see how it grows!”</p> - -<p>I did not have far to look to notice it. Before -us was a forest of grenadillo and rosewood, -behind us palms and plantains, with an occasional -cacao and mahogany tree. The ground -was covered with long grass and low brush, and -over all hung the festoons of vines of many -colors, some blooming profusely. A smell of -“something growing green” filled the hot air, -and from every side arose the hum of countless -insects and the occasional note of a bird.</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t remain on the ground too long,” -remarked Alano presently. “When one is hot -and lies down, that is the time to take on a fever. -Better rest in yonder tree—it is more healthy; -and, besides, if there is any breeze stirring, there -is where you will catch it.”</p> - -<p>“We might as well be on a deserted island as -to be in Cuba,” I said, after both of us had -climbed into a mahogany tree. “There is not a -building nor a human soul in sight. I half believe -we are lost again.”</p> - -<p>Alano smiled. "Let us rather say, as your -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">« 58 »</a></span> -Indian said, 'We are not lost, we are here. The -army and the towns and villages are lost,'" and -he laughed at the old joke, which had been the -first he had ever read, in English, in a magazine -at Broxville Academy.</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s just as bad, Alano. I, for one, am -tired of tramping up hill and down. If we could -reach the army and get a couple of horses, it -would be a great improvement.”</p> - -<p>My chum was about to reply to this, when he -paused and gave a start. And I started, too, -when I saw what was the trouble. On a limb -directly over us, and ready to descend upon our -very heads, was a serpent all of six feet in length!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">« 59 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ACROSS THE CANEFIELDS.</p> - - -<p>“Look, Mark!” ejaculated Alano.</p> - -<p>“A snake!” I yelled. “Drop! drop!”</p> - -<p>I had already dropped to the limb upon which -I had been sitting. Now, swinging myself by -the hands, I let go and descended to the ground, -a distance of twelve or fifteen feet.</p> - -<p>In less than a second my Cuban chum came -tumbling after me. The fall was no mean one, -and had the grass under the tree been less deep -we might have suffered a sprained ankle or -other injury. As it was, we both fell upon our -hands and knees.</p> - -<p>Gazing up at the limb we had left, we saw the -serpent glaring down at us, its angry eyes shining -like twin diamonds. How evil its intention -had been we could but surmise. It was possible -it had intended to attack us both. It slid -from the upper limb to the lower, and stretched -out its long, curling neck, while it emitted a hiss -that chilled my blood.</p> - -<p>“It’s coming down! Run!” I began; when -bang! went Alano’s pistol, and I saw the serpent -give a quiver, and coil and uncoil itself around -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">« 60 »</a></span> -the limb. The bullet had entered its neck, but -it was not fatally wounded; and now it came for -us, landing in the grass not a dozen feet from -where we stood.</p> - -<p>Luckily, while traveling along the hills, we -had provided ourselves with stout sticks to aid -us in climbing. These lay near, and, picking -one up, I stood on the defensive, certain the -reptile would not dare to show much fight. -But it did, and darted for me with its dull-colored -head raised a few inches out of the grass.</p> - -<p>With all of the strength at my command I -swung the stick around the instant it came -within reach. It tried to dodge, but failed; and, -struck in the neck, turned over and over as -though more than half stunned.</p> - -<p>By this time Alano had secured the second -stick, and now he rushed in and belabored the -serpent over the head and body until it was -nearly beaten into a jelly. I turned sick at the -sight, and was glad enough when it was all over -and the reptile was dead beyond all question.</p> - -<p>“That was a narrow escape!” I panted. -“Alano, don’t you advise me to rest in a tree -again. I would rather run the risk of fever ten -times over.”</p> - -<p>“Serpents are just as bad in the grass,” he -replied simply. “Supposing he had come up -when you were flat on your back!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">« 61 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Let us get away from here—there may be -more. And throw away that stick—it may -have poison on it.”</p> - -<p>“That serpent was not poisonous, Mark. -But I will throw it away,—it is so covered with -blood,—and we can easily cut new ones.”</p> - -<p>The excitement had made me forget the heat, -and we went on for over a mile. Then, coming -to a mountain stream, we sat down to take it -easy until the sun had passed the zenith and it -was a trifle cooler.</p> - -<p>About four o’clock in the afternoon, or evening, -as they call it in Cuba, we reached the end -of the woods and came to the edge of an immense -sugar-cane field. The cane waved high -over our heads, so that what buildings might be -beyond were cut off from view. There was a -rough cart-road through the field, and after -some hesitation we took to this, it being the -only road in sight.</p> - -<p>We had traveled on a distance of half a mile -when we reached a series of storehouses, each -silent and deserted. Beyond was a house, probably -belonging to the overseer of the plantation, -and this was likewise without occupant, the -windows and doors shut tightly and bolted.</p> - -<p>“All off to the war, I suppose,” I said. -“And I had half an idea we might get a chance -to sleep in a bed to-night.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">« 62 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“We might take possession,” Alano suggested.</p> - -<p>But to this proposition I shook my head. -“We might be caught and shot as intruders. -Come on. Perhaps the house of the owner is -further on.”</p> - -<p>Stopping for a drink at an old-fashioned well, -we went on through the sugar cane until we -reached a small stream, beyond which was a -boggy spot several acres in extent.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to go around, Alano,” I said. -“Which way will be best?”</p> - -<p>“The ground appears to rise to our left,” -he answered. “We’ll try in that direction.”</p> - -<p>Pushing directly through the cane, I soon discovered, -was no mean work. It was often well-nigh -impossible to break aside the stout stalks, -and the stubble underfoot was more than trying -to the feet. We went on a distance of a hundred -yards, and then on again to the stream, -only to find the same bog beyond.</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to go further yet,” said Alano. -“Come, Mark, ere the sun gets too low.”</p> - -<p>“Just a few minutes of rest,” I pleaded, and -pulled down the top of a cane. The sweet juice -was exceedingly refreshing, but it soon caused -a tremendous thirst, which I gladly slaked -at the not over clear stream. Another jog of -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">« 63 »</a></span> -quarter of an hour, and we managed to cross at -a point which looked like solid ground.</p> - -<p>“How far do you suppose this field extends?” -I asked.</p> - -<p>“I have no idea; perhaps but a short distance, -and then again it may be a mile or more. Some -of the plantations out here are very large.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think we can get back to the road? -I can’t go much further through this stubble.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll break the way, Mark. You follow me.”</p> - -<p>On we went in the direction we imagined the -trail to be, but taking care to avoid the bog. I -was almost ready to drop from exhaustion, when -Alano halted.</p> - -<p>“Mark!”</p> - -<p>“What now, Alano?”</p> - -<p>“Do you know where we are?”</p> - -<p>“In a sugar-cane field,” I said, trying to keep -up my courage.</p> - -<p>“Exactly, but we are lost in it.”</p> - -<p>I stared at him.</p> - -<p>“Can one become lost in a sugar-cane field?” -I queried.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and badly lost, for there is nothing one -can climb to take a view of the surroundings. -Even if you were to get upon my shoulders you -could see but little.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll try it,” I answered, and did so without -delay, for the sun was now sinking in the west.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">« 64 »</a></span></p> - -<p>But my chum had been right; try my best I -could not look across the waving cane-tops. -We were hedged in on all sides, with only the -setting sun to mark our course.</p> - -<p>“It’s worse than being out on an open -prairie,” I remarked. “What shall we do?”</p> - -<p>“There is but one thing—push on,” rejoined -Alano gravely; “unless you want to spend a -night here.”</p> - -<p>Again we went on, but more slowly, for even -my chum was now weary. The wet ground -passed, we struck another reach of upland, and -this gave us hope, for we knew the sugar cane -would not grow up the hills. But the rise soon -came to an end, and we found ourselves going -down into a worse hollow than that we had left. -Ere we knew it, the water was forming around -our boots.</p> - -<p>“We must go back!” I cried.</p> - -<p>“I think it is drier a few yards beyond,” said -Alano. “Don’t go back yet.”</p> - -<p>The sun had set, so far as we were concerned, -and it was dark at the foot of the cane-stalks. -We plowed on, getting deeper and deeper into -the bog or mire. It was a sticky paste, and I -could hardly move one foot after another. I -called to Alano to halt, and I had scarcely done -so when he uttered an ejaculation of disgust.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” I called.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">« 65 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“I can’t move—I am stuck!”</p> - -<p>I looked ahead and saw that he spoke the -truth. He had sunk to the tops of his boots, -and every effort to extricate himself only made -him settle deeper.</p> - -<p>I endeavored to gain his side and aid him, but -it was useless. Ere I was aware I was as deep -and deeper than Alano, and there we stood,—and -stuck,—unable to help ourselves, with night -closing rapidly in upon us.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">« 66 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A COUNCIL OF THE ENEMY.</p> - - -<p>“Well, this is the worst yet,” I said, after a -minute of silence. Somehow, I felt like laughing, -yet our situation was far from being a -laughing matter.</p> - -<p>“We have put our foot into it, and no mistake,” -rejoined Alano dubiously.</p> - -<p>“Say feet, Alano,—and legs,—and you’ll be -nearer it. What on earth is to be done?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. See, I am up to my thighs -already. In an hour or so I’ll be up to my -neck.”</p> - -<p>To this I made no reply. I had drawn my -pistol, and with the crook of the handle was endeavoring -to hook a thick sugar-cane stalk -within my reach. Several times I had the stalk -bent over, but it slipped just as I was on the -point of grasping it.</p> - -<p>But I persevered,—there was nothing else to -try,—and at last my eager fingers encircled the -stalk. I put my pistol away and pulled hard, -and was overjoyed to find that I was drawing -myself up out of my unpleasant position.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">« 67 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Be careful—or the stalk will break,” cautioned -my Cuban chum, when crack! it did split, -but not before I was able to make a quick leap -on top of the clump of roots. Here I sank -again, but not nearly as deeply as before.</p> - -<p>The leap I had taken had brought me closer -to Alano, and now I was enabled to break down -a number of stalks within his reach. He got a -firm hold and pulled with all of his might, and a -moment later stood beside me.</p> - -<p>“Oh, but I’m glad we’re out of that!” were -his first words. “I thought I was planted for -the rest of my life.”</p> - -<p>“We must get out of the field. See, it will -be pitch dark in another quarter of an hour.”</p> - -<p>“Let us try to go back—it will be best.”</p> - -<p>We turned around, and took hold of each -other’s hands, to balance ourselves on the sugar-cane -roots, for we did not dare to step in the -hollows between. Breaking down the cane was -slow and laborious work, and soon it was too -dark to see our former trail. We lost it, but -this was really to our advantage, for, by going -it blindly for another quarter of an hour, we -emerged into an opening nearly an acre square -and on high and dry ground.</p> - -<p>Once the patch was reached, we threw ourselves -down on the grass panting for breath, the -heavy perspiration oozing from every pore. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">« 68 »</a></span> -We had had another narrow escape, and silently -I thanked Heaven for my deliverance.</p> - -<p>Toward the higher end of the clearing was a -small hut, built of logs plastered with sun-baked -clay. We came upon it by accident in the dark, -and, finding it deserted, lit our bit of candle before -mentioned and made an examination.</p> - -<p>“It’s a cane-cutter’s shanty,” said Alano. “I -don’t believe anybody will be here to-night, so -we might as well remain and make ourselves -comfortable.”</p> - -<p>“We can do nothing else,” I returned. “We -can’t travel in the darkness.”</p> - -<p>Both of us were too exhausted to think of -building a fire or preparing a meal. We ate -some of our provisions out of our hands, pulled -off our water-soaked boots, and were soon -asleep on the heaps of stalks the shanty contained. -Once during the night I awoke to find -several species of vermin crawling around, but -even this was not sufficient to make me rouse -up against the pests. I lay like a log, and the -sun was shining brightly when Alano shook me -heartily by the shoulder.</p> - -<p>“Going to sleep all day?” he queried.</p> - -<p>“Not much!” I cried, springing up. “Hullo, -if you haven’t got breakfast ready!” I added, -glancing to where he had built a fire.</p> - -<p>“Yes; I thought I’d let you sleep for a while,” -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">« 69 »</a></span> -he answered. “Fall to, and we’ll be on our -way. If we have good luck we may strike a -part of General Garcia’s army to-day.”</p> - -<p>“If we can get out of this beastly canefield.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve found a way out, Mark. Finish your -meal, and I’ll show you.”</p> - -<p>Breakfast was speedily dispatched, and, having -put on my boots, which were stiff and -hard from the wetting received, and taken up -my valise, I followed Alano to the extreme -southwest end of the clearing. Here there was -an ox-cart trail, leading in a serpentine fashion -through the canefield to still higher ground. -Beyond were the inevitable rocks and woods.</p> - -<p>“We seem to have missed everything,” I said -pointedly. “We have been lost several times, -and even now we don’t know where we -are.”</p> - -<p>“We know we’re not sinking to the bottom -of that sugar-cane field,” replied my Cuban -chum grimly. “That’s something to be thankful -for. Ah, look—there is quite a respectable-looking -highway. Let us take to that and keep -our eyes and ears open. It must lead to somewhere.”</p> - -<p>We had reached the highway at right-angles, -and now we pursued a course directly eastward, -which we felt must bring us closer and closer to -the vicinity of Guantanamo. I asked Alano if -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">« 70 »</a></span> -he recognized the country at all, but he shook -his head.</p> - -<p>“I was never out in this direction,” he explained. -“My journeys have always been from -Guantanamo to Santiago by water.”</p> - -<p>As we progressed we passed several isolated -huts, and then a village containing perhaps a -score of dwellings. The separate huts were deserted -without exception, but in the village we -came across three tall and bony colored women, -who eyed us with great suspicion.</p> - -<p>Alano began to open a friendly conversation -in Spanish with them, and offered to pay them -well if they would get us up a good dinner. But -this they could not do, for there was little to be -had outside of some vegetables. They said they -had had some meat, but it had all been confiscated -by the soldiers who had passed through -only the evening before.</p> - -<p>“She means a body of Spanish soldiers,” said -Alano, after some more talk with the oldest of -the women. “She says there were about a -hundred of them on horseback, and they were -following up a detachment of General Garcia’s -volunteers.”</p> - -<p>“If that is so they can’t be far off,” I rejoined. -“We must be more careful than -ever.”</p> - -<p>"If only we could catch up to them, get -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">« 71 »</a></span> -around them, and warn our fellows!" remarked -Alano, his black eyes sparkling.</p> - -<p>“It’s easy to see you’re a rebel,” I said, laughing.</p> - -<p>“And why not—if my father is one? Come, -what do you say?”</p> - -<p>“I am with you, if it can be done. But we -mustn’t run into needless danger, Alano.”</p> - -<p>“We will take care, Mark.”</p> - -<p>Luckily, the sun had gone under the clouds, -so it was not so warm when we resumed our -journey, after the negro women had supplied us -with the best meal at their command. They -smiled broadly when Alano told them he was a -rebel sympathizer, and each declared her husband -had joined General Garcia’s army several -weeks previously.</p> - -<p>The road now led along the southern edge of -a deep ravine, bordered upon either side with -wild plantains and cacao trees, with here and -there an occasional palm. The highway was -stony, and presently Alano called a halt.</p> - -<p>“Hark!” he said, holding up his hand; and -we listened, to discern the tramping of horses' -hoofs some distance ahead.</p> - -<p>“There are a good many horses,” I said. -“Perhaps it is the Spanish detachment.”</p> - -<p>Alano nodded. “Follow me, and take to the -woods if I hiss,” he replied.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">« 72 »</a></span></p> - -<p>On we went again, but slower than before. -The road now wound around to the right, up -under a cliff backed up by a small mountain. -As the sun was behind the mountain, the path -was dark in its more sheltered portions.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Alano let out a soft hiss, and we -leaped back behind a convenient rock.</p> - -<p>“They are just ahead!” he cried softly. -“They have quartered themselves for the middle -of the day in a cave-like opening under the -cliff, where it is, no doubt, cool and pleasant.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what had we best do?”</p> - -<p>“Get around them, by some means, Mark. -But, hold up! Wouldn’t it be fine if we could -draw close enough to overhear them—if they -are talking over their plans!”</p> - -<p>“It would be risky,” I hesitated.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but think of the service we might do -my countrymen!”</p> - -<p>“That is true. Well, I’m with you, Alano, -but for gracious' sake be careful!”</p> - -<p>We talked the matter over for a few minutes, -and then retraced our steps to where a narrow -path led to the top of the cliff. Climbing this, -we crawled along the edge of the cliff until we -reached a spot directly over the encamped -Spaniards.</p> - -<p>They were a hearty, bold-looking set of men, -handsomely uniformed and thoroughly armed, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">« 73 »</a></span> -presenting a decided contrast to the dirty guerrillas -we had previously encountered. A number -of the soldiers were reclining upon the -ground smoking, but a half-dozen of them, evidently -officers, were gathered in a circle, conversing -earnestly.</p> - -<p>“They are holding a council of war!” cried -Alano, after he had strained his ears to catch -what was being said. “They are waiting for -Captain Crabo to join them with another detachment, -and then they are to aid some others -in surrounding the left wing of General Garcia’s -army, which is encamped in the valley on the -other side of this mountain.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">« 74 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A WILD RIDE ON HORSEBACK.</p> - - -<p>I was of course deeply interested in what -Alano had to say, and my heart gave a sudden -leap when he mentioned that General Garcia’s -wing of the rebel army was so close at hand. -Instantly I thought of my father. Was he in -the ranks?</p> - -<p>I was about to speak when my Cuban chum -motioned me to silence. As cautiously as a cat -he drew closer to the edge of the cliff, throwing -himself flat on his face as he made the movement. -I followed suit, knowing full well that I -would scarcely be able to understand the council -of war being held below, but anxious to get -a better view of the soldiery we now considered -our enemies.</p> - -<p>Evidently the Spanish officers did not imagine -any outsiders were near, for they spoke rather -loudly, while each gesticulated a good deal in his -own particular manner. Ten minutes passed, -and then there came a pause. Alano touched -me on the arm, and, as silently as we had advanced, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">« 75 »</a></span> -we turned and retreated into the brush -back of the cliff.</p> - -<p>“I have their plans well in mind, Mark,” he -whispered. “Oh, if only we could find General -Garcia and tell him all!”</p> - -<p>“Did you find out just where the general is -located?”</p> - -<p>“Pretty nearly—in that direction”—my Cuban -chum waved his hand. “There is a ravine -to cross and then a pass through the mountains. -I believe the rebels now hold the pass, but the -Spaniards mean to gain the high ground and -hem them in. If they do that, my people will -be slaughtered like cattle in a pen.”</p> - -<p>“And supposing our fathers are with the -rebels?” I put in quickly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I was thinking of that, Mark. We had -best—— Hist!”</p> - -<p>Alano stopped short. From a distance came -the sounds of horses' hoofs.</p> - -<p>“It must be Captain Crabo,” said Alano. -“Lay low!”</p> - -<p>We drew still further into the brush and -waited. Nearer and nearer came the horses. -Then came a shout and a sudden halting.</p> - -<p>“They’ve challenged the newcomers,” whispered -Alano, as we heard the words “<i>Quien -va?</i>”</p> - -<p>Evidently the reply was satisfactory, for in a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">« 76 »</a></span> -moment more the new arrivals had joined the -force under the cliff. Looking from our shelter, -we saw that Captain Crabo was the same individual -who had had us locked up in the smoke-house -some days previously.</p> - -<p>“We don’t want him to lay hands on us -again,” I said, and Alano smiled grimly. “Why -not get out at once?” I went on.</p> - -<p>“Wait till I hear what Captain Crabo has to -say, Mark. He may bring news, and we want -to learn as much as we can. If they——”</p> - -<p>My Cuban chum was forced to stop speaking, -for with a quick movement I had placed a warning -hand over his mouth. Some of the soldiers -who had been resting were coming up the -cliff, evidently to take a look at the surroundings.</p> - -<p>“Come!” I whispered into Alano’s ear, and -turned to retreat. He followed me, and a distance -of fifty feet was covered through the -undergrowth, when we found ourselves at the -edge of another cliff and actually hemmed in by -the advancing men.</p> - -<p>What were we to do? It was a serious question, -and one to be decided instantly. Already -the foremost of the men was less than two rods -behind us. We looked around for a place to -hide, but none was at hand. Then Alano gave -a cry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">« 77 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“They are coming from the other direction -too! We are lost!”</p> - -<p>Scarcely had the words left his lips than we -heard a yell from two of the Spanish soldiers. -We were discovered, and all thoughts of further -concealment in that hemmed-in spot were out -of the question.</p> - -<p>Hardly realizing what I was doing in my agitated -frame of mind, I ran down to the very edge -of the cliff at a point about a hundred and fifty -feet above where the soldiers were encamped. -Looking down I discovered a series of crags -leading to the highway below. Here a score or -more of horses were tethered to a mahogany -tree.</p> - -<p>“Come, it’s our only chance!” I ejaculated, -and leaped for the nearest crag below me at the -imminent peril of tumbling and breaking my -neck.</p> - -<p>Down I went, jumping and rolling from one -projection of rocks to another, with Alano but -a short distance behind me. I heard a command -to stop, and then a shot, but paid no heed. -With a final bump I reached the foot of the cliff, -less than a dozen feet from where the horses -were standing.</p> - -<p>My sudden appearance startled several of the -animals, and they plunged and broke their -halters. But they did not run away, and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">« 78 »</a></span> -the fact that they were loose gave me another -idea.</p> - -<p>“The horses, Alano! Let us ride away on -them!”</p> - -<p>“Yes! yes!” he replied, and in a twinkle we -had secured two of the nearest of the animals. -We leaped into the saddle just as a second shot -rang out. The bullet struck my horse a glancing -blow on the flank, and off he tore up the -highway as though dug with a spur.</p> - -<p>I heard Alano coming behind me, but did not -dare look back, for the highway was a poor one -and my beast needed all of my attention. Fortunately, -riding had been taught to me at Broxville -Military Academy, so I felt fairly well at -home in the saddle. Gathering up the reins, I -sent the animal along at all the speed at his command. -The shouting behind continued, but no -more shots were fired, for the trees now hid both -of us from our pursuers.</p> - -<p>“That was a clever move,” cried Alano, as he -presently ranged up beside me. “We have -escaped them and provided ourselves with as -good horses as one would wish to ride.”</p> - -<p>“They will certainly follow us, Alano. We -must see if we can’t throw them off the trail.”</p> - -<p>“I see no side road.”</p> - -<p>“Well, come on until we strike something.” -I answered.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">« 79 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Forward we went, making both horses do -their best. Half a mile was covered and we -forded a small mountain torrent. As the animals -paused to stick their noses into the cooling -liquid, we listened and heard the Spaniards coming -after us on the remainder of the animals.</p> - -<p>“Quick!” cried Alano. “They have lost no -time in following.”</p> - -<p>“There is a side road, leading into the mountains,” -I returned. “We had better take that.”</p> - -<p>We turned off as I had advised, and it was not -long before another half-mile was covered. -Having reached an elevation of several hundred -feet, the road became broad and tolerably level, -and we went on faster than ever.</p> - -<p>“We ought to be getting close to the rebel -camp,” said Alano, a while later. “By the -looks of the country we should be near that pass -the rebels are supposed to be occupying.”</p> - -<p>“I doubt if it is long before we strike some of -your people now,” I answered. “But supposing -we slack up a bit? The horses can’t stand -this strain in the heat.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, they are used to the heat. But we can -take it easier if you say so. There isn’t any use -of our riding ourselves sore the first day in the -saddle.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose they can put us down for horse -thieves if they want to.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">« 80 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Not much, Mark. Why, it’s more than -likely these horses were confiscated from my -countrymen in the first place.”</p> - -<p>Thus conversing, we galloped along for half -a mile further. Then, as Alano paused to readjust -his horse’s saddle, I fancied I heard some -suspicious sounds behind us, and drew my -chum’s attention to them.</p> - -<p>“Horses!” cried Alano. “They must have -found our trail, and are coming after us! Come -ahead, or we’ll be captured after all!”</p> - -<p>Once more we urged our animals forward. -But not for long. Coming to a turn in the -road, Alano yelled to me to halt, and pointed -ahead.</p> - -<p>I gave a groan as I looked. A mountain -stream, all of twelve feet wide and twice as deep, -crossed the roadway. There had been a rude -bridge of tree trunks, but this was torn away, -and thus our further retreat seemed hopelessly -cut off.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">« 81 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A DARING LEAP.</p> - - -<p>For the moment neither Alano nor myself -spoke as we gazed at the gap before us. Then -I gave a groan which seemed to come from my -very soul.</p> - -<p>“We are lost, Alano! They have hemmed -us in!”</p> - -<p>My Cuban chum did not answer. Instead, -he gazed to the right and the left.</p> - -<p>But this was useless. On our right was a -stony undergrowth impossible to traverse, on -the left a thick jungle leading down into what -looked like a bottomless morass.</p> - -<p>The hoof-strokes of the pursuing horses -sounded nearer, and I expected every moment -to see the band of Spanish cavalrymen dash -into sight with drawn arms, ready to shoot or -cut us down. Alano must have been thinking -the same, for I saw him grate his teeth hard.</p> - -<p>“Mark!” he cried suddenly. “Come, it’s -our only hope.”</p> - -<p>“What?”</p> - -<p>“To cross the stream.”</p> - -<p>“But how? We can’t jump it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">« 82 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“We’ll make the horses do it. Be quick, or -it will be too late. Watch me. I am certain -these horses know how to do the trick.”</p> - -<p>He rode back a distance of two hundred feet. -Then on he came, like the wind, his animal well -in hand. A cry of command, and the horse rose -in the air and went over the chasm like a bird.</p> - -<p>Could I do as well? There was no time left -to speculate on the subject. Our pursuers were -but just around the turn. I rode back as Alano -had done and started to make the leap.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” It was the cry of Captain Crabo, -who was in the lead of the oncoming cavalrymen. -I paid no attention. The edge of the -mountain stream was reached, and I cried to my -horse to move forward.</p> - -<p>But he was stubborn, and made a balk for -which I was hardly prepared. Down went his -front feet against a bit of sharp rock, and the -shock threw me over his head and directly into -the middle of the mountain torrent!</p> - -<p>I heard Alano give a cry of alarm, and then -the waters closed over my head. Down and -down I went, for at this point the water was at -least fifteen feet deep. The sunlight was shut -out as I passed under several overhanging rocks, -only to bump up against the roots of a tree, -where the water rushed rapidly in several directions.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">« 83 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Dazed to such an extent that I hardly knew -what I was doing, I caught at the roots, held -fast, and drew my head above the surface of the -stream. I was out of sight of those who were -after me, and prudently concluded to remain -where I was.</p> - -<p>My hiding-place was far from agreeable. The -tree roots were slimy, and I imagined they must -be the home of water snakes. Just over my -head was a mass of soil over which crawled innumerable -black beetles, some as big as a man’s -thumb. Within reach of my hand, a large -green-and-white frog blinked at me in amazement.</p> - -<p>The shouts of the Spaniards reached me in a -muffled way, as I heard them dismount and -tramp up and down the torrent in search of me. -I expected every moment to be discovered, but -that moment did not come, and quarter of an -hour passed.</p> - -<p>By this time I could scarcely hold on longer -to the tree roots. I listened as well as I could, -and, hearing no sound, let go my hold. The -rush of water speedily carried me fifteen feet -further down the stream, and here I caught hold -of some bushes and pulled myself up on the -bank and out of sight.</p> - -<p>I was now on the same side to which Alano -had crossed, and I soon discovered that several -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">« 84 »</a></span> -of the Spaniards had also come over, although -on foot. They were in the neighborhood of the -highway, and I could make out enough of their -talk to know they were deploring their luck in -not being able to find me and stop my Cuban -chum.</p> - -<p>Feeling that it would be foolhardy to leave -my place of concealment for some time to come, -I endeavored to make myself as comfortable as -possible under the shelter of a clump of wild -orange trees. These were full of the tempting-looking -fruit, which, however, I found on sampling -was so bitter it fairly puckered my mouth. -But in my bag were some biscuits, and, as these -were thoroughly water-soaked, I ate several -with a relish.</p> - -<p>Twice did the Spaniards pass within fifty feet -of my hiding-place, and each time I felt like giving -myself up for lost. They remained in the -vicinity until nearly sundown, and then withdrew -in the direction from whence they had -come, growling volubly among themselves over -their ill-luck.</p> - -<p>With cautious steps I left the clump of wild -oranges, and hurried to the highway. As Alano -was on horseback, I felt he must have kept to -the road. How far he had gone there was no -telling, although it must be several miles if not -much further.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">« 85 »</a></span></p> - -<p>While at the military academy we boys had, -like many other school fellows, adopted a -peculiar class whistle. This I felt certain Alano -would remember well, and, at the risk of being -spotted, I emitted the whistle with all the -strength of my lungs, not once, but half a dozen -times.</p> - -<p>I listened intently, but no answer came back; -and, satisfied that my chum was not within hearing, -I went on my way, up the road, keeping an -eye open for any enemy who might be in ambush.</p> - -<p>It was now growing dark, and I felt that in -another half-hour night would be upon me. To -be alone in that wilderness was not pleasant, -but just then there appeared to be no help -for it.</p> - -<p>At the distance of half a mile I stopped again -to whistle. While I was listening intently I -fancied I heard a rustle among the trees to my -right. I instantly dove out of sight behind -some brush, but the noise did not continue, and -I concluded it must have been made by some -bird.</p> - -<p>Presently the road took another turn and -made a descent into a canyon from which the -light of day had long since fled. I hesitated and -looked forward. Certainly the prospect was -not an inviting one. But to turn back I felt -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">« 86 »</a></span> -would be foolish, so I went on, although more -cautiously than ever.</p> - -<p>At the bottom of the hollow was a bit of -muddy ground, over which a mass of cut brush -had been thrown, probably to make the passage -safer for man and beast. I had just stepped on -this brush when something whizzed through the -air and encircled my neck. Before I could save -myself, I was jerked backward and felt a rawhide -lasso cutting into my windpipe. I caught -hold of the rawhide and tried to rise, but several -forms arose out of the surrounding gloom and -fell upon me, bearing me to the earth.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">« 87 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">FRIENDS IN NEED.</p> - - -<p>I speedily found that my enemies were five in -number; and, as they were all tall and powerful -men, to struggle against them would have been -foolhardy.</p> - -<p>“Don’t choke me—I give in,” I gasped, and -then the pressure on my neck was relieved.</p> - -<p>“<i>Americano</i>,” I heard one of the fellows mutter. -“No talk, you!” he hissed into my ear, -and flourished a knife before my eyes to emphasize -his words.</p> - -<p>I shut my mouth, to signify that I agreed, and -then I was allowed to rise, and in a twinkle my -hands were tied behind my back. Two of the -men conducted me away from the spot, while -a third followed us. The other two men remained -on guard at the highway.</p> - -<p>I wondered if Alano had been captured, but -just then did not give the subject much thought. -There was no telling whether the men were -Spanish or Cuban sympathizers; but, no matter -to what side they belonged, I noted with a shudder -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">« 88 »</a></span> -that they were a decidedly tough class of -citizens.</p> - -<p>Leaving the highway, we made our way along -a rocky course leading to a small clearing at the -top of a plateau. Back of the clearing was a -rude hut, set in a grove of sapodilla trees. -Around the hut half a dozen dirty soldiers were -lying, who leaped up at our approach. An earnest -conversation in a Spanish <i>patois</i> followed, -and then one of the men spoke to me in -Spanish.</p> - -<p>“No speak Spanish, eh?” he growled, in return -to my assertion to that effect. “Who you -be? Where you go to?”</p> - -<p>“I am on my way to Guantanamo, to join my -father,” I said, and made as much of an explanation -as I deemed necessary.</p> - -<p>The soldiers glared suspiciously at me when -my words were translated to them. Then, -without ceremony, they began to search me, -taking all I had of value from me.</p> - -<p>“You are not going to rob me, I trust,” I -said, and the man who could speak English -laughed coarsely.</p> - -<p>“We take all we get,” he replied. “All right -in war, <i>amigo</i>.”</p> - -<p>I was not his <i>amigo</i>, or friend, but I was forced -to submit; and, even as it was, I was thankful -my life had been spared, for they were a cruel-looking -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">« 89 »</a></span> -band, with less of the soldier than the -bandit about them.</p> - -<p>When I saw a chance, I started in to question -them concerning Alano, but the nearest fellow, -with a flat blow from his dirty hand, stopped me.</p> - -<p>“No talk!” growled he who could speak -English.</p> - -<p>After this I said no more, but from where I -had been placed, at the rear of the hot and ill-ventilated -hut, I watched the men narrowly and -tried to understand what they were talking -about. I heard General Garcia mentioned and -also the word “machete,” the name of the long, -deadly knives most of the Cuban soldiers -carried.</p> - -<p>At last the men around the hut began to grow -sleepy, and one after another sought a suitable -spot and threw himself down to rest. The -youngest of the party, a fellow not over twenty, -was left on guard.</p> - -<p>With his pistol in his lap, this guard sat on a -flat rock, rolling cigarette after cigarette and -smoking them. From my position in the hut -I could just catch his outline, and I watched him -eagerly. I pretended to go to sleep, but I was -very wide awake.</p> - -<p>It must have been well past midnight, and I -was giving up in despair, when the last of the -cigarettes went out and the guard’s head fell -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">« 90 »</a></span> -forward on his breast. In the meantime I had -been silently working at the rawhide which -bound my hands. In my efforts my wrists were -cut not a little, but at last my hands were free.</p> - -<p>Feeling that the guard and the others were all -asleep, I arose as silently as a shadow. Several -of my captors lay between me and the entrance -of the hut, and it was with extreme caution that -I stepped over them. The last man sighed -heavily and turned over just as I went by, and -with my heart in my throat I leaped out into the -open.</p> - -<p>But he did not awaken, nor did the guard -notice my appearance. As I passed the latter -I saw something shining on the ground. It -was the pistol, which had slipped from the -guard’s lap. I hesitated only an instant, then -picked it up and glided onward to the end of the -plateau.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” The command, coming so suddenly, -was enough to startle anybody, and I -leaped back several feet. A man had appeared -before me, one of the fellows left to guard the -highway below. Following the command came -an alarm in Spanish.</p> - -<p>On the instant the camp was in commotion. -The guard was the first to awaken, and his -anger when he found his pistol gone was very -great. While he was searching for his weapon, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">« 91 »</a></span> -the others poured from the hut and ran toward -me, leveling their weapons as they came.</p> - -<p>I was caught between two fires, for the man -before me also had his pistol raised, and I did -not know what to do. Then, to avoid being -struck, and not wishing to shed blood, I leaped -toward some near-by bushes.</p> - -<p>Bang! crack! A musket and a pistol went off -almost simultaneously, and I heard a clipping -sound through the trees. Just as my former -captors turned to follow me into the thicket, -there came another shot from down in the hollow -of the highway.</p> - -<p>“<i>Cuba libre!</i>” I heard echo upon several -sides, and a rattle of musketry followed. From -a dozen spots in the hollow I saw the long -flashes of fire, and I at once knew that a portion -of the Cuban army was at hand and had surprised -the Spanish sympathizers who were attempting -to hold the highway.</p> - -<p>The moment the battle started below the -plateau those who had held me captive gave -up pursuing me, and rushed back to the hut to -obtain their entire belongings—feeling, doubtless, -that the region would soon get too hot to -hold them. I watched them turn away with -keen satisfaction, and remained where I was, the -guard’s pistol still in my possession.</p> - -<p>For fully half an hour the firing kept up, and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">« 92 »</a></span> -then came a rush along the highway and again -I heard the cry of “<i>Cuba libre!</i>” raised, showing -that the rebels were getting the best of the -encounter and had driven the Spanish soldiers -from their hiding-places. On went one body of -men after the other down the road, until the -sounds of their voices and firearms were almost -lost in the distance.</p> - -<p>Certain that the plateau was now absolutely -deserted, I ran back to the hut and found my -valise, which had been thrown in a corner. My -pistol was gone, but as I had another, fully -loaded and just as good, I did not mind this. -With my satchel over my shoulder, I crawled -cautiously down to the highway and hurried in -the direction I had before been pursuing.</p> - -<p>I had just reached the opposite side of the -hollow, where all was pitch dark, on account of -the shade, when a feeble moan came to my ears. -Moving silently in the direction, I found a negro -lying on his back, a fearful wound in his -shoulder.</p> - -<p>The man could speak nothing but a Cuban -<i>patois</i>, yet I understood that he was in pain and -desired his shoulder bound up. Wetting my -handkerchief in the water at the hollow, I -washed the wound as best I could and tied it up -with strips of muslin torn from the sleeve of his -ragged shirt and my own shirt sleeve. For this, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">« 93 »</a></span> -I could note by his manner, that he was extremely -grateful.</p> - -<p>“<i>Americano?</i>” he said.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” I replied.</p> - -<p>Then he asked me several other questions, -from which I made out that he wanted to know -which side I was on. Feeling certain I was safe, -I said “Cuba,” and he smiled faintly.</p> - -<p>“I want to find General Garcia,” I continued, -emphasizing the name. Then I tapped my -breast, said General Garcia again, and pointed -off with my finger.</p> - -<p>He nodded and attempted to sit up. With -his bony finger he pointed up the highway, and -circled his finger to the northwest to signify I -was to turn off in that direction. Then he -caught me by the arm and whispered “Maysi” -into my ear—the password.</p> - -<p>Feeling I could do no more for him at present, -I went on, and at the distance of an eighth of a -mile came to a side road, which was the one he -had described to me. It was narrow and rocky, -and I had not proceeded over two hundred feet -in the direction when a soldier leaped out -from behind a banana tree and presented his -gun.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” he cried.</p> - -<p>“Maysi!” I called promptly.</p> - -<p>The gun was lowered, and, seeing I was but a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">« 94 »</a></span> -boy, the guard smiled and murmured “<i>Americano?</i>” -to which I nodded.</p> - -<p>“General Garcia,” I said, and tapped my -breast to signify I wished to see the great Cuban -leader.</p> - -<p>Without a word the guard led me on a distance -of a hundred feet and called another soldier. -A short talk ensued, and the second man -motioned me to follow him through a trail in the -brush. We went on for ten minutes, then came -to a clearing hemmed in by a cliff and several -high rocks.</p> - -<p>Here were over a hundred soldiers on foot -and twice as many on horseback. In the midst -of the latter was the Cuban general I had asked -to see—the gallant soldier who had fought so -hard in the cause of Cuban liberty.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">« 95 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">GENERAL CALIXTO GARCIA.</p> - - -<p>My first view of General Calixto Garcia was a -disappointing one. For some reason, probably -from the reports I had heard concerning his -bravery, I had expected to see a man of great -proportions and commanding aspect. Instead, -I saw an elderly gentleman of fair figure, with -mild eyes and almost white mustache and beard, -the latter trimmed close. But the eyes, though -mild, were searching, and as he turned them -upon me I felt he was reading me through and -through.</p> - -<p>He was evidently surprised to see a boy, and -an American at that. He spoke but little English, -but an interpreter was close at hand, who -immediately demanded to know who I was, -where I had come from, and what I wanted.</p> - -<p>“My name is Mark Carter, and I have journeyed -all the way from Santiago de Cuba,” I replied. -“I heard that my father and his friend, -Señor Guerez, had joined General Garcia’s -forces.”</p> - -<p>“You are Señor Carter’s son!” exclaimed the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">« 96 »</a></span> -Cuban officer, and turned quickly to General -Garcia. The two conversed for several minutes, -and then the under-officer turned again to me.</p> - -<p>“General Garcia bids you welcome,” he said, -and at the same time the great Cuban leader -smiled and extended his hand, which I found as -hard and horny as that of any tiller of the soil. -“He knows your father and Señor Guerez -well.”</p> - -<p>“And where are they now?” I asked quickly.</p> - -<p>“They were with the army two days ago, but -both went off to escort the ladies of Señor Guerez' -family to a place of safety. The señor was -going to take his wife and daughters to an old -convent up a river some miles from here.”</p> - -<p>This was rather disheartening news, yet I had -to be content. I asked if my father was well.</p> - -<p>“Very well, although hardly able to walk, on -account of a leg he broke some time ago.”</p> - -<p>“And have you seen Alano Guerez? He is -about my own age, and was with me up to this -morning,” I went on, and briefly related my adventures -on the road, to which the officer listened -with much interest.</p> - -<p>“We have seen nothing of him,” was the -reply I received. “But he may be somewhere -around here.”</p> - -<p>The officer wished to know about the Spanish -detachment we had met, and I told him all I -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">« 97 »</a></span> -knew, which was not much, as I had not understood -the Spanish spoken and Alano had not -interpreted it for me. But even the little I had -to say seemed to be highly important, and the -officer immediately reported the condition of -affairs to General Garcia.</p> - -<p>By this time some of the soldiers who had -taken part in the fight at the foot of the plateau -came back, bringing with them several wounded -men, including the negro whose wound I had -bound up. The disabled ones were placed in a -temporary hospital, which already sheltered a -dozen others, and General Garcia rode off with -his horsemen, leaving the foot soldiers to spread -out along the southeastern slope of the mountain.</p> - -<p>Left to myself, I hardly knew what to do. A -black, who could speak a few words of -“Englis',” told me I could go where I wanted, -but must look out for a shot from the enemy; -and I wandered over to the hospital and to the -side of the fellow I had formerly assisted.</p> - -<p>The hospital, so called, consisted of nothing -more than a square of canvas stretched over the -tops of a number of stunted trees. From one -tree to another hammocks, made of native grass, -were slung, and in these, and on piles of brush -on the ground, rested the wounded ones. Only -one regular doctor was in attendance, and as his -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">« 98 »</a></span> -surgical skill and instruments were both limited, -the sufferings of the poor fellows were indeed -great.</p> - -<p>“Him brudder me—you help him,” said the -black who spoke “Englis',” as he pointed to the -fellow whose wound I had dressed. “Jorge -Nullus no forget you—verra good you.”</p> - -<p>“Is your name Jorge Nullus?”</p> - -<p>“Yeas, señor—him brudder Christoval.”</p> - -<p>“Where did you learn English?”</p> - -<p>“Me in Florida once—dree year ago—stay -seex months—no like him there—too hard -work,” and Jorge Nullus shrugged his shoulders. -“You verra nice leetle man, señor,” and -he smiled broadly at his open compliment.</p> - -<p>“Do you know Señor Guerez?” I questioned -quickly.</p> - -<p>“Me hear of him—dat’s all.”</p> - -<p>“Do you know where the old convent on the -river is?” I continued.</p> - -<p>The Cuban nodded. “Yeas—been dare many -times—bring 'taters, onions, to Father Anuncio.”</p> - -<p>“Could you take me there—if General Garcia -would let you go?”</p> - -<p>“Yeas, señor. But Spaniards all around—maybe -shoot—bang!—dead,” and he pointed to -his wounded brother. The brother demanded -to know what we were talking about, and the -two conversed for several minutes. Then Jorge -turned again to me.</p> - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 353px;"> -<img src="images/page98f.png" width="353" height="506" alt="" /> -<div class="fig_caption">“GENERAL GARCIA, THE GALLANT SOLDIER WHO HAD FOUGHT -SO HARD IN THE CAUSE OF CUBAN LIBERTY.”</div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">« 99 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Christoval say me take you; you verra -good leetle man, señor. We go now, you say -go.”</p> - -<p>“Will you be allowed to go?”</p> - -<p>“Yeas—General Garcia no stop me—he -know me all right,” and the negro grinned and -showed his teeth.</p> - -<p>I was tempted to start at once, but decided to -wait until morning, in the hope of finding -Alano. In spite of the fact that I knew my -chum would be doubly cautious, now we were -separated, I felt decidedly anxious about him. -The Spanish troops were on every side, and the -soldiers would not hesitate to shoot him down -should they learn who he was.</p> - -<p>The night passed in comparative quietness. -Toward morning we heard distant firing to the -northwest, and at five o’clock a messenger -dashed into camp with the order to move on to -the next mountain, a distance of two miles. -Through Jorge I learned that the Spaniards had -been outwitted and driven back to the place -from whence they had come.</p> - -<p>There now seemed nothing for me to do but -to push on to the convent on the river, in the -hope of there joining my father. We were, so -I was told, but a few miles from Guantanamo, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">« 100 »</a></span> -but the route to the convent would not take us -near the town.</p> - -<p>Jorge’s brother felt much better, so the negro -went off with a light heart, especially after I had -made it plain to him that my father would reward -him for any trouble he took on my account. -I told him about Alano, and before -leaving camp we walked around among the sentries -in the hope of gaining some information -concerning him. But it was all useless.</p> - -<p>“Maybe he went on to Father Anuncio’s,” -said my negro guide, and this gave me a grain -of comfort.</p> - -<p>The soldiers and Jorge and myself left the -camp at about the same time, but we did not -take the same road, and soon my guide and I -found ourselves on a lonely mountain trail overlooking -a valley thick with brush and trees. -The sun shone brightly, but the air was clear -and there was a fine breeze blowing, and this -made it much cooler than it would otherwise -have been.</p> - -<p>I missed the horse, and wondered if Alano still -had the animal he had captured. It might be -possible he had ridden straight on to Guantanamo, -and was now bound from there up the -river. If that was so, we might meet on the -river road.</p> - -<p>“Werry bad road now,” said Jorge, as we -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">« 101 »</a></span> -came to a halt on the mountain side. “Be careful -how you step, Señor Mark.”</p> - -<p>He pointed ahead, to where a narrow trail led -around a sharp turn. Here the way was rocky -and sloped dangerously toward the valley. He -went on ahead, and I followed close at his heels.</p> - -<p>“No horse come dis way,” observed Jorge, as -he came to another turn. “Give me your hand—dis -way. Now den, jump!”</p> - -<p>We had reached a spot where a tiny mountain -stream had washed away a portion of the trail. -I took his hand, and we prepared to take the -leap.</p> - -<p>Just then the near-by crack of a rifle rang out -on the morning air. Whether or not the shot -was intended for us I cannot say, but the sound -startled me greatly and I stumbled and fell. -Jorge tried to grab me, but failed, and down I -shot head first into the trees and bushes growing -twenty feet below the trail!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">« 102 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A PRISONER OF WAR.</p> - - -<p>By instinct more than reason, I put out both -hands as I fell, and this movement saved me -from a severe blow on the head. My hands -crashed through the branches of a tree, bumped -up against the trunk, and then I bounced off -into the midst of a clump of brush and wild -peppers.</p> - -<p>“Hi, yah!” I heard Jorge cry out, but from -my present position I could not see him. “Is -you killed?” he went on.</p> - -<p>“No, but I’m pretty well shook up and -scratched up,” I answered.</p> - -<p>“Take care—somebody shoot,” he went on.</p> - -<p>I concluded I was pretty well out of sight, and -I kept quiet and tried to get back the breath -which had been completely knocked out of me. -A few minutes later I heard a crashing through -the brush, and my guide stood beside me.</p> - -<p>“Lucky you no killed,” he observed. “Bad -spot dat.”</p> - -<p>He searched around and soon found a hollow -containing some water, with which I bathed the -scratches on my face and hands. In the meantime -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">« 103 »</a></span> -he gazed around anxiously in the direction -from which he imagined the shot had come.</p> - -<p>“Maybe no shoot at us,” he said, quarter of -an hour later. “Me find out.”</p> - -<p>With his ever-ready machete he cut down a -young tree and trimmed the top branches off, -leaving the stumps sticking out about six inches -on every side. On the top of the tree he stuck -his hat, and then, having no coat, asked me for -mine, which he buttoned about the tree a short -distance under the hat, placing a fluttering -handkerchief between the two.</p> - -<p>With this rude dummy, or scarecrow, he -crawled up the side of the gully until almost on -a level with the trail. Then he hoisted the figure -up cautiously and moved it forward.</p> - -<p>No shot was fired, and after waiting a bit -Jorge grew bolder and climbed up to the trail -himself. Here he spent a long time in viewing -the surroundings, and finally called to me.</p> - -<p>“Him no shoot at us. Maybe only hunter. -Come up.”</p> - -<p>Not without some misgivings, I followed -directions. To gain the trail again was no easy -matter, but he helped me by lowering the end of -the tree and pulling me up. Once more we proceeded -on our way, but with eyes and ears on -guard in case anybody in the shape of an enemy -should appear.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">« 104 »</a></span></p> - -<p>By noon Jorge calculated we had covered -eight miles, which was considered a good distance -through the mountains, and I was glad -enough to sit down in a convenient hollow and -rest. He had brought along a good stock of -provisions, with which the rebel camp had happened -to be liberally provided, and we made a -meal of bread, crackers, and cold meat, washed -down with black coffee, cooked over a fire of -dead and dried grass.</p> - -<p>“We past the worst of the road now,” remarked -Jorge, as we again moved on. “Easy -walkin' by sundown.”</p> - -<p>He was right, for about four o’clock we struck -an opening among the mountains where there -was a broad and well-defined road leading past -several plantations. The plantations were occupied -by a number of Cubans and blacks, who -eyed me curiously and called out queries to -Jorge, who answered them cheerfully.</p> - -<p>The plantations left behind, we crossed a -brook which my guide said ran into the river, -and took to a path running along a belt of oak -and ebony trees, with here and there a clump of -plantains. We had gone but a short distance -when we crossed another trail, and Jorge called -a halt and pointed to the soft ground.</p> - -<p>The hoofprints of half a dozen horses were -plainly visible, and as they were still fresh we -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">« 105 »</a></span> -concluded they had been made that very day, -and perhaps that afternoon.</p> - -<p>“Who do you think the horsemen are, -Jorge?” I asked.</p> - -<p>He shrugged his shoulders.</p> - -<p>“Can’t say—maybe soon tell—me see,” and -on he went, with his eyes bent on the ground.</p> - -<p>For my part, I thought it best to keep a watch -to the right and the left. We went on slowly -until the evening shadows began to fall. Then -Jorge was about to speak, when I motioned him -to be silent.</p> - -<p>“There is something moving in yonder -brush,” I said, pointing with my hand. “I -think I saw a horse.”</p> - -<p>We left the road and proceeded in the direction, -moving along slowly and silently. I had -been right; there was not one horse, but half a -dozen, tethered to several stunted trees.</p> - -<p>No human beings were present, but from a -distance we presently heard the murmur of -voices, and a minute later two Spanish soldiers -came into view. Jorge drew his pistol, but I -restrained him.</p> - -<p>The soldiers had evidently come up to see if -the horses were still safe. Satisfied on this -point, one passed to the other a roll of tobacco -for a bite, and both began to converse in a low -but earnest tone.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">« 106 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Jorge listened; and, as the talk ran on, his face -grew dark and full of hatred. The backs of the -two Spaniards were toward us, and my guide -drew his machete and motioned as if to stab -them both.</p> - -<p>I shook my head, horrified at the very -thought. This did not suit Jorge, and he drew -me back where we might talk without being -overheard.</p> - -<p>“What is the use of attacking them?” I said. -“Let us be on our way.”</p> - -<p>“Them men fight General Garcia’s men—maybe -hurt my brudder,” grunted Jorge wrathfully. -“They say they have prisoner—kill him -soon.”</p> - -<p>“A prisoner?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Where?”</p> - -<p>“At camp down by river. They kill udder -prisoner, now rob dis one an' kill too. Bad men—no -good soldiers.”</p> - -<p>I agreed with him on this point. Yet I was -not satisfied that he should go back and attack -the pair while they were off their guard.</p> - -<p>“It would not be fair,” I said, “and, besides, -the noise may bring more soldiers down upon -us. I wish we could do something for their -prisoner, whoever he is.”</p> - -<p>We talked the matter over, and, seeing the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">« 107 »</a></span> -soldiers depart, concluded to follow them. We -proceeded as silently as two shadows, and during -the walk Jorge overheard one soldier tell the -other that the prisoner was to be shot at sunrise.</p> - -<p>A turn in the path brought us to a broad and -roughly flowing stream. Here a temporary -camp had been pitched. Half a dozen dirty-looking -Spaniards were lolling on the ground, -smoking and playing cards. From their talk -Jorge said they were waiting for some of their -former comrades to join them, when all were to -travel back to where the Spanish commander, -Captain Campona, had been left.</p> - -<p>“There ees the prisoner,” said Jorge, in a -whisper, and pointed along the river shore to -where rested a decaying tree, half in and half out -of the water. The prisoner was strapped with -rawhides to one of the tree branches, and it was—my -chum Alano!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">« 108 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A RESCUE UNDER DIFFICULTIES.</p> - - -<p>Mere words cannot express my astonishment -and alarm when I saw who the prisoner tied to -the tree was. As I gazed at Alano my heart -leaped into my throat, and like lightning I remembered -what Jorge had told me the Spaniards -had said, that the prisoner was to be shot -at sunrise.</p> - -<p>Alano shot! I felt an icy chill creep over -me. My own chum! No, no, it must not be! -In my excitement I almost cried aloud. Noting -how strangely I was affected, my guide -placed his hand over my mouth and drew me -back into a thicket.</p> - -<p>“It is Alano Guerez!” I whispered, as soon -as I was calm enough to speak—“Señor Guerez' -son!”</p> - -<p>“Ah, yah!” ejaculated Jorge. “I see he is -but a boy. <i>Perros!</i> [Dogs!]”</p> - -<p>“We must save Alano,” I went on. “If he -was shot, I—I would never forgive myself.”</p> - -<p>Jorge shrugged his shoulders. “How?” he -asked laconically. “Too many for us.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">« 109 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Perhaps we can do something when it -grows darker.”</p> - -<p>The guide drew down the corners of his -mouth. Then, as he gazed at the river, his big -black eyes brightened.</p> - -<p>“Yeas, when it is darker we try. But must -be careful.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps we can get to him by the way of -the river.”</p> - -<p>Jorge smiled grimly. Catching me by the -arm he led me along the bank, overgrown with -grass and rushes. Not far away was something -that looked like a half-submerged log covered -with mud. Taking a stone he threw it, and the -“log” roused up and flopped angrily into the -stream.</p> - -<p>“Alligators!” I cried, with a shiver. “No, -we won’t be able to get to him by way of the -river. But we must do something.”</p> - -<p>“We cross river, and I tell you what we do,” -replied my guide.</p> - -<p>Crossing was not an easy matter, as neither of -us cared to attempt swimming or fording with -alligators in the vicinity. But by passing along -the bank we presently discovered a spot where -half a dozen rocks afforded a footing, and over -we went in the semi-darkness, for the sun was -now setting.</p> - -<p>As we hurried down the course of the stream -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">« 110 »</a></span> -again, Jorge cut several cedar and pine branches -which appeared to be particularly dry. Then -he handed me a number of matches, of which, -fortunately, he had an entire box.</p> - -<p>“We will put one pile of branches here,” he -said, “and another further down, and one further -yet. Den I go back to camp. You watch -tree over there. When you see light wait few -minutes, den light all dree fires.”</p> - -<p>“But how will that help us?”</p> - -<p>“Soldiers see fires, want to know who is dar—don’t -watch Alano—me go in and help him. -After you make fires you run back to where we -cross on stones.”</p> - -<p>Jorge’s plan was not particularly clear to me, -yet I agreed to it, and off he sped in the gloom. -Left to myself, I made my way cautiously to the -water’s edge, there to await the signal he had -mentioned.</p> - -<p>It was a hot night and the air was filled with -myriads of mosquitoes, gnats, flies, and other -pests. From the woods behind me came the -occasional cry of a night bird, otherwise all was -silent. Frogs as big as one’s two hands sat on -the rocks near by, on the watch for anything in -the shape of a meal which might come their -way.</p> - -<p>But bad as the pests around me were, I gave -them scant consideration. My whole mind was -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">« 111 »</a></span> -concentrated upon Alano and what Jorge proposed -to do. Silently I prayed to Heaven that -the guide might be successful in rescuing my -chum.</p> - -<p>About half an hour went by,—it seemed an -extra long wait to me,—when suddenly I saw -a flash of fire, in the very top of a tree growing -behind the Spaniards' camp. The flash lasted -but a second, then died out instantly.</p> - -<p>Arising from my seat, I ran to the furthest pile -of boughs and waited while I mentally counted -off a hundred and eighty seconds, three minutes. -Then I struck a match, ignited the heaped-up -mass, and ran to the second pile.</p> - -<p>In less than ten minutes the three fires, situated -about three hundred feet apart, were burning -fiercely, and then I ran at topmost speed for -the spot where the river had been crossed. I -had just reached the locality when I heard a -shout ring out, followed by two musket shots.</p> - -<p>A painful, anxious two minutes followed. -Were Alano and Jorge safe? was the question I -asked myself. I strained my eyes to pierce the -gloom which hung like a pall over the water.</p> - -<p>Footsteps on the rocks greeted my ears. -Someone was coming, someone with a heavy -burden on his back. Once or twice the approaching -person slipped on the rocks and I -heard a low cry of warning.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">« 112 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Mark!”</p> - -<p>It was the voice of Alano, and my heart gave -a joyful bound. In another second my Cuban -chum appeared in view, carrying on his manly -back the form of Jorge.</p> - -<p>“Alano,” I ejaculated excitedly, “what is -the matter with him?”</p> - -<p>“He has been shot in the leg,” was the reply. -“Come on, help me carry him and get to cover. -I am afraid they are on my track!”</p> - -<p>“Run into the woods!” groaned Jorge. -“Den we take to trees—dat’s best.”</p> - -<p>As Alano was almost exhausted, I insisted -that the guide be transferred to my back, and -this was speedily done, and on we went, away -from the river and directly into the forest. Of -course, with such a burden I could not go far, -and scarcely a hundred yards were traversed -when I came to a halt, at the foot of a giant mahogany -tree.</p> - -<p>Not without a good deal of difficulty Jorge -was raised up into the branches of the tree, and -we followed.</p> - -<p>“Still now and listen!” cried Jorge, with a -half-suppressed groan.</p> - -<p>With strained ears we sat in the mahogany -tree for fully half an hour without speaking. -We heard the Spaniards cross the river and -move cautiously in the direction of the three -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">« 113 »</a></span> -fires, and presently they returned to their own -camp.</p> - -<p>“Thank fortune, we have outwitted them!” -murmured Alano, the first to break the silence. -“You poor fellow!” he went on to Jorge; “you -saved my life.”</p> - -<p>He asked about the wound which had been -received, and was surprised, and so was I, to -learn that it was but slight, and what had caused -the guide’s inability to run had been a large -thorn which had cut through his shoe into his -heel. By the light of a match the thorn was -forced out with the end of Jorge’s machete, and -the foot was bound up in a bit of rag torn from -my coat sleeve, for I must admit that rough -usage had reduced my clothing to a decidedly -dilapidated condition.</p> - -<p>As we could not sleep very well in the tree -without hammocks, we descended to the ground -and made our way to a bit of upland, where -there was a small clearing. Here we felt safe -from discovery and lay down to rest. But before -retiring Alano thanked Jorge warmly for -what he had done, and thanked me also.</p> - -<p>“I thought you were a goner,” he said to me. -“How did you escape when the horse balked -and threw you into the stream?”</p> - -<p>I told him, and then asked him to relate his -own adventures, which he did. After leaving -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">« 114 »</a></span> -me, he said, his horse had taken the bit in his -teeth and gone on for fully a mile. When the -animal had come to a halt he had found himself -on a side trail, with no idea where he was.</p> - -<p>His first thought was to return to the stream -where the mishap had occurred, his second to -find General Garcia. But Providence had -willed otherwise, for he had become completely -tangled up in the woods and had wandered -around until nightfall. In the morning he had -mounted his horse and struck a mountain path, -only to fall into the hands of the Spanish soldiers -two hours later. These soldiers were a -most villainous lot, and, after robbing him of all -he possessed, had decided to take his life, that -he might not complain of them to their superior -officer.</p> - -<p>“From what I heard them say,” he concluded, -“I imagine they have a very strict and -good man for their leader—a man who believes -in carrying on war in the right kind of a way, -and not in such a guerrilla fashion as these chaps -adopt.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want any war, guerrilla fashion or -otherwise,” I said warmly. “I’ve seen quite -enough of it already.”</p> - -<p>“And so have I,” said my Cuban chum.</p> - -<p>Of course he was greatly interested to learn -that his father was on the way to place his -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">« 115 »</a></span> -mother and sisters in the old convent on the -river. He said that he had seen the place several -years before.</p> - -<p>“It is a tumbled-down institution, and Father -Anuncio lives there—a very old and a very pious -man who is both a priest and a doctor. I -shouldn’t wonder if the old building has been -fitted up as a sort of fort. You see, the Spaniards -couldn’t get any cannon to it very well, to -batter it down, and if they didn’t have any cannon -the Cubans could hold it against them with -ease.”</p> - -<p>“Unless they undermined it,” I said.</p> - -<p>“Our people would be too sharp for that,” -laughed my Cuban chum. “They are in this -fight to win.”</p> - -<p>Jorge now advised us to quit talking, that our -enemies might not detect us, and we lay down -to rest as previously mentioned. I was utterly -worn out, and it did not take me long to reach -the land of dreams, and my companions quickly -followed suit.</p> - -<p>In the morning our guide’s heel was rather -sore, yet with true pluck he announced his readiness -to go on. A rather slim and hasty breakfast -was had, and we set off on a course which -Jorge announced must bring us to the river by -noon.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">« 116 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A TREACHEROUS STREAM TO CROSS.</p> - - -<p>I must mention that now that we had gained -the high ground of the mountains the air was -much cooler and clearer than it was in the valleys, -and, consequently, traveling was less fatiguing.</p> - -<p>Jorge went ahead, limping rather painfully at -times, but never uttering a word of complaint. -Next to him came Alano, while I brought up in -the rear. It is needless to state that all of us had -our eyes and ears wide open for a sight or sound -of friend or enemy.</p> - -<p>The road was a hard one for the most part, -although here and there would be found a hollow -in which the mud was from a few inches to -several feet deep. Jorge always warned us of -these spots, but on several occasions I stepped -into the innocent-looking mud only to find that -it was all I could do to get clear of the dark, -glue-like paste.</p> - -<p>It was but eleven o’clock when we came in -sight of the river, which at this point was from -thirty to forty feet wide. Looking up and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">« 117 »</a></span> -down the water-course, we saw that it wound its -way in and out among the hills in serpentine -fashion. The bottom was mostly of rough -stones, and the stream was barely three to four -feet deep.</p> - -<p>“How will we get over?—by swimming?” I -questioned, as we came to a halt on a bank that -was twenty feet above the current.</p> - -<p>“Find good place by de rocks,” said Jorge. -“Must be careful. Water werry swift.”</p> - -<p>I could see that he was right by the way the -water dashed against the rocks. Our guide led -the way along the bank for a distance of several -hundred feet and began to climb down by the -aid of the brush and roots.</p> - -<p>“That doesn’t look pleasant,” remarked -Alano, as he hesitated. “Just look at that -stream!”</p> - -<p>Picking up a dry bit of wood he threw it into -the water. In a few seconds it was hurried -along out of our sight.</p> - -<p>Nevertheless, we followed Jorge down to the -water’s edge. Before us was a series of rocks, -which, had the stream been a bit lower, would -have afforded an excellent fording-place.</p> - -<p>“De river higher dan I think,” said our guide. -“You take off boots, hey?”</p> - -<p>“That we will,” I answered, and soon had my -boots slung around my neck. Alano followed -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">« 118 »</a></span> -my example, and with extreme caution we -waded down and out to the first rock.</p> - -<p>“Any alligators?” I cried, coming to a pause.</p> - -<p>“No 'gators here,” answered Jorge. “Water -too swift—'gators no like dat.”</p> - -<p>This was comforting news, and on I went -again, until I was up to my knees. The water -felt very refreshing, and I proposed to Alano -that we take advantage of our situation and -have a bath.</p> - -<p>“I feel tremendously dirty, and it will brace -us up. We needn’t lose more than ten minutes.”</p> - -<p>My Cuban chum was willing, and we decided -to take our bath from the opposite shore. -Jorge declined to go swimming and said he -would try his luck at fishing, declaring that the -river held some excellent specimens of the finny -tribe.</p> - -<p>We had now reached the middle of the stream. -I was two yards behind Alano, while Jorge was -some distance ahead. We were crossing in a -diagonal fashion, as the fording rocks ran in that -direction.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Alano muttered an exclamation in -Spanish. “It’s mighty swift out here!” he -cried. “Look out, Mark, or——”</p> - -<p>He did not finish. I saw him slip and go -down, and the next instant his body was rolling -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">« 119 »</a></span> -over and over as it was being carried along by -the rushing current.</p> - -<p>“Jorge, Alano is gone!” I yelled, and took a -hasty step to catch hold of my chum’s coat. The -movement was a fatal one for me, and down I -went precisely as Alano had done. The water -entered my eyes and mouth, and for the moment -I was blinded and bewildered. I felt my feet -touch bottom, but in the deeper water to obtain -a footing was out of the question.</p> - -<p>When my head came up I found myself at -Alano’s side. I saw he had a slight cut on the -forehead and was completely dazed. I caught -him by the arm until he opened his eyes and instinctively -struck out.</p> - -<p>“We’re lost, Mark!” he spluttered.</p> - -<p>“Not yet,” I returned. “Strike out for the -shore.”</p> - -<p>With all the strength at our command we -struck out. To make any headway against that -boiling current was well-nigh impossible, and on -and on we went, until I was almost exhausted. -Alano was about to sink when he gave a cry.</p> - -<p>“The bottom!” he announced, and I put -down both feet, to find the stream less than -three feet deep. With our feet down, we were -now able to turn shoreward; and five minutes -later Jorge had us both by the hands and was -helping us out.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">« 120 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Well, we wanted a bath and we got it,” were -Alano’s first words. “Have you had enough, -Mark?”</p> - -<p>“More than sufficient,” I replied, with a -shudder. “Ugh, but that is a treacherous -stream, and no mistake!”</p> - -<p>“You lucky boys,” said Jorge. “Horse get -in and roll over, he lose his life.”</p> - -<p>We stopped long enough to wring out our -clothing and put on our boots, and then followed -our guide again. Half an hour later we reached -a sheltered spot and here took dinner. By the -time the repast was ended our light summer -suits were almost dried. Luckily, through it all -each of us had retained his hat.</p> - -<p>“We haven’t had the fish Jorge promised us,” -said Alano, as we were preparing to resume our -journey. “A bit of something baked wouldn’t -go bad.”</p> - -<p>“Fish to-night,” said the guide.</p> - -<p>“Have you a line and hook, Jorge?” I asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes, always carry him,” he answered; and, -upon further questioning, I learned that to carry -a fishing outfit was as common among the rebels -as to carry a pistol or the ever-ready machete. -They had to supply themselves with food, and it -was often easier and safer to fish in the mountain -streams than to shoot game or cattle.</p> - -<p>We made a camp that night under the shelter -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">« 121 »</a></span> -of a clump of grenadillo trees; and, as Jorge had -promised, he tried his luck at fishing in a little -pool under some rocks. He remained at his -lines, two in number, for nearly an hour, and in -that time caught four fish—three of an eel-like -nature and a perch. These were cooked for -supper, and tasted delicious.</p> - -<p>“When will we reach the old convent?” I -asked, as we were about to turn in.</p> - -<p>“Reach him by to-morrow afternoon maybe, -if no storm come,” said Jorge.</p> - -<p>“Do you think there will be a storm?”</p> - -<p>The guide shrugged his shoulders.</p> - -<p>“Maybe—time for storm now.”</p> - -<p>The fire had been put out as soon as the fish -were baked, that it might not attract the attention -of any Spaniards who might be in the -neighborhood. At eight o’clock we turned in, -making our beds on a number of cedar boughs, -which were easy to obtain in this mountainous -locality. We had no coverings but our coats, -but found these sufficient under the shelter of -the grenadillos.</p> - -<p>How long I slept I did not know. I awoke -with a start and raised up. All was silent. I -gazed around in the gloom, and saw that Alano -and our guide slumbered soundly.</p> - -<p>“I must have been dreaming,” I muttered to -myself, when a rustle in the brush behind me -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">« 122 »</a></span> -caused me to leap to my feet. There was another -rustle, and then came what I imagined was -a half-subdued growl of rage.</p> - -<p>Fearful that we were on the point of being attacked -by some wild animal, I bent over my -companions and shook them.</p> - -<p>“Wake up! Wake up!” I cried. “There -are wild beasts about! Quick, and get your -pistols ready!”</p> - -<p>And then I looked toward the bushes again, -to see an ugly, hairy head thrust forward and a -pair of glaring eyes fastened full upon me!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">« 123 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ALONE.</p> - - -<p>“What is it?” cried Alano, as he scrambled -to his feet.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know!” I yelled. “Look! look!”</p> - -<p>As I spoke I pulled out my pistol. By this -time Jorge was also aroused.</p> - -<p>“<i>Que ha dicho V.?</i> [What did you say?]” he -demanded, leaping up and catching at his machete.</p> - -<p>“An animal—a bear, or something!” I went -on. “There he is!”</p> - -<p>I raised my pistol, and at the same time our -guide looked as I had directed. I was about to -pull the trigger of my weapon when he stopped -me.</p> - -<p>“No shoot! <i>Puerco!</i>” he cried, and gave a -laugh. Leaping forward, he made after the animal, -which turned to run away. But Jorge was -too quick for him. Presently there was a grunt -and a prolonged squeal, and then I understood -what my wild beast was—nothing but a wild -pig! In a couple of minutes Jorge came back to -camp dragging the tough little porker by the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">« 124 »</a></span> -hind legs. He had killed the animal in true -butcher’s style.</p> - -<p>“We have pork to-morrow,” he grinned, for -Cuban negroes are as fond of pig meat as their -Northern brothers. Taking a short rope from -one of his pockets, he attached it to the pig’s -hind legs and hung the body up on a convenient -tree branch.</p> - -<p>The incident had upset my nerves, and for the -balance of the night I slept only by fits and -starts, and I was glad when dawn came and the -rising sun began to gild the tops of the surrounding -hills. The sight was a beautiful one, -and I gazed at it for some time, while Jorge prepared -some pork chops over a tiny fire he had -kindled.</p> - -<p>“We carry what pork we can,” he said. -“No use to leave it behind. Father Anuncio -very glad to get pig, so sweet!” and once again -Jorge grinned. After breakfast the guide cut -up the balance of the animal, wrapped the parts -in wet palm leaves, and gave us each our share -to carry.</p> - -<p>Our involuntary bath had done me good, and -I stepped out feeling brighter and better than I -had for several days. I was becoming acclimated, -and I was glad of it, for had I been -taken down with a fever I do not know what I -would have done.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">« 125 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Alano was as eager as myself to reach the old -convent on the river, and we kept close upon -Jorge’s heels as our guide strode off down the -mountain side toward a forest of sapodillas and -plantains.</p> - -<p>“I trust we find everybody safe and sound,” -I remarked. “The fact that your father thought -it best to conduct your mother and sisters to -the convent would seem to indicate he was disturbed -about their safety.”</p> - -<p>“I am hoping he did it only to be clear to -join the rebel army,” replied Alano. “I hope -both your father and mine are in the ranks, and -that we are allowed to join too.”</p> - -<p>I did not wish to discourage my Cuban chum -on this point, yet I had my own ideas on the -subject. I was not anxious to join any army, -at least not while both sides to the controversy -were conducting the contest in this guerrilla-like -fashion. I was quite sure, from what I had -heard from various sources, that up to that date -no regular battle had been fought in the eastern -portion of Cuba, although the western branch -of the rebel army, under General Gomez, was -doing much regular and effective work.</p> - -<p>The reasons for this were twofold. In the -first place, General Gomez' forces were composed -mainly of white men, while a large portion -of the soldiers under General Garcia were -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">« 126 »</a></span> -black. Nearly all of the Americans who came -to Cuba to fight for Cuban liberty, came by way -of Havana or Jibacoa and joined General Gomez, -and these fellows brought with them a -large stock of arms and ammunition. It was -said that there were three armed men in the -West to every man who had even a pistol in the -East. Many of the negroes were armed only -with their machetes, which they tied to their -wrists with rawhides, that they might not lose -this sole weapon while on the march or in a -skirmish. To shoot off a cartridge in a pistol -without doing some effective work with it was -considered under General Garcia and his -brother officers almost a crime.</p> - -<p>The guerrilla warfare in the mountains I felt -could be kept up for a long time, perhaps indefinitely. -The Spanish troops had sought to surround -General Garcia a dozen times, only to discover, -when too late, that he and his men had -left the vicinity. The Cuban forces moved almost -always at night, and often detachments of -soldiers were sent off on swift horses to build -false campfires dozens of miles away from the -real resting-place of the army.</p> - -<p>In the valley we crossed through a large -coffee plantation. In the center was a low, -square house with several outbuildings. The -house was closed tightly, and so were the other -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">« 127 »</a></span> -buildings, yet as we drew close I fancied I heard -sounds from within.</p> - -<p>I notified Jorge, and a halt ensued. Hardly -had we stopped than the door of the house flew -open and out rushed half a dozen well-dressed -Spanish soldiers.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” came the command, but instead of -halting we turned and fled—I in one direction, -and Alano and our guide in another. Bang! -bang! went a couple of guns, and I heard the -bullets clipping through the trees. Surprised -and alarmed, I kept on, past a field of coffee and -into a belt of palms. Several of the soldiers -came after me, and I heard them shouting to me -to stop and promising all sorts of punishment if -I did not heed their command.</p> - -<p>But I did not intend to stop, and only ran the -faster, past the palms and into a mass of brushwood -growing to a height of ten or twelve feet. -At first the bushes were several feet apart, and -I went on with ease; but soon the growth was -more dense, and numerous vines barred the -way; and at last I sank down in a hollow, unable -to go another step, and thoroughly winded.</p> - -<p>I remained in the hollow at least half an hour, -trying to get back my breath and listening intently -to the movements of my pursuers. The -soldiers passed within fifty feet of me, but that -was as close as they got, and presently they -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">« 128 »</a></span> -went off; and that was the last I heard of -them.</p> - -<p>In the excitement of the chase I had dropped -my pig meat, and now I discovered that nearly -all of my other traps were gone, including my -pistol, which had left my hand during a nasty -trip-up over a hidden tree root. The trip-up had -given me a big bump on the temple and nearly -knocked me unconscious.</p> - -<p>Crawling around, I found a pool of water, in -which I bathed my forehead, and then I set -about finding out what had become of Alano -and Jorge. I moved with extreme caution, -having no desire to be surprised by the enemy, -who might be lying in ambush for me.</p> - -<p>Moving onward in the brush I soon discovered -was no light undertaking, and it was fully -an hour before I found my way out to where the -vines grew less profusely. The spot where I -emerged was not the same as that at which I had -entered the undergrowth, and on gazing around -I was dismayed to find that the whole topography -of the country looked different.</p> - -<p>I was lost!</p> - -<p>The thought rushed upon me all in an instant, -and I half groaned aloud as I realized my -situation. I must be all of a mile from the plantation, -and where my friends were I had not the -remotest idea.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">« 129 »</a></span></p> - -<p>The sun beat down hotly in the valley, and it -was not long before I was both dry and hungry. -I searched around for another pool, but could -not find any, and had to content myself with the -taste of a wild orange, far from palatable.</p> - -<p>Noon came and went and found me still -tramping around the valley looking for Alano -and Jorge. In my passage through the bushes -my already ragged clothing was torn still more, -until I felt certain that any half-decent scarecrow -could discount me greatly in appearance.</p> - -<p>At four o’clock, utterly worn out, I threw -myself on the ground in a little clearing and -gave myself up to my bitter reflections. I felt -that I was hopelessly lost. Moreover, I was -tremendously hungry, with nothing in sight with -which to satisfy the cravings of my appetite. -Night, too, was approaching. What was to -be done?</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">« 130 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE CAVE IN THE MOUNTAIN.</p> - - -<p>I lay in the clearing in the valley for all of half -an hour. Then, somewhat rested, I arose, -unable to endure the thought that night would -find me in the wilds alone and unarmed.</p> - -<p>I could well remember how the sun had stood -when I had separated from my companions, and -now, using the sun as a guide, I endeavored -once more to trace my steps to the path leading -down to the river. Once the stream was gained, -I resolved to search up and down its banks until -the old convent was sighted.</p> - -<p>My course led me up the side of a small mountain, -which I climbed with great difficulty, on -account of the loose stones and dirt, which more -than once caused my ankle to give a dangerous -twist. A sprained ankle would have capped -the climax of my misfortunes.</p> - -<p>Just as the sun was beginning to set behind -the peaks to the westward of me, I reached a -little plateau which divided a ridge from the -mountain proper. Here I rested for a few minutes -and obtained a refreshing drink at a spring -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">« 131 »</a></span> -under some rocks. Then I went on, in some -manner satisfied that I was on the right path at -last.</p> - -<p>But, alas! hardly had I taken a score of steps -than I stepped on a bit of ground which appeared -solid enough, but which proved to be -nothing but a mass of dead brushwood lying -over a veritable chasm. The whole mass gave -way, and with a lurch I was hurled forward into -black space.</p> - -<p>As I went down I put out my hands to save -myself. But, though I caught hold of several -roots and bits of rocks, this did not avail; and I -did not stop descending until I struck a stone -flooring twenty feet below the top of the opening. -Fortunately the floor was covered with -a large mass of half-decayed brush, otherwise -the fall must have been a serious if not a fatal -one.</p> - -<p>As I went down, on hands and knees, a lot of -loose branches, dirt, and small stones rolled on -top of me, and for the minute I had a vision of -being buried alive. But the downfall soon -ceased; and, finding no bones broken, I -crawled from under the load and surveyed the -situation.</p> - -<p>I felt that I was now worse off than ever. -The well-hole—I can call it nothing else—was -about ten feet in diameter, and the walls were -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">« 132 »</a></span> -almost smooth. The top of the opening was far -out of my reach, and, as for a means of escape, -there seemed to be none.</p> - -<p>However, I was not to be daunted thus easily, -and, striking a match and lighting a cedar -branch, I set about looking for some spot where -I might climb up. But the spot did not present -itself.</p> - -<p>But something else did, and that was an opening -leading directly into the mountain. On -pulling at a projecting rock, I felt it quiver, and -had just time to leap back, when it fell at my -feet. Behind the rock was a pitch-black hole, -into which I thrust the lighted branch curiously. -There was a cave beyond—how large was yet to -be discovered.</p> - -<p>I had no desire to explore any cave at that -moment, my one idea being to get out of the -well-hole and proceed on my way. But getting -out of the hole was impossible, and I was forced -to remain where I was, much to my disgust and -alarm.</p> - -<p>Jorge had been right about the coming storm. -At an hour after sunset I heard the distant -rumble of thunder, and soon a lively breeze blew -through the trees and brush on the mountain -side. A few flashes of lightning followed, and -then came a heavy downpour of rain.</p> - -<p>Not wishing to be soaked, I retreated to the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">« 133 »</a></span> -cave I had discovered, although with caution, -for I had no desire to take another tumble into -a deeper hole. But the floor of the cavern appeared -to be quite level, and with rising curiosity -I took up my lighted cedar branch, whirled it -around to make it blaze up, and started on a -tour of investigation and discovery.</p> - -<p>That I should not miss my way back, I lit a -pile of small brush at the mouth of the opening. -Then I advanced down a stony corridor, irregular -in shape, but about fifty feet wide by half as -high.</p> - -<p>The opening appeared to be a split in the -mountain, perhaps made ages before by volcanic -action. I felt certain there was an opening -above, for in several spots the rain came -down, forming small pools and streams of -water.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the idea struck me to watch which -way the water ran, and I did so and learned that -its course was in the very direction I was walking. -Moreover the tiny streams merged one -into another, until, several hundred feet further -on, they formed quite a water course.</p> - -<p>“If only this stream flows into the main -river!” I thought, and on the spur of the moment -resolved to follow it as far as I was able, -satisfied that if it led to nowhere in particular I -could retrace my steps to its source.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">« 134 »</a></span></p> - -<p>I now found the cave growing narrower, and -presently it grew less than a dozen feet in width, -and the stream covered the entire bottom to the -depth of several inches. Throwing my boots -over my shoulders, I began wading, feeling sure -of one step ere I trusted myself to take another.</p> - -<p>It took me fully ten minutes to proceed a hundred -feet in this fashion. The stream was now -not over six feet wide and all of a foot deep.</p> - -<p>Making sure that my torch was in no danger -of going out, I continued to advance, but now -more slowly than ever, for in the distance I -could hear the water as it fell over a number of -rocks. There was a bend ahead; and this -passed, I fervently hoped to emerge into the -open air, on the opposite side of the mountain -and close to the bank of the river for which I -was seeking.</p> - -<p>At the bend the water deepened to my knees, -and I paused to roll up my trousers, in the meantime -resting the torch against the wall, which -afforded a convenient slope for that purpose.</p> - -<p>I had just finished arranging my trouser-legs -to my satisfaction, when a rumble of thunder, -echoing and re-echoing throughout the cavern, -made me jump. My movement caused the -cedar branch to roll from the rocks, and it -slipped with a hiss into the stream. I made a -frantic clutch for it, and, in my eagerness to save -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">« 135 »</a></span> -it from going out or getting too wet, I fell on it -in the very middle of the stream.</p> - -<p>With a splutter I arose to find myself in utter -darkness. Moreover, the cedar branch was -thoroughly soaked, and it would take a good -many matches to light it again. And what was -still worse, every match my pocket contained -was soaked as badly as the torch.</p> - -<p>I must confess that I was utterly downcast -over my mishap, and if there had been any dry -ground handy I would have thrown myself down -upon it in abject despair. But there was only -water around, and, disconsolate as I was, I felt -I must either go forward or backward.</p> - -<p>How I became turned about I do not know, -but certain it is that, in essaying to return to the -spot from whence I had come, I continued on -down the stream. I did not notice the mistake -I had made until fifty yards had been passed and -I brought up against an overhanging rock with -my shoulder. Putting up my hands, I was dismayed -to discover that the passage-way was -just high enough to clear my head.</p> - -<p>Realizing that I must be walking into a trap, -I endeavored to turn about, when I slipped and -went down again. Before I could gain my footing -I was swept around a bend and into a much -broader stream. All was as dark as before, and -I soon learned that the bottom of the new water-course -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">« 136 »</a></span> -was beyond my reach. Putting my hand -up, I learned that the rocky ceiling was not over -two feet above the surface of the water, and the -distance between the two was gradually but -surely growing less!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">« 137 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">SEÑOR GUEREZ.</p> - - -<p>I was horrified over the discovery that I had -made. Here I was, in absolute darkness, -hemmed in by water and rocky walls, and drifting -rapidly I knew not whither.</p> - -<p>In my terror I cried aloud, but only echo answered -me—a peculiar echo which made me -shiver from head to foot.</p> - -<p>On and on, and still on, was I dashed by the -underground current, which seemed to grow -more powerful as I advanced, until my head -grazed repeatedly against the wall over me, -and I felt like giving myself up for lost. Oh, -how bitterly I regretted the curiosity which had -led me to explore the cavern in which chance -had so strangely placed me!</p> - -<p>But now what was this—a light? At first I -could scarcely believe the evidence of my senses. -There was a bright flash—then total blackness -again.</p> - -<p>What could it mean? Perhaps I was dreaming—or -the fearful situation had turned my -brain. Then came a second flash and a revelation.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">« 138 »</a></span></p> - -<p>It was the lightning from without, shining -through some opening into the waters under -and around me! I was nearing the outer world. -Oh, for a breath of fresh air again!</p> - -<p>Even as the thought crossed my mind, my -head struck the rocky ceiling again, and under I -went, to find that I could not come up, the -water now rising to the very rocks. But a -stronger light could be seen, and I dove along, -came up once, twice—and then emerged into -the open air with a splutter and a gasp, on the -verge of exhaustion.</p> - -<p>The underground stream emerged at the very -base of the mountain, and on both sides were -level stretches of swamps, covered with rushes -and other tropical growths. Swimming for the -nearest bank, I drew myself up and fell on my -breast, too worn out to stand.</p> - -<p>It did not matter to me just then that it was -night, that I was alone, and that it was raining in -torrents. I was safe from drowning—that was -my one thought, and never was a thought -sweeter to a boy.</p> - -<p>For fully fifteen minutes I remained on the -bank of the stream. Then, having recovered -somewhat from the effects of my awful experience, -I arose and took as good a view of my -situation as was possible. I waited for a strong -flash of lightning, and by this saw that my former -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">« 139 »</a></span> -wish had been realized and that I was within -a few hundred feet of the river upon which the -convent was said to be located.</p> - -<p>While the storm and the night lasted there -was nothing to do but to seek shelter wherever -it might be found; and, as the lightning now appeared -to die away, I walked to the very mountain -side, and found shelter under an overhanging -rock, flanked by several tall trees. Here I -wrung what water I could from my clothing and -made myself as comfortable as my miserable -condition permitted.</p> - -<p>Never was a person more glad to see the sun -than I. Old Sol came up clear and strong, and -my clothing quickly dried upon my body as I -walked along.</p> - -<p>Passing around the swamps, which were full -of monstrous toads and numerous lizards, I -reached the bank of the larger stream and -started to hunt for the convent for which Alano, -Jorge, and myself had been bound. As I hurried -on, as rapidly as the formation of the -ground permitted, I could not help but wonder -what had become of my chum and our negro -guide. Had they escaped, to roam around -looking for me, or had they fallen into the hands -of the Spaniards at the coffee plantation?</p> - -<p>Having had no breakfast, it was not long before -I began to feel hungry. To satisfy the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">« 140 »</a></span> -cravings of my appetite I picked several almost -ripe plantains, which, however, proved rather -poor eating. I also spent some time in a hunt -for berries, but none were to be found.</p> - -<p>By noon I calculated I had covered four or -five miles, and reached a narrow woods, growing -on both sides of the river. Beyond the -woods was a village, a decidedly poor-looking -settlement composed of a score of rude dwellings -built of logs and thatched with palm leaves -to keep out the rain.</p> - -<p>I did not know whether to enter the village or -not, and remained in the woods for some time, -watching the inhabitants, consisting of a score -of men and women and perhaps fifty children of -all ages. The children were dirty, and wore -hardly any clothing, but they seemed to be as -happy as though such a thing as war had never -been mentioned. Most of the men were at work -curing some wild-hog meat, while the women -were engaged in braiding mats and other -articles for sale or exchange.</p> - -<p>At last three of the children, running close to -the woods, espied me, and set up a shout of wonder -and alarm, at which the men stopped work -and came rushing forward with their clubs and -machetes. Seeing there was no help for it, I -stepped out into the open, and was immediately -surrounded.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">« 141 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Not a soul in the settlement, which went by -the name of Jiawacadoruo, could speak a word -of English, and for the time being I was partly -at a loss to make them understand that I came -as a friend who meant no harm. At the word -“<i>Americano</i>” they grinned, and one of them -queried “<i>Cuba libre?</i> [For Cuban liberty?]” -and I nodded. Then I pointed to my mouth -and stomach to signify that I was hungry.</p> - -<p>At once half a dozen of the women rushed off, -and soon I was presented with several bowls of -broth, made of chicken meat and vegetables, -strongly flavored with the inevitable garlic, and -a pot of strong black coffee. There was also a -dish of boiled arrowroot, made from the native -maranta, and this tasted best of all to me.</p> - -<p>While I was eating I tried, by every means -in my power, to make these Cubans understand -that I wanted to find the old convent, but failed -utterly. Finally an idea struck me, and I -essayed to carry it out. Tearing a page from a -blank book in my pocket, I drew upon it a rough -representation of a river and pointed to the -stream, at which the men gathered around -nodded that they understood.</p> - -<p>Next I drew the picture of a boy at one end of -the river, and pointed to myself. I am not by -any means an artist; but we had had drawing -lessons at Broxville Academy, and I managed -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">« 142 »</a></span> -to represent the boy as walking rapidly, as if in -a great hurry to get to where he was going. -This caused the men to laugh heartily.</p> - -<p>The next thing to do was to draw the old convent. -Never having heard the structure described, -I had to draw entirely upon my imagination, -and my knowledge of convent architecture -was decidedly limited. Yet I managed -to draw a fairly good representation of a ruined -stone building, with a cross at the top, and -before it put a priest, to whom, by an inspiration, -I suddenly pointed and cried “Father Anuncio.”</p> - -<p>A dozen exclamations followed, and the men -nodded to show that they now knew what was -wanted. A parley followed, and one tall negro -stepped forth and motioned that he was ready -to be my guide by pointing first to me and then -to my picture of the old convent.</p> - -<p>Luckily I still retained a few silver pieces in -my pocket, and before leaving I left two of these -behind, to be divided among the crowd of negroes, -for let me say in passing that all of the -inhabitants of Jiawacadoruo are people of color. -With my newly made guide I started up the -river, and the settlement was soon lost to -sight.</p> - -<p>I wondered how long it would take to reach -the old convent, and tried to put the question to -Bumbo, as I made his name out to be, but without -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">« 143 »</a></span> -success. Instead of answering with his fingers -or by pointing to the sun, he merely -grinned and walked faster, until it was all I could -do to keep up with him.</p> - -<p>It was almost sundown when we passed a -bend in the stream and mounted a bluff overlooking -a wide expanse of swamp land. The -topmost point of the bluff reached, the guide -pointed ahead, and there, almost at our feet, I -saw the massive outlines of what long years before -had been an imposing Spanish convent, -planted in that out-of-the-way spot for certain -noble families who had left Spain under a cloud -during the wars of the seventeenth century.</p> - -<p>As we approached the building, which was -now little more than a mass of ruins, I saw several -men standing just outside of the inclosed -courtyard. One was a priest, and two others -were in the uniform of officers in the Cuban -army. One of the latter I recognized as Señor -Guerez, having met the gentleman once while -he was on a business visit to the United States.</p> - -<p>“Señor Guerez!” I called out, as I ran to -him; and he turned in amazement.</p> - -<p>“Mark Carter!” he ejaculated, with a strong -Spanish accent. “I am much astonished.”</p> - -<p>“Is my father with you?” I demanded -eagerly, as I looked around.</p> - -<p>“No, my boy; I am sorry to say it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">« 144 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“And where is he?” I went on, my heart rising -to my throat, as I saw a look of anxiety cross -the gentleman’s bronzed features.</p> - -<p>“Your father was made a prisoner by the -Spanish authorities two days ago,” replied the -señor, and the answer all but prostrated me.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">« 145 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE ATTACK ON THE OLD CONVENT.</p> - - -<p>“My father a prisoner!” I gasped out, when -I could speak.</p> - -<p>“Yes, Mark.”</p> - -<p>“And how was he captured? and why?”</p> - -<p>“It is rather a long story. But tell me, -where is Alano?” And now it was Señor Guerez' -turn to become anxious.</p> - -<p>In a few words I explained matters, to which -the planter listened with close attention. His -brow darkened when I mentioned the Spaniards -up at the coffee plantation.</p> - -<p>“I know them,” he said. “We are expecting -an attack from them every day.”</p> - -<p>“An attack at this place?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.” He turned to his companions, and -introduced me to Father Anuncio and to Lieutenant -Porlando, both of whom shook hands -warmly when they were informed who I was. -“You see, many of the planters have brought -their families here,” Señor Guerez went on, -"and the Spanish think to subdue us if they can -make our wives and daughters prisoners. But -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">« 146 »</a></span> -that shall never be while we have strength to -fight."</p> - -<p>“Tell me of my father,” I said impatiently.</p> - -<p>“Come inside, my boy,” said Alano’s father; -and giving Bumbo a bit of silver I sent him off, -and followed the others into the courtyard, in -the rear of which was the convent building -proper, although wings extended out upon both -sides.</p> - -<p>In a shady corner I was introduced to La -Señora Guerez and to Alano’s two sisters, Inez -and Paula, two girls of ten and twelve, now -quite as dark as their father and mother, and -very beautiful, with their black wavy hair and -sparkling eyes full of good humor and merriment. -Mother and daughters could speak a -little English, and for Alano’s sake they fairly -made me feel like one of the family.</p> - -<p>I was impatient to hear about my father; and -as soon as the señor had told the others of what -I had said concerning Alano, Señor Guerez told -me his story.</p> - -<p>“As soon as we felt that the war was going to -be severe and probably of long duration,” said -he, "your father and I telegraphed to Dr. Walford -to keep you at Broxville Academy until -you heard from us by letter. Two days later -came a return message stating that you had -already gone to New York and taken steamer -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">« 147 »</a></span> -for Cuba. The worthy doctor could not tell by -what route you had gone.</p> - -<p>"This being the case, your father and I -concluded to let you come on, and I dispatched -Pedro, one of my faithful servants, to meet you -at Santiago de Cuba and conduct you in safety -to the plantation, where your father was still -down with his broken leg, which was, however, -mending rapidly.</p> - -<p>"Several days went by, and matters became -very troublesome about my plantation. Some -of the men had joined the Cuban forces under -Brigadier General José Maceo, a brother to the -late Antonio Maceo, and my neighbors begged -me to join also and become captain of a company -of white Cubans—they not caring to serve -under Maceo or Garcia and also not caring to -go as far west as where the forces under General -Gomez were located.</p> - -<p>"While I was deliberating, a body of Spanish -guerrillas came along and burned down two of -my largest storehouses and threatened my wife -with violence. This angered me, and I got my -gun and shot two of the rascals—one in the leg -and the other in the shoulder. A battle royal -ensued between my workmen and the guerrillas, -and the guerrillas received the worst of the encounter -and were forced to retreat, with three -men wounded and one man dead.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">« 148 »</a></span></p> - -<p>"This settled the matter, and I joined the Cuban -forces under Garcia without delay. Your -father also took part in the battle and saved my -wife from great indignities. When I called my -white men together, and my white neighbors, -they speedily formed a company of volunteers, -and I was chosen the captain, with Lieutenant -Porlando for my first officer and your father for -second lieutenant. We were all supplied with -good horses and first-class weapons, and the -very next day after effecting our organization -defeated a body of the Spanish troops and drove -them ten miles up the road and away from the -mountains which General Garcia is using as a -stronghold.</p> - -<p>“As it was perilous in the extreme to leave -the women-folks home alone while the men were -away, it was decided by me and my neighbors -to bring them all here and leave them with -Father Anuncio and a strong guard. It was -believed that no one would dare molest any -woman while sheltered by this old convent. -There are within the walls over a dozen ladies -and nearly thirty children, besides a company of -picked men and six men who were wounded at -one time or another.”</p> - -<p>“But my father?” I put in, as the señor -paused.</p> - -<p>"I am coming to that, Mark. It was two -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">« 149 »</a></span> -days ago that our company was in the vicinity -of Guantanamo. I had received valuable information -concerning the contemplated movements -of the Spanish troops, and this information -I wished to place in the hands of General -Garcia and his staff. Your father offered to find -a certain captain, while another of the company -rode off to find the general.</p> - -<p>“Your father was accompanied by a private -named Hawley, an American who settled near -me several years ago. The pair were gone -about six hours when Hawley came riding back -to our camp, severely wounded in the thigh. -He said they had met a company of Spanish soldiers, -who had discovered them ere they were -aware. Your father had been taken a prisoner, -while Hawley had had a hard time of it to -escape.”</p> - -<p>“And have you heard of him since then?” I -asked anxiously.</p> - -<p>"I heard from him yesterday. Some of our -soldiers, while tramping through the woods, -came across a Spaniard who was severely -wounded. They treated him as well as he could -possibly expect, dressed his wounds, and gave -him a supply of water and bread and meat; and -in return he told them about their prisoner, your -father. He said your father was to be sent on -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">« 150 »</a></span> -to the authorities at Santiago as an American -spy."</p> - -<p>“A spy!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, my boy, a spy. It is, of course, a -foolish charge, but I am afraid it may cause your -father a good deal of trouble.”</p> - -<p>“Why, they place spies in dungeons and often -shoot them, Señor Guerez!”</p> - -<p>“Let us hope for the best, Mark,” he returned -soothingly.</p> - -<p>“Would they dare shoot an American citizen?”</p> - -<p>“Unfortunately your father was caught wearing -a Cuban uniform and with our flag pinned -to his hat—as I have it.”</p> - -<p>I bowed my head, and something like tears -started to my eyes. This news was awful. -Supposing my father was shot as a spy? I -would be left alone in the world. Overcome -by my emotions, I felt compelled to turn away, -when Señor Guerez placed a kindly hand on my -shoulder.</p> - -<p>“Don’t be too downcast, my boy. It may -not go so badly with your parent, and I will do -all I can for both of you. As soon as I can arrange -certain matters with the men who are in -charge here, I will follow up those who have -your father in charge and see if he cannot be -rescued.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">« 151 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Oh, will you do that?” I cried, catching his -hand. “You are more than kind, Señor Guerez!”</p> - -<p>We were about to continue the conversation, -when the lieutenant to whom I had been introduced -came rushing up all out of breath. He -had been walking down by the river, field-glass -in hand, and had made an important discovery, -which he imparted to the others in Spanish.</p> - -<p>It was to the effect that a large body of Spanish -soldiers were riding through the woods, back -of the river, and it looked as if they were bound -for the old convent. They were heavily armed, -and on the back of a mule could be seen a small -cannon.</p> - -<p>“As I expected,” muttered Señor Guerez. -“I’ll take a look at them.”</p> - -<p>He ran up to the roof of the convent, glass in -hand, and, nobody stopping me, I followed him. -A long, searching look and he dashed down the -glass, hurried below, and issued a dozen rapid -orders.</p> - -<p>Men flew in all directions, some to get their -guns and pistols, and others to shut the gates -leading to the courtyard and to place square bits -of blocks into the deep windows.</p> - -<p>I tried to get an explanation from somebody, -but all were too busy. Señor Guerez was the -only one who gave me a hint of what was wrong.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">« 152 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“'Tis a body of Spanish soldiers led by a -priest who is a rival to Father Anuncio. He -wishes to get the good father to give up this old -convent, which means that we must vacate too. -It is a ruse of the enemy.”</p> - -<p>No more was said. Quarter of an hour later -a white flag was waved and a man came up to -the old convent gates. A short talk ensued between -him, Señor Guerez, Father Anuncio, and -several others, and then the man withdrew.</p> - -<p>Hardly had he gone than all of us heard the -cracks of a dozen or more guns, and as many -bullets flattened themselves on the convent -walls.</p> - -<p>“They have opened the fight,” remarked -Señor Guerez grimly, while several of the -women and children shrieked. “Now we will -show them what we can do.”</p> - -<p>He selected the best of his soldiers, and placed -them at convenient loopholes in the upper part -of the old building. Weapons were ready for -use, and at a word of command the fire of the -Spaniards was returned.</p> - -<p>A yell of surprise and rage went up, and there -immediately followed another volley of musketry -from without. This was returned, and -this sort of thing lasted for quarter of an hour, -when the enemy retired behind the bluff I have -previously mentioned.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">« 153 »</a></span></p> - -<p>But they did not remain quiet long. Presently, -looking through his field-glass, Señor -Guerez announced that they had succeeded in -mounting the cannon they had brought along. -The weapon was duly loaded and sighted, and -we awaited with thrilling interest the effect of -this rather formidable weapon.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">« 154 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE ROUTING OF THE ENEMY.</p> - - -<p>Boom!</p> - -<p>The Spanish gunners had fired the cannon -perched on the bluff, its muzzle pointed directly -for the doors of the old convent.</p> - -<p>Hardly had we heard the report than there -was a crash and the splinters flew in every direction. -The shot had struck the frame of the -doors and shattered it badly.</p> - -<p>A cry of rage went up from the Cubans, and, -rushing to the loopholes left in the blocked-up -windows, they sought to pick off the gunners -with their carbines. But the Spaniards prudently -kept out of sight, so this movement was -useless.</p> - -<p>“Two more shots like that, and the doors -will come down,” muttered Señor Guerez, with -a grave shake of his head. “I wish we had a -cannon to fire in return.”</p> - -<p>A consultation was held, and all of the women -and children were told to retire to an inner room -of the convent, where the damage done by the -cannon might not reach them.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">« 155 »</a></span></p> - -<p>This had scarcely been accomplished when -the Spaniards fired a second shot. But their -aim was poor, and the ball only plowed up the -ground fifty feet outside of the courtyard.</p> - -<p>Señor, or rather Captain, Guerez, as I should -now call him, collected his men together, and a -short but exciting debate took place, only a few -words of which were plain to me. Alano’s -father favored leaving the convent by a rear -passage-way leading to a woods and surprising -the enemy by coming up in their rear.</p> - -<p>Just as a third shot from the cannon struck -the roof of the convent and tore off a corner of -the stonework, it was agreed upon to carry out -this project. Four men were left to exhibit -themselves occasionally, so that the Spaniards -might think the soldiers still there, and Alano’s -father asked me to remain with them.</p> - -<p>“I do not advise you to take part in the fighting,” -he said. “But if you find it necessary to -defend yourself, you’ll find guns in plenty in the -dining-hall closet, with cartridges in one of the -drawers.”</p> - -<p>In less than ten minutes the company of soldiers, -fifty-six strong, were on their way, leaving -the convent as silently as shadows. The moment -the last of them had taken to the passage-way, -the entrance was closed and bolted, and I -found myself left behind with the women and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">« 156 »</a></span> -children and the four guards, none of whom -could speak a word of English.</p> - -<p>After firing the third shot the Spaniards -paused, probably to hold a council of war. To -divert suspicion from the movements of Captain -Guerez and his men, the four guards and myself -passed out in plain sight of them several times. -Of course we did not remain long, nor did we -show ourselves in the same place twice. Our -appearance called forth half a dozen shots from -as many muskets, but we were too far off for -these to have any effect. One bullet did hit -near where a guard had shown himself, but its -force was spent and it did no damage.</p> - -<p>Nearly half an hour had passed, when suddenly -we heard a yell and a wild shouting, and -all of the Spaniards dashed into view, running -hither and thither as though panic-stricken. -Captain Guerez had surprised them completely, -and they thought it was a re-enforcement for the -old convent and not the soldiers from that place -themselves. A hundred shots rang out, and, -using a field-glass, I saw that the Spaniards were -completely demoralized. They formed into a -hollow square once, but this was speedily broken -up, and then off they rode and ran, helter-skelter, -down the bluff and across the river, -some fording and some swimming, for their very -lives.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">« 157 »</a></span></p> - -<p>The engagement had lasted less than quarter -of an hour when some of the Cubans came riding -toward the convent gates, bringing with -them several wounded men—some of their own -party—and three of the Spaniards who had been -captured.</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez had, in the meantime, followed -the Spanish leader across the stream. -The pursuit was kept up for nearly half an hour, -at the end of which time the Spaniards were -driven so far off it was likely they would not -dare to return for a long while, if at all.</p> - -<p>When Alano’s father came back it was found -he had received a sword thrust through the -fleshy part of the leg. The wound was not a -dangerous one, but it was painful, and his wife -and daughters did all they could to ease his -sufferings.</p> - -<p>“I am sorry for your sake, Mark, that I am -wounded,” he remarked, as he rested upon a cot. -“I will have to keep quiet for a few days, and -thus our quest after your father will have to be -delayed.”</p> - -<p>“You wouldn’t dare to leave here just yet -anyway, would you?” I asked, much disappointed, -yet feeling that it was no more than I -could expect.</p> - -<p>"Hardly, my boy. I do not expect those -Spaniards to return; we have given them far -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">« 158 »</a></span> -more than they expected. They would not attack -us without re-enforcements, and there are -no other Spanish troops within a good many -miles."</p> - -<p>Now that the old convent had been once attacked, -it was decided to keep a strict watch, -day and night, upon the roof and through the -grounds. A detail of men was formed, instructions -to keep a constant lookout given, and then -Captain Guerez passed over his command temporarily -to Lieutenant Porlando.</p> - -<p>The remainder of the day passed quietly -enough, I occupying the time in repairing my -clothing, which needed many a stitch. In this -work the elder of Alano’s sisters helped me, -Señora Guerez keeping by her husband’s -side and having the younger sister to assist -her.</p> - -<p>I found Inez Guerez a most companionable -girl. Her stock of English was as limited as -was my knowledge of Spanish, yet we managed -to make each other understand, laughing -roundly over the mistakes we made. When I -mentioned Alano and told what great friends we -were, tears stood in her dark eyes, and she said -she trusted he would soon reach the old convent -in safety. My father and she had also become -great friends, and she said she hoped he would -escape from his Spanish captors ere they had a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">« 159 »</a></span> -chance to thrust him into a dungeon at Santiago.</p> - -<p>Having had no sleep the night before, I retired -early, and was soon in the land of dreams, -despite the many misgivings I had concerning -my father’s welfare. Fervently I prayed that he -might escape from the Spaniards who held him, -and that we might speedily be reunited.</p> - -<p>When I awoke in the morning the sky was -darkly overcast and it was raining furiously. -The downpour caused the river to rise, and the -lower end of the old convent was partly under -water.</p> - -<p>A fair breakfast was had, consisting of coffee, -bread, and some fried plantains, which to me -tasted particularly fine, and then I went to Captain -Guerez, to find him much improved and in -good spirits.</p> - -<p>“We would not go off anyway in such a -storm as this,” he said, as he sipped a bowl of -coffee. “It will be fresh and cool after it is -over, and by that time I think I will be able to -ride once more, and I think my cousin will come -to remain with my wife and girls.”</p> - -<p>The downpour up to noon was terrific, then -the sun came out strongly, and the hills and valleys -were covered with a heavy mist as the water -evaporated. By sundown it became cooler, and -the roof of the old convent proved a most delightful -lounging place.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">« 160 »</a></span></p> - -<p>We were all out there, watching the shadows -as the sun set behind the hills in the west, when -one of the guards announced that two men were -approaching from a trail leading through the -woods to the northwest. A field-glass was at -once procured, and Lieutenant Porlando took a -long look at them.</p> - -<p>“A black and a boy,” he announced in Spanish, -and I leaped forward and begged for the use -of the glass for a minute. My request was -readily granted, and I waited for the two newcomers -to reappear among the trees.</p> - -<p>“They are Alano and Jorge!” I exclaimed a -minute later.</p> - -<p>“Alano!” cried my chum’s sisters. “Are -you certain?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, it is Alano, and he carries his arm in a -sling.”</p> - -<p>And down we rushed in a body and asked to -be let out of the courtyard. Inez was the first -to emerge into the open, and off she rushed at -full speed, to find herself a minute later in -Alano’s arms, with Paula close behind.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">« 161 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ON THE TRAIL OF MY FATHER.</p> - - -<p>“Mark!” ejaculated my Cuban chum, when, -on releasing himself from his sisters' embraces, -he espied me. “So you have reached here before -me. I am very glad to see it.”</p> - -<p>“You are wounded?” I queried, as we shook -hands. Had it not been for the girls and Jorge -we would have fairly hugged each other. -“How did that happen?”</p> - -<p>“It’s quite a story. Are my father and -mother safe?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, although your father, too, is wounded.”</p> - -<p>“Those soldiers at the coffee plantation, then, -did not manage to catch you?”</p> - -<p>“No.”</p> - -<p>“They caught me and Jorge, and we were -their prisoners for five or six hours. We would -not have gotten away, only Jorge bribed one of -the servants at the plantation, another negro. -He cut the cords with which we were bound, and -we got out of the cellar into which we were put -at night.”</p> - -<p>“And that wound?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">« 162 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“I got that when they came after us, ten minutes -later. They couldn’t see us and fired -blindly, and I got a bullet across the forearm. -But it’s a mere scratch,” Alano added, as he saw -Inez and Paula look serious.</p> - -<p>He wanted to know all about my adventures, -but there was no time to tell of them just then, -for the convent gates were soon reached and -here Alano’s mother met him and, after a warm -embrace, led him to his father’s side. It was a -happy family gathering, and I thought it best to -withdraw for the time being. I walked again to -the roof; and an hour later Alano joined me -there.</p> - -<p>His story was soon told. After escaping -from the coffee plantation he and Jorge had become -lost like myself in the forest. They, however, -had not made their way to the mountain -side, but had entered a valley between that -mountain and the next, and, coming to a branch -of the river, had floated down it until overtaken -by the storm at night.</p> - -<p>The storm had driven them to shelter under -some shelving rocks, and here a temporary camp -was made and Jorge went out on a search for -food. Little could be found, but in the morning -the guide had brought down several birds -with a stick and these they had cooked and -eaten with keen relish. The way was then resumed, -when, at noon, they had found themselves -on the wrong road and many miles out of -their way.</p> - -<div class="fig_center" style="width: 348px;"> -<img src="images/page162f.png" width="348" height="500" alt="" /> -<div class="fig_caption">“THE SPANIARDS WERE COMPLETELY DEMORALIZED.”</div> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">« 163 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Jorge was much chagrined at his mistake and -wanted Alano to kick him for his thoughtlessness. -The stream was left, and they took a cut -through the woods, which at last brought them -to the old convent, as described.</p> - -<p>When Alano had finished, I told him my story -in all of its details, especially my adventures in -the mountain stream and on the underground -river. He listened in silent amazement.</p> - -<p>“It was a wonderful escape!” he cried, when -I was through. “A wonderful escape! I would -like some day to explore that cave.”</p> - -<p>“It was nothing but a big hole in the ground, -and I never want to see it again,” I answered, -with a shudder. “But now you are here, what -do you expect to do?”</p> - -<p>“If my father will permit me, I’ll join you and -him in the search for your father,” he answered. -“But it may be that he will wish me to remain -here with my mother and my sisters.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, somebody ought to remain with them, -Alano.”</p> - -<p>“My father is expecting Señor Noenti, a relative -of mine. If he comes he will look after my -mother and sisters. He is a very brave and -powerful man.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">« 164 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Alano and I slept together that night, just as -we had often done at Broxville Academy. It -was a good deal to me to have my chum by me -again. We had missed each other more than -mere words can tell.</p> - -<p>We had just finished breakfast the next day, -and Captain Guerez was trying to walk around -a bit on his wounded leg, when several newcomers -were announced. Among them was -Señor Noenti, who was warmly received by the -Guerez family.</p> - -<p>During the morning it was arranged that he -should remain at the old convent during Captain -Guerez' absence, and by hard pleading Alano -obtained permission to join us in our hunt for -my father. Jorge and three other trusty men -were to go along also. Alano’s father pronounced -himself quite able to ride, and each of -us was fitted out with a good horse, a brace of -pistols, and a quantity of ammunition sufficient -to last for several engagements. We -also carried with us two days' rations. When -they were gone we would have to depend -upon what we found for our meals. But -armed as we were, and in a country where -everything grew in profusion, it was not -likely that such a small body would lack for -something to eat. Starvation was common in -the regular Cuban army, but only when the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">« 165 »</a></span> -troops remained in one mountainous region for -a long while and ate up everything in sight.</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez had a well-formed idea concerning -the highways and trails the party having -my father a prisoner would take; and, after an -affectionate farewell to his wife and daughters, -he led our little party up past the bluff the -Spaniards had occupied and along a path skirting -the mountain which had caused me so much -trouble. Our horses were fresh, and we made -good time until sunset, when we reached a small -village called Molino. Here there were a number -of blacks and the poorer class of whites. -All, however, made us welcome, and here it was -decided to remain for the night.</p> - -<p>The principal man living in the place was a -Spaniard named Curilos, a fellow who years before -had been a sailor. He was a comical fellow -in the extreme and a good singer, accompanying -himself in singing on a home-made guitar, a -rough-looking instrument, but one very sweet -in tone. How a sailor had ever settled there -was a mystery to me, but there he was and apparently -more than content.</p> - -<p>Curilos' home was of long tree branches, fastened -together with tough vines, which grow -everywhere in profusion. The branches were -twined and intertwined and lashed to four corner-posts. -The roof of this abode was covered -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">« 166 »</a></span> -with dried palm leaves, and was quite water-proof. -In one corner was a rude fireplace of -stone, and the smoke curled up through a hole -in a corner of the building.</p> - -<p>I slept in this structure on a hammock -stretched from one corner-post to another. It -was as good a bed as one would desire had it not -been for one thing, as disgusting to me as it was -annoying: the house was overrun with vermin—a -not uncommon thing, even in the dwellings -of the middle classes.</p> - -<p>It was hardly sunrise when Alano’s father -called us for breakfast, after which we leaped -into the saddle once more and rode off at a stiff -gait. The ride of the afternoon had left me a -little sore, I not as yet being used to such traveling, -but I made up my mind not to complain, as -it would do no good and only worry Captain -Guerez and my chum. Riding never bothered -Alano, as he had been used to the high, stiff -Spanish saddle from early boyhood.</p> - -<p>As we proceeded on our way we of course -kept a strict lookout for enemies, and on more -than one occasion Alano’s father called a halt, -while he rode ahead to make certain that the -road was clear.</p> - -<p>“If we’re not careful the Spaniards may surprise -us and make us all prisoners,” he said -grimly. "Although I hardly think any troops -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">« 167 »</a></span> -are near us at present," he added a minute -later.</p> - -<p>Having stopped for dinner in the middle of a -dense woods, we rode out in the afternoon on a -broad plateau overlooking numerous valleys. -Far to the southward could be seen the buildings -in Guantanamo. By the aid of the field-glass -Captain Guerez pointed out a portion of -his immense plantation.</p> - -<p>As this was the first sight I had had of Alano’s -home, I gazed at it with interest. While I was -looking, I saw a small column of smoke curling -upward from a broad stretch of canefields. I -watched it for several seconds, and then called -Alano’s attention to it.</p> - -<p>“There should be no smoke there,” he said -gravely, and called his father, who had turned -away for the moment to give Jorge some directions.</p> - -<p>“What is it—smoke?” cried Captain Guerez, -snatching the glass. “Let me see if you are not -mistaken.” He gave a searching look and then -a groan. “You are right, boys, the Spaniards -have kept their word. They threatened to burn -down my fields if I did not declare in their favor, -and now they are doing it. In a few hours the -whole of my property will be nothing more than -a blackened waste!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">« 168 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXIV">CHAPTER XXIV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">IN THE BELT OF THE FIREBRANDS.</p> - - -<p>“Do you mean to say, father, that they will -dare to burn down all of our sugar-cane fields?” -demanded Alano.</p> - -<p>“Dare, Alano? They will dare do anything, -now they have heard that I have thrown in my -fortunes with the insurgents,” replied Captain -Guerez bitterly.</p> - -<p>“What of your house and barns?” I put in -soberly.</p> - -<p>“Most likely they will be ransacked first and -then the torch will be applied,” answered -Alano’s father with increased bitterness. “Ah, -well, such are the fortunes of war. <i>Cuba libre!</i>” -he muttered firmly.</p> - -<p>Alano’s parent was first tempted to ride in the -direction of his plantation in the hope of saving -something, but speedily gave up the idea. -There was no direct course hither, and the -roundabout trail which must be pursued would -not bring him to Guantanamo until the next -morning.</p> - -<p>"And by that time the Spaniards will have -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">« 169 »</a></span> -done their dastardly work and gone on," he remarked.</p> - -<p>Several times as we rode along the plateau, -Captain Guerez stopped to take a look through -the field-glass, but he said nothing more excepting -in an undertone to his son.</p> - -<p>By sundown the plateau came to an end, and -we plunged into a valley which was for the most -part divided into immense sugar plantations, -some of them half a mile or more in length.</p> - -<p>“This is something like that at home,” remarked -Alano to me, as we moved on side by -side. “That is, like it was,” he hastened to -add.</p> - -<p>“The fields will grow again, won’t they?” I -asked.</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; but my father’s loss will be very -great.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose so. Did he have much sugar on -hand?”</p> - -<p>“The storehouses were full. You see, shipments -have been at a standstill for a year or -more.”</p> - -<p>“It will take a long while, after the war is -over, to get back to prosperity, I am afraid, -Alano?”</p> - -<p>"It will take years, and perhaps prosperity -will never come. General Garcia is determined -to fight to the bitter end, and so is General Gomez, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">« 170 »</a></span> -and so long as both remain among the -mountains and forests it will be impossible for -the Spaniards to make them surrender. I heard -father say we could lead the Spanish troops a -dance from one spot to another for years, and in -the meantime Spain will get no revenue from -Cuba, while the expense of keeping the war up -will foot up to millions of piasters—something -that even Spain cannot stand."</p> - -<p>“I wish it was all over, and that we were all -safe,” I returned shortly. “I’ve seen all the war -I want.”</p> - -<p>“And yet you haven’t seen any regular -battle,” laughed my Cuban chum. “I’m afraid -you wouldn’t make much of a fighter, Mark, if -Uncle Sam got into a muss.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, that would be different!” I burst -out. “I would fight for our country every -time.”</p> - -<p>Alano laughed more loudly than ever. -“That’s just it—you would fight for the United -States just as we are now willing to fight for our -beloved Cuba.”</p> - -<p>I had to smile, for I saw that he was right. -Cuba was as much to him as our United States -was to me, and let me add that I am a Yankee -lad to the backbone, and always hope to be.</p> - -<p>Having passed the end of a large plantation, -we came to several storehouses, which were -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">« 171 »</a></span> -wide-open and empty, and here we pitched our -camp for the night.</p> - -<p>“How close are we to the spot where my -father was taken?” I asked of Alano’s father -after supper.</p> - -<p>“We have passed that locality,” was the answer, -which surprised me not a little. “By to-morrow -noon I hope to reach a village called -Rodania, where I will be able probably to learn -something definite concerning his whereabouts.”</p> - -<p>This was certainly encouraging, and I went to -bed with a lighter heart than I had had since -leaving the old convent. Hope in a youthful -breast is strong, and I could not but believe -that so far all had gone well with my -parent.</p> - -<p>Fortunately, the storehouse in which I slept -with Alano and Captain Guerez was a clean -affair, so we were not troubled as we had been at -Molino with vermin. We turned in at nine -o’clock, and ten minutes sufficed to render me -forgetful of all of my surroundings.</p> - -<p>I awoke with a cough. I could not breathe -very well, and sat up in the darkness to learn -what was the matter. The wind had banged -shut the storehouse door, and it was strangely -hot within.</p> - -<p>“I’ll open the door and let in some fresh air,” -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">« 172 »</a></span> -I said to myself, and arose from the bunch of -straw upon which I had made my bed.</p> - -<p>As I moved across the storehouse floor I -heard several of the horses which were tethered -outside let out snorts of alarm. Feeling something -was surely wrong, I called to Alano and -his father.</p> - -<p>“What’s the trouble?” cried Captain Guerez -and Alano in a breath.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, but the horses are alarmed,” I -answered.</p> - -<p>By this time all were aroused by a shout from -Jorge, who had been left on guard. As we -stepped into the open air, he came running up -from a path leading into the immense sugar-cane -field back of the storehouse.</p> - -<p>“<i>Fuego! fuego!</i> [Fire! fire!]” he shouted at -the top of his powerful lungs.</p> - -<p>“Where?” demanded Alano’s father quickly.</p> - -<p>“In the fields! A band of Spanish guerrillas -just came up and set fire all around.”</p> - -<p>“That cannot be, Jorge. This is the plantation -of Señor Corozan, a stanch supporter of -Spain. They would not burn his fields.”</p> - -<p>“Then they are rebels like ourselves.”</p> - -<p>This last remark proved true, although we -did not learn the fact until some time later. It -seemed Señor Corozan had left the plantation -immediately after refusing the demands of a -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">« 173 »</a></span> -Cuban officer for food for his soldiers, and in -consequence the rebel had dispatched a detachment -to burn up everything in sight. It was a -wanton destruction of property, but it could not -very well be avoided, through the peculiar conditions -under which the war was being carried -on.</p> - -<p>Just now, however, there was no time left to -think of these matters. A stiff breeze was blowing, -and looking over the sugar-cane fields we -could see the fire leaping from place to place. -Then, turning about, we made another discovery. -The very storehouse in which we had -been sleeping was on fire. The smoke from the -smoldering straw was what had caused me to -cough and wake up.</p> - -<p>“To horse, everyone!” shouted Captain Guerez. -“We had best get out of here, for there is -no telling how far this fire extends, or how the -wind may shift around!”</p> - -<p>Everyone understood what he meant—that -we were in danger of being caught in the midst -of the conflagration; and everyone lost not an -iota of time in loosening his animal and saddling -him. In less than three minutes we were off, -and riding down a narrow trail between the -fields with all the speed at our animals' command.</p> - -<p>As we passed along, the sky above us grew -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">« 174 »</a></span> -brighter, and we could hear the crackling of the -cane in the distance. Then I felt a live ember -drop upon my neck, which raised a small blister -before I could brush it off.</p> - -<p>“Jupiter! but this is getting hot!” I gasped, -as I urged my horse on beside that of Alano. -“I wonder if there is any danger of that fire -catching us?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, I’m sure,” he panted. “The -only thing we can do is to ride for the hills, -where the fire won’t have such a chance.”</p> - -<p>On and on we went, now in a bunch and then -again scattered into two or three groups. To -gain the hills we had to cross a bit of a valley, -and here our poor horses sunk into the mud half -up to their knees.</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez had been riding in the rear, -but now he went ahead, to shout a word of guidance -to the men in advance. Alano dashed on -with his father, expecting me to follow. But -my horse had become temporarily stuck, and -ere he could extricate himself I had to dismount.</p> - -<p>Once free again, I was on the point of leaping -into the saddle as before, when a turn of the -wind brought a shower of burning embers in a -whirl over our very heads. I ducked and shook -them off, letting go of my steed for that purpose.</p> - -<p>It was a foolish movement, for the embers -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">« 175 »</a></span> -also struck the animal, who instantly gave a -snort and a bound and ran off. I made a clutch -at his tail as he passed, but missed it, and a second -later I found myself utterly alone, with the -fire of the sugar-cane fields hemming me in on -all sides!</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">« 176 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXV" id="CHAPTER_XXV">CHAPTER XXV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ESCAPING THE FLAMES.</p> - - -<p>My situation was truly an appalling one. -Here I was, with the fierce fire from the sugar-cane -fields swirling about me, my horse and -companions gone, left utterly alone, with the -horrifying thought that each moment must be -my last.</p> - -<p>As the horse disappeared in a cloud of eddying -smoke, I attempted to rush after him, only -to slip in the mire and roll over and over. -When I scrambled up I was covered with mud -from head to foot, and the live embers from the -burning fields were coming down more thickly -than ever.</p> - -<p>But life is sweet to all of us, and even in that -supreme moment of peril I made a desperate -effort to save myself. Seeing a pool of water -and mud just ahead of me, I leaped for it and -threw myself down.</p> - -<p>It was a bath far from sweet, yet at that time -a most agreeable one. I allowed what there -was of the water to cover my head and shoulders -and saw to it that all of my clothing was -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">« 177 »</a></span> -thoroughly saturated. Then I arose again, and, -pulling my coat collar up over my ears, leaped -on in the direction taken by my companions.</p> - -<p>The air was like that of a furnace, and soon -the smoke became so thick I could scarcely see -the trail. The wind was blowing the fire directly -toward me, and to have stood that onslaught -for long would have been utterly -impossible.</p> - -<p>But just as I felt that I must sink, and while -I murmured a wild prayer for deliverance, the -wind shifted and a cooling current of air reached -me. This was wonderfully reviving, and, -breathing deeply, I gathered courage and continued -on my way.</p> - -<p>Almost quarter of a mile was covered, and I -had gained the base of the hills, when the wind -shifted again, and once more the fire rushed onward -and it became so hot I could not breathe -except with difficulty.</p> - -<p>“Mark! Mark! where are you?”</p> - -<p>It was a most welcome cry, coming from Captain -Guerez. In an instant more Alano’s father -dashed up through the smoke.</p> - -<p>“Captain Guerez!” I gasped, and ran up to -his side. “Save me!”</p> - -<p>“Where is your horse?” he asked, as he -caught me up and assisted me to mount behind -him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">« 178 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“He ran away.”</p> - -<p>No more was said. Turning his animal about, -Captain Guerez dug his spurs deep into the -horse’s flesh, and away we went up the hillside -at a rate of speed which soon left the roaring and -crackling sugar-cane fields far behind.</p> - -<p>In fifteen minutes we had joined the others of -the party, on a plateau covered with stunted -grass and well out of reach of the fire. Here it -was found that my runaway horse had quietly -joined his fellows. I was tempted to give him -a whipping for leaving me in the lurch, but desisted -upon second thought, as it would have -done no good and I knew the animal had only -done what I was trying to do—save my life.</p> - -<p>“That was a narrow escape for you, Mark!” -cried Alano, as he came up with an anxious look -on his face. “You ought to be more careful -about your horse in the future.”</p> - -<p>“You can be sure I will be, Alano,” I answered; -and then turned to Captain Guerez and -thanked him for what he had done for me.</p> - -<p>It was hardly dawn; yet, as all had had a fair -night’s rest, it was determined to proceed on -our way and take a somewhat longer rest during -the hot noon hour.</p> - -<p>“This fire will necessitate a change in our -course,” said Captain Guerez to me.</p> - -<p>“Will that delay us much?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">« 179 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Not over a few hours. We will reach Rodania -by nightfall.”</p> - -<p>The captain was right, for it was not yet six -o’clock when, from the side of one mountain, we -saw the buildings of Rodania perched upon the -side of another. We traveled across the tiny -valley separating the two, and just outside of the -town Captain Guerez called a halt.</p> - -<p>“I think I had better send Jorge ahead and -see if the coast is clear,” he said. “The coming -of the negro into town will not be noticed, and -he can speedily learn if there are any Spaniards -about.”</p> - -<p>This was agreed upon, and, after receiving his -instructions, the colored guide hurried away, to -be gone less than half an hour.</p> - -<p>“Spanish soldiers dare yesterday,” he announced. -“All gone now—on the road to Cubineta.”</p> - -<p>“Did they have any prisoners?” questioned -Captain Guerez.</p> - -<p>“Yes, dree—two Cubans and an <i>Americano</i>.”</p> - -<p>“My father!” I cried. “Oh, Captain Guerez, -cannot we overtake them before they manage -to get him to some fort or prison?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll try our best, Mark,” replied Alano’s -father.</p> - -<p>“Why can’t we travel after them at once?” -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">« 180 »</a></span> -put in Alano, fairly taking the words out of my -mouth.</p> - -<p>“We will,” replied his father. “The long -noontime rest has left our horses still fresh. -Forward, all of you! We will take a short cut, -and not visit Rodania at all.”</p> - -<p>During the halt I had taken the opportunity -to brush off my clothing, which was now thoroughly -dry. I had taken a bath at noon, so -now felt once more like myself, although several -blisters on my neck and hands, received from -the fire, hurt not a little. I told Jorge of the -bums, and he ran into the woods for several -species of moss, which he crushed between -two rocks, putting the crushed pulp on the -blisters.</p> - -<p>“Take burn out soon,” he announced; and he -was right. In less than half an hour after the -application was made the smarting entirely -ceased.</p> - -<p>We were now in the depths of a valley back -of Rodania, and here the trail (they are called -roads in Cuba, but they are only trails, and -sometimes hardly that) was so choked up with -vines and so soft that our progress was greatly -impeded, and about eight o’clock we came to a -halt in the darkness.</p> - -<p>“The mud beyond is all of two feet deep, and -we can’t get through it,” declared one of the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">« 181 »</a></span> -men, who had been sent in advance. “We’ll -have to go back.”</p> - -<p>This was discouraging news, and I looked in -perplexity at Alano’s father, whose brow contracted.</p> - -<p>“I’ll take a look myself,” he said, and, dismounting -so that his horse might not get stuck, -advanced on foot.</p> - -<p>In my impatience I went with him. The way -was very dark, and I suggested that a torch be -lighted.</p> - -<p>“An excellent plan,” said Alano’s father, and -immediately cut a cedar branch. By its blaze -we were enabled to see quite well, and succeeded -in finding another path around the muddy spot.</p> - -<p>To save our horses we walked them for half -a mile. It was tough traveling, and the clouds -of mosquitoes made the journey almost unendurable. -I was glad when, at early dawn, we -emerged from the valley on a bit of a rise, where -the ground was firm and the growth somewhat -limited.</p> - -<p>A broad highway now lay before us, the main -road from Rodania to Cubineta. It was one of -the best highways I had seen since leaving Santiago -de Cuba, and this was explained by Captain -Guerez, who said the road had been put into -condition just previous to the breaking out of -the war.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">« 182 »</a></span></p> - -<p>As usual, one of the party was in advance, and -this was a lucky thing, for about ten o’clock the -soldier came tearing toward us on his horse and -motioning us to take to the woods.</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez was on the lookout, and -turned to us quickly.</p> - -<p>“Dismount!” he cried in Spanish, and we -leaped to the ground, and led our animals into -a thicket growing to the left of the highway. -The vidette followed us, stating that a large -body of Spanish cavalry was approaching.</p> - -<p>We forced our horses into the thicket for fully -a hundred feet and tied them fast. Then, with -cautious steps, we returned to the vicinity of the -road and concealed ourselves behind convenient -trees and bushes.</p> - -<p>By this time a thunder of hoofs could be -heard, and soon the cavalry appeared, at least -two hundred strong. They were the finest -body of men I had seen in the island, and looked -as if they had just come over from Spain, their -uniforms and weapons were so clean and new. -They were riding at a brisk pace, and hardly had -we caught a good look at them than they were -gone, leaving a cloud of dust behind them.</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez was the first to speak, when -they were well out of hearing.</p> - -<p>“It’s a good thing we did not run into them,” -he remarked grimly. "Our little detachment -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">« 183 »</a></span> -would have stood small chances with such a -body of well-armed men."</p> - -<p>“They form a great contrast to the rebels,” I -could not help but murmur.</p> - -<p>“They do indeed, Mark. But why not? -The rebels, especially in this district, were never -soldiers. When the war broke out they were -without uniforms or weapons; and what was and -is worse, many of them knew nothing about the -use of a firearm. You will find the men in the -western provinces, where the whites predominate, -both better trained and clothed—although, -let me add, their hearts are no more sturdy or -loyal than you will find here in the East.”</p> - -<p>Thus talking, we went on and on, until Alano, -who had gone ahead this time, came back with -the information that Cubineta was in sight.</p> - -<p>“And the village seems to be under guard of -the Spanish soldiery,” he added, words which -caused me, at least, considerable dismay.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">« 184 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXVI">CHAPTER XXVI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A DISHEARTENING DISCOVERY.</p> - - -<p>“Under Spanish guard!” I cried, and looked -questioningly at Alano’s father.</p> - -<p>“That’s too bad,” he said gravely. “However, -there is no help for this unexpected turn -of affairs, and we must make the best of it. -Alano, my son, you are sure you are not mistaken?”</p> - -<p>“There are a number of Spanish soldiers on -the highway, and with the field-glass I saw that -more soldiers were scattered round about.”</p> - -<p>“Then your report must be true. I’ll ride -ahead and take a view of the situation.”</p> - -<p>I begged to go along, and Captain Guerez -agreed. Alano came too, while the others -withdrew to a thicket, to avoid being surprised -by any of the Spaniards who might be out -foraging.</p> - -<p>A turn in the highway brought us in full view -of Cubineta. Of course we were not foolish -enough to expose ourselves. Screened behind -bushes and vines, we took a survey through the -glass of the place, its people, and the soldiers.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">« 185 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Cubineta was not a large village, but it was a -pretty place and evidently thriving—or had been -thriving before the war put a blight upon all -Cuban industries. There was one long street -of stores and dwellings, a church, a <i>casa</i> or town-house, -and at the farthest end what looked to be -a hastily constructed fort, built of heavy logs -and sods.</p> - -<p>“The Spaniards are evidently going to use -the place as a center or depot for supplies,” was -Captain Guerez' comment. “Under the present -circumstances I hardly know what is best to -do.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps they have my father a prisoner in -that fortress,” I suggested.</p> - -<p>“It is not unlikely, Mark—if the men who -held him have not yet gone further than Cubineta.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t we steal into town under cover of -night?” I continued.</p> - -<p>“We might do that—if it would do any -good.”</p> - -<p>“I want to join my father at any hazard.”</p> - -<p>“That might be very foolish, Mark. How -can you assist him if you are yourself made a -prisoner?”</p> - -<p>“Would they hold a boy like myself?”</p> - -<p>“You are not so young as you would like to -make them imagine,” laughed Alano’s father -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">« 186 »</a></span> -shortly. “Besides, if left free, they would be -afraid you would carry messages for your father. -I think the best thing we can do just now is to -let Jorge go into town, pretending he is half -starved and willing to do anything for anybody -who will give him food. By taking this course, -no one will pay much attention to him, as there -are many such worthless blacks floating about, -and he can quietly find his way around the fort -and learn what prisoners, if any, are being kept -there.”</p> - -<p>This was sensible advice, and, impatient as I -was to catch sight of my parent, I agreed to -wait. We rode back to where the others had -made their camp, and Jorge was called up and -duly instructed. The black grinned with pleasure, -for he considered it a great honor to do spy -work for such an influential planter as Captain -Guerez. Possibly he had visions of a good situation -on the plantation after the war was over; -but, if so, he kept his thoughts on that point to -himself.</p> - -<p>Jorge gone, the time hung heavily on the -hands of all; but I believe I was the most impatient -of the crowd, and with good reason. -Alano noticed how uneasily I moved about, and -soon joined me.</p> - -<p>“You must take things easy, Mark,” he said. -"Stewing won’t do any good, and it will only -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">« 187 »</a></span> -make you sick, combined with this hot weather, -which, I know, is about all you can stand."</p> - -<p>“If only I felt certain that my father was safe, -Alano! Remember, he is all I have in the -world. My mother has been dead for years, and -I never had a brother or a sister.”</p> - -<p>“I think it will all come out right in the end,” -he answered, doing his best to cheer me up. -“They won’t dare to—to——” He did not -finish.</p> - -<p>“To shoot him? That’s just what I fear -they will do, Alano. From what I heard at Santiago -de Cuba, the Spaniards are down on most -Americans, for they know we sympathize with -you and think Cuba ought to be free, or, at least -ought to have a large hand in governing itself.”</p> - -<p>When nightfall came most of the others lay -down to sleep. But this was out of the question -for me, tired though I was physically, and -so I was left on guard, with instructions to call -one of the men at midnight.</p> - -<p>Slowly the hours went by, with nothing to -break the stillness of the night but the hum of -countless insects and the frequent note of a -night bird. We had not dared to build a campfire, -and in consequence there was no getting -where the smoke drifted and out of the way of -the mosquitoes.</p> - -<p>At midnight I took a walk around to see if all -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">« 188 »</a></span> -was safe. The man I was to call slept so -soundly I had not the heart to wake him up, so -I continued on guard until one, when a noise -down by the road attracted my attention.</p> - -<p>Pistol in hand I stalked forward, when I heard -a low voice and recognized Jorge. The negro -had been walking fast, and he was almost out of -breath.</p> - -<p>“Well?” I inquired anxiously. “Is my -father there?”</p> - -<p>“I think he is, señor,” replied the guide. “I -go to prison-fort—da have six Cubans dare an' -one <i>Americano</i>.”</p> - -<p>“My father!”</p> - -<p>“I talk to some men, an' da tell me prisoners -come in last night—some from Rodania, udders -from udder places. <i>Americano</i> in a prison by -himself, near the river. I swim up close to dat -prison—maybe we make hole in wall an' git him -out.”</p> - -<p>“Could we do that, Jorge, without being discovered?”</p> - -<p>“Tink so, señor—work at night—now, maybe. -Swim under river an' come up by fort, den -dig with machetes—make hole under fort.”</p> - -<p>“If only we could do that!” I cried; and then, -struck with a sudden idea, I caught Jorge by the -arm. “Jorge, if I go, will you come and show -me the way and help me?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">« 189 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes, señor.”</p> - -<p>“Then let us go at once, without arousing the -others. More than two might spoil the plan. -Go back to the road and wait for me.”</p> - -<p>The guide did as directed, and I turned back -into camp. Here I awoke the man previously -mentioned, and told him I was going off to meet -Jorge. He but partly understood, but arose to -do guard duty, and I hurried off.</p> - -<p>I felt that I was not doing just right in not -notifying Captain Guerez and Alano, but I was -impatient to meet my father and was afraid if I -told them what Jorge had said they would want -to delay matters. As events turned out it -would probably have been much better had I -been guided by their advice.</p> - -<p>A short but brisk walk brought the guide and -myself in sight of the town. On the outskirts -the campfires of the Spanish soldiers burned -brightly. These we carefully avoided, and -made a détour, coming up presently to the bank -of the stream upon which the fort was located.</p> - -<p>The river was broad and shallow, and as it ran -but sluggishly we might have forded across, but -this would have placed us in plain view of the -sentries, who marched up and down along the -river bank and in front of the prison-house.</p> - -<p>Disdaining to undress, we dropped down into -the stream and swam over, with only our faces -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">« 190 »</a></span> -out of water, and without a sound, to a spot behind -the building opposite. We came up in a -tiny hollow, screened by several small bushes, -and crawled on our stomachs to the rear of the -wing in which the guide said the American prisoner -was incarcerated.</p> - -<p>I had a long and broad dagger which I had -picked up the day previous, and Jorge had his -machete, and with these we began to dig a tunnel -leading under the wooden wall of the fort. -Fortunately, the ground was not hard, and soon -we broke through the very flooring of the -prison. I was in the lead, and in great eagerness -I poked up my head and gazed around me.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, who’s there?” cried a startled voice, -in English, and my heart sank completely, for -the prisoner was not my father at all.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">« 191 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXVII">CHAPTER XXVII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">GILBERT BURNHAM.</p> - - -<p>“Are you alone?” I asked, when I had recovered -sufficiently to speak.</p> - -<p>“An American!” came the low cry. “Yes, -I am alone. Who are you, and what do you -want?”</p> - -<p>“I came to save you—that is, I thought my -father was a prisoner here,” I stammered. -“Are you tied up?”</p> - -<p>“Worse, chained. But I think the chain can -easily be broken. If you’ll help me get away -from here, I’ll consider myself in your debt for -life.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll do what I can for you. But keep quiet, -for there are a number of guards about,” I whispered.</p> - -<p>With an effort I squeezed through the hole -that had been made, and felt my way to the prisoner’s -side, for the interior of the cell was dark. -He had a chain around one wrist, and the chain -was fastened by a large staple driven into a log -of the wall of the fort.</p> - -<p>Jorge had come up behind me, and, learning -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">« 192 »</a></span> -of the staple, began to cut at the woodwork surrounding -it with his machete. The lower end -of the blade was fairly keen, and he made such -rapid progress that in less than five minutes a -sharp jerk cleared the staple from the log, and -the prisoner was free.</p> - -<p>“Good for you,” he whispered to the colored -guide. “Now which is the way out of this -hole?”</p> - -<p>“Follow me, and keep very quiet,” I whispered, -and motioned to Jorge to lead the way.</p> - -<p>Soon the guide had disappeared into the -opening we had made. Going from the prison -was worse than getting in, and the man we were -trying to rescue declared the passage-way too -small for him.</p> - -<p>We commenced to enlarge it, I with my dagger -and he with his hands. We had just made -it of sufficient size when we heard a cry from -outside. Jorge had emerged into the open, -only to be discovered by a sentry who chanced -to be looking his way. There was a shot, and -half a dozen soldiers came running up, at which -the guide took to the river with a loud splash.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid we are lost!” I cried, and -stopped, half in and half out of the hole. Then -the prison door was banged open, and the rays -of a lantern flared into the cell.</p> - -<p>The American I had discovered promptly -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">« 193 »</a></span> -showed fight by leaping on the intruder. But -this was madness, as the soldier was backed up -by four others, all armed with pistols and guns. -In the meantime another light flashed from outside -the hole, and I felt myself caught, very -much like a rat in a trap.</p> - -<p>“<i>De donde viene V.?</i> [Where do you come -from?]” demanded a cold, stern voice, and I felt -myself grabbed by the hair. Realizing that resistance -was useless, I gave myself up, and immediately -found myself surrounded by a dozen -Spanish soldiers. In the meantime Jorge had -made good his escape.</p> - -<p>The soldiers marched me around to the entrance -of the fort, where an officer began to -question me in Spanish. He could speak no -English, and as soon as he found my command -of Spanish was very limited he sent off for an -interpreter. Then I was taken inside the fort -and consigned to one of the prison cells.</p> - -<p>My feelings can be better imagined than described. -Bitterly I regretted having started on -my midnight quest without notifying Captain -Guerez. My hasty action had brought me to -grief and placed me in a position from which -escape seemed impossible. What my captors -would do with me remained to be seen. That -they would treat me in anything like a friendly -fashion was out of the question to expect. It -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">« 194 »</a></span> -was likely that they would hold me as a prisoner -of war.</p> - -<p>Presently the door of the cell was opened, and -somebody else was thrown in bodily and with -such force that he fell headlong. The door was -banged shut and bolted, and the crowd which -had been outside went away.</p> - -<p>The new arrival lay like a log where he had -been thrown, and for a few minutes I fancied -he must be dead from the way he had been -treated.</p> - -<p>I bent over him, and in the dim light of the -early dawn made out that it was the American I -had sought to rescue. I placed my hand over -his heart and discovered that he still breathed, -although but faintly.</p> - -<p>There was nothing at hand with which I could -do anything for him. My own pockets had -been turned inside out by my captors, and even -my handkerchief, with which I might have -bound up an ugly wound on his brow, was gone. -I opened his coat and vest and his shirt around -the neck, and gave him as much air as I could.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” he groaned, as he finally came to his -senses. “Oh! Don’t kick me any more! I -give in!”</p> - -<p>“You’re all right—they have put you in a -cell with me,” I hastened to reassure him, and -then he sat up.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">« 195 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Who—what——” he paused. “In a cell, -eh? And they caught you, too?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“That’s too bad.” He drew a deep breath. -“Did you fight with them?”</p> - -<p>“No. I saw it would be no use.”</p> - -<p>“I was a fool to do it. I’m too hot-blooded -for this sort of work. I ought to have stayed in -Boston reporting local affairs.”</p> - -<p>“Are you a reporter?”</p> - -<p>“Hush! Yes; but I don’t want it to become -known if I can help it. They think I am nothing -more than an inquisitive American.”</p> - -<p>“Then why did they lock you up?”</p> - -<p>“That was more of my hot-headedness. I -was sketching a picture of the town and this fort -or prison, when a Spanish officer came up and -tried to snatch the drawing from my hand. Instead -of demanding an explanation I promptly -knocked him down. Then a couple of guards -ran for me, and I dusted. But it was no use. -They sent a company of soldiers after me, and -here I am.”</p> - -<p>“And here we are both likely to remain for -some time to come,” I added bitterly.</p> - -<p>“Looks that way, that’s a fact. By the way, -you said something about your father, didn’t -you?”</p> - -<p>"Yes. My father is a prisoner of the Spaniards, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">« 196 »</a></span> -and I felt almost certain he was in this -fort."</p> - -<p>“What’s your father’s name?”</p> - -<p>“Richard Carter. My name is Mark.”</p> - -<p>“And my name is Gilbert Burnham. I’ve -heard of your father, come to think of it. He -joined the Cuban army along with a plantation -owner named Guerez and another American -named Hawley.”</p> - -<p>“You are right. Did you hear anything at -all of him here in Cubineta or the vicinity?”</p> - -<p>“No. But then, you see, that is not strange, -as I talk very little Spanish. I certainly haven’t -seen any Americans here but you and myself.”</p> - -<p>Gilbert Burnham asked me to tell him my -story; and, feeling that I could lose nothing by -so doing, I favored him with a recital of my -efforts to get to my father. He was quite interested.</p> - -<p>“By Jove, young man, if I get clear from -here I’ll do what I can to help you,” he said.</p> - -<p>Then he told me his own history—how he had -grown tired of newspaper reporting in Boston -and begged the head editor of the paper he -represented to send him on an “assignment” to -Cuba. He had been in the island four months, -and had had a varied list of adventures, although -none of a particularly thrilling or perilous -nature.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">« 197 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“But now it looks as though I was in for it,” -he concluded moodily. “That officer I -knocked down will make matters as hard as he -can for me.”</p> - -<p>“And I’m afraid trying to break away from -prison won’t help matters,” I said.</p> - -<p>“You are right there. But, heigho! we must -make the best of it.”</p> - -<p>Yet making the best of it was small satisfaction -to me. Tired out in body and mind, I sank -down in a corner of the gloomy and damp cell -and gave myself up to my bitter reflections.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">« 198 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII">CHAPTER XXVIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A BATTLE ON LAND AND WATER.</p> - - -<p>It was about eight o’clock in the morning -that the door of the prison cell was opened and -Gilbert Burnham and I were ordered to march -out into a larger apartment.</p> - -<p>The order was given by a Spanish officer who -spoke fairly good English, and the officer was -backed up by a guard of eight men, all well -armed.</p> - -<p>“They are going to run no chances on us -now,” remarked the newspaper correspondent, -as he arose from the floor, upon which he had -been resting.</p> - -<p>“We had better be as civil as possible,” I answered. -“If we anger them they have it in -their power to make us mighty uncomfortable.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll keep as civil as my hot-headedness will -permit,” he grumbled.</p> - -<p>We were led from one end of the fort to the -other, where there was a narrow room, provided -with a small, square table and half a dozen -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">« 199 »</a></span> -benches. At the table sat several officers I had -seen before. One was a particularly ugly-looking -fellow, and Burnham nudged me and -said this chap was the fellow he had knocked -down.</p> - -<p>“And he’s got it in for me,” he added.</p> - -<p>I was marched to the front of the table, and -the officer who could speak English forced me -to clasp my hands behind me. This done, one -of the officers at the table asked a number of -questions in Spanish.</p> - -<p>“<i>No habla V. castellano?</i> [Do you not speak -Spanish?]” he asked me.</p> - -<p>“No, señor,” I replied.</p> - -<p>He glared at me suspiciously for a moment, -then spoke to the other officer.</p> - -<p>“Who you are?” demanded the latter.</p> - -<p>“I am Mark Carter, an American boy. I -came to Cuba to join my father, who was stopping -at a plantation near Guantanamo.”</p> - -<p>This was repeated in Spanish. At the mention -of my name several of those present exchanged -glances.</p> - -<p>“You son of Richard Carter?” was the next -question.</p> - -<p>“Yes, señor. I understand he is a prisoner. -Is it true?”</p> - -<p>My question remained unanswered, and it was -plain that my captors intended to give me no -information.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">« 200 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Why you break in the fort? Did this man -pay you to do that?” And the Spanish officer -pointed to Gilbert Burnham.</p> - -<p>“I never saw or heard of this man before, -señor. I broke in because I thought my father -was a prisoner there. I heard an American was -there, and I thought it must be he.”</p> - -<p>“Aha, I see! Well, your father is not here, -as you have found out.”</p> - -<p>“Where is he?”</p> - -<p>This question also remained unanswered. -The officers began to consult among themselves, -and then I was ordered back to the cell. I tried -to protest, and pleaded for liberty, for a chance -to find my parent, but it was all in vain. I was -hustled off without ceremony and made as close -a prisoner as before.</p> - -<p>It was nearly noon before Gilbert Burnham -joined me. In the meantime I had had nothing -to eat or drink, and was beginning to wonder -if my enemies meant to let me die of hunger and -thirst.</p> - -<p>The face of the newspaper correspondent was -much downcast.</p> - -<p>“I’m to catch it now,” he said. “To-morrow -morning they are going to start to transport me -to some regular fortress, and there I suppose I’ll -be permitted to languish until this bloody war -is over. I wish I had made a dash for liberty -when I was out in that courtroom.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">« 201 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“They would have shot you dead. They -were too well armed for anything of the -sort.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe. But this is tough. Is there a -pitcher of water anywhere?”</p> - -<p>“Not a drop.”</p> - -<p>At this he stormed more than ever, and finally -shouted to the guard to bring some <i>agua</i>. But -no one paid any attention to his cries, further -than to order him to be silent, under penalty of -being gagged, and then he subsided.</p> - -<p>Slowly the morning wore away. The sun -was shining brightly outside, and the cell, with -only one narrow window, high up to the ceiling, -was like a bake-oven. Once I climbed up to the -window sill and looked out, only to have the -muzzle of a gun thrust into my face, while a -guard outside ordered me to drop. I dropped, -and made no further attempt to get a whiff of -fresh air.</p> - -<p>I wondered if Jorge had escaped in safety and -if Captain Guerez would do anything to save -me. I felt certain he would be very angry over -the way I had acted, and, looking back, I felt -that I richly deserved to be censured.</p> - -<p>It was high noon, and I and my companion -were walking the floor, impatient for food and -drink, when the door opened and a guard came -in with a platter and an earthenware pitcher. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">« 202 »</a></span> -He set both on the floor and withdrew without -a word.</p> - -<p>“Well, here’s something, anyway,” remarked -Gilbert Burnham. “Bah! a stew of onions and -garlic, not fit for a dog to eat. Let me have -some of the water.”</p> - -<p>Neither of us could do more than taste the -mess which had been served; and as for the -water, it looked as if it had been scooped from -the river, and was both warm and muddy. I -had just finished taking a gingerly drink, when -a shot from outside startled both of us. Several -more shots followed, and then came a blast -on a trumpet from somewhere in the distance.</p> - -<p>“Hullo! that means a fight!” ejaculated Gilbert -Burnham, his face brightening. “I hope -it’s a body of rebels to the rescue.”</p> - -<p>“So do I, and I further hope they release us,” -I replied.</p> - -<p>At the first shot an alarm had been sounded -in and about the fort. We could hear the soldiers -hurrying in several directions and a number -of orders issued in Spanish. The firing now -continued to increase, and presently we heard a -crash of splintered woodwork.</p> - -<p>“It’s getting interesting, eh, Carter?” said -Gilbert Burnham. “If only they don’t grow -too enthusiastic and fire in here!”</p> - -<p>Scarcely had he spoken than we heard a little -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">« 203 »</a></span> -noise up at the window. A bullet had entered -and buried itself in the woodwork opposite.</p> - -<p>“Better lay down,” I urged, and set the -example, which the newspaper man was not -long in following. The firing and shouting -kept on steadily, and we heard the occasional -splashing of water, telling that the encounter -was taking place on the river as well as on land.</p> - -<p>The battle had been going on with more or -less violence for half an hour, when there came -a wild rush through the fort, and some shooting -just outside of our cell. Then the door went -down with a crash, and we found ourselves confronted -by a score or more of dusky rebels, -all of whom wore the flag of Cuba pinned to -their hats and coats.</p> - -<p>“<i>Americano!</i>” shouted one of them, and -allowed us to come outside. Then, without -waiting to question us, the crowd dashed to the -entrance of another cell and succeeded in liberating -several of their own countrymen. But now -the soldiers of the fort rallied, and the intruders -were driven back.</p> - -<p>Feeling it was our one chance to escape, we -went with the insurgents, and soon found ourselves -on the outskirts of Cubineta, in a spot -backed up by a forest of palms and oaks. As -we ran along Gilbert Burnham paused and -pointed to the dead body of a Spanish soldier.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">« 204 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“He won’t need his weapons any more, poor -fellow,” he said, and stooping down secured two -pistols, one of which he gave to me. There was -also a belt of cartridges, and this was speedily -divided between us.</p> - -<p>“I think the road to the camp I left is behind -us,” I remarked, as I took a view of the situation, -in the meantime screening myself from our -enemies by diving behind a clump of trees. “I -think I’ll go in that direction. Do you want to -come along?”</p> - -<p>My companion was willing to go anywhere, -so long as we kept clear of the Spanish forces, -and off we went on an easy run down the highway, -keeping our pistols in our hands and our -eyes to the right and the left, as well as ahead. -Quarter of an hour of this sort of traveling -brought us to the spot where I had left Alano -and the others.</p> - -<p>The temporary camp was deserted.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">« 205 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXIX">CHAPTER XXIX.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">LOOKING FOR MY CUBAN CHUM.</p> - - -<p>“Gone, eh?” remarked Gilbert Burnham, as -he saw the disappointed look upon my face. -“Well, you could hardly expect anything different, -with the fighting going on. It’s more -than likely they took part in the attack.”</p> - -<p>“I presume so,” I answered. “But where -can they be now? The firing has about ceased.”</p> - -<p>“The rebels have withdrawn from the town, -that’s certain. Let us try to find the main body -of the insurgents, and there we’ll probably learn -of the whereabouts of your friends.”</p> - -<p>I considered this good advice, and, leaving the -vicinity of what had been the former camp, we -struck out on a trail which took us in a semi-circle -around Cubineta.</p> - -<p>It was one of the hottest days I had yet experienced -since landing on the island, and we -had not progressed a half-mile before I was fairly -panting for breath. As for Gilbert Burnham, -he declared that he must halt or collapse.</p> - -<p>“Talk about balmy groves and summer -skies,” he growled. "I would rather be at the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">« 206 »</a></span> -North Pole any time. Why, I’ll bet a dollar -you could bake bread on that bit of ground out -there!" and he pointed to a stretch of dark soil, -dried as hard as stone by the fierce rays of the -sun.</p> - -<p>“The average Cuban never thinks of traveling -in the sun between eleven and three o’clock, -and I don’t blame him,” I rejoined. “Let us -climb a tree and take it easy.”</p> - -<p>We mounted an oak, I making certain first -that there was no snake on it, and took seats -near the very top. By parting the branches we -could get a fair view of Cubineta, and we saw -that the attack was at an end. The rebels had -retreated out of sight, but not before setting fire -to the fort, which was burning fiercely, with -nothing being done to save it from destruction.</p> - -<p>“To me it looks as if the rebels were bunched -in the woods to the north,” I said, after a long -and careful survey. “I wish we had a field-glass.”</p> - -<p>“I’m glad we took the pistols, Carter. They -may come in very handy before we reach safe -quarters again.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sure I don’t want to shoot anyone, -Burnham,” I answered.</p> - -<p>“But you believe in defending yourself?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. But what do you propose to do, now -you have escaped?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">« 207 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Get back to the coast and take the first vessel -I can find for the United States.”</p> - -<p>“Then you’ve had sufficient of reporting -down here?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, indeed! If any other young man -wants to come down here and take my place, he -is welcome to do so.” And Gilbert Burnham -spoke with an emphasis that proved he meant -every word he uttered.</p> - -<p>As soon as we were cooled off and rested, we -resumed our way, through a heavy undergrowth -which, on account of the entangling vines, often -looked as if it would utterly stay our progress. -But both of us were persevering, and by four -o’clock had reached the section of country I -had fancied the rebels were occupying.</p> - -<p>My surmise was correct. Hardly had we -proceeded a dozen yards along a side road than -three Cubans leaped from behind some brush -and commanded us to halt. We did so and explained -that we were Americans, at the same -time pointing to the burning fort and then -crossing our wrists as though tied.</p> - -<p>The rebels understood by this that we had -been prisoners, and as we did not attempt to -draw our pistols, they shouldered their long -guns and conducted us to the officer in command.</p> - -<p>“Look for Captain Guerez?” said the officer, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">« 208 »</a></span> -whose name I have forgotten. “He ride off -dat way!” and he pointed with his hand to the -westward. “He look for you, I tink.”</p> - -<p>This was comforting news, and I asked if -Alano’s father had taken part in the attack on -Cubineta, to which I received the reply that -both the captain and all under him had taken -part and that one of the insurgents had been -killed.</p> - -<p>“Was it his boy Alano?”</p> - -<p>“No, man named Ciruso.”</p> - -<p>I waited to hear no more, but, thanking the -officer for his trouble, hurried off down a trail -leading to the westward, with Burnham at my -side.</p> - -<p>We were descending a short hill, covered with -a stunted growth of brush, which tripped us up -more than once, when my companion suddenly -uttered a howl and tumbled over me in his effort -to retreat.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” I asked.</p> - -<p>“Spiders, or crabs, as big as your foot,” he -cried. “Look! look!” He pointed to several -holes in the sand, beside a small brook. At the -entrance to each hole sat an enormous land -crab, gray in color, with round, staring eyes, -well calculated to give anyone a good scare.</p> - -<p>“They are only crabs, and won’t hurt you, -unless you try to catch hold of them,” I laughed. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">« 209 »</a></span> -“Alano told me of them, and I’ve met them before.”</p> - -<p>“More of the beauties of this delightful country,” -said Burnham sarcastically.</p> - -<p>I advanced and stamped my foot, and instantly -each crab scampered for his hole, in the -clumsy fashion all crabs have. I fancied some -of them hissed at us, but I might have been mistaken.</p> - -<p>The brook crossed, we ascended the next hill -and entered a plantain grove where the fruit -hung in profusion on all sides. We found some -that was almost ripe, and made a refreshing -meal.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, Mark!”</p> - -<p>The welcome voice rang out from a grove of -oaks on the other side of the plantains. I -started, then rushed ahead, to find myself, a -minute later, in Alano’s arms, with Captain -Guerez looking on, highly pleased.</p> - -<p>“We thought you were killed!” ejaculated -my Cuban chum, when our greeting was over. -“Where on earth have you been?”</p> - -<p>“Haven’t you seen Jorge?”</p> - -<p>“No,” put in Alano’s father.</p> - -<p>“It’s a long story. Let me introduce another -American,” and I presented Gilbert Burnham.</p> - -<p>Sitting down in as cool a spot as we could -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">« 210 »</a></span> -find, each related all he had to tell. My story is -already known.</p> - -<p>“When you did not show up in camp I was -much worried,” said the captain, “and I sent -men out at once to hunt up both you and Jorge. -During this search one of the men, Circuso, met -some of the Spanish troops, and fought desperately -to escape them, but was shot and killed.”</p> - -<p>“Poor chap!” I could not help but murmur. -“Did he leave a family?”</p> - -<p>“No; he was a bachelor, without kith or kin.”</p> - -<p>“I think he might have escaped,” put in -Alano, “but he was so fierce against the soldiers -from Spain. He said they had no right to -come over here and fight us, and he was in for -killing every one of them.”</p> - -<p>“While the hunt for you and Jorge was going -on,” continued Alano’s father, "the rebel leader, -Captain Conovas, arrived and said he had instructions -to attack Cubineta and make an attempt -to release the prisoners at the fort. I decided -to join him in the attack, at the same time -thinking you might be a prisoner with your -father.</p> - -<p>“We operated from the south and from -across the river, and soon took possession of the -fort, only to be repulsed with a heavy loss. -Then our party withdrew to this quarter, and -here we are.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">« 211 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“And what of my father?” I asked anxiously. -“He was not at the fort, nor have I been able to -hear anything of him.”</p> - -<p>“The Cuban forces captured several prisoners, -and they are being held in a valley just below -here. I was on the point of journeying hither -to interview them on that point when Alano discovered -you coming through the plantain -grove,” answered Captain Guerez.</p> - -<p>“Then let us go and question them now,” I -cried.</p> - -<p>The captain was willing, and off we hurried -on horseback, Burnham and myself being provided -with steeds which had belonged to the -Spanish prisoners.</p> - -<p>Riding was much more comfortable than -walking, and the road being fairly level the distance -to the valley mentioned was soon covered. -Here it was found that four of the Spaniards had -died of their wounds, but there were six others, -and these Captain Guerez proceeded to examine -carefully, taking each aside for that purpose.</p> - -<p>“Your father is <i>en route</i> for Santiago,” he -said, when the examination was over. “When -he arrives there he is to be tried by court-martial -for plotting against the life of a certain Spanish -leader, General Gonza. If we wish to save him -we must start after him without an instant’s -delay.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">« 212 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXX" id="CHAPTER_XXX">CHAPTER XXX.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">ONCE MORE AMONG THE HILLS.</p> - - -<p>Fortunately the road leading to the northern -shore of Santiago Bay was well known to Captain -Guerez, who at one time had been a commissioner -of highways in that district.</p> - -<p>“I do not know how we will fare on this trip,” -he remarked, as we rode off only four strong—the -captain, Alano, Burnham, and myself. “At -one spot we will have to pass the railroad, and I -understand that is now under strict Spanish -surveillance.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll have to take matters as they come,” I -returned. “We must save my father at any -cost—at least, I shall attempt to do so.”</p> - -<p>“I am with you, Mark,” said the captain earnestly. -“Next to my family, there is no one to -whom I am more attached.”</p> - -<p>“And I go in for helping any American,” put -in Burnham.</p> - -<p>Alano simply smiled at me. But that smile -was enough. I felt that my Cuban chum could -be depended upon to stick to me through thick -and thin.</p> - -<p>Nightfall found us in the midst of a long -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">« 213 »</a></span> -range of hills, covered with a heavy growth of -oaks, cedars, and mahogany. The vines which -I mentioned before were here as thick as ever, -and in the darkness Gilbert Burnham suddenly -gave a yell and slid from the back of his horse to -the ground.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” we cried in chorus.</p> - -<p>“Matter!” he growled. “Nothing, only a -vine caught me under the chin, and I thought I -was about to be hung.”</p> - -<p>We laughed at this, but my humor was soon -short, as another vine slipped over my forehead, -taking my Panama hat with it.</p> - -<p>After this we were more careful, fearful that -some of us might be seriously injured, and a -little later we went into camp in the midst of a -tiny clearing.</p> - -<p>We were just finishing our supper when a -most doleful howl arose on the air, coming from -the rear and to the right of us. I leaped up and -drew my pistol, expecting to be attacked by -some wild animal.</p> - -<p>“Here’s excitement!” ejaculated the newspaper -correspondent. “What can it be—a -bear?”</p> - -<p>He had hardly finished when a perfect chorus -of howls arose, coming closer. I gazed in alarm -at Captain Guerez and Alano. My chum -laughed outright.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">« 214 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Don’t get scared, Mark; they are only wild -dogs.”</p> - -<p>“Wild dogs!” put in Burnham. “Well that -is the worst yet! And they are not dangerous?”</p> - -<p>“If you met a large number of them alone -they might be,” replied Captain Guerez. “But -they won’t think of attacking such a party as -ours. They’ll hang around until we leave and -then search the camp for stray food.”</p> - -<p>In spite of this explanation, however, Burnham -insisted that a guard be kept during the -night, and we each took two hours at the task. -Before the sun had struck us from over the treetops, -we had breakfast and were off. Sure -enough, the wild dogs rushed in the moment we -had left the opening. They were a lean and -ugly-looking set of curs.</p> - -<p>“It’s a terrible thing when these wild dogs -and a bloodhound on the trail meet,” observed -Captain Guerez. “Of course one wild dog cannot -do much, but the whole pack will fall on the -bloodhound, and in the end the larger dog will -be killed and literally torn to shreds.”</p> - -<p>A storm was approaching, but this did not -discourage us, although Burnham growled as -usual. In fact, we soon found that he was a -chronic fault-finder, but then he seldom meant -half that he said, and, taken all in all, he was -good company.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">« 215 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“If the storm grows heavy it will give us a -good chance to cross the railroad tracks,” remarked -the captain. “The sentries will relax -their vigilance and more than likely seek shelter -under the trees.”</p> - -<p>“Won’t we strike some settlement before -that?” I asked.</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; we are on the outskirts of Los -Hanios now.”</p> - -<p>Five minutes later we rode into a small village -occupied principally by half a hundred cattlemen, -for we were now coming to the meadows -and valleys in which immense herds of cows and -sheep are pastured. The people of Los Hanios -took but little interest in the revolution, and as -a consequence had been but little molested -either by the Spaniards or Cubans, although a -portion of their cattle had been confiscated.</p> - -<p>From one of the head cattlemen Captain Guerez -learned that a body of Spaniards had passed -through the village the afternoon before bound -for Santiago. They had several prisoners, who -were tied hands and feet, and fast to the mules -which carried them. At least one of the prisoners -had been <i>un Americano</i>.</p> - -<p>At Los Hanios we procured dinner, a splendid -meal—the best I had eaten since leaving the -steamer, for it consisted of prime roast beef done -to a turn, potatoes and beans and coffee. Burnham -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">« 216 »</a></span> -attended to the cooking, saying he had -cooked many a meal for himself during his Bohemian -life at the “Hub,” and consequently all -the dishes were turned out in true American -style, garlic and such stuff being for once -tabooed.</p> - -<p>Yet I hurried matters, wishing to catch up -with my father as soon as possible. I wondered -if he knew I was after him, and how he was faring. -I felt certain that to be bound to the back -of a mule over these rough trails could be anything -but a pleasant sensation.</p> - -<p>While we were still in sight of Los Hanios it -began to rain, and we had not made over a mile -when the downpour became very heavy. Burnham -wished to take shelter under some trees, -but I would not hear of it, and Alano and his -father backed me up in my idea.</p> - -<p>“We can rest a-plenty when Mr. Carter is -once more safe,” said the captain, and that -ended the discussion.</p> - -<p>On and on we went, until, looking ahead, we -espied a turn in the road. Beyond this was a -bank six or eight feet in height, and this was -where the railroad tracks were located.</p> - -<p>“We had best dismount and go ahead on -foot,” said the captain. “A sentry could easily -see our animals if he had his eyes about him.”</p> - -<p>“If he wasn’t asleep,” put in Burnham. "I -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">« 217 »</a></span> -fancy these Spaniards and Cubans do a lot of -sleeping whenever they get the chance."</p> - -<p>“Not in war-times,” said Alano, who did not -fancy this slur upon his countrymen. “Of -course we are not so nervous and impatient as -some of the Americans,” he added pointedly, -and Burnham took the hint and said no more on -the subject.</p> - -<p>A fierce rattle of thunder stopped all talking -soon after. The lightning became almost incessant, -and glared and flared along the railroad -tracks as far as eye could see. We came together -close to a clump of berry bushes.</p> - -<p>“Wait a moment,” whispered Captain Guerez. -“I think I saw a sentry not over fifty feet away!”</p> - -<p>At this announcement all of us crouched -down, and each looked to his weapons, feeling -that a crisis might be at hand. Alano’s father -moved like a shadow up to the railroad bank.</p> - -<p>“I was right,” he announced, after a particularly -bright flash of lightning; “I saw his gun-barrel -plainly.”</p> - -<p>“Can we pass him?” asked Alano.</p> - -<p>“We can try, but——”</p> - -<p>“If he sees us why can’t we make him a prisoner?” -I broke in. “If we did that, we would -have a chance to bring our horses up the bank -and over the tracks.”</p> - -<p>“I was thinking as much,” said the captain. -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">« 218 »</a></span> -“The horses must be gotten over; that is necessary.”</p> - -<p>He deliberated for a minute, and then motioned -us forward, warning us at the same time -to keep perfectly silent. On we went, to where -something of a trail led up over the railroad embankment. -There were a few bushes growing -in the vicinity, and we skulked beside these, -almost crawling along the ground.</p> - -<p>Several minutes passed, and the top of the -embankment was reached and we stood on the -glistening tracks. Down we plunged on the -opposite side, and not over a dozen paces from -where the Spanish sentry was standing.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” came the unexpected cry, and the -man rushed forward, pointing his gun as he ran. -But for once fate was in our favor. A trailing -vine tripped him up and he went headlong.</p> - -<p>Before the Spanish soldier could collect his -senses, or make a movement to rise, Captain -Guerez and myself were on him. The captain -sat down astride of the fellow’s back, while I -secured his gun and clapped my hand over his -mouth, to keep him from calling for assistance. -A second later Alano and the newspaper man -came up, and the Spaniard was our prisoner.</p> - -<p>“Now bring the horses over, as quickly as -possible!” said the captain to his son and Burnham. -“Mark and I will guard this fellow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">« 219 »</a></span></p> - -<p>At once Alano and Burnham departed. The -prisoner struggled wildly to escape, but we held -him fast, and presently Captain Guerez pulled -out his sword and pointed it at the fellow’s -throat.</p> - -<p>“Not a sound, on your life!” he commanded -in Spanish, and the prisoner became mute instantly.</p> - -<p>The sharpness of the lightning and the deafening -thunder had frightened our animals a good -deal, and Alano and the newspaper man had all -they could do to bring them up the embankment, -which in one spot was quite steep. Just -as the railroad tracks were reached one of the -horses broke away, and with a loud snort ran -down the road, his hoofs clattering loudly on the -ties and the iron rails. Alano endeavored to -catch him, with the result that another broke -loose and went up the road in the same fashion.</p> - -<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” came from half a dozen different -directions, and as if by magic as many Spanish -sentries showed themselves along the embankment. -A flash of lightning revealed Alano and -Burnham, and crack! crack! crack! went three -carbines almost simultaneously. The alarm was -taken up on several sides, and soon we found the -best part of a company of Spanish soldiery -swooping down upon us.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">« 220 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXI" id="CHAPTER_XXXI">CHAPTER XXXI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE BATTLE AT THE RAILROAD EMBANKMENT.</p> - - -<p>“We are lost!” cried my Cuban chum, as he -came stumbling down to where his father and I -stood, with our prisoner between us.</p> - -<p>“We’re in for it, that’s a fact!” ejaculated Gilbert -Burnham, as he came after Alano, bringing -the remaining two horses. “Come on, can’t -we ride two on a horse and escape them?”</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez shook his head. There was -no time left to answer, for some of the soldiers -were already less than a score of yards away. -The captain waved his hand and ran off, followed -by all of us, and leaving our late prisoner -standing with mouth wide open in amazement.</p> - -<p>To try to go back whence we had come, and -thus expose ourselves on the top of the railroad -embankment, would have been foolhardy. Instead, -the captain led the way directly into a -grove of sapodilla trees some distance up the -track.</p> - -<p>Our Spanish pursuers called upon us to halt, -not once, but many times; and when we did not -heed their repeated commands, they opened fire -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">« 221 »</a></span> -in a manner which made us feel far from comfortable, -for a bullet grazed the captain’s hand, -and another whizzed so closely to my ear that I -nearly fell from ducking. There may be those -who can stand up coolly under fire; but I must -confess I am not one of them, and I am willing -to give a flying bullet all the room it wishes in -which to spend itself.</p> - -<p>Hardly had we reached the grove of sapodillas -than Captain Guerez swung around and began -to use his own pistol in a most effective way, -wounding two of the soldiers in advance of the -main body of the Spaniards. Seeing this, the -rest of us took courage and also opened fire, -although I must confess I aimed rather low, -having no desire to kill anyone. The cracks -from our four pistols brought consternation to -our pursuers, and they halted and fell back a -dozen paces.</p> - -<p>“Come on,” whispered Captain Guerez. -“Our only hope is to lose ourselves in the -woods. The enemy outnumbers us five to -one.”</p> - -<p>Away he went again, with all of us close upon -his heels. Another volley from the Spaniards -rang out, but did no damage, as the trees and -brush now hid us from view.</p> - -<p>We had passed along a distance of a hundred -feet when we heard a crashing in the brush coming -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">« 222 »</a></span> -from a direction opposite to that being -taken by ourselves. Fearing another company -of Spanish infantry was coming up, Captain -Guerez called us to his side.</p> - -<p>“Here is a narrow ravine, leading under the -railroad tracks,” he said hurriedly. “Let us go -down into that and work our way to the other -side of the embankment.”</p> - -<p>No opposition was made, and into the ravine -we fairly tumbled, just as the soldiers came up -once more. Bushes and stones hid us from -view, and we went on only when the thunder -rolled, that no sounds of our progress might -reach our enemies' ears.</p> - -<p>Ten minutes later found us close to the railroad -embankment. But here we came to a halt -in dismay. The ravine had been filled up by the -recent rains, so that crawling under the tracks -was out of the question.</p> - -<p>“Now what is to be done?” asked Alano in a -low voice. “We can’t stay here, that’s certain.”</p> - -<p>“Some of the soldiers are coming up the ravine -after us!” exclaimed Burnham a moment -later. “Hark!”</p> - -<p>We listened, and found that he was right. -At least half a dozen of the Spaniards were advancing -in a cautious manner, their guns ready -for immediate use.</p> - -<p>“Let us climb this tree,” said Captain Guerez, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">« 223 »</a></span> -pointing to a tall monarch of the forest, whose -spreading branches reached nearly to the opposite -side of the embankment. “Be quick, all of -you!”</p> - -<p>He leaped for the tree, and Burnham followed. -I gave Alano a boost up, and he gave me a hand; -and inside of forty seconds all of us were safe -for the time being. As we rested on the upper -branches of the tree we heard the far-away -whistle of a locomotive.</p> - -<p>“A train is coming!” said Alano.</p> - -<p>“If we could only board it!” I put in eagerly. -“It would carry us part of the way to Guantanamo, -wouldn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“It would—going in that direction,” said -Captain Guerez, with a wave of his hand. “But -the train may be filled with Spanish soldiers, and -what then?”</p> - -<p>The locomotive kept coming closer, and presently -we heard the rattle of the cars as they -bumped over the rails, which were far from -being well ballasted. The captain was peering -out from behind the tree branches, and he gave -a deep breath as a flash of lightning lit up the -scene.</p> - -<p>“It is a freight train!” he exclaimed softly. -“Come down to the branch below, all of -you!”</p> - -<p>We understood him, and one after another -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">« 224 »</a></span> -we dropped to the branch mentioned. It was -directly over the track upon which the freight -was pounding along, and we calculated that the -distance to the top of the tallest cars would not -be over six or eight feet.</p> - -<p>“We can’t jump with that train running at -twenty or thirty miles an hour,” I said, with a -shudder. “We’ll slip and be ground to death -under the car wheels.”</p> - -<p>“Mark is right—a jump is out of the question,” -added Gilbert Burnham. “I’d rather -risk staying here.”</p> - -<p>“The train may have supplies for the soldiers -about here and stop,” whispered Captain Guerez. -“Watch your chances.”</p> - -<p>On and on came the train, and in a few seconds -more we realized that those in charge had -no intention of stopping in that vicinity. Yet -as the headlight came closer we lowered ourselves -in readiness to make a leap.</p> - -<p>Suddenly there was a shrill whistle, and down -went some of the brakes on the long train. I -glanced in the opposite direction from whence -the freight had come and saw on the tracks one -of our runaway horses, which stood staring in -alarm at the glaring headlight. Evidently the -engineer had been startled by the sudden appearance -of the animal, and, not realizing exactly -what it was, had, on the impulse of the moment, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">« 225 »</a></span> -reversed the locomotive’s lever and whistled for -brakes.</p> - -<p>The train could not be stopped in time to save -the beast, which was struck and sent rolling -over and over down the embankment. Then -the train went on still further, the locomotive -finally coming to a halt about fifty yards -beyond the tree upon which all of us were -perched.</p> - -<p>As it slowed up the top of one of the tall -freight cars rolled directly beneath us. Giving -the word to follow, Captain Guerez let himself -drop on the “running board,” as it is termed by -train hands—that is, the board running along -the center of the top of a freight car from end to -end. All of us came after him, the quartette -landing in a row less than two yards apart. As -soon as each had struck in safety he lay down -flat, that those below the embankment, as well -as those on the train, might not have such an -easy chance to discover us.</p> - -<p>Scarcely had the train halted than some of the -Spanish soldiers came running up to ascertain -why it had stopped. But their shouting evidently -frightened the train hands, who possibly -thought a band of rebels was at hand and that -the horse on the track had been a ruse to stop -them. The engineer whistled to release brakes, -and put on a full head of steam, and on went the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">« 226 »</a></span> -train, while the Spaniards yelled in dismay and -flourished their weapons.</p> - -<p>“By Jove! that was a move worth making!” -remarked Gilbert Burnham, after the long train -had covered at least an eighth of a mile. “We -are clear of those chaps now.”</p> - -<p>“Where will this train take us?” asked Alano -of his father.</p> - -<p>“The next village is Comaro, but I do not -know if the train will stop,” was the reply. -“Two miles further on is Los Harmona, but we -must not go there, for I understand there is a -strong Spanish garrison stationed in the village. -Let us get down between the cars and watch -our chance to spring off. If we remain here -some of the brakemen may come along and give -the alarm.”</p> - -<p>The lightning and thunder were decreasing in -violence, and the rain had settled into a thin but -steady downpour. The captain was nearest to -the front end of the freight car, and led the way -down the narrow ladder to the platform below. -Once on this, and on the platform of the car -ahead, we divided into pairs on either side and -awaited a favorable opportunity to leave the -train.</p> - -<p>Comaro was reached and passed in the darkness, -and the long freight began to pull out for -Los Harmona at a steady rate of twenty-five -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">« 227 »</a></span> -miles or more an hour. No chance had been -given us to jump off without great danger, and -now it began to look as if we would be carried -right into the fortified town, or further.</p> - -<p>“Some distance below here is, unless I am -greatly mistaken, a wide patch of meadow,” said -Captain Guerez. “I do not believe a leap into -the water and mud would hurt any of us very -much, and, under the circumstances, I am in -favor of taking the risk, in preference to being -carried into Los Harmona.”</p> - -<p>“If you go I will follow,” I said, and Alano -said the same.</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t intend to be left alone,” smiled -Burnham grimly. “But what will we do after -we strike the meadow?”</p> - -<p>“The meadow is not very broad,” answered -the captain, “and beyond is a highway leading -almost directly into Guantanamo. We will take -to this highway and trust to luck to get on as -originally intended. Of course the loss of our -horses is a heavy one, but this cannot be helped. -If we—— Ha!”</p> - -<p>Captain Guerez stopped short, and not without -good reason. From the interior of the -freight car had come the unmistakable sounds of -human voices. We heard first two men talking, -then a dozen or more. The conversation was in -Spanish, and I did not understand it. But Alano -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">« 228 »</a></span> -and his father did, and my Cuban chum turned -to Burnham and me in high excitement.</p> - -<p>“What do you think!” he whispered. “This -car is filled with Spanish soldiers bound for -Guantanamo! They heard us talking, and they -are going to investigate and find out where we -are and who we are!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">« 229 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXII" id="CHAPTER_XXXII">CHAPTER XXXII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">A LEAP IN THE DARK.</p> - - -<p>My readers can readily believe that all of us -were much alarmed at the prospect ahead. We -had not dreamed that the freight car contained -soldiers, although all of us had heard that the -Spanish Government was transporting troops -by this means wherever the railroads ran.</p> - -<p>Alano had scarcely explained the situation, -when Captain Guerez motioned us to withdraw -from the side edges of the platforms, so that the -soldiers looking out of the broad side doors of -the car could not catch sight of us.</p> - -<p>“We must jump as soon as the meadow appears,” -whispered the captain. “Be prepared, -all of you.”</p> - -<p>He had scarcely finished when we heard a -clatter of feet, and knew that one or more of the -Spaniards had crawled from a side door to the -top of the car. Then followed cautious footsteps -in the direction of the rear platform. -Finding no one there, the Spanish soldiers came -forward.</p> - -<p>“Ha!” cried one, as he espied Captain Guerez. -“Who are you?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">« 230 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Friends,” was the reply, of course in Spanish.</p> - -<p>“Friends? And why ride out here, then?”</p> - -<p>“We have no money, <i>capitan</i>. We are dirt-poor.”</p> - -<p>“And where do you intend to go?”</p> - -<p>“Los Harmona—if the train will ever reach -there.”</p> - -<p>“What will you do there?”</p> - -<p>“We may join the Spanish soldiery, <i>capitan</i>—if -you will take us.”</p> - -<p>“Ha!” The Spanish officer tugged at his -heavy mustache. He was only a sergeant, but -it pleased him to be called captain. “Why did -you not come into the car instead of sneaking -around outside? If you want to become soldiers -we will take you along fast enough. But -you must not play us false. Come up here.”</p> - -<p>“I am afraid—I may fall off,” answered -Alano’s father, in a trembling voice.</p> - -<p>All the while the conversation had been carried -on he had been peering sharply ahead for -the meadow and the water to appear. We now -shot out of the woods, and on either side could -be seen long stretches of swamp. He turned -to us and spoke in English. “All ready to -jump?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” we answered in concert.</p> - -<p>“Then jump—all together!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">« 231 »</a></span></p> - -<p>And away we went, leaving the rude steps of -the freight cars with an impetus that took each -several yards from the tracks. I made a -straight leap and landed on my feet, but as -quickly rolled over on my shoulder in the wet -grass. Burnham came close to me, but took a -header, which filled his nose and one ear with -black mud. Alano and his father were on the -opposite side of the track.</p> - -<p>A pistol shot rang out, followed by half a -dozen more, but the bullets did not reach any of -us. In a moment the long train had rolled out -of sight. We watched its rear light for fully an -eighth of a mile, when it disappeared around a -bend behind a bit of upland.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, Mark, how are you?” It was the -voice of Alano, who came up on the tracks directly -the freight had passed. He was not hurt -in the least. Captain Guerez had scratched one -arm on a bit of low brush, but outside of this the -entire party was uninjured.</p> - -<p>“Come now, follow me; there is no time to -be lost,” said the captain. “Those soldiers may -take it into their heads to have the train run -back in search of us.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s true,” said Burnham. “Which -way now?”</p> - -<p>“We’ll walk back on the tracks until we reach -dry ground.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">« 232 »</a></span></p> - -<p>The plunge into the wet meadow had completed -the work of the rain in soaking us to the -skin, but as the night was warm we did not mind -this. Keeping our eyes on the alert for more -Spanish sentries, we hurried along the railroad -embankment for a distance of several hundred -yards. Then we left the tracks and took a trail -leading southward.</p> - -<p>Our various adventures for the past few hours -had completely exhausted Burnham, while the -others of the party were greatly fatigued. The -newspaper man was in favor of stopping under -a clump of palm trees and resting, but Captain -Guerez demurred.</p> - -<p>“We’ll reach a hut or a house ere long,” he -said. “And there the accommodations will be -much better.”</p> - -<p>“Well, we can’t reach a resting-place too -soon,” grumbled Burnham. “I can scarcely -drag one foot after the other, and it’s so close -my clothing is fairly steaming.”</p> - -<p>“You are no worse off than any of us,” I -made answer, as cheerfully as I could.</p> - -<p>The highway was a stony one, and the rains -had washed away what little dirt there was, -making walking difficult. However, we had -not very far to go. A turn brought us in sight -of a long, low house built of logs and thatched -with palm; and Captain Guerez called a halt.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">« 233 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“I’ll go forward and investigate,” he said. -“In the meantime be on guard against anybody -following us from the railroad.”</p> - -<p>He was gone less than quarter of an hour, and -on returning said it was all right. A very old -man named Murillo was in sole charge of the -house, and he was a strong Cuban sympathizer.</p> - -<p>The place reached, we lost no time in divesting -ourselves of a portion of our clothing and -making ourselves comfortable in some grass -hammocks spread between the house posts.</p> - -<p>“We ought to start early in the morning,” I -said, my thoughts still on my father.</p> - -<p>“We will start at four o’clock,” announced -Captain Guerez. “So make the most of your -rest.”</p> - -<p>The captain had intended to divide up the -night into watches, but Murillo came forward -and volunteered to stand guard.</p> - -<p>“You go to sleep,” he said in Spanish. “I -sleep when you are gone. I know how to -watch.”</p> - -<p>Feeling the old man could be trusted, we all -retired. In a few minutes Burnham was snoring, -and shortly after the others also dropped -asleep.</p> - -<p>It lacked yet a few minutes of four o’clock in -the morning when Murillo came stealing into -the house and shook everyone by the shoulder.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">« 234 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Spanish soldiers down by the railroad,” he -explained hurriedly. “They intend to come up -this road.”</p> - -<p>“Then let us be off!” cried Captain Guerez.</p> - -<p>All of us were already arranging our toilets. -In a few seconds we were ready to leave, and -Murillo was paid for the trouble he had taken in -our behalf.</p> - -<p>“Have they horses?” asked Captain Guerez; -and Murillo nodded.</p> - -<p>“Then come, all of you!” cried Alano’s -father. He started out of the door, and we -came after him. Hardly, however, had he taken -a dozen steps than he pushed each of us behind -a clump of bushes.</p> - -<p>“Soldiers!” he muttered. “They are coming -from the opposite direction!”</p> - -<p>“We are caught in a trap!” exclaimed Alano. -“We cannot go back, and we cannot go forward.”</p> - -<p>“Here is a how d’ye do!” put in Burnham. -“I’m sure I don’t want to take to those beastly -swamps.”</p> - -<p>Murillo had followed us to the doorway. His -face took on a troubled look, for he wanted us -to get away in safety.</p> - -<p>“More soldiers coming the other way!” he -cried. “What will you do? Ah, I have it! -Come into the house at once?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">« 235 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“But what will you do?” queried Captain -Guerez impatiently.</p> - -<p>“I’ll show you. Come, and you shall be safe.”</p> - -<p>The old man spoke so confidently that we followed -him inside at once. Pushing aside a rude -table which stood over a rush matting, he -caught hold of a portion of the flooring. A -strong pull, and up came a trapdoor, revealing -a hole of inky darkness beneath.</p> - -<p>“Into that, all of you!” he cried; and down -we went, to find ourselves in a rude cellar about -ten feet square and six feet deep. As soon as -the last of us was down, Murillo replaced the -trapdoor, matting, and table, and we heard him -throw off some of his clothing and leap into one -of the hammocks.</p> - -<p>We had been left in total darkness, and now -stood perfectly still and listened intently. Not -more than three minutes passed, when we heard -the tramping of horses' hoofs on the rocky road. -The house reached, the animals came to a halt, -and several soldiers dismounted. A rough voice -yelled out in Spanish:</p> - -<p>“Hullo, in there! Who lives here?”</p> - -<p>“I do,” replied Murillo, with a start and a -yawn, as though he had just awakened from a -long sleep.</p> - -<p>“Have you seen anything of four strangers -around here?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">« 236 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“No, <i>capitan</i>.”</p> - -<p>There was a pause, and the leader of the soldiers -came tramping inside.</p> - -<p>“You are sure you are telling me the truth?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, <i>capitan</i>.”</p> - -<p>“It is strange.”</p> - -<p>The newcomer was about to go on, when a -shout from outside attracted his attention. The -soldiers from the opposite direction had come -up. A short conference was held, of which, -however, we heard nothing distinctly. Then -some of the soldiers came inside, and we heard -their heavy boots moving directly over our -heads.</p> - -<p>“You say you saw nobody?” was again asked -of Murillo.</p> - -<p>“No, <i>capitan</i>, not a soul. But then I have -been asleep since evening. I am an old man, -and I need a great deal of rest.”</p> - -<p>“You are lazy, no doubt,” came with a rough -laugh. “Andros, what do you think?”</p> - -<p>“What should I think? There seems to be -no one around. We might make a search.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, we’ll do that. It can do no harm. -Tell the other men to scour the woods and -brush.”</p> - -<p>The order was given; and a moment later -those who had first come in began to search the -house.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">« 237 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXXIII">CHAPTER XXXIII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">CAPTAIN GUEREZ MAKES A DISCOVERY.</p> - - -<p>We listened in much consternation while the -soldiers overhead moved from one portion of the -dwelling to another. Would they discover us?</p> - -<p>“Be prepared for anything!” whispered Captain -Guerez, and they were the only words -spoken.</p> - -<p>There was no second story to the house, so -the search through the rooms took but a few -minutes, and the soldiers came to a halt around -the table.</p> - -<p>“I suppose you are a rebel,” said the officer -abruptly to Murillo.</p> - -<p>“I am an old man, <i>capitan</i>; I wish to end my -days in peace.”</p> - -<p>“I know your kind.” The officer paused. -“Well, comrades, we may as well be on our -way.”</p> - -<p>These words caused me to utter a deep sigh -of relief. They had not discovered us, and now -they were going away. But the next words -sent a chill down my backbone.</p> - -<p>“Can there be a cellar under the house?” -questioned one of the others.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">« 238 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“There is no cellar,” said Murillo simply. -“There is a little hole, half full of water. You -can look down if you wish.”</p> - -<p>“We will.”</p> - -<p>What could it mean? We held our breath as -the old man led the way to the apartment used -as a kitchen. We heard him raise another trapdoor, -some distance behind us.</p> - -<p>“Humph! A man would be a fool to get in -there!” we heard the officer remark, and then -the trap was dropped again into place. “We -will go.”</p> - -<p>The soldiers passed through the kitchen and -toward the front door. One of them must have -taken a last look around, for suddenly he uttered -a cry.</p> - -<p>“Ha! what is this? A collar and a tie! Do -you wear these?”</p> - -<p>“Confound it, my collar and tie,” murmured -Burnham. “I knew I forgot something.”</p> - -<p>“They belong to my nephew,” said Murillo -calmly.</p> - -<p>“Your nephew? Where is he?”</p> - -<p>“He is now at Baiquiri at work on one of the -shipping wharves.”</p> - -<p>“He must dress well?” remarked the officer -dryly.</p> - -<p>“Alfredo earns much money. He was educated -at the college.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">« 239 »</a></span></p> - -<p>The officer tapped the floor with his heavy -boot. “You tell a good story,” he said. “Beware -lest we find you have been lying. Come!” -The last word to his companions.</p> - -<p>The soldiers went outside, and we heard a call -to the men sent out into the woods and brush. -A few minutes later there followed the sounds -of horses' hoofs receding in the distance.</p> - -<p>“Now we can get out of this hole, thank -goodness!” burst out Burnham.</p> - -<p>“Wait—Murillo will inform us when the -coast is clear,” said Captain Guerez.</p> - -<p>Fully five minutes passed before the old man -raised the trap. His face wore a satisfied smile.</p> - -<p>“We fooled them nicely, did we not, <i>capitan</i>?” -he said.</p> - -<p>“You did well, Murillo,” said Alano’s father. -“Here is a gold piece for your trouble.”</p> - -<p>But the old man drew back, and would not -accept the coin. “I did it not alone for you,” -he said. “<i>Cuba libre!</i>”</p> - -<p>We all thanked him heartily, and then Alano’s -father asked him in what directions the two -bodies of soldiers had gone. That from the -railroad had taken the highway to Canistero.</p> - -<p>“We will have to take another road, not quite -so short,” said Captain Guerez. “It is unfortunate, -Mark, but it cannot be helped. Forward!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">« 240 »</a></span></p> - -<p>Much refreshed by our night’s rest, we struck -out rapidly, and by noon calculated that we had -covered eight miles, a goodly distance in that -hilly district. A little before noon we came out -on a clearing overlooking a long stretch of valley -and swamp lands.</p> - -<p>“Just below here is the village of San Luardo,” -said the captain. “It is there we ought -to find out something concerning your father. -It may be possible he is quartered somewhere in -the village, that is, if the journey to Santiago has -been delayed.”</p> - -<p>“Is the village under guard?” I questioned -anxiously, my heart giving a bound when I -thought how close to my parent I might be.</p> - -<p>“Yes, every village in this district is under -Spanish rule.”</p> - -<p>“Then how can we get in?”</p> - -<p>“I have been trying to form a plan,” was the -slow answer. “Let us get a little closer, and I -will see what can be done.”</p> - -<p>We descended from the clearing, and just before -noon reached the outskirts of the village. -The captain had been right; two companies of -freshly imported soldiers were in control of San -Luardo.</p> - -<p>As we surveyed the situation from a bit of -woodland, we heard the heavy creaking of an -ox-cart on the stony road. Looking down we -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">« 241 »</a></span> -saw the turnout coming slowly along, loaded -with hay and straw, probably for the horses of -the Spanish soldiers.</p> - -<p>“I will go into town in that!” cried Captain -Guerez. “Stop that fellow!” and he indicated -the driver.</p> - -<p>A rush was made, and the ox-cart came to a -sudden halt. When the dirty fellow who drove -it saw us he turned pale, but a few words from -Alano’s father soon reassured him, and he -readily consented to allow the captain to hide -himself under the hay and straw and thus pass -the guards. The driver was working for the -Spaniards, but his heart was with the insurgents.</p> - -<p>Stripping himself of his coat and everything -else which gave him a military appearance, Captain -Guerez rubbed a little dirt on his face, neck, -and hands, leaped into the ox-cart, and dove beneath -the straw. If discovered, he intended to -explain that he was out of work and was willing -to do anything the Spaniards desired.</p> - -<p>Once more the cart creaked on its way toward -the village, and we were left alone. Withdrawing -to a safe and cool shelter, we sat down -to rest and to await the captain’s return.</p> - -<p>“I wish I could have gone along,” I said to -my chum.</p> - -<p>“Father can do the work better alone,” replied -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">« 242 »</a></span> -Alano, who had great faith in his parent’s -ability.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps so. He wouldn’t want me anyway—after -the mess I made of it when I discovered -Mr. Burnham.”</p> - -<p>“Mess!” cried the newspaper man. “Why, -it was through you that I escaped, my boy. -You’re all right. But I fancy Captain Guerez -knows just exactly what he wishes to do, and -probably one person can do it better than two.”</p> - -<p>“The fact that you are an American would -make everyone regard you with suspicion,” -added Alano.</p> - -<p>Two hours went by, which to me seemed a -day, and then came a peculiar whistle from the -road. At once Alano leaped to his feet.</p> - -<p>“My father is back!” he announced, and we -ran forth to meet the captain. At first we -hardly knew him, for he had taken some grease -and some burnt cork and transformed himself -into a negro. He was out of breath, and one of -his hands was much scratched.</p> - -<p>“I had a narrow escape,” he panted. “Come -with me! There is not a moment to lose!”</p> - -<p>Although almost out of breath, he ran off, and -we went with him through the woods and up the -side of a small hill, which course took us around -San Luardo. Not until the town was left well -behind did the captain stop and throw himself -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">« 243 »</a></span> -on a patch of deep grass. He was too exhausted -to speak, yet he saw my anxiety and -smiled.</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry, Mark; so far your father is -safe,” were his brief words.</p> - -<p>“That’s good!” I cried, with a weight lifted -from my heart, for during the wait I had conjured -up any number of dreadful thoughts concerning -my parent.</p> - -<p>“Yes, so far he is safe. They have him a prisoner -at San Luardo, but they intend to remove -him to Santiago before nightfall.”</p> - -<p>“Before nightfall!” My heart seemed to -stop beating. “How will they do it? Can’t -we stop them and rescue him?”</p> - -<p>“We must rescue him,” was the reply. -“That is why I hurried back. If they get him -to Santiago he will be—that is, Mark, I am -afraid you will never see him alive again.”</p> - -<p>I understood Captain Guerez only too well. -My father was doomed to die the death of a spy, -and he would be shot very shortly after his removal -to the seaport town.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">« 244 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXXIV">CHAPTER XXXIV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE DOGS OF CUBAN WARFARE.</p> - - -<p>In a few minutes Alano’s father recovered -sufficiently to tell his story. He had entered -the village in safety, and soon put himself into -communication with several citizens who were -Cuban sympathizers. From one of these he -had learned that my father was being kept a -prisoner in what had formerly been a cattle-house, -but which was now doing duty as a Spanish -prison. No one was allowed to talk to the -prisoners, but by bribing the man who owned -the building the captain had succeeded in getting -word to my father that he was around and -that I was with him, and that both of us intended -to do all in our power to effect his release.</p> - -<p>This word having been passed to my parent, -Captain Guerez has set about perfecting a plan -whereby my father might be supplied with tools -for freeing himself, and also a pistol. But in -this work he had been discovered, and a struggle -and flight followed. Luckily, the Spaniards -had not discovered whom he was working for in -particular, there being a dozen prisoners in the -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">« 245 »</a></span> -same building, so it was not likely my parent -would suffer in consequence.</p> - -<p>“We must watch the road to Santiago,” said -Captain Guerez, when he had finished, washed -himself, and had a refreshing drink of water. -“It is our one chance.”</p> - -<p>“If only we had horses!” put in Alano.</p> - -<p>“We must find animals, my son.”</p> - -<p>The captain spoke decidedly. “Necessity -knows no law,” and it was easy to see he intended -to obtain the horses—if not in one way, -then in another. Of course I did not blame -him. To me it seemed a matter of life and -death.</p> - -<p>As rapidly as we could, we made our way -around the hills to the Santiago road. We had -just reached it when Burnham, who was slightly -in advance, halted us and announced a camp off -to our left. Captain Guerez surveyed the situation -and smiled.</p> - -<p>“Cattle dealers,” he said. “They have -brought in horses to sell to the Spanish authorities. -I’ll make a deal with them.”</p> - -<p>He went off, with Alano at his side. Instead -of following, Burnham and I concealed ourselves -in the bushes, to watch who might pass on -the highway to the seaport town. There was -no telling when those who had my father in -custody would be along.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">« 246 »</a></span></p> - -<p>It was a long while before the captain and my -chum came back, but when they did each rode a -strong horse and led another behind. Burnham -and I were soon in the saddle; and then all -of us felt safer, for being in the saddle would -place us in a position equally as good as that -occupied by any of our enemies.</p> - -<p>“Look well to your pistols,” said the captain. -“It may be that a sharp and wild dash will be -the only way in which Mark’s father can be -rescued.”</p> - -<p>“I hope the guard having him in charge is -not too large,” I answered, as I did as he suggested.</p> - -<p>“We’ll all hope that, Mark.”</p> - -<p>With pistols ready for use, we ranged up behind -a heavy clump of trees and awaited the -coming of the guard from San Luardo. I was -on pins and needles, as the saying goes, and -started up at the slightest sound. For this -Burnham poked fun at me; yet he himself was -on the alert, as I could see by the way he compressed -his lips and worked at the ends of his -mustache.</p> - -<p>“Hark!” said Captain Guerez presently, and -we all sat like statues and listened. From down -the road came the tramp of a dozen or more -horses and mules. The guard with the prisoners -was advancing. The decisive moment -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">« 247 »</a></span> -was at hand. I swallowed a strange lump in my -throat and grasped my pistol tighter. For my -father’s sake I would fight to the bitter end.</p> - -<p>From out of a cloud of dust rode a vidette, -heavily armed and with his eyes and ears on the -alert for anything which might sound or look -suspicious. As he came nearer we drew back -behind the trees, and Captain Guerez motioned -us to absolute silence.</p> - -<p>The vidette passed, and then the main body of -the guard came on. There were three soldiers -in front and three behind, and between rode two -prisoners on mules, both whites and evidently -Americans. I strained my eyes to their utmost, -and soon distinguished my father’s familiar face -and form.</p> - -<p>My father! The sight thrilled me to the soul, -and I had all I could do to restrain myself from -riding forth to meet him. An exclamation -came to my lips, but the hand of my chum -checked it, while a look from him told plainer -than words that he realized how I felt.</p> - -<p>“Attention!” whispered Captain Guerez. -“Are you all prepared to fight? I think these -guards are raw recruits, and if so a few volleys -will cause them to take to their heels.”</p> - -<p>“I am ready,” I said grimly.</p> - -<p>“And I,” added Alano.</p> - -<p>“You can count on me,” put in Burnham.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">« 248 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Very well. I will take the first fellow to the -left. Alano, you take the second; Mark, you -the third; and you, Burnham, take any one in -the rear you choose.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll take the middle guard,” muttered the -newspaper man.</p> - -<p>“I know you can all fire well, so aim for the -sword arm,” went on the captain. “There is no -necessity for killing the fellows, unless it comes -to close quarters. Ready? Take aim—fire!”</p> - -<p>The words “Take aim!” had been spoken -aloud, causing several of the guards to draw rein -in alarm. At the command to fire, our pistols -blazed away simultaneously, and our several -aims were so good that four of the guards -were hit, three in the arms and one in the -side.</p> - -<p>“Forward, and fire again!” shouted the gallant -captain, and out of the clearing we dashed, -discharging our weapons a second time.</p> - -<p>The detachment of Spanish soldiers was taken -completely by surprise. The lieutenant in command -had been wounded, and when he saw us -coming from the woods he imagined we must -outnumber his men, for he gave a hasty order to -retreat, and led the way. For a third time we -fired, and scarcely had the echo died among the -hills than every one of the soldiers was going -back the way he had come, as rapidly as his -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">« 249 »</a></span> -horse would carry him, the vidette, who had -turned also, going with them.</p> - -<p>“Mark!” cried my father, when he saw me. -“Is it possible!”</p> - -<p>“Father!” was all I could say. With my -knife I cut the rawhide thongs which bound him -to the mule’s back, and in a second more we -were in each other’s arms. The other prisoner -was also released, and both were speedily provided -with weapons.</p> - -<p>“We must not lose time here—follow me!” -shouted Captain Guerez. “You can talk all -you please later on,” he added to me and my -happy parent.</p> - -<p>All of us followed him back into the woods, -and along a trail which he declared must bring -us to another seaport town, eight miles to the -east of Santiago Bay. We put spurs to our -steeds, and long before nightfall half a dozen -miles of the uneven way had been covered.</p> - -<p>As fast as we were able to do so, my father and -I rode side by side, and never had I felt happier -than then, while he was equally pleased. As we -journeyed along I told my story from beginning -to end, and then he told his own—how he had -been captured and taken for a spy, how cruelly -he had been treated, and all. Just before he had -received Captain Guerez' message he had given -up all hope, and even while on the road he had -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">« 250 »</a></span> -been fearful that the plan to rescue him would -miscarry.</p> - -<p>“What do you think we had best do?” I -asked, after our stories were told.</p> - -<p>“I wish to get out of the country as soon as -possible, Mark. I cannot stand the climate. -Half a dozen times I have felt as if I was going -to be taken down with the fever. That injured -leg took away a good bit of my strength.”</p> - -<p>“Can we take passage from the town to which -we are bound?”</p> - -<p>“We can try,” answered my father.</p> - -<p>Another half-mile was covered, and we were -beginning to consider that we had made good -our retreat from the spot where the encounter -with the Spanish soldiers had occurred, when -suddenly a deep baying broke out at our rear, -causing Alano and the captain to give a simultaneous -cry of alarm.</p> - -<p>“What is it?” asked Burnham.</p> - -<p>“What is it!” was the answer from the -captain. “Can’t you hear? The heartless -wretches have set several bloodhounds on our -trail!”</p> - -<p>“Bloodhounds!” we echoed.</p> - -<p>“Yes, bloodhounds!” ejaculated Alano. -“Hark! there must be three, if not four, of the -beasts!”</p> - -<p>“Will they attack us—on horseback?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">« 251 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Certainly—they’ll fly right at a fellow’s -throat.”</p> - -<p>“But how can they track us—we have not -been on foot.”</p> - -<p>“They are tracking the mules Señor Carter -and Señor Raymond ride,” put in Captain Guerez. -“Hark! they are coming nearer! In a -few minutes more they will be upon us! Out -with your pistols and fight the beasts as best you -can. It is our only hope!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">« 252 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXV" id="CHAPTER_XXXV">CHAPTER XXXV.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE LAST OF THE BLOODHOUNDS.</p> - - -<p>The announcement that the bloodhounds -would soon be upon us filled me with dread. I -had had one experience with this class of beasts, -and I did not wish to have another. I looked -around at our party and saw that the others, -even to the captain, were as agitated as myself. -A Cuban dreads an unknown bloodhound worse -than a native African does a lion or an American -pioneer does a savage grizzly bear.</p> - -<p>“Have your pistols ready!” went on the captain, -when an idea came into my head like a -flash, and I turned to him.</p> - -<p>“If they are following the mules, why not -turn the mules into a side trail?” I said. “My -father can ride with me, and Mr. Raymond can -double with somebody else.”</p> - -<p>“A good idea!” cried Captain Guerez. -“Quick, let us try it.”</p> - -<p>In a twinkle my father had leaped up behind -me, and Alano motioned Mr. Raymond to join -him. A small side trail was close at hand, and -along this we sent the mules at top speed, cutting -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">« 253 »</a></span> -them deeply with our whips to urge them -along.</p> - -<p>“Now to put distance between them and ourselves!” -cried my father, and once more we -went on. As we advanced we listened to the -bloodhounds. In a few minutes more we heard -them turn off in the direction the mules had -taken, and their bayings gradually died away in -the distance. Then we slackened our speed a -bit, and all breathed a long sigh of relief.</p> - -<p>“That was a brilliant idea, my boy!” said Mr. -Raymond warmly. “Mr. Carter, you have a -son to be proud of.”</p> - -<p>“I am proud of him,” said my father, and he -gave my arm a tight squeeze. From that moment -on, Mr. Raymond, who was a business -man from the West, became my warm friend.</p> - -<p>It must not be supposed that we pursued -our journey recklessly. Far from it. The captain -rode in advance continually, and on several -occasions called a halt while he went forward to -investigate. But nothing offered itself to block -our progress, and late that night, saddle-weary -and hungry, we came in sight of the seaport -town for which we were bound.</p> - -<p>“I believe the bark <i>Rosemary</i> is in port here,” -said Mr. Raymond. “And if that is so, we -ought to be able to get on board, for I know the -captain well.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">« 254 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Then that will save us a good deal of -trouble,” replied my father. “But of course we -can’t go aboard openly—the Spanish authorities -wouldn’t allow that.”</p> - -<p>How to get into the town unobserved was a -question. Finally Alano’s father said he would -ride in as a horse dealer, taking all of our animals -with him. To disguise himself he dirtied his -face once more, and put on my hat and coat, -both rather small for him. Then driving three -of the horses before him, he went on.</p> - -<p>We went into camp under some plantains, and -it was not until three o’clock in the morning that -Captain Guerez came back. He returned with -a smile on his face, for he had sold two of the -worst of the steeds at a good price and had in -addition found the <i>Rosemary</i> and interviewed -her captain.</p> - -<p>“The captain said he couldn’t do anything for -you to-night,” he explained. “But to-morrow, -if it is dark, he will send a rowboat up the shore -to a rock he pointed out to me with his glass. -You are to be at the rock at one o’clock sharp—if -it’s dark. If it is not, you are to wait until -the next night. He says to try to come on -board from the quay will only bring you to -grief.”</p> - -<p>“Good for Captain Brownley!” cried Mr. -Raymond. "I felt sure he would not go back -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">« 255 »</a></span> -on me. Once on board, Mr. Carter, and the -three of us will be safe."</p> - -<p>“There is, therefore, nothing to do but to -wait,” went on Captain Guerez. “I shall see -you safe off, and then return to Father Anuncio’s -convent with Alano and join the rest of my -family once more.”</p> - -<p>As soon as it was light we rode and tramped -through the woods and the swamps to the seacoast, -where it did not take long to locate the -rock the captain of the <i>Rosemary</i> had pointed -out to Captain Guerez. This accomplished, we -retired to a near-by plantain grove, there to eat -and rest, and spend a final day together.</p> - -<p>The thought of parting with my chum was a -sad one, yet I felt it my duty to remain with my -father. Alano was also affected, and often -placed his brown hand affectionately on my -shoulder while we conversed.</p> - -<p>“Let us both hope that this cruel and senseless -warfare will soon cease, and that Cuba will -be free,” I said.</p> - -<p>“Yes, Mark, and that we will soon be together -again,” he replied. “I hope your journey -proves a safe one; and when you get back -you must remember me to all of the other -boys.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll do it; and you must remember me to -your mother and your two sisters,” I said.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">« 256 »</a></span></p> - -<p>With it all, however, the day passed somewhat -slowly, for we were impatient to see what -the night would bring forth. The sun set -clearly, and soon the heavens were bespangled -with countless stars.</p> - -<p>Mr. Raymond shook his head. “Captain -Brownley won’t risk coming to-night,” he remarked. -“They could easily spot a boat from -the town shore, it is so clear.”</p> - -<p>But about ten o’clock it began to cloud over, -and at eleven it started to rain, a gentle but -steady downpour. Not a star remained, and out -on the water it was as dark as Erebus.</p> - -<p>“A kind Providence is with us!” cried my -father. “We could not possibly imagine a better -night.”</p> - -<p>Slowly the time wore on, until Captain Guerez' -watch indicated ten minutes to one. We -sat close beside the rock, paying no attention to -the rain, although it was gradually soaking us -to the skin.</p> - -<p>“Here they come!” whispered my father, and -a few seconds later a rowboat containing four -sailors loomed up through the darkness. As -silently as a shadow the boat glided up past the -rock and into the swamp grass.</p> - -<p>“On time, I see,” said Mr. Raymond, as he -advanced. “Is Captain Brownley here?”</p> - -<p>"No, he’s watching at the ship, and will give -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">« 257 »</a></span> -us the signal when to come aboard," replied one -of the sailors, who was in command. “Come -aboard, if you are ready, sir.”</p> - -<p>“We are,” said my father.</p> - -<p>There was a short but affectionate good-by -on both sides. Captain Guerez wrung my hand -tightly, and I gave Alano a warm squeeze. -Then Mr. Raymond, Burnham, father, and -myself stepped into the rowboat, and the sailors -pushed off with their long oars. In another instant -the craft swung clear of the shore and was -turned in the direction from whence we had -come. I was going to cry out a last parting to -my chum, when the sailor sitting nearest -checked me.</p> - -<p>“Be silent, my lad; if we’re discovered we’ll -all be shot.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” put in my father, “don’t make a -sound. Leave everything to these men. They -have their instructions and know what they are -doing.”</p> - -<p>On and on over the Bay of Guantanamo -glided the rowboat. The rain still came down, -and if anything the night was blacker than ever. -I wondered how the sailors could steer, until I -saw one of them consulting a compass which lay -in the bottom of the craft, looking it by the rays -of a tiny dark-lantern.</p> - -<p>I reckoned that the best part of half an hour -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">« 258 »</a></span> -had gone by, when the sailors rested on their -oars, while one took up a night-glass. For -five minutes he waited, then put the glass -down.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right,” he whispered. “Let fall. -No noise now, on your life!”</p> - -<p>Forward went our craft again, and now I noticed -that each oar was bound with rubber at the -spot where it touched the rowlock, to keep it -from scraping. Thus we moved onward in absolute -silence.</p> - -<p>From out of the darkness we now saw a number -of lights, coming from the town and the -shipping. A few minutes later we ran up to the -dark hull of a large vessel. A rope ladder was -thrown down to us, and a sailor whispered to us -to go up. We followed directions as rapidly as -we could, and once on the deck we were hurried -below, while the rowboat was swung up on the -davits.</p> - -<p>“Ah, Mr. Raymond, glad to see you!” said -Captain Brownley, a bluff New Englander, as he -extended his hand. “A fine night to come on -board.” And then he turned to us and we were -introduced.</p> - -<p>The <i>Rosemary</i> was bound for Philadelphia, -but would not sail for three days. She was -under strict Spanish watch, so it was necessary -for us to keep out of sight. We were locked in -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">« 259 »</a></span> -a stateroom, but made as comfortable as circumstances -permitted.</p> - -<p>From time to time during the three days the -captain came to us with various bits of news. -One was to the effect that the Spanish detachment -which had had my father and Mr. Raymond -in charge had reported a conflict with a -Cuban force fifty or sixty strong. Another was -that the United States had declared war upon -Spain and was going to bombard Havana.</p> - -<p>“I wonder if it is true that we are to fight -Spain?” I said to Burnham. “What do you -think?”</p> - -<p>“We ought to fight Spain,” answered the -newspaper man. “Cuba deserves her freedom, -and if she can’t help herself against Spanish imposition -and brutality we ought to give her a -friendly hand.”</p> - -<p>We talked the matter over at some length; but -neither of us knew the truth—that war was -really declared, and that not Havana, but Santiago, -was to be attacked by the time the year -was half over.</p> - -<p>At last came the hour when the ship’s anchors -were hove apeak and the sails were set. We -sailed at high noon, and, having a good wind, -soon passed outside of Guantanamo Bay, which, -as my readers may know, is situated but a few -miles to the eastward of Santiago Bay.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">« 260 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Free at last!” cried my father, as he came -on deck to get the fresh air. “I must say I am -not sorry to leave Cuba—since the times have -grown so troublesome.”</p> - -<p>He had scarcely spoken when a small Spanish -revenue cutter hove in sight, steaming down the -coast evidently from Santiago Bay. While -Captain Brownley was examining the craft, -there was a flash of fire, and a dull boom -sounded over the water.</p> - -<p>“Great Scott! What does that mean?” demanded -Burnham, leaping up from his seat near -the rail.</p> - -<p>“It’s an order to heave to,” answered Captain -Brownley grimly. “We are not yet out of the -woods, it would seem.”</p> - -<p>“Then that means for us to get out of sight -again,” said my father, and, as the captain -nodded, the four of us ran for the companion-way, -descended to the cabin, and secreted ourselves -in the cabin pantry.</p> - -<p>Five minutes later the Spanish revenue cutter -steamed alongside, and we heard the tramp of -half a dozen strange pairs of feet on the deck -above.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">« 261 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXXVI">CHAPTER XXXVI.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">CAST INTO A SANTIAGO DUNGEON.</p> - - -<p>“Those fellows evidently mean business,” -whispered Mr. Raymond, as an angry discussion -drifted down to us. “Is it possible they -got wind that we are on board?”</p> - -<p>“Let us hope not,” shuddered my father. -“Hist! they are coming down into the cabin!”</p> - -<p>After this we remained as quiet as mice, -hardly daring to breathe. We heard loud talking, -partly in Spanish and a few words in very -bad English. “I know they are here,” growled -one Spaniard. “We shall make a large hunt, -<i>capitan</i>.”</p> - -<p>“If you insist, I cannot help myself,” answered -Captain Brownley. “But it is a most -unusual proceeding.”</p> - -<p>At this the Spaniard muttered something in -his own language. He began to hunt in one direction, -while his followers hunted in another. -Soon two of the men came to the pantry and -forced the door. We tried to escape observation, -but could not manage it, and were ordered -forth at the point of several long pistols.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">« 262 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Ha! as I suspected! All <i>Americanos</i>!” -muttered the Spanish commander of the revenue -cutter. “A fine haul! A fine haul, indeed!”</p> - -<p>Then turning to his second in command he -issued orders that some irons be brought on -board. At the same time a dozen Spanish marines -from the cutter were formed in line, with -loaded carbines, to cover the crew of the <i>Rosemary</i>.</p> - -<p>“I place all of you under arrest,” said the -Spanish captain. “You”—pointing to my -father, Burnham, Mr. Raymond, and myself—“as -spies; and you and your men”—this to -Captain Brownley—“as enemies of Spain, assisting -these spies to escape.”</p> - -<p>In vain Captain Brownley tried to argue the -matter. The Spanish commander would not -listen to a word. “The Yankee pigs have declared -war on us!” he burst out at last. “Now -let them take care of themselves.”</p> - -<p>“Then war is really declared?” came from -several of us simultaneously.</p> - -<p>“Yes, war has been declared. More than -that, we have already whipped the Yankee pigs -who dared to attack our noble ships in the Philippines,” -said the Spaniard bombastically.</p> - -<p>But, as all American boys know, the Spaniard -was mistaken. The American squadron under -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">« 263 »</a></span> -Commodore, afterward Admiral, George Dewey, -was not defeated. Instead, it gained a most -glorious victory, some of the particulars of -which will be related in a volume to follow this, -of which more later.</p> - -<p>The news was staggering, and while we talked -it over among ourselves, each of us was handcuffed, -I being linked to Mr. Raymond, while -my father was linked to Burnham. Captain -Brownley and his first mate were also handcuffed, -and the sailors were told to obey the -Spanish captain’s orders or run the risk of being -shot down.</p> - -<p>The announcement that a naval battle had -been fought in the Philippines seemed to worry -Mr. Raymond a good deal. “I wonder if -Oliver knows anything of this?” he half muttered.</p> - -<p>“Oliver, who is he?” I asked.</p> - -<p>“Oliver is my son,” answered the merchant. -“He took a trip to China a year ago, and from -there went to Manila, the principal city of the -Philippines. I haven’t heard of him for a number -of months now. He is perhaps a year older -than you.”</p> - -<p>“I never heard much of the Philippines,” I -answered. “I know they are a good way off—somewhere -between Australia, the Hawaiian -Islands, and China. Do they belong to Spain?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">« 264 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Yes, but she is having as much trouble to -hold them as she is having to hold Cuba.”</p> - -<p>We were now ordered to keep silent, and -compelled to march from the cabin of the <i>Rosemary</i> -to the deck of the Spanish vessel. Here -we were made to stand in a line, our weapons -having previously been taken from us. The -course of the sailing vessel had been eastward -toward Cape Maysi, but now both craft were -headed westward.</p> - -<p>“I’ll wager we are bound for Santiago,” murmured -Burnham, who stood beside me, and he -was right, for in a little over an hour the narrow -entrance to Santiago Bay came into view, with -Morro Castle, a famous old fortress, standing -high upon the rocks to the right.</p> - -<p>The bay is several miles long, and Santiago -stands well in on the northeast shore. The -land-locked harbor was alive with vessels, but -not one of them floated the familiar Stars and -Stripes of our own country.</p> - -<p>“There is where we made our way across the -bay when first Alano Guerez and I escaped from -Santiago,” I whispered. “I am afraid I’ll not -get another such chance now.”</p> - -<p>Soon one of the numerous docks in front of -the city was reached, and we were marched -ashore. The news of our capture had spread, -and a large crowd of curiosity-seekers gathered, -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">« 265 »</a></span> -to jeer and pass all sorts of unpleasant remarks. -The city was now under stricter Spanish rule -than ever before, and as we marched from the -dock to the city prison not another American -was to be seen.</p> - -<p>At the prison a brief examination was held. -When it was learned that my father was present, -I was thrust aside and told that he could speak -for me. Yet he was allowed to say but little. -The authorities were certain that he, Burnham, -and Mr. Raymond were spies, and the four of us -were sentenced to confinement in another prison -several squares away—a low, dingy pile of stone, -every opening of which was heavily barred and -grated.</p> - -<p>Within this prison came the hardest parting -of all. I was separated from my father, and, -when I remonstrated, received a sharp blow on -my shoulder from a jailer’s sword. Mr. Raymond -and I were paired off as before, and conducted -through a long stone passage-way and -down a dirty flight of steps. Sunshine and fresh -air were left behind, and the way was lit up by a -smoky kerosene lamp. We were taken to a -dungeon cell several feet below the sidewalk and -locked in, and then our jailer left us.</p> - -<p>I was too overcome to speak when we were -left alone. Mr. Raymond strained his eyes and -peered around at the four bare walls, the bare -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">« 266 »</a></span> -ceiling overhead, and the stone flooring with its -water pitcher and heap of musty straw in one -corner.</p> - -<p>“This is awful!” he murmured. “Mark, -how long do you think you can stand living in -this place?”</p> - -<p>“No longer than I have to!” I cried. “I’ll -get out just as fast as ever I can.”</p> - -<p>“If we ever do get out!” he concluded significantly.</p> - -<p>The remainder of the day passed slowly. For -supper the jailer brought us some stale bread -and some more water, no fresher than that -already in the pitcher. That night I did not -sleep a wink.</p> - -<p>I expected that another examination would -be held the next day, or, at the latest, within a -week; but I was doomed to disappointment. -No one but the jailer came near us, and he only -to bring us our bread and water and occasionally -a stew of ill-flavored meat and potatoes, -reeking with garlic. Of this both of us tried -bits of the potatoes, and sometimes mouthfuls -of the meat, but it was all we could do to choke -them down.</p> - -<p>“How long is this to last?” I asked Mr. Raymond -one day, as both of us walked up -and down the narrow cell like two caged animals.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">« 267 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“God alone knows, Mark,” he answered. -“If there is no change soon I shall go mad!”</p> - -<p>“It is inhuman!” I went on. “A Christian -would not treat a dog like this.”</p> - -<p>“They are very bitter against us Americans, -Mark. Now the United States have declared -war against them, they must realize that Cuban -freedom is assured.”</p> - -<p>Another week went on, and then we were -taken up into the prison yard. Here I saw my -father,—thin, pale, and sick,—but I was not permitted -to converse with him. We were placed -in two rows with a hundred other prisoners, and -inspected by General Toral, the military governor -of Santiago and surrounding territory. -After the inspection we went back to our various -dungeon cells; and many weary weeks of -close confinement followed.</p> - -<p>One day a curious booming reached our ears, -coming from we knew not where. I heard it -quite plainly, and called Mr. Raymond’s attention -to it.</p> - -<p>“It is the discharging of cannon,” he said. -“And it is not a salute either,” he added, as the -booming became more rapid and violent.</p> - -<p>It was not until long afterward that I learned -the truth, that a fleet of Spanish warships commanded -by Admiral Cervera had been “bottled -up” in Santiago Bay by our own warships -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">« 268 »</a></span> -under Admiral Sampson and Commodore -Schley, and that the Yankee gunners were now -trying what they could do in the way of bombarding -Morro Castle and the ships which lay -hidden from them behind the mountains at the -harbor’s entrance.</p> - -<p>The booming of cannon kept up for several -hours and then died away gradually, but a few -days later the bombardment was continued. -We now felt certain that a battle of some sort -was on, and Mr. Raymond questioned the jailer.</p> - -<p>“The Yankee pigs will be well whipped,” -growled the fellow, and that was all we could get -out of him.</p> - -<p>Again the days lengthened into weeks, and -nothing of importance happened—to us. But -in the outside world great events were taking -place. The entrance to Santiago Bay was -being blockaded by the vessels under Sampson’s -command, and an army of invasion was gathering -at Tampa, Fla., to land on the southeastern -coast of Cuba and attack Santiago from the rear. -The army of invasion, under command of General -Shafter, was sixteen thousand strong, and -left Tampa in between thirty and forty transports.</p> - -<p>A landing of the army was effected at Baiquiri -and other points, and here General Shafter -consulted with General Garcia, and it was decided -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">« 269 »</a></span> -that about three thousand Cuban troops -should co-operate with the United States forces. -Among the Cuban troops was the company commanded -by Alano’s father; and my chum, let me -add right here, was in the fight from start to -finish.</p> - -<p>The Spanish authorities now saw what the -Americans were up to, and without delay Santiago -was fortified from end to end. Every -road leading from the city was barricaded with -logs and earthworks, and barriers of barbed wire -were strung in various directions. Thousands -of Spanish troops had been gathered in the -vicinity, and these were hurried to San Juan -Hill, El Caney, and other points of vantage just -outside of Santiago proper.</p> - -<p>As the American forces advanced closer and -closer to the city Admiral Cervera became anxious -for the safety of his fleet. He knew that if -Santiago was captured there would be nothing -left for him to do but to try to escape from the -bay, and that would mean to go forth and fight -the American warships stationed on the blockade -beyond Morro Castle.</p> - -<p>One day the jailer came in evidently much depressed. -We had expected the usual stew that -day, but got only a chunk of dry bread. “And -you are lucky to get even so much,” said the -Spaniard, as he hurried out.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">« 270 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Something has gone wrong,” remarked Mr. -Raymond, as he translated the fellow’s words to -me. “I begin to believe that Santiago is suffering -some sort of an attack.”</p> - -<p>He had hardly spoken when the dull booming -of cannon broke once more on our ears. It -was a strange sound, and I threw myself down -on our straw bed to listen.</p> - -<p>I was half in a doze,—dreaming of my school -days at Broxville,—when suddenly came an -awful crash that to me sounded like the crack of -doom, and the dungeon was filled with pieces of -stone, dirt, and cement, and a thick smoke that -all but choked us. Mr. Raymond was hurled -flat on top of me, and for the space of several -seconds neither of us could speak or move.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">« 271 »</a></span></p> - - - - -<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXXVII">CHAPTER XXXVII.</a></h2> - -<p class="caption3">THE FALL OF THE SPANISH STRONGHOLD.</p> - - -<p>“Wha—what does this mean?” I managed -to gasp at last.</p> - -<p>“The dungeon has been struck by a shell!” -answered Mr. Raymond, breathing with difficulty. -“There is a bombardment going on!”</p> - -<p>“But we may be killed!”</p> - -<p>“Let us trust not, Mark. Are you hurt -much?”</p> - -<p>“I have a cut in my cheek, and another in my -left arm.”</p> - -<p>“And I have a bad bruise in the right leg,” -answered my fellow prisoner. “But still——Oh, -Mark, look! The sunshine!”</p> - -<p>Mr. Raymond broke off short and pointed upward. -He was right. The shell which had -torn up the sidewalk above us had left a hole in -the dungeon ceiling nearly a foot in diameter.</p> - -<p>“Can we get out?” I burst out eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps—but the city is in the hands of our -enemies.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t care,” I went on recklessly. “Anything -is better than staying here.”</p> - -<p>“That is true.” Mr. Raymond arose and -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">« 272 »</a></span> -measured the distance from the hole to the cell -floor. “It’s all of ten feet, Mark.”</p> - -<p>“Let me balance myself on your shoulders,” -I said, and now my athletic training at the -military school stood me in good stead. Mr. -Raymond raised me up into the air, and I -caught the edge of the hole with ease.</p> - -<p>Yet to pull myself up was no mean task. But -I worked desperately, and finally found myself -on the pavement. Crowds of people were rushing -hither and thither, and no one paid any attention -to me. Slipping off my jacket, I let -down one sleeve.</p> - -<p>“Take hold of that, and I’ll pull you up!” I -cried to Mr. Raymond; and he did as bidden, -and soon stood beside me.</p> - -<p>A guard was now running toward us, and as -he came on he discharged his Mauser rifle, but -the bullet flew wide of its mark. “<i>Halte!</i>” he -yelled, but we did nothing of the sort, but took -to our heels and ran as if the very Old Nick was -after us. Our course soon took us into a crowd -of Cubans, and leaving these we made our way -into a street which was little better than an alleyway -for width. Finding the door of a house -wide open, we slipped into the building and hid -ourselves in an apartment in the rear.</p> - -<p>All day long the tumult continued, but we -could not learn what it was about, excepting -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">« 273 »</a></span> -that a force of American soldiers were advancing -upon El Caney and San Juan. “If our -forces take those hills,” said Mr. Raymond, -“Santiago is doomed, for the heavy artillery and -siege guns can knock down every building -here.”</p> - -<p>“Then I hope we get out before the hills are -taken,” I answered.</p> - -<p>We remained in the building all day, and during -that time I managed to scrape up a loaf of -bread and the larger part of a knuckle of ham, -besides several cocoanuts. On these we lived -for the next twenty-four hours, and we had -more than many starving Cubans still staying in -the doomed city.</p> - -<p>As we waited for nightfall I wondered how -my father was faring. It was not likely that the -prison had been struck more than once. Probably -he was still in his dungeon cell. Oh, if only -I could get to him and liberate him!</p> - -<p>But Mr. Raymond shook his head at the idea. -“You would only be captured yourself, Mark. -Better try to escape with me to the American -camp. If Santiago is taken, your father will be -sure to be liberated sooner or later.”</p> - -<p>I thought it over, and decided to accept his -advice. We left the building at eleven o’clock. -The moon was shining, but it had been raining -and the clouds were still heavy in the sky.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">« 274 »</a></span></p> - -<p>As silently as possible we stole along one -street and then another until the outskirts of -Santiago were reached. Once we met a detachment -of Spanish soldiery, but avoided them by -crouching behind an abandoned barricade until -they had passed.</p> - -<p>The hardest part of our task was still before -us—that of getting beyond the Spanish picket -line. On and on we went, but now much -slower, for we felt that we were running not only -the risk of capture but the risk of being shot -down without warning.</p> - -<p>At four o’clock in the morning we felt we -could go no further for the present and climbed -into the limbs of a mahogany tree. We had -been sitting here several hours when suddenly a -fierce rattle of musketry rang out. It was the -attack of General Lawton’s infantry upon El -Caney. The attack had but fairly opened, when -we saw the pickets around us ordered forward -and then to the right. The way was now open -for us to escape, and, descending to the ground, -we hurried on, through the brush and over the -rocks, carefully to avoid any well-defined trail -which the Spaniards might be covering.</p> - -<p>An hour of hard traveling brought us to a valley -to the north of El Caney, and here we encountered -a body of several hundred Cuban -soldiers.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">« 275 »</a></span></p> - -<p>“Mark!” came the cry, and a moment later I -found myself confronted by Alano, while Captain -Guerez sat on horseback but a short distance -away.</p> - -<p>Now was no time to compare notes, and soon -both Mr. Raymond and myself were supplied -with guns taken from several of the enemy that -had died on the field of battle. Then, with -a good-by to Alano, I set off for the American -forces, accompanied by Mr. Raymond.</p> - -<p>The gallant attacks upon El Caney and San -Juan hills are now matters of history. All know -how the brave boys of the American army were -repulsed several times, only to dash to the very -tops of the hills at last, carrying all before them, -and causing the Spaniards to fall back to the intrenchments -before Santiago.</p> - -<p>We had fallen in with a body of Regulars sent -to Cuba from the West, and I think I can safely -say that I never fought harder in my life than -on that day, and on the day following, when the -Spaniards tried to drive us from the position we -had gained on the top of El Caney Hill. I was -in the very front in the final attack, and when -it was all over discovered that I had received a -severe wound in the left arm, one from which I -have not fully recovered to the present time.</p> - -<p>The hills were now ours, and everywhere -along the American lines it was felt that Santiago -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">« 276 »</a></span> -was doomed. This was on the 2d of July. -On the 3d, early in the morning, Admiral -Cervera attempted to escape with his fleet from -Santiago Bay by running the gantlet of United -States warships stationed outside. It was Sunday, -and in less than fifteen minutes after his -first vessel appeared around the rocks of Morro -Castle, one of the fiercest naval battles of history -was on. The Spanish admiral had four -powerful fighting ships and two torpedo-boat -destroyers, but they were no match for the warships -under gallant Commodore Schley, who -was in command during Admiral Sampson’s absence. -The enemy tried to escape by running -along the shore westward, but the fire from our -side was too heavy; and in less than three hours -the battle was over, and all of the Spanish ships -were either sunk or run ashore, and over seven -hundred men were taken prisoner. The loss -to the Americans was but one man killed and -no ship seriously injured!</p> - -<p>What a cheer went up when the news of the -Spanish fleet’s destruction reached the soldier -boys! The hooraying lasted the best part of the -day, and many of the soldiers cut up like a lot of -schoolboys just out of school. It was a scene I -shall never forget.</p> - -<p>Admiral Cervera had aided the Spanish army -in the attack on our forces, by throwing shells -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">« 277 »</a></span> -over Santiago into our ranks. Now he was -gone, Santiago was even more defenseless than -ever, and General Shafter immediately sent -word to General Toral that unless he surrendered -the American artillery would bombard the -city.</p> - -<p>There were several days of delay, and finally -the Spanish general, seeing how useless it would -be to continue the fight, agreed to surrender -under certain conditions. These conditions -were not accepted, and another wait of several -days took place—a time that to me seemed an -age, so anxious was I to get word concerning -my father’s welfare.</p> - -<p>At last, on the 14th of July, General Toral -gave up the struggle, and three days later the -American troops marched into the city and -hoisted the glorious Stars and Stripes over the -civic-government building.</p> - -<p>It was a grand time, never to be forgotten. -As our boys came in the soldiers of Spain went -out, giving up their arms as they left. Twenty-four -hours later, I received an order which permitted -me to call upon my father and Burnham.</p> - -<p>“Mark! alive and well!” burst from my -parent’s lips on seeing me. “They said you -were dead—that a shell had killed you.”</p> - -<p>“That shell did not kill me; it gave me my -liberty,” I answered, and told my story, to which -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">« 278 »</a></span> -my father and Burnham listened with keen -interest. My father was much broken in health, -and as soon as I could I had him removed to a -hotel, where care and good food soon restored -him to his accustomed vitality.</p> - -<p>The Cuban troops, as a body, were not permitted -to come into Santiago at once, the -authorities fearing a riot between them and the -Spaniards, but Alano and his father visited us, -and a joyous reunion was had all around.</p> - -<p>“Cuba will be free now,” said Captain Guerez. -“If Spain knows when she has enough, -she will now bring this war to a close.”</p> - -<p>Alano’s father was right; the Santiago campaign -was the first and last to be fought by the -American troops on Cuban soil, and soon after -Spain asked that a peace commission be appointed -to settle the matter without further -appeal to arms. This was done; and the war -ceased. Cuba was granted her absolute freedom, -with the United States to protect her until -all internal difficulties were settled and she was -fully able to manage her own affairs.</p> - -<p>Alano and his father remained in the Cuban -army, and were later on stationed but a short -distance away from the plantation owned by -Captain Guerez. Thus they were near their -home and able to visit constantly the other -members of the family, who at that time returned -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">« 279 »</a></span> -to the plantation. Burnham remained -in Santiago, reporting constantly for the newspaper -he represented.</p> - -<p>Two months after my father was released -from prison we set sail for the United States. -Mr. Raymond accompanied us, and we made -the trip in the <i>Rosemary</i>, under our former -friend Captain Brownley, who had succeeded, -though not without much difficulty, in having -both himself and his vessel released.</p> - -<p>“How good to be back home again!” I cried, -as we stepped ashore. “Foreign countries are -all well enough, but as for me—give me our own -United States every time!”</p> - -<p>“You are right, Mark,” answered my father. -“There is no better place on earth to live than -in our own dear native land.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Here I bring to a close my story of adventures -in Cuba during the Cuban-Spanish conflict -and the Spanish-American campaign. I -had seen many startling happenings, and was, as -told above, heartily glad to sail away and leave -the Queen of the Antilles to carve out her future -without my aid.</p> - -<p>During my confinement with Mr. Raymond I -had become much interested in that gentleman -and what he had to say concerning his son -Oliver, then supposed to be at Manila, where -<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">« 280 »</a></span> -the first naval battle of our war with the Dons -had occurred. As a matter of fact, Oliver Raymond -had been with the Asiatic squadron when -the fight came off, and the news he sent to his -father was truly interesting. But I will let him -tell his own tale in another volume, to be entitled -“A Sailor Boy with Dewey; or, Afloat in -the Philippines,” after which I will expect to be -with my readers again in still another story to -be called “Off for Hawaii; or, the Mystery of -a Great Volcano.”</p> - -<p>And now for the present, kind reader, good-by -and good luck to you.</p> - - -<p class="caption3">THE END.</p> - - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="trans_notes"> -<p class="caption2">Transcriber Note</p> - - -<p>Que, Què and Qué all appear once and left as is. Ciruso and Circuso are -each used once but may represent the same individual. Due to context, -granadilla (Passionfruit) on <a href="#Page_57">page 57</a> was assumed a typo for grenadillo -trees (<a href="#Page_121">p. 121</a>). The images were repositioned so as to not split paragraphs. -The cover image was constructed from images provided by the University of -Michigan and The Internet Archive and is placed in the Public Domain.</p> -</div> - - - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of When Santiago Fell, by -Captain Ralph Bonehill and Edward Stratemeyer - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK WHEN SANTIAGO FELL *** - -***** This file should be named 51798-h.htm or 51798-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/1/7/9/51798/ - -Produced by David Edwards, Tom Cosmas and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at -http://gutenberg.org/license). - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org/license - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at -http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at -809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email -business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact -information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official -page at http://pglaf.org - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit http://pglaf.org - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - http://www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/51798-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6773866..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/cover_epub.jpg b/old/51798-h/images/cover_epub.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8d1e167..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/cover_epub.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/frontis.png b/old/51798-h/images/frontis.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 481b7b1..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/frontis.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/page10f.png b/old/51798-h/images/page10f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2acc9c8..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/page10f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/page162f.png b/old/51798-h/images/page162f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 03dddf0..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/page162f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/page98f.png b/old/51798-h/images/page98f.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0038bdf..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/page98f.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/51798-h/images/whorl.png b/old/51798-h/images/whorl.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1e9595b..0000000 --- a/old/51798-h/images/whorl.png +++ /dev/null |
